DocuPrint 3055/2065

Service Manual 1st Edition

DocuPrint 3055/2065
Service Manual 1st Edition Issued: March 2007

• This service manual is for the following product. • Revision and Modification Information
FUJI XEROX Co. Ltd. Laser Printer When design changes or revisions relating to
DocuPrint 3055/2065 this service manual occur, the overseas
technical information or overseas service
• Related Materials bulletin may be issued as supplementary
No other related materials issued other than this information until such changes are
service manual. accomodated in the updated version of this
service manual.
• Confidentiality
This service manual is issued intending use by
maintenance service personnel authorized by
FUJI XEROX Co. Ltd.. Copying, transferring or CAUTION
leasing this manual without prior consent by Important changes including revisions of
FUJI XEROX Co. Ltd. is prohibited. spare parts numbers and adjustment
When a page becomes irrelavant (e.g. specifications must immediately be reflected
superceded by a replacement page), destroy on the respective page of this service manual
the page by burning or shredding it. upon reception of such information.
Handle with care to avoid loss or damage of the
manual.

Edited by Fuji Xerox Co., Ltd. CS&S TSC SDEG

KSP R&D Business Park Bldg 6A7 3-2-1, Sakado, Takatsu-ku, Kawasaki-shi, Kanagawa,
JAPAN 213-8501
TEL 044-812-7637

[XEROX][The Document Company] are registered trademarks.

PRINTED IN JAPAN
Company Name
Department Name
Telephone No.
Full Name Employee No.
Preface
 Preface
Contents

Contents
1 Getting to know this Service Manual............................................................ Preface - 2
2 How to use the Service Manual ................................................................... Preface - 2
2.1 Contents of Manual ....................................................................................................Preface - 2
2.2 Information on Updating .............................................................................................Preface - 3
3 Glossary and Symbols ................................................................................. Preface - 4
4 Abbreviations ............................................................................................... Preface - 5

Preface - 1
Preface
1. Getting to know this Service Manual

1. Getting to know this Service Manual

This manual is used as the standard service manual for DocuPrint 3055/2065.

• Publication Comment Sheet

Enter any comments and/or corrections regarding the DocuPrint 3055/2065 service manual into
the Publication Comment Sheet, and send it to the technical support center SDEG.

2. How to use the Service Manual

This manual describes the standard procedures for the servicing of DocuPrint 3055/2065. Refer to
Chapter 1 Service Call Procedure for efficient and effective servicing during maintenance calls.

2.1 Contents of Manual

• Hardware
This manual summarizes all technical information on the DocuPrint 3055/2065.
• Chapters
This manual is divided into ten chapters as described below.

Chapter 1 Service Call Procedure

This chapter describes the general work and servicing procedures for the maintenance of
DocuPrint 3055/2065.

Chapter 2 Troubleshooting
This chapter describes the troubleshooting procedures other than image quality
troubleshooting of DocuPrint 3055/2065. It also describes how to use the Self Diagnosis
Mode/Program.

Chapter 3 Image Quality Troubleshooting

This chapter describes the image quality troubleshooting procedures of DocuPrint 3055/2065.

Chapter 4 Disassembly/Assembly and Adjustment

This chapter describes the disassembly, assembly, adjustment and replacement procedures
for components of DocuPrint 3055/2065.

Chapter 5 Parts List

This chapter lists the spare parts for DocuPrint 3055/2065.

Chapter 6 General
This chapter contains the following information on the DocuPrint 3055/2065.
6.1 Specifications
6.2 Tools and Service Consumables
6.3 Consumables
6.4 Periodic Replacement Parts
6.5 Optional Parts
6.6 Installation Procedures
6.7 Printer Environment Settings
6.8 Software Related Information

Chapter 7 Wiring Data

This chapter contains the wiring information on DocuPrint 3055/2065.
7.1 P/J List
7.2 P/J Location Diagrams
7.3 Connection Charts
7.4 Connection Charts Between Parts

Preface - 2
 Preface
2. How to use the Service Manual

Chapter 8 Accessories
This chapter describes the accessories/options that are specific to DocuPrint 3055/2065.

Chapter 9 BSD (Block Schematic Diagram) (Not yet issued)

Chapter 10 System Overview

This chapter gives an overview of the functions of the main components of DocuPrint 3055/
2065.

2.2 Information on Updating

This manual will be revised and sent to each CE as specified below. Revisions must be incorporated
correctly to keep the manual up-to-date.

Updating Procedure:
• When the entire manual is revised, "1st Edition" on the front cover will be renewed to 1st Edition,
2nd Edition, 3rd Edition and so on...
• Partial revisions will be marked starting with "Revision A", and follows the order of Revision A,
Revision B, Revision C… and so on.Each revised page is marked with "Revision A" or "Revision
B" to clearly distinguish the revision status.

Revision Sidebar
When any paragraph, table or figure has been added or amended, a revision sidebar will be
added to indicate where the revision was made.

(Example)

If the same page is changed again due to a subsequent revision, revision sidebars associated
with the previous revision(s) will be deleted.

Preface - 3
Preface
3. Glossary and Symbols

3. Glossary and Symbols

The symbols used in each chapter are listed on their respective introduction. The symbols listed
here are used across all chapters.

• The terms and symbols used at the beginning of a text are defined as follows:
Indicates an imminently hazardous situation, such as death or serious
DANGER injury if operators do not handle the machine correctly by disregarding
the statement.

Indicates a potentially hazardous situation, such as death or serious

WARNING injury if operators do not handle the machine correctly by disregarding
the statement.

Indicates a potentially hazardous situation, such as injury or property

CAUTION damage if operators do not handle the machine correctly by
disregarding the statement.

POINT Used to alert you to a procedure, if not strictly observed, could result in
damage to the machine or equipment.

NOTE Used when work procedures and rules are emphasized.

REFERENCE Used when other explanations are given.

PURPOSE Used to explain purpose of adjustment.

• REP : Indicates the disassembly/assembly procedure for reference.
• ADJ : Indicates the adjustment procedure for reference.
• PL : Indicates the parts list for reference.
• ASSY : Means Assembly.

Safety Critical Components (SCC)

For the safety control of the Safety Critical Components and the components specified, follow the
regulations regarding the Safety Critical Components set by Fuji Xerox Co., Ltd.

Important Information Stored Component (ISC)

This component stores all the important customer information that is input after the installation.
When performing replacement, follow the procedures in "Chapter 4 Disassembly/Assembly
Adjustment" to replace/discard. Make absolutely sure that no customer information gets leaked
outside.

Preface - 4
 Preface
4. Abbreviations

4. Abbreviations
Abbreviations
This manual contains abbreviations that are specific to this manual, as well as general
abbreviations, which include:
ADC Automatic Density Control M Magenta
AG Analog Ground MAG Magnet Roll
APS Auto Paper Select MCU Machine Control Unit
ARC Auto Registration Control MOB Marks On Belt
ASSY Assembly MOT Motor
ATS Auto Tray Switching MSI Multi Sheet Inserter
B Black N/P No Paper
BCR Bias Charge Roll NVM Non Volatile Memory
Bk Black OEM Original Equipment
BLK Black Manufacuring
BLU Blue OHP Overhead Project
BRN Brown OP Operation
BTR Bias Transfer Roll OPC Organic Photo Conductor
C Cyan ORN ORANGE
CLN Cleaner PC Personal Computer
CRU Customer Replaceable Unit PCDC Pixel Count Dispense Control
CRUM CRU Monitor PH Paper Handling
CTRG Cartridge PHD Printer Head
DET Detoner Roll PNK Pink
DEVE. Developer POP Paper On Photoreceptor
DIAG. Diagnostic PPM Prints Per Minute
DISP Dispense PR,P/R Process
dpi dots per inch PV Print Volume
DTS Detack Saw PWB(A) Printed Wiring Boad (Assembly)
DUP Duplex R Right
ESB Electro Static Brush R Rear
ESS Electric Subsystem R/H Right Hand
F Front REF Refresher
FEED, FDR Feeder REGI. Registration
FIP Fault Isolation Procedure RH Right Hand
GND Ground ROS Raster Output Scanner
GRN Green ROT Rotary
GRY Gray RTC Rubber Tube Charger
HT Half Tone RTN Return
HUM Humidity SEF Short Edge Feed
HVPS High Voltage Power Supply SG Signal Ground
ICDC Image Count Dispense Control SMH Special Material Handler
ID Image Density SNR Sensor
or Identification SOL. Solenoid
IBT Intermediate Belt Transfer SOS Start Of Scan
INTL, INLK Interlock STM Single Tray Module
IOT Image Output Terminal SW Switch
K Black TEMP. Temperature
L Left TM Tray Module
L/H Left Hand TNER, TNR Toner
LD Laser diode TP Thermopile
LDD Lightly Doped Drain TR Transfer
LED Light-emitting diode VIO Violet
LEF Long Edge Feed WHT White
LH Left Hand XERO Xerographic
LV Low Voltage Y Yellow
LVPS Low Voltage Power Supply YEL Yellow

Preface - 5
Chapter 1 Service Call Procedure
1.1 Before Starting the Servicing......................................................................................1-1
1.1.1 Safety.............................................................................................................................................. 1-1
1.1.2 Other Precautions ........................................................................................................................... 1-2
1.2 Service Call Procedure...............................................................................................1-4
1.3 TRIM Servicing ...........................................................................................................1-5
1.3.1 TRIM Servicing Procedure.............................................................................................................. 1-5
1.3.2 Machine consumables and periodic replacement parts.................................................................. 1-6
1.3.3 TRIM Check List ............................................................................................................................. 1-8
Chap 1 Service Call Procedure
1.1 Before Starting the Servicing

1.1 Before Starting the Servicing

1.1.1 Safety
To prevent any accident that may occur during maintenance service, any warning or any caution regarding the
servicing must be strictly observed. Do not perform any hazardous operation.

1 Power Supply

To prevent electrical shocks, burns, or injury, etc., be sure to switch OFF the machine and disconnect
the plug before starting the maintenance servicing. If the machine has to be switched ON, such as
when measuring the voltage, take extra care so as not to get an electrical shock.

2 Drive Area

Never inspect or lubricate the drive area such as the gears when the machine is in operation.

3 Heavy Parts

The weight of the machine is 21.9kg. When moving the machine to ensure sufficient working space,
take extra care so as to prevent back pain.

4 Safety Device

See that safety devices for preventing mechanical accidents, such as fuses, circuit breakers, interlock
switches, etc., and those for protecting customers from injury, such as panels and covers, function
properly. Modifications that hinder the function of any safety devices are strictly prohibited.

5 Installing and removing the parts

The edge of parts and covers may be sharp, take care not to touch them. If the oil gets onto your hand,
wipe it off before getting on with the servicing. When removing parts or cables, do not pull them out by
force but remove them slowly.

WARNING
Do not replace the lithium battery on the ESS PWB. Replacing the lithium battery by mistake may
cause explosion.

6 Specified Tools

Follow the instruction when a tool is specified.

7 Organic Solvents

When using an organic solvent such as the Drum Cleaner or Machine Cleaner, pay attention to the
following:
• Ensure good ventilation in the room to prevent too much inhalation of solvent fumes.
• Do not use heated solvent.
• Keep it away from fire.

1-1
 Chap 1 Service Call Procedure
1.1 Before Starting the Servicing
8 Modifications to the Machine

If any modifications are deemed necessary for the printer, submit an Application for Approval of
Modification prior to performing any work.

9 Other Safety Precautions

For safety, you should also pay attention to precautions other than the above items 1 to 9. Take safety
into full consideration in working, following WORKING PRACTICES FOR ENGINEERS issued by
FXAP EH&S (Environmental Health and Safety) department.

1.1.2 Other Precautions

Pay attention to the following when performing maintenance service so that you do not perform wrong or
useless servicing:

1 Reference Materials

Before performing maintenance servicing, read all relevant technical materials such as SB, FTI, or FTO
to make a systematic approach.

2 Disassembling

Make sure to check the assembled condition before removing parts or disassembling the machine.

3 Installation/Adjustment

After the installation or adjustment is complete, check that no parts or tools are left inside or on the
assemblies before using the machine.

4 Handling of replaced parts/consumables

Make sure that the replaced parts or consumables as well as the packaging materials are collected
back to the Service Center.
NOTE

For the separation and processing methods for the collected items, refer to the Common Technical
Information No. 2-138 for all machines.

If you have replaced the following consumables, affix the "U" sticker for the recyclable parts and
perform collection.
• Drum/Toner Cartridge
For recyclable parts, fill the necessary items in the "U-TAG" and perform collection.

5 General Precautions

• Take care not to disturb the customer's daily work.

• Place a drop cloth or paper on the customer's floor when working on the machine because the toner
may dirty the floor and it is difficult to clean.

1-2
Chap 1 Service Call Procedure
1.1 Before Starting the Servicing
• Throw any trash generated during the maintenance service into a trash bag and bring them back to
the Service Center.
• Record the service details and the consumables and parts replaced at the visit in the Service Log.

1-3
 Chap 1 Service Call Procedure
1.2 Service Call Procedure

1.2 Service Call Procedure

1. Ask the operator(s) about the machine condition.

2. Record the billing meter readings.
Initial Actions
3. Inspect any erroneous printout, then check the machine status.
4. Check the Service Log.
1. Troubleshoot on Level 1.
2. Troubleshoot.
3. Check the print quality using the test patterns in the machine. (Refer to 3.2)
UM Call 4. Feed paper from each of the trays and, if necessary, clean or replace the Feed
Roll.
5. Repair all secondary problems.
6. Perform TRIM servicing.
1. Check the print quality using the test patterns in the machine. (Refer to 3.2)
2. Feed paper from each of the trays and, if necessary, clean or replace the Feed
SM Call Roll.
3. Repair all secondary problems.
4. Perform TRIM servicing.
1. Check overall operation/features.
2. Check the machine exterior and consumables.
Final Actions 3. Train the operator as required.
4. Complete the Service Log and Service Report.
5. Keep the print sample with the Service Log.

Technical Information Regarding Software

Information can be obtained from the following page. This site is only accesible to Fuji Xerox employees.
Kring Web System URL http://kring.css.ksp.fujixerox.co.jp/
The latest technical, fault and software-related information is posted on this site.

1-4
Chap 1 Service Call Procedure
1.3 TRIM Servicing

1.3 TRIM Servicing

TRIM Servicing for DocuPrint C3055 is performed during all SM/UM calls to maintain the performance of the
machine. Independent visits for TRIM Servicing do not take place.

1.3.1 TRIM Servicing Procedure

1 Check overall operation before servicing

• Check the print quality by using the test patterns.

* Refer to 3.2 on how to print test patterns.

2 Clean the interior of the machine

• Clean any toner residues and paper dust etc. in the paper delivery system.
(Especially, clean the operation section of the operator carefully)

3 Inspect the Periodic Replacement Parts (consumables) and replace them if necessary.

4 Safety Precautions

• Check the connection of the power plug and check for any damage on the cord and the plug.

5 Check the overall operation after servicing as follows:

• Check the machine operation.

• Check the print quality.
• Check the billing meter reading.

1-5
 Chap 1 Service Call Procedure
1.3 TRIM Servicing

1.3.2 Machine consumables and periodic replacement parts

• During TRIM Servicing, check the total number of copies printed before replacing the machine
consumables.

Machine Consumables

Product Code
Consumables Printable page
FX (local) AP (IBG)
Drum/Toner Cartridge (6K) CT350515 - Approx. 6,000 pages
Drum/Toner Cartridge (10K) - CWAA0710 (CL) Approx. 10,000 pages
Drum/Toner Cartridge (10K) - CWAA0711 (AP) Approx. 10,000 pages
Drum/Toner Cartridge (14K) CT350516 - Approx. 14,000 pages

*1: Usage condition

• The number of printable pages for Drum/Toner Cartridges is the number of sheets in the case of
continuous printing with A4 LEF paper at 5% print ratio.
• The actual number of printable pages differs depending on the print content, type, usage
environment, frequency of machine ON/OFF, and etc.

1-6
Chap 1 Service Call Procedure
1.3 TRIM Servicing
Periodic Replacement Parts

Periodic Replacement Parts Product Code Replacement

Remarks
FX (local) AP (IBG) Type

Maintenance Kit 220V *2 -- CWAA0718 CRU

Maintenance Kit 110V *2 -- CWAA0719 CRU
100K Sheets
Fuser Unit *1 - ERU
Trans Assy *1 - ERU
MSI Roll Assy Kit *1 - ERU
100K Sheets
Cassette Roll Assy Kit *1 - ERU

*1 No product code due to ERU

*2 Maintenance Kit = Fuser Unit + Trans Assy + Cassette Roll Assy KIT + MSI Roll Assy Kit

1-7
 Chap 1 Service Call Procedure
1.3 TRIM Servicing

1.3.3 TRIM Check List

A ------ Perform checking. Clean, replace or supply if necessary.
B ------ Always perform cleaning and checking.
C ------ Always perform replacement service at the specified interval.

Disassembly
Every
No Servicing Items 100K /Adjustment Service Details
time
No.
Check Items before Servicing • Activate the machine and check
1.1 A
(Check the machine operation) that abnormal noise is not heard.
Check Items before Servicing • Output the Built-in Test Pattern to
1.2 A
(Output test patterns) check the print quality.
• Clean any paper dust and toner
Clean the interior of the residue in the paper path and on
machine the jam sensor.
(Clean the paper transport • Especially, clean the operation
2 A C
system) section of the operator carefully.
Feed Roll/Retard Roll/Nudger • Check and clean the Feed Roll/
Roll Retard Roll/Nudger Roll for every
Tray and MSI
• Check that Heat Roll/Pressure Roll
3.1 Fuser Unit B C REP8.1 are not scratched.
• Replace where necessary.
C: 6K
• Visual check only. Do not touch
3.2 Drum/Toner Cartridge B C: 10K
with hand.
C: 14K
• Make sure that the power plug is
plugged in properly.
• Make sure that the power cords
are not cracked and no wires are
exposed.
• Make sure that no extension cord
4 Safety Precautions B with insufficient length or power
cord outside the specification, such
as an off-the-shelf power strip, is
being used.
• Make sure that a single socket
does not have multiple power
plugs plugged to it.
• Print Built-in Test Patterns to
Check Items after Servicing
5.1 A confirm that the print quality
(Print Quality Check)
satisfies the specification.
Check Items after Servicing • Check the paper feed and
5.2 A
(Check the machine operation) abnormal noise.
• Create the Service Log and
5.3 Post-servicing check (meter) A
Service Report.

1-8
Chap 1 Service Call Procedure
1.3 TRIM Servicing

CAUTION
Do not touch the Drum/Toner Cartridges and BTR Unit with hand.
Do not use solvents such as Drum cleaner. (Long time is required for recovery.)

1-9
 Chap 1 Service Call Procedure
1.3 TRIM Servicing

1-10
Chapter 2 Troubleshooting
Table of Contents
2.1 Fault Repair Overview ................................................................................................2-1
2.1.1 Check the Status of Installation ...................................................................................................... 2-2
2.1.2 Things to take note when servicing................................................................................................. 2-3
2.1.3 Things to take note when using FIP................................................................................................ 2-4
2.1.4 FIP Flow.......................................................................................................................................... 2-5
2.2 Error Codes and Alarm Messages .............................................................................2-6
2.2.1 When the paper jam persists despite the action taken ................................................................... 2-6
2.2.2 System Errors ................................................................................................................................. 2-7
2.2.3 Downloading Errors ...................................................................................................................... 2-10
2.2.4 Life Warning.................................................................................................................................. 2-11
2.2.5 Alarm Messages ........................................................................................................................... 2-13
2.3 FIP ............................................................................................................................2-15
2.3.1 Level 1 FIP.................................................................................................................................... 2-15
FIP1.1 IOT Exit On Jam1, IOT Exit On Jam2, IOT Exit Off Early Jam
IOT Reg On Jam, IOT PreReg Jam ....................................................................................... 2-15
FIP1.2 IOT Early Feed Jam ............................................................................................................... 2-17
FIP1.3 IOT MSI Missfeed Jam........................................................................................................... 2-18
FIP1.4 IOT Tray 1 Missfeed Jam ....................................................................................................... 2-19
FIP1.5 IOT Tray 2 Missfeed Jam ....................................................................................................... 2-20
FIP1.6 IOT Tray 3 Missfeed Jam ....................................................................................................... 2-22
FIP1.7 IOT Tray 4 Missfeed Jam ....................................................................................................... 2-24
FIP1.8 IOT Duplex On Jam, IOT Duplex Refeed Jam ...................................................................... 2-26
FIP1.9 IOT Duplex Missfeed Jam, IOT Remain at Dup Jam ............................................................ 2-27
FIP1.10 IOT Fuser Failure ................................................................................................................. 2-28
FIP1.11 IOT-ESS Communication Fail .............................................................................................. 2-29
FIP1.12 IOT Motor Failure ................................................................................................................. 2-30
FIP1.13 IOT Fan Motor Failure .......................................................................................................... 2-31
FIP1.14 IOT ROS Motor Failure ........................................................................................................ 2-33
FIP1.15 IOT Option Feeder Communication Error ............................................................................ 2-34
FIP1.16 IOT Option Duplex Communication Error............................................................................. 2-35
FIP1.17 Fuser Life Warning ............................................................................................................... 2-36
FIP1.18 Trans Assy Life Warning ...................................................................................................... 2-36
FIP1.19 Tray 1 Cassette Roll Assy Kit Warning ................................................................................ 2-36
FIP1.20 Tray 2 Cassette Roll Assy Kit Warning ................................................................................ 2-37
FIP1.21 Tray 3 Cassette Roll Assy Kit Warning ................................................................................ 2-37
FIP1.22 Tray 4 Cassette Roll Assy Kit Warning ................................................................................ 2-37
FIP1.23 MSI Roll Assy Kit Warning ................................................................................................... 2-38
FIP1.24 ROS Unit Warning................................................................................................................ 2-38
FIP1.25 Regi Unit Warning ................................................................................................................ 2-38
FIP1.26 Gear Unit Warning................................................................................................................ 2-39
FIP1.27 Tray 1 Cassette Chute Kit Warning...................................................................................... 2-39
FIP1.28 Tray 2 Cassette Chute Kit Warning...................................................................................... 2-39
FIP1.29 Tray 3 Cassette Chute Kit Warning...................................................................................... 2-40
FIP1.30 Tray 4 Cassette Chute Kit Warning...................................................................................... 2-40
FIP1.31 IOT Toner Detached............................................................................................................. 2-41
 FIP1.32 IOT Cover Front / Top Open ................................................................................................ 2-42
FIP1.33 IOT Cover Duplex Open....................................................................................................... 2-43
FIP1.34 Tray Detached, Upper Cassette Detached ......................................................................... 2-44
FIP1.35 IOT Paper Size Mismatch .................................................................................................... 2-44
FIP1.36 No Suitable Paper ................................................................................................................ 2-45
FIP1.37 ESS-related error ................................................................................................................. 2-46
FIP1.38 ESS-related error (MPC) ...................................................................................................... 2-46
FIP1.39 ESS-related error (HDD) ...................................................................................................... 2-47
2.3.2 Level 2 FIP.................................................................................................................................... 2-48
FIP2.1 REGI SENSOR (PL5.1.4)....................................................................................................... 2-48
FIP2.2 Fuser Exit Sensor [FUSER ASSY] (PL8.1.11) ....................................................................... 2-49
FIP2.3 SIZE SWITCH (PL2.1.13 / PL2.3.8) (Tray 1) ......................................................................... 2-50
FIP2.4 TRAY NO PAPER SENSOR (PL2.1.3 / PL2.4.11) (Tray 1) ................................................... 2-51
FIP2.5 MSI NO PAPER SENSOR (PL3.1.11) ................................................................................... 2-52
FIP2.6 REGI CLUTCH (PL5.1.2) ....................................................................................................... 2-53
FIP2.7 TURN CLUTCH (PL2.4.3) ...................................................................................................... 2-54
FIP2.8 FEED CLUTCH (PL2.4.4) ...................................................................................................... 2-55
FIP2.9 MSI FEED SOLENOID (PL3.1.1) ........................................................................................... 2-56
FIP2.10 MAIN MOTOR (PL9.1.3) ...................................................................................................... 2-57
FIP2.11 Pick Motor [BRACKET ASSY FDR 250/550] (PL2.1.11 / PL2.3.3) ...................................... 2-58
FIP2.12 Exit Motor [EXIT DRIVE ASSY] (PL13.1.2).......................................................................... 2-58
FIP2.13 Dup Jam Sensor (PL13.2.7)................................................................................................. 2-59
FIP2.14 DUP MOTOR (PL13.2.13).................................................................................................... 2-59
FIP2.15 SIZE SWITCH (PL14.2.17 / PL15.2.17) (Tray 2/3/4) ........................................................... 2-60
FIP2.16 TRAY NO PAPER SENSOR (PL14.3.11 / PL15.3.11) (Tray 2/3/4) ..................................... 2-61
FIP2.17 TURN CLUTCH (PL14.3.3 / PL15.3.3) (Tray 2/3/4) ............................................................. 2-62
FIP2.18 FEED CLUTCH (PL14.3.4 / PL15.3.4) (Tray 2/3/4) ............................................................. 2-63
FIP2.19 Feed Motor [DRIVE ASSY OPTION] (PL14.2.6 / PL15.2.6 ) (Tray 2/3/4)............................ 2-64
FIP2.20 Unstable DC voltage Supply to the MCU PWB .................................................................... 2-65
2.4 CE Mode...................................................................................................................2-66
2.4.1 How to Enter the CE Mode ........................................................................................................... 2-67
2.4.2 Overview of Operation Procedures in CE Mode ........................................................................... 2-67
2.4.3 How to Exit from the CE Mode...................................................................................................... 2-68
2.4.4 Menu Tree..................................................................................................................................... 2-69
2.4.5 ESS Diagnostics Details (ESS Diag) ............................................................................................ 2-74
2.4.6 IOT Diagnostics (IOT Diag)........................................................................................................... 2-77
2.4.6.1 Digital Input (DI) Test ............................................................................................................ 2-77
2.4.6.2 Digital Output (DO) Test ....................................................................................................... 2-79
2.4.6.3 NVM Access ......................................................................................................................... 2-83
2.4.6.4 NVM List ............................................................................................................................... 2-86
2.4.7 Installation..................................................................................................................................... 2-89
2.4.8 Print Function Test (Test Print) ..................................................................................................... 2-90
2.4.8.1 Test Pattern 600 ................................................................................................................... 2-90
2.4.8.2 Density 20% Pattern ............................................................................................................. 2-90
2.4.8.3 Gradation Pattern.................................................................................................................. 2-90
2.4.9 Parameter Settings ....................................................................................................................... 2-91
2.4.9.1 Example of Registration Adjustment..................................................................................... 2-91
2.4.9.2 Life Counter .......................................................................................................................... 2-93
2.4.9.3 Print Parameter List .............................................................................................................. 2-95
Chapter 2 Troubleshooting
2.1 Fault Repair Overview

2.1 Fault Repair Overview

The fault repair operation proceeds in the following flow:
After performing the pre-check, verify the phenomenon and refer to FIP (Fault Isolation Procedure), "2.4 CE
Mode", "Chapter 7. Wiring Data" and "Chapter 10. Machine Overview" to effectively repair the fault.

Check the Status of Installation

Check the Problem Status CE Mode

Machine Overview
Wiring Data

Perform FIP

Reference
Check if the fault is repaired

Completed

Figure 2-1 Troubleshooting Procedure

2-1
 Chapter 2 Troubleshooting
2.1 Fault Repair Overview

2.1.1 Check the Status of Installation

Before starting to troubleshoot, always check the following items.

• The voltage of the power supply is within the specification. (Measure the voltage at the Power
Outlet.)
• The Power Cord for damage, short circuit, open circuit and wrong internal connection.
• The machine for proper grounding.
• The machine is not installed in a place with high temperature, high humidity, low temperature, low
humidity, or a place with drastic changes in temperature.
• The machine is not installed near a water outlet, humidifier, heater or fire source, dusty areas, or
under the direct draft of an air-conditioner.
• The machine is not installed in a place where volatile or flammable gas is generated.
• The machine is not installed in a place exposed to direct sunlight.
• The machine is installed in a well-ventilated place.
• The machine is installed on a stable level surface.
• The paper is within the specification. (Standard paper is recommended.)
• The machine for any improper handling.
• The Regular Replacement Parts are replaced for every replacement sheet count.

2-2
Chapter 2 Troubleshooting
2.1 Fault Repair Overview

2.1.2 Things to take note when servicing

• Before servicing, always unplug the Power Cord unless required otherwise.
When the power is turned ON, never touch a current-carrying parts unless required otherwise.
Also, as current is carried in the LVPS power switch/inlet even when the power is turned OFF, never
touch the current-carrying parts.

• When turning the power ON to perform check operation, while the Interlock Switch or Security
Switch is also turned ON and the covers removed, always disconnect the connectors (P/J18 and
P/J17) that are connected to the ROS ASSY unless required otherwise, because laser beam
might be emitted from the ROS ASSY.

• When connecting the connector (P/J51) on the HVPS according to the instructions in the FIP, never
touch the HVPS and high-voltage output parts.

• When performing a high voltage output using the DI Test or DO Test in CE mode, make sure that all
covers are installed unless specified otherwise. Also, never touch any high voltage output section
when performing the high voltage output.

• When operating the Drive Section using the DI Test or DO Test in CE mode, make sure that all
covers are installed unless specified otherwise. Also, never touch the Drive Section while operating
it.

• Be careful not to burn yourself when touching parts that can get very hot.

• When servicing, the service personnel should be grounded using wrist bands etc. to remove static
electricity from the body.

2-3
 Chapter 2 Troubleshooting
2.1 Fault Repair Overview

2.1.3 Things to take note when using FIP

• When troubleshooting using the FIP, prepare normally working parts such as the MCU PWB, LVPS,
HVPS, and FUSER ASSY in advance because they might be required to identify a failure.
In addition, if the fault cannot be repaired, replace the "parts considered to be the cause" and related
parts in sequence and check the operation.

• When servicing, always disconnect the power cord unless required otherwise.
When the power cord is connected, never touch any current-carrying part unless absolutely
necessary.

• Descriptions related to connectors are expressed as follows:

"P/J12" → The connector (P/J12) is in connected state
"P12" → The plug side when the connector (P/J12) is in disconnected state (except when it is
directly connected to a board)
"J12" → The jack side when the connector (P/J12) is in disconnected state (except when it is directly
connected to a board)

• In the FIP, "P/J1 <=> P/J2" means that all the opposing pins between "P/J1" and "P/J2" (refer to
Chapter 7. Wiring Data) should be measured.

• The voltages of the small connectors are measured using a specialized tool. Handle the tool
carefully because it has a sharp tip.

• When measuring a voltage, install the CRU ASSY, BTR and paper cassette and close the covers
before turning ON the power to measure, unless required otherwise.

• The numerical values described in the FIP are for reference only. Approximate values are
considered to be the same.

• Note that for the checks specified in the FIP, the parts that must be removed and their procedures
are not described in the document.

• "Replacement" in the FIP indicates the parts that are considered to be the cause of the problem.
Check by replacing the parts and the assembly parts (High Assy) that contains those parts.

• In the FIP, the first level of paper source of the paper cassette placed at the bottom of the machine is
called "Tray 1" and the second level is called "Tray 2".

• In the FIP, some procedures are separately described for each specification. Follow the instructions
for your model to repair the faults.

• The format "aa [BB]" of the part names (e.g. Fuser Exit Sensor [FUSER ASSY]) means that BB is
the unit for replacement and aa is a parts included in BB.

2-4
Chapter 2 Troubleshooting
2.1 Fault Repair Overview

2.1.4 FIP Flow

The FIP is the first step in diagnosing a failure. The FIP guides you on how to proceed with troubleshooting by
checking for the presence of error codes and other types of problematic symptoms.

Ask the operator about the problem

Did the operator operate the No
machine correctly?
Yes

Turn the Power Switch OFF then ON Explain how to operate the machine

Does the error reoccur when

performing output in the mode No Procedure is complete
with the problem?
Yes

When a status code or LCD Refer to "2.2 Error Codes and

message appears Alarm Messages".

When a failure occurs in image Refer to "Chapter 3. Image

quality Quality Troubleshooting"

Figure 2-2 FIP Flow

2-5
 Chapter 2 Troubleshooting
2.2 Error Codes and Alarm Messages

2.2 Error Codes and Alarm Messages

2.2.1 When the paper jam persists despite the action taken

If the paper jam reoccurs despite taking the actions indicated by the message, a mechanical or electric failure
may have occurred. Refer to the following table and proceed with the troubleshooting.

Table 2-1 Action for recurring paper jam

FIP,
LCD Display Error Description Corrective
Actions
<IOT Exit On Jam1>
Paper did not pass through the Fuser Exit Sensor
FIP1.1
within the specified time.
The Fuser Exit Sensor turned ON during warm-up.
<IOT Exit On Jam2>
Custom Paper did not pass through the Fuser Exit
FIP1.1
Sensor within the specified time after it passed
through the REGI SENSOR.
Open A & C
Clear Jam from E <IOT Exit Off Early Jam>
FIP1.1
Paper has reached the Fuser Exit Sensor too early.
<IOT Reg On Jam>
Paper did not reach the fuser position (Fuser Exit
FIP1.1
Sensor) within the specified time after it passed
through the registration position (REGI SENSOR).
<IOT PreReg Jam>
FIP1.1
The REGI SENSOR turned ON during warm-up.
Open A
Clear Jam or <IOT Early Feed Jam>
↓↑ Paper has reached the registration position (REGI FIP1.2
Open Tray 1 SENSOR) too early.
Open & Close A
Clear Jam from
<IOT MSI Missfeed Jam>
Bypass Tray or
Paper did not reach the registration position (REGI
↓↑ FIP1.3
SENSOR) within the specified time after it was fed
Open A
from the MSI.
Clear Jam
Open Tray 1
<IOT Tray 1 Missfeed Jam>
Clear Jam
Paper did not reach the registration position (REGI
↓↑ FIP1.4
SENSOR) within the specified time after it was fed
then
from Tray 1.
Open & Close A
Open Tray 1 & 2
<IOT Tray 2 Missfeed Jam>
Clear Jam
Paper did not reach the registration position (REGI
↓↑ FIP1.5
SENSOR) within the specified time after it was fed
then
from Tray 2.
Open & Close A

2-6
Chapter 2 Troubleshooting
2.2 Error Codes and Alarm Messages
Table 2-1 Action for recurring paper jam

FIP,
LCD Display Error Description Corrective
Actions
Open Tray 3, 2
<IOT Tray 3 Missfeed Jam>
& 1. Clear Jam
Paper did not reach the registration position (REGI
↓↑ FIP1.6
SENSOR) within the specified time after it was fed
then
from Tray 3.
Open & Close A
Open All Trays
<IOT Tray 4 Missfeed Jam>
Clear Jam
Paper did not reach the registration position (REGI
↓↑ FIP1.7
SENSOR) within the specified time after it was fed
then
from Tray 4.
Open & Close A
<IOT Duplex On Jam>
Paper has reached the registration position (REGI
Open Bypass & B FIP1.8
SENSOR) too early after it passed through the
Clear Jam at D Duplex Jam Sensor.
↓↑
Close D & Open A <IOT Duplex Refeed Jam>
Clear Jam Paper did not reach the registration position (REGI
FIP1.8
SENSOR) within the specified time after it passed
through the Duplex Jam Sensor.
<IOT Duplex Missfeed Jam>
Open Bypass & B Paper did not reach the Duplex Jam Sensor within FIP1.9
Clear Jam at D the specified time.
↓↑ <IOT Remain at Dup Jam>
Close D, Open A Paper did not pass through the Duplex Jam Sensor
& C. Clear Jam FIP1.9
within the specified time.
The Duplex Jam Sensor turned ON during warm-up.

2.2.2 System Errors

Table 2-2 System Errors

Error Code FIP,

Error Details Error Description Corrective
Chain Link Actions
The Temp Sensor detected abnormally
high temperature.
Open circuit of the Temp Sensor was
detected.
The Temp Sensor detected abnormally
low temperature.
010 397 IOT Fuser Failure The FUSER ASSY did not reach the FIP1.10
setting temperature within the specified
time.
When the motor was stopped after the
FUSER ASSY had reached the setting
temperature, the Heater Lamp remains
ON for 10 seconds.

2-7
 Chapter 2 Troubleshooting
2.2 Error Codes and Alarm Messages
Table 2-2 System Errors

Error Code FIP,

Error Details Error Description Corrective
Chain Link Actions
Communication failure between the NIC
018 310 NIC-ESS Communication Fail FIP1.38
and ESS.
NIC Flash ROM Boot Module
018 311 MPC (Multi Protocol Card) related error FIP1.38
Checksum Error
018 312 NIC RAM R/W Test Error MPC (Multi Protocol Card) related error FIP1.38
NIC Flash ROM Application
018 313 MPC (Multi Protocol Card) related error FIP1.38
Module Checksum Error
018 314 NIC MAC Address Checksum Error MPC (Multi Protocol Card) related error FIP1.38
NIC Ethernet BIST parity/RAM R/
018 315 MPC (Multi Protocol Card) related error FIP1.38
W Error
018 316 NIC Internal Loopback Error MPC (Multi Protocol Card) related error FIP1.38
018 317 NIC Fatal Error MPC (Multi Protocol Card) related error FIP1.38
018 318 NIC_WLANOPTERR Wireless Option Error FIP1.38
018 319 NIC_OSWORKQERR On Board Network OS Error FIP1.37
018 320 NIC_OSOTHERERR On Board Network VxWorks Error FIP1.37
Communication failure between the IOT
024 371 IOT-ESS Communication Fail FIP1.11
and ESS.
The MAIN MOTOR did not reach the
specified rotation count within the
042 325 IOT Motor Failure FIP1.12
specified time after it had started
rotating.
The following fans were stopped.
042 358 IOT Fan Motor Failure FIP1.13
MIDDLE FAN, REAR FAN, SIDE FAN
The sending interval of image data
signals was longer than the specified
value for the specified time after the
Scanner Motor had started rotating.
The sending interval of image data
061 370 IOT ROS Motor Failure FIP1.14
signals became longer than the
specified value after the interval had
reached the specified value.
The voltage of the Laser Diode did not
reach the specified value.
A communication error occurred
between the MCU PWB and the 250/
IOT Option Feeder Communication
077 215 550 Paper Feeder (optional), or within FIP1.15
Error
the 250/550 Paper Feeder (between
Tray 2 and Tray 3, Tray 3 and Tray 4).
A communication error occurred
IOT Option Duplex Communication
077 216 between the MCU PWB and the Duplex FIP1.16
Error
Unit (optional).
116 310 ESS FontROM Error (Main) Built-in Font ROM checksum error FIP1.37
116 311 ESS FontROM Error (Option) Option Font ROM checksum error FIP1.37

2-8
Chapter 2 Troubleshooting
2.2 Error Codes and Alarm Messages
Table 2-2 System Errors

Error Code FIP,

Error Details Error Description Corrective
Chain Link Actions
On Board Network MAC Address Built-in network MAC address
116 314 FIP1.37
Checksum Error checksum error
116 324 ESS Illegal Exception CPU illegal exception FIP1.37
116 327 ESS Instruction Cache Error CPU instruction cache error FIP1.37
116 328 ESS Data Cache Error CPU data cache error FIP1.37
116 333 PCI Option#0 Fail PCI option 0 detection error FIP1.38
116 334 PCI Option#1 Fail PCI option 1 detection error FIP1.38
116 343 ASIC Fail ASIC error FIP1.37
On Board Network Communication
116 350 Built-in network function related error FIP1.37
Fail
On Board Network Ethernet BIST
116 351 Built-in network function related error FIP1.37
Parity/RAM R/W Error
On Board Network Internal
116 352 Built-in network function related error FIP1.37
Loopback Error
116 353 ESS HD Fail Detected by an HDD error FIP1.39
116 355 On Board Network Fatal Error Built-in network function related error FIP1.37

2-9
 Chapter 2 Troubleshooting
2.2 Error Codes and Alarm Messages

2.2.3 Downloading Errors

Table 2-3 Downloading Errors

Error Code FIP,

Error Details Error Description Corrective
Chain Link Actions
016 500 DOWNLOAD DELETE ERROR Flash deletion error during download FIP1.37
016 501 DOWNLOAD WRITE ERROR Flash write error during download FIP1.37
016 502 DOWNLOAD VERIFY ERROR Flash verify error during download FIP1.37
Press the
016 737 DOWNLOAD FORMAT ERROR The download file format is incorrect [Eject/Set]
button
Press the
The NIC failed to activate in download
016 738 DOWNLOAD INITIAL ERROR [Eject/Set]
mode
button
Press the
Download was performed with the
016 739 DOWNLOAD INSERTION ERROR [Eject/Set]
optional NIC not installed
button
Press the
A communication error occurred when
016 740 DOWNLOAD COMM ERROR [Eject/Set]
downloading to the optional NIC
button
FW download was performed when Press the
016 741 DOWNLOAD PROTECT ERROR FW update was prohibited by the [Eject/Set]
panel settings button
Press the
016 742 DOWNLOAD ID ERROR The download file ID is incorrect [Eject/Set]
button
The write destination address during Press the
016 743 DOWNLOAD RANGE ERROR download is incorrect. Range check [Eject/Set]
error button
Press the
DOWNLOAD CHECKSUM The download file checksum is
016 744 [Eject/Set]
ERROR incorrect
button
Press the
The download file header information
016 745 DOWNLOAD HEADER ERROR [Eject/Set]
is incorrect
button

2-10
Chapter 2 Troubleshooting
2.2 Error Codes and Alarm Messages

2.2.4 Life Warning

Table 2-4 Life Warning

Error Code FIP,

Error Details Error Description Corrective
Chain Link Actions
The FUSER ASSY needs to be
replaced soon.
010 421 Fuser Life Warning FIP1.17
(The number of printed sheets had
exceeded the specified number.
The BTR needs to be replaced soon.
094 422 Trans Assy Life Warning (The number of printed sheets had FIP1.18
exceeded the specified number.
The Tray 1 KIT ROLL ASSY FEED
needs to be replaced soon.
Tray 1 Cassette Roll Assy Kit
071 401 (The number of printed sheets from FIP1.19
Warning
Tray 1 had exceeded the specified
number.)
The Tray 2 KIT ROLL ASSY FEED
needs to be replaced soon.
Tray 2 Cassette Roll Assy Kit
072 401 (The number of printed sheets from FIP1.20
Warning
Tray 2 had exceeded the specified
number.)
The Tray 3 KIT ROLL ASSY FEED
needs to be replaced soon.
Tray 3 Cassette Roll Assy Kit
073 401 (The number of printed sheets from FIP1.21
Warning
Tray 3 had exceeded the specified
number.)
The Tray 4 KIT ROLL ASSY FEED
needs to be replaced soon.
Tray 4 Cassette Roll Assy Kit
074 401 (The number of printed sheets from FIP1.22
Warning
Tray 4 had exceeded the specified
number.)
The KIT ROLL MSI needs to be
replaced soon.
075 401 MSI Roll Assy Kit Warning (The number of printed sheets from FIP1.23
the MSI had exceeded the specified
number.)
The ROS ASSY needs to be replaced
soon.
061 400 ROS Unit Warning FIP1.24
(The number of printed sheets had
exceeded the specified number.
The KIT REGIST needs to be
replaced soon.
077 401 Regi Unit Warning FIP1.25
(The number of printed sheets had
exceeded the specified number.
The DRIVE ASSY needs to be
replaced soon.
042 401 Gear Unit Warning FIP1.26
(The number of printed sheets had
exceeded the specified number.

2-11
 Chapter 2 Troubleshooting
2.2 Error Codes and Alarm Messages
Table 2-4 Life Warning

Error Code FIP,

Error Details Error Description Corrective
Chain Link Actions
The Tray 1 CHUTE RETARD CST
needs to be replaced soon.
071 410 Tray 1 Cassette Chute Kit Warning (The number of printed sheets from FIP1.27
Tray 1 had exceeded the specified
number.)
The Tray 2 CHUTE RETARD CST
needs to be replaced soon.
072 410 Tray 2 Cassette Chute Kit Warning (The number of printed sheets from FIP1.28
Tray 2 had exceeded the specified
number.)
The Tray 3 CHUTE RETARD CST
needs to be replaced soon.
073 410 Tray 3 Cassette Chute Kit Warning (The number of printed sheets from FIP1.29
Tray 3 had exceeded the specified
number.)
The Tray 4 CHUTE RETARD CST
needs to be replaced soon.
074 410 Tray 4 Cassette Chute Kit Warning (The number of printed sheets from FIP1.30
Tray 4 had exceeded the specified
number.)

Table 2-5 Life Warning Messages

FIP,
LCD Display Error Description Corrective
Actions
Top) Ready to Print <IOT Toner Near Empty>
Replace
Bottom) Toner Cartridge The CRU ASSY needs to be replaced soon.
the CRU
Bottom) Replace soon (The number of printed sheets had exceeded the
ASSY·
(Bottom row appears alternately) specified number.

2-12
Chapter 2 Troubleshooting
2.2 Error Codes and Alarm Messages

2.2.5 Alarm Messages

Table 2-6 Alarm Messages

FIP,
LCD Display Error Description Corrective
Actions
<IOT Toner Detached>
Install
The CRU ASSY is not installed. Or, an incorrect CRU FIP1.31
Toner Cartridge
ASSY is installed.
<IOT Cover Front/Top Open>
Close A & C The Front Cover is open.
FIP1.32
This message has higher display priority over "Install
Toner Cartridge".
Close D <IOT Cover Duplex Open>
FIP1.33
The Duplex Cover is open.
<Tray Detached>
Push in trays • When the machine is waiting for jobs or the auto
paper selection is specified, all the existing trays
FIP1.34
Push in Tray N are open. (All Tray Detached)
• When a source tray is specified, the specified tray
is open. (Specified Tray Detached)
(When it occurs as paper is fed from a
tray)
Wrong paper size
<IOT Paper Size Mismatch>
↓↑
The paper size setting (dial) of the tray is different
Reload Tray N
from the size of loaded paper. FIP1.35
(The size of loaded paper is detected when it passed
(When it occurs as paper is fed from
through the REGI SENSOR.)
Bypass)
Wrong paper size
Reload Bypass
<No Suitable Paper>
• When the machine is waiting for jobs or the auto
paper selection is specified, all the existing trays
Set Tray N contain no paper. (All Tray Empty)
A4 Plain Paper • When auto paper selection is specified, the paper
sizes of all the existing trays are wrong. (All Tray
FIP1.36
<When paper is fed from the Bypass> Size Mismatch)
Bypass Tray • When a source tray is specified, the specified tray
A4 Plain Paper contains no paper. (Specified Tray Empty)
• When a source tray is specified, the paper size of
the specified Tray is wrong. (Specified Tray Size
Mismatch)
<When auto paper selection is
specified> <Upper Cassette Detached>
Push in trays • When Auto Tray is specified, any one of the trays
above the available tray is open. FIP1.34
<When a tray is specified> • When a source tray is specified, any one of the
Push in trays above the specified tray is open.
all trays

2-13
 Chapter 2 Troubleshooting
2.2 Error Codes and Alarm Messages
Table 2-6 Alarm Messages

FIP,
LCD Display Error Description Corrective
Actions
Out of memory Press the
<Memory Overflow>
↓↑ [Eject/Set]
The memory for creating pages is insufficient.
Use Set toCancel button
Disk is full Press the
<Hard Disk Full>
↓↑ [Eject/Set]
The hard disk is full.
Use Set toCancel button
PDL Error Press the
<PDL Error>
↓↑ [Eject/Set]
PDL cannot be processed for some reason.
Use Set toCancel button
Wrong password Press the
<PDF Password Error>
↓↑ [Eject/Set]
The PDF password does not match.
Use Set toCancel button
PDF file secured Press the
<PDF Error>
↓↑ [Eject/Set]
The PDF is not allowed for printing.
Use Set toCancel button
<Mediatype Violation>
UnknownPaperType A violation of the paper type print conditions has Press the
↓↑ occurred. [Eject/Set]
Use Set toCancel • Auto Tray was specified when the priorities for all button
paper types were "none".
Invalid job Press the
<Job Environment Violation>
↓↑ [Eject/Set]
A violation of the print conditions has occurred.
Use Set toCancel button
Login Error Press the
<PrinterAuditron: Invalid User>
↓↑ [Eject/Set]
An unregistered account error was detected.
Use Set toCancel button
Invalid feature Press the
<PrinterAuditron: Disabled Function>
↓↑ [Eject/Set]
An unauthorized function error was detected.
Use Set toCancel button
Limit reached Press the
<Printer Auditron: Usage limit exceeded>
↓↑ [Eject/Set]
A usage limit exceed error was detected.
Use Set toCancel button

2-14
Chapter 2 Troubleshooting
2.3 FIP

2.3 FIP
2.3.1 Level 1 FIP

FIP1.1 IOT Exit On Jam1, IOT Exit On Jam2, IOT Exit Off Early Jam
IOT Reg On Jam, IOT PreReg Jam

Procedure Check and Action Yes No

Parts considered to be the cause
Fuser Exit Sensor [FUSER ASSY] (PL8.1.11)
REGI SENSOR (PL5.1.4)
BTR(PL4.1.3)
Regi Roll Metal [KIT REGIST] (PL5.1.1)
Regi Roll Rubber [KIT REGIST] (PL5.1.1)
REGI CLUTCH (PL5.1.2)
MAIN MOTOR (PL9.1.3)
Exit Motor [EXIT DRIVE ASSY] (PL13.1.2) (Only for the
models with Duplex installed)
MCU PWB (PL11.1.3)
Remove the
Check the paper transport path
foreign
1 Is there any foreign substances or bits of paper found on Go to Step 2
substances and
the paper transport path?
bits of paper, etc.
Check the paper feed rolls
Reinstall the
Are the paper feed rolls (the rolls that are listed among
2 Go to Step 3 corresponding
the parts considered to be the cause) installed
paper feed rolls
properly?
Check the paper feed rolls
Replace the
Are the paper feed rolls (the rolls that are listed among
3 corresponding Go to Step 4
the parts considered to be the cause) deformed or worn
paper feed rolls
out?
Check the Fuser Exit Sensor operation
Enter the CE mode and execute the following menu to
4 check the Fuser Exit Sensor operation. Go to Step 5 Go to FIP2.2
IOT Diag / Digital Input / DI-e
Is the Fuser Exit Sensor operating normally?
Check the REGI SENSOR operation
Enter the CE mode and execute the following menu to
5 check the REGI SENSOR operation. Go to Step 6 Go to FIP2.1
IOT Diag / Digital Input / DI-d
Is the REGI SENSOR operating normally?
Check the REGI CLUTCH operation
Enter the CE mode and execute the following menu to
6 check the REGI CLUTCH operation. Go to Step 7 Go to FIP2.6
IOT Diag / Digital Output / DO-1c
Is the REGI CLUTCH operating normally?

2-15
 Chapter 2 Troubleshooting
2.3 FIP

Procedure Check and Action Yes No

Models with
Check the MAIN MOTOR operation Duplex installed,
Enter the CE mode and execute the following menus to go to Step 8
7 check the MAIN MOTOR operation. Others, Go to FIP2.10
IOT Diag / Digital Output / DO-10 replace the MCU
Is the MAIN MOTOR operating normally? PWB
(REP11.2)
Check the Exit Motor operation (Only for the models
with Duplex installed)
Replace the
Enter the CE mode and execute the following menu to
8 MCU PWB Go to FIP2.12
check the Exit Motor operation.
(REP11.2)
IOT Diag / Digital Output / DO-11
Is the Exit Motor operating normally?

2-16
Chapter 2 Troubleshooting
2.3 FIP

FIP1.2 IOT Early Feed Jam

Procedure Check and Action Yes No

Parts considered to be the cause
REGI SENSOR (PL5.1.4)
Feed Roll (PL2.1.4 / PL2.3.10)
Nudger Roll (PL2.1.4 / PL2.3.10)
Retard Roll (PL2.2.19 / PL2.5.19)
ROLL ASSY TURN (PL2.4.12) (Only for the models with
the standard 550-sheet tray installed)
TURN CLUTCH (PL2.4.3) (Only for the models with the
standard 550-sheet tray installed)
Pick Motor [BRACKET ASSY FDR 250] (PL2.1.11)
Pick Motor [BRACKET ASSY FDR 550] (PL2.3.3)
MCU PWB (PL11.1.3)
Remove the
Check the paper transport path
foreign
1 Is there any foreign substances or bits of paper found on Go to Step 2
substances and
the paper transport path?
bits of paper, etc.
Check the paper feed rolls
Reinstall the
Are the paper feed rolls (the rolls that are listed among
2 Go to Step 3 corresponding
the parts considered to be the cause) installed
paper feed rolls
properly?
Check the paper feed rolls
Replace the
Are the paper feed rolls (the rolls that are listed among
3 corresponding Go to Step 4
the parts considered to be the cause) deformed or worn
paper feed rolls
out?
Models with the
550-sheet tray
Check the REGI SENSOR operation
installed,
Enter the CE mode and execute the following menu to
go to Step 5
4 check the REGI SENSOR operation. Go to FIP2.1
Models with the
IOT Diag / Digital Input / DI-d
250-sheet tray
Is the REGI SENSOR operating normally?
installed,
go to Step 6
Check the TURN CLUTCH operation
Enter the CE mode and execute the following menu to
5 check the TURN CLUTCH operation. Go to Step 6 Go to FIP2.7
IOT Diag / Digital Output / DO-31
Is the TURN CLUTCH operating normally?
Check the Pick Motor operation
Enter the CE mode and execute the following menu to Replace the
6 check the Pick Motor operation. MCU PWB Go to FIP2.11
IOT Diag / Digital Output / DO-30 (REP11.2)
Is the Pick Motor operating normally?

2-17
 Chapter 2 Troubleshooting
2.3 FIP

FIP1.3 IOT MSI Missfeed Jam

Procedure Check and Action Yes No

Parts considered to be the cause
REGI SENSOR (PL5.1.4)
MSI FEED ROLL (PL3.1.17)
HOLDER ASSY RETARD (PL3.1.21)
Turn Roll [KIT FRAME FRONT] (PL4.1.1)
MSI FEED SOLENOID (PL3.1.1)
MAIN MOTOR (PL9.1.3)
MCU PWB (PL11.1.3)
Remove the
Check the paper transport path
foreign
1 Is there any foreign substances or bits of paper found on Go to Step 2
substances and
the paper transport path?
bits of paper, etc.
Check the paper feed rolls
Reinstall the
Are the paper feed rolls (the rolls that are listed among
2 Go to Step 3 corresponding
the parts considered to be the cause) installed
paper feed rolls
properly?
Check the paper feed rolls
Replace the
Are the paper feed rolls (the rolls that are listed among
3 corresponding Go to Step 4
the parts considered to be the cause) deformed or worn
paper feed rolls
out?
Check the REGI SENSOR operation
Enter the CE mode and execute the following menu to
4 check the REGI SENSOR operation. Go to Step 5 Go to FIP2.1
IOT Diag / Digital Input / DI-d
Is the REGI SENSOR operating normally?
Check the MSI FEED SOLENOID operation
Enter the CE mode and execute the following menu to
5 check the MSI FEED SOLENOID operation. Go to Step 6 Go to FIP2.9
IOT Diag / Digital Output / DO-16
Is the MSI FEED SOLENOID operating normally?
Check the MAIN MOTOR operation
Enter the CE mode and execute the following menus to Replace the
6 check the MAIN MOTOR operation. MCU PWB Go to FIP2.10
IOT Diag / Digital Output / DO-10 (REP11.2)
Is the MAIN MOTOR operating normally?

2-18
Chapter 2 Troubleshooting
2.3 FIP

FIP1.4 IOT Tray 1 Missfeed Jam

Procedure Check and Action Yes No

Parts considered to be the cause
REGI SENSOR (PL5.1.4)
Feed Roll (PL2.1.4 / PL2.3.10)
Nudger Roll (PL2.1.4 / PL2.3.10)
Retard Roll (PL2.2.19 / PL2.5.19)
ROLL ASSY TURN (PL2.4.12) (Only for the models with
the standard 550-sheet tray installed)
TURN CLUTCH (PL2.4.3) (Only for the models with the
standard 550-sheet tray installed)
FEED CLUTCH (PL2.4.4) (Only for the models with the
standard 550-sheet tray installed)
Pick Motor [BRACKET ASSY FDR 250] (PL2.1.11)
Pick Motor [BRACKET ASSY FDR 550] (PL2.3.3)
MCU PWB (PL11.1.3)
Remove the
Check the paper transport path
foreign
1 Is there any foreign substances or bits of paper found on Go to Step 2
substances and
the paper transport path?
bits of paper, etc.
Check the paper feed rolls
Reinstall the
Are the paper feed rolls (the rolls that are listed among
2 Go to Step 3 corresponding
the parts considered to be the cause) installed
paper feed rolls
properly?
Check the paper feed rolls
Replace the
Are the paper feed rolls (the rolls that are listed among
3 corresponding Go to Step 4
the parts considered to be the cause) deformed or worn
paper feed rolls
out?
Models with the
550-sheet tray
Check the REGI SENSOR operation
installed,
Enter the CE mode and execute the following menu to
go to Step 5
4 check the REGI SENSOR operation. Go to FIP2.1
Models with the
IOT Diag / Digital Input / DI-d
250-sheet tray
Is the REGI SENSOR operating normally?
installed,
go to Step 7
Check the TURN CLUTCH operation
Enter the CE mode and execute the following menu to
5 check the TURN CLUTCH operation. Go to Step 6 Go to FIP2.7
IOT Diag / Digital Output / DO-31
Is the TURN CLUTCH operating normally?
Check the FEED CLUTCH operation
Enter the CE mode and execute the following menu to
6 check the FEED CLUTCH operation. Go to Step 7 Go to FIP2.8
IOT Diag / Digital Output / DO-32
Is the FEED CLUTCH operating normally?
Check the Pick Motor operation
Enter the CE mode and execute the following menu to Replace the
7 check the Pick Motor operation. MCU PWB Go to FIP2.11
IOT Diag / Digital Output / DO-30 (REP11.2)
Is the Pick Motor operating normally?

2-19
 Chapter 2 Troubleshooting
2.3 FIP

FIP1.5 IOT Tray 2 Missfeed Jam

Procedure Check and Action Yes No

Parts considered to be the cause
REGI SENSOR (PL5.1.4)
ROLL ASSY TURN (PL2.4.12) (Only for the models with
the 550-sheet tray installed) (Tray 1)
TURN CLUTCH (PL2.4.3) (Only for the models with the
550-sheet tray installed) (Tray 1)
Pick Motor [BRACKET ASSY FDR 250] (PL2.1.11)
Pick Motor [BRACKET ASSY FDR 550] (PL2.3.3)
ROLL ASSY TURN (PL14.3.12 / PL15.2.12) (Tray 2)
Feed Roll (PL14.3.10 / PL15.3.10) (Tray 2)
Nudger Roll (PL14.3.10 / PL15.3.10) (Tray 2)
Retard Roll (PL2.2.19 / PL2.5.19) (Tray 2)
TURN CLUTCH (PL14.3.3 / PL15.3.3) (Tray 2)
FEED CLUTCH (PL14.3.4 / PL15.3.4) (Tray 2)
Feed Motor [DRIVE ASSY OPTION] (PL14.2.6 /
PL15.2.6 ) (Tray 2)
FDR PWB (PL14.2.18 / PL15.2.18) (Tray 2)
MCU PWB (PL11.1.3)
Remove the
Check the paper transport path
foreign
1 Is there any foreign substances or bits of paper found on Go to Step 2
substances and
the paper transport path?
bits of paper, etc.
Check the paper feed rolls
Reinstall the
Are the paper feed rolls (the rolls that are listed among
2 Go to Step 3 corresponding
the parts considered to be the cause) installed
paper feed rolls
properly?
Check the paper feed rolls
Replace the
Are the paper feed rolls (the rolls that are listed among
3 corresponding Go to Step 4
the parts considered to be the cause) deformed or worn
paper feed rolls
out?
Models with the
550-sheet tray
Check the REGI SENSOR operation
installed,
Enter the CE mode and execute the following menu to
go to Step 5
4 check the REGI SENSOR operation. Go to FIP2.1
Models with the
IOT Diag / Digital Input / DI-d
250-sheet tray
Is the REGI SENSOR operating normally?
installed,
go to Step 7
Check the TURN CLUTCH operation (Tray 1)
Enter the CE mode and execute the following menu to
5 check the TURN CLUTCH operation. Go to Step 6 Go to FIP2.7
IOT Diag / Digital Output / DO-31
Is the TURN CLUTCH operating normally?
Check the Pick Motor operation
Enter the CE mode and execute the following menu to
6 check the Pick Motor operation. Go to Step 7 Go to FIP2.11
IOT Diag / Digital Output / DO-30
Is the Pick Motor operating normally?

2-20
Chapter 2 Troubleshooting
2.3 FIP

Procedure Check and Action Yes No

Check the TURN CLUTCH operation (Tray 2)
Enter the CE mode and execute the following menu to
7 check the TURN CLUTCH operation. Go to Step 8 Go to FIP2.17
IOT Diag / Digital Output / DO-2d (Tray 2)
Is the TURN CLUTCH operating normally?
Check the FEED CLUTCH operation (Tray 2)
Enter the CE mode and execute the following menu to
8 check the FEED CLUTCH operation. Go to Step 9 Go to FIP2.18
IOT Diag / Digital Output / DO-35 (Tray 2)
Is the FEED CLUTCH operating normally?
Check the Feed Motor operation (Tray 2)
Enter the CE mode and execute the following menu to Replace the
9 check the Feed Motor operation. MCU PWB Go to FIP2.19
IOT Diag / Digital Output / DO-2b (Tray 2) (REP11.2)
Is the Feed Motor operating normally?

2-21
 Chapter 2 Troubleshooting
2.3 FIP

FIP1.6 IOT Tray 3 Missfeed Jam

Procedure Check and Action Yes No

Parts considered to be the cause
REGI SENSOR (PL5.1.4)
ROLL ASSY TURN (PL2.4.12) (Only for the models with
the 550-sheet tray installed) (Tray 1)
TURN CLUTCH (PL2.4.3) (Only for the models with the
550-sheet tray installed) (Tray 1)
Pick Motor [BRACKET ASSY FDR 250] (PL2.1.11)
Pick Motor [BRACKET ASSY FDR 550] (PL2.3.3)
ROLL ASSY TURN (PL14.3.12 / PL15.2.12) (Tray 2)
TURN CLUTCH (PL14.3.3 / PL15.3.3) (Tray 2)
Feed Motor [DRIVE ASSY OPTION] (PL14.2.6 /
PL15.2.6 ) (Tray 2)
FDR PWB (PL14.2.18 / PL15.2.18) (Tray 2)
ROLL ASSY TURN (PL14.3.12 / PL15.2.12) (Tray 3)
Feed Roll (PL14.3.10 / PL15.3.10) (Tray 3)
Nudger Roll (PL14.3.10 / PL15.3.10) (Tray 3)
Retard Roll (PL2.2.19 / PL2.5.19) (Tray 3)
TURN CLUTCH (PL14.3.3 / PL15.3.3) (Tray 3)
FEED CLUTCH (PL14.3.4 / PL15.3.4) (Tray 3)
Feed Motor [DRIVE ASSY OPTION] (PL14.2.6 /
PL15.2.6 ) (Tray 3)
FDR PWB (PL14.2.18 / PL15.2.18) (Tray 3)
MCU PWB (PL11.1.3)
Remove the
Check the paper transport path
foreign
1 Is there any foreign substances or bits of paper found on Go to Step 2
substances and
the paper transport path?
bits of paper, etc.
Check the paper feed rolls
Reinstall the
Are the paper feed rolls (the rolls that are listed among
2 Go to Step 3 corresponding
the parts considered to be the cause) installed
paper feed rolls
properly?
Check the paper feed rolls
Replace the
Are the paper feed rolls (the rolls that are listed among
3 corresponding Go to Step 4
the parts considered to be the cause) deformed or worn
paper feed rolls
out?
Models with the
550-sheet tray
Check the REGI SENSOR operation
installed,
Enter the CE mode and execute the following menu to
go to Step 5
4 check the REGI SENSOR operation. Go to FIP2.1
Models with the
IOT Diag / Digital Input / DI-d
250-sheet tray
Is the REGI SENSOR operating normally?
installed;
go to Step 7
Check the TURN CLUTCH operation (Tray 1)
Enter the CE mode and execute the following menu to
5 check the TURN CLUTCH operation. Go to Step 6 Go to FIP2.7
IOT Diag / Digital Output / DO-31
Is the TURN CLUTCH operating normally?

2-22
Chapter 2 Troubleshooting
2.3 FIP

Procedure Check and Action Yes No

Check the Pick Motor operation
Enter the CE mode and execute the following menu to
6 check the Pick Motor operation. Go to Step 7 Go to FIP2.11
IOT Diag / Digital Output / DO-30
Is the Pick Motor operating normally?
Check the TURN CLUTCH operation (Tray 2)
Enter the CE mode and execute the following menu to
7 check the TURN CLUTCH operation. Go to Step 8 Go to FIP2.17
IOT Diag / Digital Output / DO-2d (Tray 2)
Is the TURN CLUTCH operating normally?
Check the Feed Motor operation (Tray 2)
Enter the CE mode and execute the following menu to
8 check the Feed Motor operation. Go to Step 9 Go to FIP2.19
IOT Diag / Digital Output / DO-2b (Tray 2)
Is the Feed Motor operating normally?
Check the TURN CLUTCH operation (Tray 3)
Enter the CE mode and execute the following menu to
9 check the TURN CLUTCH operation. Go to Step 10 Go to FIP2.17
IOT Diag / Digital Output / DO-2e (Tray 3)
Is the TURN CLUTCH operating normally?
Check the FEED CLUTCH operation (Tray 3)
Enter the CE mode and execute the following menu to
10 check the FEED CLUTCH operation. Go to Step 11 Go to FIP2.18
IOT Diag / Digital Output / DO-36 (Tray 3)
Is the FEED CLUTCH operating normally?
Check the Feed Motor operation (Tray 3)
Enter the CE mode and execute the following menu to Replace the
11 check the Feed Motor operation. MCU PWB Go to FIP2.19
IOT Diag / Digital Output / DO-2c (Tray 3) (REP11.2)
Is the Feed Motor operating normally?

2-23
 Chapter 2 Troubleshooting
2.3 FIP

FIP1.7 IOT Tray 4 Missfeed Jam

Procedure Check and Action Yes No

Parts considered to be the cause
REGI SENSOR (PL5.1.4)
ROLL ASSY TURN (PL2.4.12) (Only for the models with
the 550-sheet tray installed) (Tray 1)
TURN CLUTCH (PL2.4.3) (Only for the models with the
550-sheet tray installed) (Tray 1)
Pick Motor [BRACKET ASSY FDR 250] (PL2.1.11)
Pick Motor [BRACKET ASSY FDR 550] (PL2.3.3)
ROLL ASSY TURN (PL14.3.12 / PL15.2.12) (Tray 2)
TURN CLUTCH (PL14.3.3 / PL15.3.3) (Tray 2)
Feed Motor [DRIVE ASSY OPTION] (PL14.2.6 /
PL15.2.6 ) (Tray 2)
FDR PWB (PL14.2.18 / PL15.2.18) (Tray 3)
ROLL ASSY TURN (PL14.3.12 / PL15.2.12) (Tray 3)
TURN CLUTCH (PL14.3.3 / PL15.3.3) (Tray 3)
Feed Motor [DRIVE ASSY OPTION] (PL14.2.6 /
PL15.2.6 ) (Tray 3)
FDR PWB (PL14.2.18 / PL15.2.18) (Tray 3)
ROLL ASSY TURN (PL14.3.12 / PL15.2.12) (Tray 4)
Feed Roll (PL14.3.10 / PL15.3.10) (Tray 4)
Nudger Roll (PL14.3.10 / PL15.3.10) (Tray 4)
Retard Roll (PL2.2.19 / PL2.5.19) (Tray 4)
TURN CLUTCH (PL14.3.3 / PL15.3.3) (Tray 4)
FEED CLUTCH (PL14.3.4 / PL15.3.4) (Tray 4)
Feed Motor [DRIVE ASSY OPTION] (PL14.2.6 /
PL15.2.6 ) (Tray 4)
FDR PWB (PL14.2.18 / PL15.2.18) (Tray 4)
MCU PWB (PL11.1.3)
Remove the
Check the paper transport path
foreign
1 Is there any foreign substances or bits of paper found on Go to Step 2
substances and
the paper transport path?
bits of paper, etc.
Check the paper feed rolls
Reinstall the
Are the paper feed rolls (the rolls that are listed among
2 Go to Step 3 corresponding
the parts considered to be the cause) installed
paper feed rolls
properly?
Check the paper feed rolls
Replace the
Are the paper feed rolls (the rolls that are listed among
3 corresponding Go to Step 4
the parts considered to be the cause) deformed or worn
paper feed rolls
out?
Models with the
550-sheet tray
Check the REGI SENSOR operation
installed,
Enter the CE mode and execute the following menu to
go to Step 5
4 check the REGI SENSOR operation. Go to FIP2.1
Models with the
IOT Diag / Digital Input / DI-d
250-sheet tray
Is the REGI SENSOR operating normally?
installed,
go to Step 7

2-24
Chapter 2 Troubleshooting
2.3 FIP

Procedure Check and Action Yes No

Check the TURN CLUTCH operation (Tray 1)
Enter the CE mode and execute the following menu to
5 check the TURN CLUTCH operation. Go to Step 6 Go to FIP2.7
IOT Diag / Digital Output / DO-31
Is the TURN CLUTCH operating normally?
Check the Pick Motor operation
Enter the CE mode and execute the following menu to
6 check the Pick Motor operation. Go to Step 7 Go to FIP2.11
IOT Diag / Digital Output / DO-30
Is the Pick Motor operating normally?
Check the TURN CLUTCH operation (Tray 2)
Enter the CE mode and execute the following menu to
7 check the TURN CLUTCH operation. Go to Step 8 Go to FIP2.17
IOT Diag / Digital Output / DO-2d (Tray 2)
Is the TURN CLUTCH operating normally?
Check the Feed Motor operation (Tray 2)
Enter the CE mode and execute the following menu to
8 check the Feed Motor operation. Go to Step 9 Go to FIP2.19
IOT Diag / Digital Output / DO-2b (Tray 2)
Is the Feed Motor operating normally?
Check the TURN CLUTCH operation (Tray 3)
Enter the CE mode and execute the following menu to
9 check the TURN CLUTCH operation. Go to Step 10 Go to FIP2.17
IOT Diag / Digital Output / DO-2e (Tray 3)
Is the TURN CLUTCH operating normally?
Check the Feed Motor operation (Tray 3)
Enter the CE mode and execute the following menu to
10 check the Feed Motor operation. Go to Step 11 Go to FIP2.19
IOT Diag / Digital Output / DO-2c (Tray 3)
Is the Feed Motor operating normally?
Check the TURN CLUTCH operation (Tray 4)
Enter the CE mode and execute the following menu to
11 check the TURN CLUTCH operation. Go to Step 12 Go to FIP2.17
IOT Diag / Digital Output / DO-34 (Tray 4)
Is the TURN CLUTCH operating normally?
Check the FEED CLUTCH operation (Tray 4)
Enter the CE mode and execute the following menu to
12 check the FEED CLUTCH operation. Go to Step 13 Go to FIP2.18
IOT Diag / Digital Output / DO-37 (Tray 4)
Is the FEED CLUTCH operating normally?
Check the Feed Motor operation (Tray 4)
Enter the CE mode and execute the following menu to Replace the
13 check the Feed Motor operation. MCU PWB Go to FIP2.19
IOT Diag / Digital Output / DO-33 (Tray 4) (REP11.2)
Is the Feed Motor operating normally?

2-25
 Chapter 2 Troubleshooting
2.3 FIP

FIP1.8 IOT Duplex On Jam, IOT Duplex Refeed Jam

Procedure Check and Action Yes No

Parts considered to be the cause
Dup Jam Sensor (PL13.2.7)
Roll Dup 1 (PL13.2.1)
Roll Dup 2 (PL13.2.1)
REGI SENSOR (PL5.1.4)
Turn Roll [KIT FRAME FRONT] (PL4.1.1)
DUP MOTOR (PL13.2.13)
MAIN MOTOR (PL9.1.3)
DUP PWB (PL13.2.21)
MCU PWB (PL11.1.3)
Remove the
Check the paper transport path
foreign
1 Is there any foreign substances or bits of paper found on Go to Step 2
substances and
the paper transport path?
bits of paper, etc.
Check the paper feed rolls
Reinstall the
Are the paper feed rolls (the rolls that are listed among
2 Go to Step 3 corresponding
the parts considered to be the cause) installed
paper feed rolls
properly?
Check the paper feed rolls
Replace the
Are the paper feed rolls (the rolls that are listed among
3 corresponding Go to Step 4
the parts considered to be the cause) deformed or worn
paper feed rolls
out?
Check the REGI SENSOR operation
Enter the CE mode and execute the following menu to
4 check the REGI SENSOR operation. Go to Step 5 Go to FIP2.1
IOT Diag / Digital Input / DI-d
Is the REGI SENSOR operating normally?
Check the MAIN MOTOR operation
Enter the CE mode and execute the following menus to
5 check the MAIN MOTOR operation. Go to Step 6 Go to FIP2.10
IOT Diag / Digital Output / DO-10
Is the MAIN MOTOR operating normally?
Check the DUP MOTOR operation
Enter the CE mode and execute the following menus to Replace the
6 check the DUP MOTOR operation. MCU PWB Go to FIP2.14
IOT Diag / Digital Output / DO-15 (REP11.2)
Is the DUP MOTOR operating normally?

2-26
Chapter 2 Troubleshooting
2.3 FIP

FIP1.9 IOT Duplex Missfeed Jam, IOT Remain at Dup Jam

Procedure Check and Action Yes No

Parts considered to be the cause
Dup Jam Sensor (PL13.2.7)
Roll Dup 1 (PL13.2.1)
Roll Dup 2 (PL13.2.1)
Exit Roll [COVER TOP ASSY] (PL1.1.2)
DUP MOTOR (PL13.2.13)
Exit Motor [EXIT DRIVE ASSY] (PL13.1.2)
DUP PWB (PL13.2.21)
MCU PWB (PL11.1.3)
Remove the
Check the paper transport path
foreign
1 Is there any foreign substances or bits of paper found on Go to Step 2
substances and
the paper transport path?
bits of paper, etc.
Check the paper feed rolls
Reinstall the
Are the paper feed rolls (the rolls that are listed among
2 Go to Step 3 corresponding
the parts considered to be the cause) installed
paper feed rolls
properly?
Check the paper feed rolls
Replace the
Are the paper feed rolls (the rolls that are listed among
3 corresponding Go to Step 4
the parts considered to be the cause) deformed or worn
paper feed rolls
out?
Check the Dup Jam Sensor operation
Enter the CE mode and execute the following menus to
4 check the Dup Jam Sensor operation. Go to Step 5 Go to FIP2.13
IOT Diag / Digital Input / DI-f
Is the Dup Jam Sensor operating normally?
Check the DUP MOTOR operation
Enter the CE mode and execute the following menus to
5 check the DUP MOTOR operation. Go to Step 6 Go to FIP2.14
IOT Diag / Digital Output / DO-15
Is the DUP MOTOR operating normally?
Check the Exit Motor operation
Enter the CE mode and execute the following menu to Replace the
6 check the Exit Motor operation. MCU PWB Go to FIP2.12
IOT Diag / Digital Output / DO-11 (REP11.2)
Is the Exit Motor operating normally?

2-27
 Chapter 2 Troubleshooting
2.3 FIP

FIP1.10 IOT Fuser Failure

Procedure Check and Action Yes No

Parts considered to be the cause
FUSER ASSY (PL8.1.11)
HARNESS ASSY FSR (PL8.1.10)
HARNESS ASSY MAIN FRM (PL12.1.3)
HARNESS ASSY PS (PL11.1.9)
LVPS (PL11.1.6)
MCU PWB (PL11.1.3)
Check the installation of the FUSER ASSY Reinstall the
1 Go to Step 2
Is the FUSER ASSY installed properly? FUSER ASSY
Check the connection of the FUSER ASSY
Check the connections between FUSER ASSY and Connect P/J4410,
MCU PWB, between FUSER ASSY and LVPS, as well P/J12, P/J32,
2 Go to Step 3
as between LVPS and MCU PWB. P/J33, and P/J21
Are P/J4410, P/J12, P/J32, P/J33, and P/J21 connected securely
securely?
Check the conductivity of the HARNESS ASSY FSR Replace the
3 Is the wire between P/J4410 <=> P/J32 conducting Go to Step 4 HARNESS
properly? ASSY FSR
Check the conductivity of the HARNESS ASSY MAIN Replace the
FRM HARNESS
4 Go to Step 5
Is the wire between P/J4410 <=> P/J12 conducting ASSY MAIN
properly? FRM
Check the conductivity of the HARNESS ASSY PS Replace the
5 Is the wire between P/J33 <=> P/J21 conducting Go to Step 6 HARNESS
properly? ASSY PS
Check after the replacement of FUSER ASSY
Procedure is
6 Replace the FUSER ASSY. (REP8.2) Go to Step 7
complete
Does an error occur?
Check after the replacement of LVPS Replace the
Procedure is
7 Replace the LVPS. (REP11.5) MCU PWB
complete
Does an error occur? (REP11.2)

2-28
Chapter 2 Troubleshooting
2.3 FIP

FIP1.11 IOT-ESS Communication Fail

Procedure Check and Action Yes No

Parts considered to be the cause
FFC VIDEO (PL11.1.8)
HARNESS ASSY PS (PL11.1.9)
ESS PWB (PL11.1.7)
MCU PWB (PL11.1.3)
Check the connection of the ESS PWB and the MCU PWB Connect
1 Check the connection between ESS PWB and MCU PWB. Go to Step 2 P/J7 and
Are P/J7 and P/J19 connected securely? P/J19 securely
Check the conductivity of the FFC VIDEO Replace the
2 Go to Step 3
Is the wire between P/J7 <=> P/J19 conducting properly? FFC VIDEO
Check the connection between the MCU PWB and the
Connect P/J33
LVPS
3 Go to Step 4 and P/J21
Check the connection between MCU PWB and LVPS.
securely
Are P/J33 and P/J21 connected securely?
Replace the
Check the conductivity of the HARNESS ASSY PS
4 Go to Step 5 HARNESS
Is the wire between P/J33 <=> P/J21 conducting properly?
ASSY PS
Check after the replacement of MCU PWB Replace the
Procedure is
5 Replace the MCU PWB. (REP11.2) ESS PWB
complete
Does an error occur? (REP11.6)

2-29
 Chapter 2 Troubleshooting
2.3 FIP

FIP1.12 IOT Motor Failure

Procedure Check and Action Yes No

Parts considered to be the cause
MAIN MOTOR (PL9.1.3)
MCU PWB (PL11.1.3)
Check the MAIN MOTOR operation
Enter the CE mode and execute the following menus to Replace the MCU
1 check the MAIN MOTOR operation. PWB Go to FIP2.10
IOT Diag / Digital Output / DO-10 (REP11.2)
Is the MAIN MOTOR operating normally?

2-30
Chapter 2 Troubleshooting
2.3 FIP

FIP1.13 IOT Fan Motor Failure

Procedure Check and Action Yes No

Parts considered to be the cause
MIDDLE FAN (PL10.1.2)
REAR FAN (PL10.1.4)
SIDE FAN (PL10.1.5)
HARNESS ASSY SIDE FAN (PL10.1.6)
KIT BASE ASSY INTERLOCK (PL12.1.1)
HARNESS ASSY INTERLOCK (PL12.1.4)
(The KIT BASE ASSY INTERLOCK is the unit for
replacement)
MCU PWB (PL11.1.3)
Check the open/close status of the Front Cover and Top Close the Cover
Cover (Press the
1 Go to Step 2
Are the Front Cover and Top Cover completely closed? Interlock Switch
(Is the Interlock Switch pressed securely?) securely)
Check the Fan operation
Enter the CE mode and execute the following menus to Replace the
2 check the Fan operation. MCU PWB Go to Step 3
IOT Diag / Digital Output / DO-2f (REP11.2)
Are the Fans operating normally?
Check the connections of the Fans
Connect P/J14,
Check the connection between each Fan and the MCU
P/J15, P/J16,
3 PWB. Go to Step 4
and P/J1610
Are P/J14, P/J15, P/J16, and P/J1610 connected
securely
securely?
Check the conductivity of the HARNESS ASSY SIDE
Replace the
FAN
4 Go to Step 5 HARNESS
Is the wire between P/J1610 <=> P/J16 conducting
ASSY SIDE FAN
properly?
Check the voltage supply to the SIDE FAN
Measure the voltage between MCU PWB GND <=>
P/J16-1 Pin.
5 Go to Step 6 Go to FIP2.20
Close the Interlock Switch (HARNESS ASSY
INTERLOCK) before checking.
Is there a voltage (approx. +24VDC) output?
Check the voltage supply to the MIDDLE FAN
Measure the voltage between MCU PWB GND <=>
P/J14-1 Pin.
6 Go to Step 7 Go to FIP2.20
Close the Interlock Switch (HARNESS ASSY
INTERLOCK) before checking.
Is there a voltage (approx. +24VDC) output?
Check the voltage supply to the REAR FAN
Measure the voltage between MCU PWB GND <=>
P/J15-1 Pin.
7 Go to Step 8 Go to FIP2.20
Close the Interlock Switch (HARNESS ASSY
INTERLOCK) before checking.
Is there a voltage (approx. +24VDC) output?
Check after the replacement of SIDE FAN
Procedure is
8 Replace the SIDE FAN. (REP1.3) Go to Step 9
complete
Does an error occur?

2-31
 Chapter 2 Troubleshooting
2.3 FIP

Procedure Check and Action Yes No

Check after the replacement of MIDDLE FAN
Procedure is
9 Replace the MIDDLE FAN. (REP10.2) Go to Step 10
complete
Does an error occur?
Check after the replacement of REAR FAN Replace the
Procedure is
10 Replace the REAR FAN. (REP10.3) MCU PWB
complete
Does an error occur? (REP11.2)

2-32
Chapter 2 Troubleshooting
2.3 FIP

FIP1.14 IOT ROS Motor Failure

Procedure Check and Action Yes No

Parts considered to be the cause
ROS ASSY (PL7.1.1)
MCU PWB (PL11.1.3)
ESS PWB (PL11.1.7)
Check the connection of the ROS ASSY
Connect P/J62,
Check the connections between ROS ASSY and MCU
P/J61, P/J18,
1 PWB, as well as between ROS ASSY and ESS PWB. Go to Step 2
P/J17, P/J64 and
Are P/J62, P/J61, P/J18, P/J17, P/J64 and P/J1
P/J1 securely
connected securely?
Check after the replacement of ROS ASSY
Procedure is
2 Replace the ROS ASSY. (REP7.1) Go to Step 3
complete
Does an error occur?
Check after the replacement of MCU PWB Replace the ESS
Procedure is
3 Replace the MCU PWB. (REP11.2) PWB
complete
Does an error occur? (REP11.6)

2-33
 Chapter 2 Troubleshooting
2.3 FIP

FIP1.15 IOT Option Feeder Communication Error

Procedure Check and Action Yes No

Parts considered to be the cause
HARNESS ASSY FEEDER 1 (PL2.1.17 / PL2.3.10)
HARNESS ASSY FEEDER 2 (PL14.2.20 / PL15.2.20)
HARNESS ASSY FEEDER 3 (PL14.2.19 / PL15.2.19)
FDR PWB (PL14.2.18 / PL15.2.18)
MCU PWB (PL11.1.3)
Check the connection of the FDR PWB
Connect P/J24,
Check the connections between FDR PWB and MCU
P/J2481, P/J81,
1 PWB, as well as between FDR PWB and FDR PWB. Go to Step 2
P/J86, and
Are P/J24, P/J2481, P/J81, P/J86, and P/J8610
P/J8610 securely
connected securely?
Check the conductivity of the HARNESS ASSY
Replace the
FEEDER 1
2 Go to Step 3 HARNESS ASSY
Is the wire between P/J24 <=> P/J2481 conducting
FEEDER 1
properly?
Check the conductivity of the HARNESS ASSY
Replace the
FEEDER 2
3 Go to Step 4 HARNESS ASSY
Is the wire between P/J2481 <=> P/J81 conducting
FEEDER 2
properly?
Check the conductivity of the HARNESS ASSY
Replace the
FEEDER 3
4 Go to Step 5 HARNESS ASSY
Is the wire between P/J86 <=> P/J8610 conducting
FEEDER 3
properly?
Check after the replacement of FDR PWB Replace the
Procedure is
5 Replace the FDR PWB. (REP14.15) MCU PWB
complete
Does an error occur? (REP11.2)

2-34
Chapter 2 Troubleshooting
2.3 FIP

FIP1.16 IOT Option Duplex Communication Error

Procedure Check and Action Yes No

Parts considered to be the cause
Harness Assy Front [KIT FRAME FRONT] (PL4.1.1)
HARNESS ASSY DUP (PL13.2.22)
DUP PWB (PL13.2.21)
MCU PWB (PL11.1.3)
Check the connection of the DUP PWB
Connect P/J23,
Check the connection between DUP PWB and MCU
1 Go to Step 2 P/J2371, and
PWB.
P/J71D securely
Are P/J23, P/J2371, and P/J71D connected securely?
Check the conductivity of the Harness Assy Front Replace the
2 Is the wire between P/J23 <=> P/J2371 conducting Go to Step 3 Harness Assy
properly? Front
Check the conductivity of the HARNESS ASSY DUP Replace the
3 Is the wire between P/J2371 <=> P/J71D conducting Go to Step 4 HARNESS
properly? ASSY DUP
Check after the replacement of DUP PWB Replace the
Procedure is
4 Replace the DUP PWB. (REP13.11) MCU PWB
complete
Does an error occur? (REP11.2)

2-35
 Chapter 2 Troubleshooting
2.3 FIP

FIP1.17 Fuser Life Warning

Procedure Check and Action Yes No

Parts considered to be the cause
FUSER ASSY (PL8.1.11)
MCU PWB (PL11.1.3)
Check after the replacement of FUSER ASSY
Replace the FUSER ASSY with a new one. (REP8.2)
Replace the
Enter the CE mode and execute the following menus to Procedure is
1 MCU PWB
clear the FUSER ASSY life counter. complete
(REP11.2)
Parameter / Life Counter / Fuser / Trans / Reset Counter
Does an error occur?

FIP1.18 Trans Assy Life Warning

Procedure Check and Action Yes No

Parts considered to be the cause
BTR (PL4.1.3)
MCU PWB (PL11.1.3)
Check after the replacement of BTR
Replace the BTR with a new one. (REP4.3)
Replace the
Enter the CE mode and execute the following menus to Procedure is
1 MCU PWB
clear the BTR life counter. complete
(REP11.2)
Parameter / Life Counter / Fuser / Trans / Reset Counter
Does an error occur?

FIP1.19 Tray 1 Cassette Roll Assy Kit Warning

Procedure Check and Action Yes No

Parts considered to be the cause
KIT ROLL ASSY FEED (PL2.1.99 / PL2.4.99)
MCU PWB (PL11.1.3)
Check after the replacement of Tray 1 KIT ROLL ASSY
FEED
Replace the KIT ROLL ASSY FEED with a new one.
Replace the
(REP2.5 and REP2.17) Procedure is
1 MCU PWB
Enter the CE mode and execute the following menus to complete
(REP11.2)
clear the KIT ROLL ASSY FEED life counter.
Parameter / Life Counter / Tray 1 Roll / Reset Counter
Does an error occur?

2-36
Chapter 2 Troubleshooting
2.3 FIP

FIP1.20 Tray 2 Cassette Roll Assy Kit Warning

Procedure Check and Action Yes No

Parts considered to be the cause
KIT ROLL ASSY FEED (PL14.3.99 / PL15.3.99)
MCU PWB (PL11.1.3)
Check after the replacement of Tray 2 KIT ROLL ASSY
FEED
Replace the KIT ROLL ASSY FEED with a new one.
Replace the
(REP14.19 and REP2.17) Procedure is
1 MCU PWB
Enter the CE mode and execute the following menus to complete
(REP11.2)
clear the KIT ROLL ASSY FEED life counter.
Parameter / Life Counter / Tray 2 Roll / Reset Counter
Does an error occur?

FIP1.21 Tray 3 Cassette Roll Assy Kit Warning

Procedure Check and Action Yes No

Parts considered to be the cause
KIT ROLL ASSY FEED (PL14.3.99 / PL15.3.99)
MCU PWB (PL11.1.3)
Check after the replacement of Tray 3 KIT ROLL ASSY
FEED
Replace the KIT ROLL ASSY FEED with a new one.
Replace the
(REP14.19 and REP2.17) Procedure is
1 MCU PWB
Enter the CE mode and execute the following menus to complete
(REP11.2)
clear the KIT ROLL ASSY FEED life counter.
Parameter / Life Counter / Tray 3 Roll / Reset Counter
Does an error occur?

FIP1.22 Tray 4 Cassette Roll Assy Kit Warning

Procedure Check and Action Yes No

Parts considered to be the cause
KIT ROLL ASSY FEED (PL14.3.99 / PL15.3.99)
MCU PWB (PL11.1.3)
Check after the replacement of Tray 4 KIT ROLL ASSY
FEED
Replace the KIT ROLL ASSY FEED with a new one.
Replace the
(REP14.19 and REP2.17) Procedure is
1 MCU PWB
Enter the CE mode and execute the following menus to complete
(REP11.2)
clear the KIT ROLL ASSY FEED life counter.
Parameter / Life Counter / Tray 4 Roll / Reset Counter
Does an error occur?

2-37
 Chapter 2 Troubleshooting
2.3 FIP

FIP1.23 MSI Roll Assy Kit Warning

Procedure Check and Action Yes No

Parts considered to be the cause
KIT ROLL MSI (PL3.1.20)
MCU PWB (PL11.1.3)
Check after the replacement of KIT ROLL MSI
Replace the KIT ROLL MSI with a new one.
(REP3.8 and REP3.10)
Replace the
Enter the CE mode and execute the following menus to Procedure is
1 MCU PWB
clear the KIT ROLL MSI life counter. complete
(REP11.2)
Parameter / Life Counter / Bypass Tray Roll / Reset
Counter
Does an error occur?

FIP1.24 ROS Unit Warning

Procedure Check and Action Yes No

Parts considered to be the cause
ROS ASSY (PL7.1.1)
MCU PWB (PL11.1.3)
Check after the replacement of ROS ASSY
Replace the ROS ASSY with a new one. (REP7.1)
Enter the CE mode and execute the following menus to Replace the
Procedure is
1 clear the ROS ASSY life counter. MCU PWB
complete
Parameter / Life Counter / ROS / Regist / Drive / Reset (REP11.2)
Counter
Does an error occur?

FIP1.25 Regi Unit Warning

Procedure Check and Action Yes No

Parts considered to be the cause
KIT REGIST (PL5.1.1)
MCU PWB (PL11.1.3)
Check after the replacement of KIT REGIST
Replace the KIT REGIST with a new one. (REP5.1)
Enter the CE mode and execute the following menus to Replace the
Procedure is
1 clear the KIT REGIST life counter. MCU PWB
complete
Parameter / Life Counter / ROS / Regist / Drive / Reset (REP11.2)
Counter
Does an error occur?

2-38
Chapter 2 Troubleshooting
2.3 FIP

FIP1.26 Gear Unit Warning

Procedure Check and Action Yes No

Parts considered to be the cause
DRIVE ASSY (PL9.1.2)
MCU PWB (PL11.1.3)
Check after the replacement of DRIVE ASSY
Replace the DRIVE ASSY with a new one. (REP9.2)
Enter the CE mode and execute the following menus to Replace the
Procedure is
1 clear the DRIVE ASSY life counter. MCU PWB
complete
Parameter / Life Counter / ROS / Regist / Drive / Reset (REP11.2)
Counter
Does an error occur?

FIP1.27 Tray 1 Cassette Chute Kit Warning

Procedure Check and Action Yes No

Parts considered to be the cause
CHUTE RETARD CST (PL2.2.15 / PL2.5.15)
MCU PWB (PL11.1.3)
Check after the replacement of Tray 1 CHUTE RETARD
CST
Replace the CHUTE RETARD CST with a new one. Replace the
Procedure is
1 Enter the CE mode and execute the following menus to MCU PWB
complete
clear the CHUTE RETARD CST life counter. (REP11.2)
Parameter / Life Counter / Tray 1 Chute / Reset Counter
Does an error occur?

FIP1.28 Tray 2 Cassette Chute Kit Warning

Procedure Check and Action Yes No

Parts considered to be the cause
CHUTE RETARD CST (PL2.2.15 / PL2.5.15)
MCU PWB (PL11.1.3)
Check after the replacement of Tray 2 CHUTE RETARD
CST
Replace the CHUTE RETARD CST with a new one. Replace the
Procedure is
1 Enter the CE mode and execute the following menus to MCU PWB
complete
clear the CHUTE RETARD CST life counter. (REP11.2)
Parameter / Life Counter / Tray 2 Chute / Reset Counter
Does an error occur?

2-39
 Chapter 2 Troubleshooting
2.3 FIP

FIP1.29 Tray 3 Cassette Chute Kit Warning

Procedure Check and Action Yes No

Parts considered to be the cause
CHUTE RETARD CST (PL2.2.15 / PL2.5.15)
MCU PWB (PL11.1.3)
Check after the replacement of Tray 3 CHUTE RETARD
CST
Replace the CHUTE RETARD CST with a new one. Replace the
Procedure is
1 Enter the CE mode and execute the following menus to MCU PWB
complete
clear the CHUTE RETARD CST life counter. (REP11.2)
Parameter / Life Counter / Tray 3 Chute / Reset Counter
Does an error occur?

FIP1.30 Tray 4 Cassette Chute Kit Warning

Procedure Check and Action Yes No

Parts considered to be the cause
CHUTE RETARD CST (PL2.2.15 / PL2.5.15)
MCU PWB (PL11.1.3)
Check after the replacement of Tray 4 CHUTE RETARD
CST
Replace the CHUTE RETARD CST with a new one. Replace the
Procedure is
1 Enter the CE mode and execute the following menus to MCU PWB
complete
clear the CHUTE RETARD CST life counter. (REP11.2)
Parameter / Life Counter / Tray 4 Chute / Reset Counter
Does an error occur?

2-40
Chapter 2 Troubleshooting
2.3 FIP

FIP1.31 IOT Toner Detached

Procedure Check and Action Yes No

Parts considered to be the cause
CRU ASSY (PL6.1.1)
HARNESS ASSY CRU (PL12.1.20)
MCU PWB (PL11.1.3)
Check the installation of the CRU ASSY Reinstall the
1 Go to Step 2
Is the CRU ASSY installed properly? CRU ASSY
Check the CRU ASSY Replace with the
2 Is the installed CRU ASSY of the appropriate Go to Step 3 appropriate CRU
specification? ASSY
Check the connection of the HARNESS ASSY CRU
Connect P/J250
Check the connections between CRU ASSY connectors
3 Go to Step 4 and P/J25
and MCU PWB.
securely
Are P/J250 and P/J25 connected securely?
Check the connection of the HARNESS ASSY CRU Replace the
4 Is the wire between P/J250 <=> P/J25 conducting Go to Step 5 HARNESS
properly? ASSY CRU
Check after the replacement of CRU ASSY Replace the
Procedure is
5 Replace the CRU ASSY. MCU PWB
complete
Does an error occur? (REP11.2)

2-41
 Chapter 2 Troubleshooting
2.3 FIP

FIP1.32 IOT Cover Front / Top Open

Procedure Check and Action Yes No

Parts considered to be the cause
KIT BASE ASSY INTERLOCK (PL12.1.1)
HARNESS ASSY INTERLOCK (PL12.1.4)
(The KIT BASE ASSY INTERLOCK is the unit for
replacement)
COVER TOP ASSY (PL1.1.2)
KIT FRAME FRONT (PLPL4.1.1)
MCU PWB (PL11.1.3)
Check the open/close status of the Front Cover and Top
1 Cover Go to Step 2 Close the Cover
Are the Front Cover and Top Cover completely closed?
Check the shape of the Top Cover
Check the shape of Interlock Switch section that is Replace the
pressed (the protrusion on the left side of the COVER COVER TOP
2 Go to Step 3
TOP ASSY). ASSY
Is that section of the COVER TOP ASSY deformed or (REP1.5)
damaged?
Check the shape of the Front Cover
Check the shape of Interlock Switch section that is
Replace the KIT
pressed (the protrusion on the left side of the KIT
3 FRAME FRONT Go to Step 4
FRAME FRONT).
(REP4.1)
Is that section of the KIT FRAME FRONT deformed or
damaged?
Check the Interlock Switch (HARNESS ASSY
INTERLOCK) operation
Replace the
Enter the CE mode and execute the following menus to
4 MCU PWB Go to Step 5
check the Interlock Switch operation.
(REP11.2)
IOT Diag / Digital Input / DI-39
Are the Interlock Switches operating normally?
Check the connection of the HARNESS ASSY
Replace the KIT
INTERLOCK
BASE ASSY Connect P/J28
5 Check the connection between HARNESS ASSY
INTERLOCK securely
INTERLOCK and MCU PWB.
(REP12.1)
Is P/J28 connected securely?

2-42
Chapter 2 Troubleshooting
2.3 FIP

FIP1.33 IOT Cover Duplex Open

Procedure Check and Action Yes No

Parts considered to be the cause
CHUTE COVER (PL13.2.18)
Dup Cover Open Sensor (PL13.2.7)
HARNESS ASSY COVER DUP (PL13.2.27)
DUP PWB (PL13.2.21)
MCU PWB (PL11.1.3)
Check the open/close status of the Duplex Cover
1 (CHUTE COVER) Go to Step 2 Close the Cover
Is the Duplex Cover closed?
Check the shape of the Duplex Cover (CHUTE COVER)
Check the shape of the section that blocks light to the
Replace the
Dup Cover Open Sensor (the protrusion on the left side
2 CHUTE COVER Go to Step 3
of the CHUTE COVER).
(REP13.9)
Is that section of the CHUTE COVER deformed or
damaged?
Check the Dup Cover Open Sensor operation
Enter the CE mode and execute the following menus to Replace the DUP
3 check the Dup Cover Open Sensor operation. PWB Go to Step 4
IOT Diag / Digital Input / DI-38 (REP13.11)
Is the Dup Cover Open Sensor operating normally?
Check the connection of the HARNESS ASSY COVER
DUP Connect
4 Check the connection between HARNESS ASSY Go to Step 5 P/J730D and
COVER DUP and DUP PWB. P/J73D securely
Are P/J730D and P/J73D connected securely?
Check the conductivity of the HARNESS ASSY COVER Replace the
DUP HARNESS
5 Go to Step 6
Is the wire between P/J730D <=> P/J73D conducting ASSY COVER
properly? DUP
Check after the replacement of Dup Cover Open Sensor
Procedure is
6 Replace the Dup Cover Open Sensor. (REP13.6) Go to Step 7
complete
Does an error occur?
Check after the replacement of DUP PWB Replace the
Procedure is
7 Replace the DUP PWB. (REP13.11) MCU PWB
complete
Does an error occur? (REP11.2)

2-43
 Chapter 2 Troubleshooting
2.3 FIP

FIP1.34 Tray Detached, Upper Cassette Detached

Check the tray where the problem has occurred.

Procedure Check and Action Yes No

Parts considered to be the cause
WHEEL SIZE ASSY (PL2.2.28 / PL2.5.36)
SIZE SWITCH (PL2.1.13 / PL2.3.8)
SIZE SWITCH (PL14.2.17 / PL15.2.17)
HARNESS ASSY PH (PL2.1.18 / PL2.4.14)
HARNESS ASSY SIZE FDR (PL14.2.21 / PL15.2.21)
FDR PWB (PL14.2.18 / PL15.2.18)
MCU PWB (PL11.1.3)
Check the installation of the Paper Cassette Reinstall the
1 Go to Step 2
Is the Paper Cassette installed properly? Paper Cassette
Check the WHEEL SIZE ASSY
Replace the Tray 1: Go to
Check the shape of the WHEEL SIZE ASSY's SIZE
WHEEL SIZE FIP2.3
2 SWITCH button that is pressed.
ASSY Tray 2, 3 or 4: Go
Is that section of the WHEEL SIZE ASSY deformed or
(REP2.22) to FIP2.15
damaged?

FIP1.35 IOT Paper Size Mismatch

Check the tray where the problem has occurred.

Procedure Check and Action Yes No

Parts considered to be the cause
REGI SENSOR (PL5.1.4)
WHEEL SIZE ASSY (PL2.2.28 / PL2.5.36)
SIZE SWITCH (PL2.1.13 / PL2.3.8)
SIZE SWITCH (PL14.2.17 / PL15.2.17)
HARNESS ASSY PH (PL2.1.18 / PL2.4.14)
HARNESS ASSY SIZE FDR (PL14.2.21 / PL15.2.21)
FDR PWB (PL14.2.18 / PL15.2.18)
MCU PWB (PL11.1.3)
Check the paper size of the Paper Cassette
Set the correct
1 Is the paper size of the Paper Cassette set correctly Go to Step 2
paper size
according to the size of loaded paper?
Check the REGI SENSOR operation
Enter the CE mode and execute the following menu to
2 check the REGI SENSOR operation. Go to Step 3 Go to FIP2.1
IOT Diag / Digital Input / DI-d
Is the REGI SENSOR operating normally?
Check the WHEEL SIZE ASSY
Replace the Tray 1: Go to
Check the shape of the WHEEL SIZE ASSY's SIZE
WHEEL SIZE FIP2.3
3 SWITCH button that is pressed.
ASSY Tray 2, 3 or 4: Go
Is that section of the WHEEL SIZE ASSY deformed or
(REP2.22) to FIP2.15
damaged?

2-44
Chapter 2 Troubleshooting
2.3 FIP

FIP1.36 No Suitable Paper

Check the tray where the problem has occurred.

Procedure Check and Action Yes No

Parts considered to be the cause
TRAY NO PAPER SENSOR (PL2.1.3 / PL2.4.11)
TRAY NO PAPER SENSOR (PL14.3.11 / PL15.3.11)
MSI NO PAPER SENSOR (PL3.1.11)
WHEEL SIZE ASSY (PL2.2.28 / PL2.5.36)
SIZE SWITCH (PL2.1.13 / PL2.3.8)
SIZE SWITCH (PL14.2.17 / PL15.2.17)
HARNESS ASSY PH (PL2.1.18 / PL2.4.14)
HARNESS ASSY SIZE FDR (PL14.2.21 / PL15.2.21)
FDR PWB (PL14.2.18 / PL15.2.18)
MCU PWB (PL11.1.3)
Check the installation of the Paper Cassette Reinstall the
1 Go to Step 2
Is the Paper Cassette installed properly? Paper Cassette
Check the paper size of the Paper Cassette
Set the correct
2 Is the paper size of the Paper Cassette set correctly Go to Step 3
paper size
according to the size of loaded paper?
Check the TRAY NO PAPER SENSOR operation
Enter the CE mode and execute the following menus to
Tray 1: Go to
check the TRAY NO PAPER SENSOR operation.
FIP2.4
IOT Diag / Digital Input / DI-3b (for Tray 1)
Go to Step 4
IOT Diag / Digital Input / DI-3c (for Tray 2)
Tray 2, 3 or 4: Go
IOT Diag / Digital Input / DI-3d (for Tray 3)
to FIP2.16
3 IOT Diag / Digital Input / DI-3e (for Tray 4)
Is the TRAY NO PAPER SENSOR operating normally?
Check the MSI NO PAPER SENSOR operation
Enter the CE mode and execute the following menus to Replace the
check the MSI NO PAPER SENSOR operation. MCU PWB Go to FIP2.5
IOT Diag / Digital Input / DI-3a (for MSI) (REP11.2)
Is the MSI NO PAPER SENSOR operating normally?
Check the WHEEL SIZE ASSY
Replace the Tray 1: Go to
Check the shape of the WHEEL SIZE ASSY's SIZE
WHEEL SIZE FIP2.3
3 SWITCH button that is pressed.
ASSY Tray 2, 3 or 4: Go
Is that section of the WHEEL SIZE ASSY deformed or
(REP2.22) to FIP2.15
damaged?

2-45
 Chapter 2 Troubleshooting
2.3 FIP

FIP1.37 ESS-related error

Procedure Check and Action Yes No

Parts considered to be the cause
ESS PWB (PL11.1.7)
Replace the ESS Upgrade the
Check the firmware version of the ESS PWB
1 PWB firmware of the
Is it the latest ESS PWB firmware version?
(REP11.6) ESS PWB

FIP1.38 ESS-related error (MPC)

Procedure Check and Action Yes No

Parts considered to be the cause
KIT PKG MPC (PL11.1.13)
ESS PWB (PL11.1.7)
Check the installation of the KIT PKG MPC Reinstall the KIT
1 Go to Step 2
Is the KIT PKG MPC installed properly? PKG MPC
Upgrade the
Check the firmware version of the ESS PWB
2 Go to Step 3 firmware of the
Is it the latest ESS PWB firmware version?
ESS PWB
Check after the replacement of KIT PKG MPC Replace the ESS
Procedure is
3 Replace the KIT PKG MPC. PWB
complete
Does an error occur? (REP11.6)

2-46
Chapter 2 Troubleshooting
2.3 FIP

FIP1.39 ESS-related error (HDD)

Procedure Check and Action Yes No

Parts considered to be the cause
KIT PKG HDD (PL11.1.12)
ESS PWB (PL11.1.7)
Check the installation of the KIT PKG HDD Reinstall the KIT
1 Go to Step 2
Is the KIT PKG HDD installed properly? PKG HDD
Upgrade the
Check the firmware version of the ESS PWB
2 Go to Step 3 firmware of the
Is it the latest ESS PWB firmware version?
ESS PWB
Check after the replacement of KIT PKG HDD Replace the ESS
Procedure is
3 Replace the KIT PKG HDD. PWB
complete
Does an error occur? (REP11.6)

2-47
 Chapter 2 Troubleshooting
2.3 FIP

2.3.2 Level 2 FIP

FIP2.1 REGI SENSOR (PL5.1.4)

Procedure Check and Action Yes No

Parts considered to be the cause
REGI SENSOR (PL5.1.4)
KIT BASE ASSY INTERLOCK (PL12.1.1)
Including the following two harnesses:
• HARNESS ASSY SNR REGI (PL12.1.6)
• HARNESS ASSY MAIN FRM (PL12.1.3)
MCU PWB (PL11.1.3)
Check the connection of the REGI SENSOR Connect
Check the connection between REGI SENSOR and P/J1211,
1 Go to Step 2
MCU PWB. P/J1210, and
Are P/J1211, P/J1210, and P/J12 connected securely? P/J12 securely
Check the conductivity of the HARNESS ASSY SNR Replace the KIT
REGI BASE ASSY
2 Go to Step 3
Is the wire between P/J1211 <=> P/J1210 conducting INTERLOCK
properly? (REP12.1)
Check the conductivity of the HARNESS ASSY MAIN Replace the KIT
FRM BASE ASSY
3 Go to Step 4
Is the wire between P/J1210 <=> P/J12 conducting INTERLOCK
properly? (REP12.1)
Check the voltage supply to the REGI SENSOR
Measure the voltage between MCU PWB GND <=>
4 Go to Step 5 Go to FIP2.20
P/J12-1 Pin.
Is there a voltage (approx. +3.3VDC) output?
Check the REGI SENSOR operation
Measure the voltage between MCU PWB GND <=> Replace the Replace the
5 P/J12-3 Pin. MCU PWB REGI SENSOR
Does the voltage change when the REGI Sensor is (REP11.2) (REP5.2)
blocked/exposed to light by using paper, etc.?

2-48
Chapter 2 Troubleshooting
2.3 FIP

FIP2.2 Fuser Exit Sensor [FUSER ASSY] (PL8.1.11)

Procedure Check and Action Yes No

Parts considered to be the cause
Fuser Exit Sensor [FUSER ASSY] (PL8.1.11)
HARNESS ASSY FSR (PL8.1.10)
KIT BASE ASSY INTERLOCK (PL12.1.1)
Including the following harness
• HARNESS ASSY MAIN FRM (PL12.1.3)
MCU PWB (PL11.1.3)
Check the connection of the Fuser Exit Sensor Connect
Check the connection between Fuser Exit Sensor and P/J4410,
1 Go to Step 2
MCU PWB. P/J1240, and
Are P/J4410, P/J1240, and P/J12 connected securely? P/J12 securely
Check the conductivity of the HARNESS ASSY FSR Replace the
2 Is the wire between P/J4410 <=> P/J1240 conducting Go to Step 3 HARNESS
properly? ASSY FSR
Check the conductivity of the HARNESS ASSY MAIN Replace the KIT
FRM BASE ASSY
3 Go to Step 4
Is the wire between P/J1240 <=> P/J12 conducting INTERLOCK
properly? (REP12.1)
Check the voltage supply to the Fuser Exit Sensor
Measure the voltage between MCU PWB GND <=>
4 Go to Step 5 Go to FIP2.20
P/J12-13 Pin.
Is there a voltage (approx. +3.3VDC) output?
Check the Fuser Exit Sensor operation
Measure the voltage between MCU PWB GND <=> Replace the Replace the
5 P/J12-11 Pin. MCU PWB FUSER ASSY
Does the voltage change when the Fuser Exit Sensor is (REP11.2) (REP8.1)
blocked/exposed to light by using paper, etc.?

2-49
 Chapter 2 Troubleshooting
2.3 FIP

FIP2.3 SIZE SWITCH (PL2.1.13 / PL2.3.8) (Tray 1)

Procedure Check and Action Yes No

Parts considered to be the cause
WHEEL SIZE ASSY (PL2.2.28 / PL2.5.36)
SIZE SWITCH (PL2.1.13 / PL2.3.8)
HARNESS ASSY PH (PL2.1.18 / PL2.4.14)
MCU PWB (PL11.1.3)
Check the SIZE SWITCH
Replace the SIZE
Check the shape of the SIZE SWITCH button.
1 SWITCH Go to Step 2
Is that section of the SIZE SWITCH deformed or
(REP2.8)
damaged?
Check the connection of the HARNESS ASSY PH
Connect
Check the connection between HARNESS ASSY PH
2 Go to Step 3 P/J1110 and
and MCU PWB.
P/J11 securely
Are P/J1110 and P/J11 connected securely?
Check the conductivity of the HARNESS ASSY PH Replace the
3 Is the wire between P/J1110 <=> P/J11 conducting Go to Step 4 HARNESS
properly? ASSY PH
Check the voltage supply to the SIZE SWITCH
With the SIZE SWITCH removed, measure the following
voltages.
4 Between MCU PWB GND <=> P/J11-1 Go to Step 5 Go to FIP2.20
Between MCU PWB GND <=> P/J11-2
Between MCU PWB GND <=> P/J11-4
Is there a voltage (approx. +3.3VDC) output?
Check the SIZE SWITCH operation
With the SIZE SWITCH installed, measure the following
voltages.
Replace the Replace the
Between MCU PWB GND <=> P/J11-1
5 MCU PWB SIZE SWITCH
Between MCU PWB GND <=> P/J11-2
(REP11.2) (REP2.8)
Between MCU PWB GND <=> P/J11-4
Does the voltage change when each of the SIZE
SWITCH is turned ON/OFF?

2-50
Chapter 2 Troubleshooting
2.3 FIP

FIP2.4 TRAY NO PAPER SENSOR (PL2.1.3 / PL2.4.11) (Tray 1)

Procedure Check and Action Yes No

Parts considered to be the cause
TRAY NO PAPER SENSOR (PL2.1.3 / PL2.4.11)
HARNESS ASSY PH (PL2.1.18 / PL2.4.14)
MCU PWB (PL11.1.3)
Check the connection of the TRAY NO PAPER
SENSOR Connect
1 Check the connection between TRAY NO PAPER Go to Step 2 P/J1130 and
SENSOR and MCU PWB. P/J11 securely
Are P/J1130 and P/J11 connected securely?
Check the conductivity of the HARNESS ASSY PH Replace the
2 Is the wire between P/J1130 <=> P/J11 conducting Go to Step 3 HARNESS
properly? ASSY PH
Check the voltage supply to the TRAY NO PAPER
SENSOR
3 Measure the voltage between MCU PWB GND <=> Go to Step 5 Go to FIP2.20
P/J11-11 Pin.
Is there a voltage (approx. +3.3VDC) output?
Check the TRAY NO PAPER SENSOR operation
Replace the
Measure the voltage between MCU PWB GND <=>
Replace the TRAY NO
P/J11-13 Pin.
4 MCU PWB PAPER
Does the voltage change when the TRAY NO PAPER
(REP11.2) SENSOR
SENSOR is blocked/exposed to light by using paper,
(REP2.4)
etc.?

2-51
 Chapter 2 Troubleshooting
2.3 FIP

FIP2.5 MSI NO PAPER SENSOR (PL3.1.11)

Procedure Check and Action Yes No

Parts considered to be the cause
MSI NO PAPER SENSOR (PL3.1.11)
Harness MSI [CHUTE ASSY DUP] (PL3.1.7)
Harness Assy Front [KIT FRAME FRONT] (PL4.1.1)
MCU PWB (PL11.1.3)
Check the connection of the MSI NO PAPER SENSOR Connect
Check the connection between MSI NO PAPER P/J2311,
1 Go to Step 2
SENSOR and MCU PWB. P/J2310, and
Are P/J2311, P/J2310, and P/J23 connected securely? P/J23 securely
Replace the
Check the conductivity of the Harness MSI
CHUTE ASSY
2 Is the wire between P/J2311 <=> P/J2310 conducting Go to Step 3
DUP
properly?
(REP3.4)
Check the conductivity of the Harness Assy Front Replace the KIT
3 Is the wire between P/J2310 <=> P/J23 conducting Go to Step 4 FRAME FRONT
properly? (REP4.1)
Check the voltage supply to the MSI NO PAPER
SENSOR
4 Measure the voltage between MCU PWB GND <=> Go to Step 5 Go to FIP2.20
P/J23-1 Pin.
Is there a voltage (approx. +3.3VDC) output?
Check the MSI NO PAPER SENSOR operation
Measure the voltage between MCU PWB GND <=> Replace the MSI
Replace the
P/J23-3 Pin. NO PAPER
5 MCU PWB
Does the voltage change when the MSI NO PAPER SENSOR
(REP11.2)
SENSOR is blocked/exposed to light by using paper, (REP3.6)
etc.?

2-52
Chapter 2 Troubleshooting
2.3 FIP

FIP2.6 REGI CLUTCH (PL5.1.2)

Procedure Check and Action Yes No

Parts considered to be the cause
REGI CLUTCH (PL5.1.2)
KIT BASE ASSY INTERLOCK (PL12.1.1)
Including the following harness
• HARNESS ASSY MAIN FRM (PL12.1.3)
MCU PWB (PL11.1.3)
Check the connection of the REGI CLUTCH
Connect
Check the connection between REGI CLUTCH and
1 Go to Step 2 P/J1230 and
MCU PWB.
P/J12 securely
Are P/J1230 and P/J12 connected securely?
Check the conductivity of the HARNESS ASSY MAIN Replace the KIT
FRM BASE ASSY
2 Go to Step 3
Is the wire between P/J1230 <=> P/J12 conducting INTERLOCK
properly? (REP12.1)
Check the resistance of the REGI CLUTCH
Replace the
Disconnect P/J1230 and measure the wiring resistance
3 Go to Step 4 REGI CLUTCH
between the two REGI CLUTCH Pins.
(REP5.1)
Is the wiring resistance 115 Ohm ± 10% (at 20°C)?
Check the voltage supply to the REGI CLUTCH
Measure the voltage between MCU PWB GND <=>
Replace the
P/J12-8 Pin.
4 REGI CLUTCH Go to FIP2.20
Close the Interlock Switch (HARNESS ASSY
(REP5.1)
INTERLOCK) before checking.
Is there a voltage (approx. +24VDC) output?

2-53
 Chapter 2 Troubleshooting
2.3 FIP

FIP2.7 TURN CLUTCH (PL2.4.3)

Procedure Check and Action Yes No

Parts considered to be the cause
TURN CLUTCH (PL2.4.3)
HARNESS ASSY CLUTCH (PL2.4.15)
MCU PWB (PL11.1.3)
Check the connection of the TURN CLUTCH
Connect
Check the connection between TURN CLUTCH and
1 Go to Step 2 P/J2710 and
MCU PWB.
P/J27 securely
Are P/J2710 and P/J27 connected securely?
Check the conductivity of the HARNESS ASSY
Replace the
CLUTCH
2 Go to Step 3 HARNESS
Is the wire between P/J2710 <=> P/J27 conducting
ASSY CLUTCH
properly?
Check the resistance of the TURN CLUTCH
Replace the
Disconnect P/J2710 and measure the wiring resistance
3 Go to Step 4 TURN CLUTCH
between the two TURN CLUTCH Pins.
(REP2.11)
Is the wiring resistance 144 Ohm ± 10% (at 20°C)?
Check the voltage supply to the TURN CLUTCH
Measure the voltage between MCU PWB GND <=>
Replace the
P/J27-1 Pin.
4 TURN CLUTCH Go to FIP2.20
Close the Interlock Switch (HARNESS ASSY
(REP2.11)
INTERLOCK) before checking.
Is there a voltage (approx. +24VDC) output?

2-54
Chapter 2 Troubleshooting
2.3 FIP

FIP2.8 FEED CLUTCH (PL2.4.4)

Procedure Check and Action Yes No

Parts considered to be the cause
FEED CLUTCH (PL2.4.4)
HARNESS ASSY CLUTCH (PL2.4.15)
MCU PWB (PL11.1.3)
Check the connection of the FEED CLUTCH
Connect P/J2720
Check the connection between FEED CLUTCH and
1 Go to Step 2 and P/J27
MCU PWB.
securely
Are P/J2720 and P/J27 connected securely?
Check the conductivity of the HARNESS ASSY
Replace the
CLUTCH
2 Go to Step 3 HARNESS
Is the wire between P/J2720 <=> P/J27 conducting
ASSY CLUTCH
properly?
Check the resistance of the FEED CLUTCH
Replace the
Disconnect P/J2720 and measure the wiring resistance
3 Go to Step 4 FEED CLUTCH
between the two FEED CLUTCH Pins.
(REP2.12)
Is the wiring resistance 144 Ohm ± 10% (at 20°C)?
Check the voltage supply to the FEED CLUTCH
Measure the voltage between MCU PWB GND <=>
Replace the
P/J27-3 Pin.
4 FEED CLUTCH Go to FIP2.20
Close the Interlock Switch (HARNESS ASSY
(REP2.12)
INTERLOCK) before checking.
Is there a voltage (approx. +24VDC) output?

2-55
 Chapter 2 Troubleshooting
2.3 FIP

FIP2.9 MSI FEED SOLENOID (PL3.1.1)

Procedure Check and Action Yes No

Parts considered to be the cause
MSI FEED SOLENOID (PL3.1.1)
Harness Assy Front [KIT FRAME FRONT] (PL4.1.1)
MCU PWB (PL11.1.3)
Check the connection of the MSI FEED SOLENOID
Connect
Check the connection between MSI FEED SOLENOID
1 Go to Step 2 P/J2320 and
and MCU PWB.
P/J23 securely
Are P/J2320 and P/J23 connected securely?
Check the conductivity of the Harness Assy Front Replace the KIT
2 Is the wire between P/J2320 <=> P/J23 conducting Go to Step 3 FRAME FRONT
properly? (REP4.1)
Check the resistance of the MSI FEED SOLENOID Replace the MSI
Disconnect P/J2320 and measure the wiring resistance FEED
3 Go to Step 4
between the two MSI FEED SOLENOID Pins. SOLENOID
Is the wiring resistance 96 Ohm ± 10% (at 20°C)? (REP3.1)
Check the voltage supply to the MSI FEED SOLENOID
Measure the voltage between MCU PWB GND <=> Replace the MSI
P/J23-5 Pin. FEED
4 Go to FIP2.20
Close the Interlock Switch (HARNESS ASSY SOLENOID
INTERLOCK) before checking. (REP3.1)
Is there a voltage (approx. +24VDC) output?

2-56
Chapter 2 Troubleshooting
2.3 FIP

FIP2.10 MAIN MOTOR (PL9.1.3)

Procedure Check and Action Yes No

Parts considered to be the cause
MAIN MOTOR (PL9.1.3)
HARNESS ASSY MOTOR (PL9.1.4)
MCU PWB (PL11.1.3)
Check the connection of the MAIN MOTOR
Connect P/J220
Check the connection between MAIN MOTOR and MCU
1 Go to Step 2 and P/J22
PWB.
securely
Are P/J220 and P/J22 connected securely?
Check the conductivity of the HARNESS ASSY MOTOR Replace the
2 Is the wire between P/J220 <=> P/J22 conducting Go to Step 3 HARNESS
properly? ASSY MOTOR
Check the voltage supply to the MAIN MOTOR
Measure the voltage between MCU PWB GND <=>
P/J22-1 Pin.
Is there a voltage (approx. +24VDC) output? Replace the
3 Measure the voltage between MCU PWB GND <=> MAIN Motor Go to FIP2.20
P/J22-3 Pin. (REP9.3)
Is there a voltage (approx. +5VDC) output?
Close the Interlock Switch (HARNESS ASSY
INTERLOCK) before checking.

2-57
 Chapter 2 Troubleshooting
2.3 FIP

FIP2.11 Pick Motor [BRACKET ASSY FDR 250/550] (PL2.1.11 / PL2.3.3)

Procedure Check and Action Yes No

Parts considered to be the cause
Pick Motor [BRACKET ASSY FDR 250] (PL2.1.11)
Pick Motor [BRACKET ASSY FDR 550] (PL2.3.3)
HARNESS ASSY PH (PL2.1.18 / PL2.4.14)
MCU PWB (PL11.1.3)
Check the connection of the Pick Motor
Connect
Check the connection between Pick Motor and MCU
1 Go to Step 2 P/J1120 and
PWB.
P/J11 securely
Are P/J1120 and P/J11 connected securely?
Check the conductivity of the Pick Motor Replace the
2 Is the wire between P/J1120 <=> P/J11 conducting Go to Step 3 HARNESS
properly? ASSY MOTOR
Check the voltage supply to the Pick Motor
Measure the voltages between MCU PWB GND <=> Replace the
P/J11-6 Pin and P/J11-9 Pin. BRACKET ASSY
3 Go to FIP2.20
Close the Interlock Switch (HARNESS ASSY FDR
INTERLOCK) before checking. (REP2.7)
Is there a voltage (approx. +24VDC) output?

FIP2.12 Exit Motor [EXIT DRIVE ASSY] (PL13.1.2)

Procedure Check and Action Yes No

Parts considered to be the cause
Exit Motor [EXIT DRIVE ASSY] (PL13.1.2)
Harness Exit [BRACKET ASSY EXIT] (PL9.1.1)
MCU PWB (PL11.1.3)
Check the connection of the EXIT DRIVE ASSY
Connect
Check the connection between EXIT DRIVE ASSY and
1 Go to Step 2 P/J2671 and
MCU PWB.
P/J26 securely
Are P/J2671 and P/J26 connected securely?
Replace the
Check the conductivity of the Harness Exit
BRACKET
2 Is the wire between P/J2671 <=> P/J26 conducting Go to Step 3
ASSY EXIT
properly?
(REP9.1)
Check after the replacement of EXIT DRIVE ASSY Replace the
Procedure is
3 Replace the EXIT DRIVE ASSY. (REP13.2) MCU PWB
complete
Does an error occur? (REP11.2)

2-58
Chapter 2 Troubleshooting
2.3 FIP

FIP2.13 Dup Jam Sensor (PL13.2.7)

Proced
Check and Action Yes No
ure
Parts considered to be the cause
Dup Jam Sensor (PL13.2.7)
HARNESS ASSY SNR DUP (PL13.2.26)
DUP PWB (PL13.2.21)
DUPLEX ASSY (PL13.1.1)
Check the connection of the Dup Jam Sensor
Connect P/J740D
Check the connection between Dup Jam Sensor and
1 Go to Step 2 and P/J74D
DUP PWB.
securely
Are P/J740D and P/J74D connected securely?
Check the conductivity of the HARNESS ASSY SNR
Replace the
DUP
2 Go to Step 3 HARNESS ASSY
Is the wire between P/J740D <=> P/J74D conducting
SNR DUP
properly?
Check after the replacement of Dup Jam Sensor Replace the DUP
Procedure is
3 Replace the Dup Jam Sensor. (REP13.5) PWB
complete
Does an error occur? (REP13.11)

FIP2.14 DUP MOTOR (PL13.2.13)

Procedure Check and Action Yes No

Parts considered to be the cause
DUP MOTOR (PL13.2.13)
DUP PWB (PL13.2.21)
DUPLEX ASSY (PL13.1.1)
Check the connection of the DUP MOTOR
Check the connection between DUP MOTOR and DUP Connect P/J72D
1 Go to Step 2
PWB. securely
Is P/J72D connected securely?
Check after the replacement of DUP MOTOR Replace the DUP
Procedure is
2 Replace the DUP MOTOR. (REP13.7) PWB
complete
Does an error occur? (REP13.11)

2-59
 Chapter 2 Troubleshooting
2.3 FIP

FIP2.15 SIZE SWITCH (PL14.2.17 / PL15.2.17) (Tray 2/3/4)

Check the tray where the problem has occurred.

Procedure Check and Action Yes No

Parts considered to be the cause
WHEEL SIZE ASSY (PL2.2.28 / PL2.5.36)
SIZE SWITCH (PL14.2.17 / PL15.2.17)
HARNESS ASSY SIZE FDR (PL14.2.21 / PL15.2.21)
FDR PWB (PL14.2.18 / PL15.2.18)
MCU PWB (PL11.1.3)
Check the SIZE SWITCH
Replace the SIZE
Check the shape of the SIZE SWITCH button.
1 SWITCH Go to Step 2
Is that section of the SIZE SWITCH deformed or
(REP14.14)
damaged?
Check the connection of the HARNESS ASSY SIZE
FDR Connect P/J820
2 Check the connection between HARNESS ASSY SIZE Go to Step 3 and P/J82
FDR and FDR PWB. securely
Are P/J820 and P/J82 connected securely?
Check the conductivity of the HARNESS ASSY SIZE
Replace the
FDR
3 Go to Step 4 HARNESS
Is the wire between P/J820 <=> P/J82 conducting
ASSY SIZE FDR
properly?
Check the voltage supply to the SIZE SWITCH
With the SIZE SWITCH removed, measure the following
voltages. Replace the
4 Between FDR PWB GND <=> P/J82-1 Go to Step 5 FDR PWB
Between FDR PWB GND <=> P/J82-2 (REP14.15)
Between FDR PWB GND <=> P/J82-4
Is there a voltage (approx. +3.3VDC) output?
Check the SIZE SWITCH operation
With the SIZE SWITCH installed, measure the following
voltages.
Replace the FDR Replace the
Between FDR PWB GND <=> P/J11-1
5 PWB SIZE SWITCH
Between FDR PWB GND <=> P/J11-2
(REP14.15) (REP14.14)
Between FDR PWB GND <=> P/J11-4
Does the voltage change when each of the SIZE
SWITCH is turned ON/OFF?

2-60
Chapter 2 Troubleshooting
2.3 FIP

FIP2.16 TRAY NO PAPER SENSOR (PL14.3.11 / PL15.3.11) (Tray 2/3/4)

Check the tray where the problem has occurred.

Procedure Check and Action Yes No

Parts considered to be the cause
TRAY NO PAPER SENSOR (PL14.3.11 / PL15.3.11)
HARNESS ASSY NO PAPER FDR (PL14.3.13 /
PL15.3.13)
FDR PWB (PL14.2.18 / PL15.2.18)
Check the connection of the TRAY NO PAPER
SENSOR Connect P/J850
1 Check the connection between TRAY NO PAPER Go to Step 2 and P/J85
SENSOR and FDR PWB. securely
Are P/J850 and P/J85 connected securely?
Check the conductivity of the HARNESS ASSY NO Replace the
PAPER FDR HARNESS
2 Go to Step 3
Is the wire between P/J850 <=> P/J85 conducting ASSY NO
properly? PAPER FDR
Check the voltage supply to the TRAY NO PAPER
SENSOR Replace the FDR
3 Measure the voltage between FDR PWB GND <=> Go to Step 4 PWB
P/J85-1 Pin. (REP14.15)
Is there a voltage (approx. +3.3VDC) output?
Check the TRAY NO PAPER SENSOR operation
Replace the
Measure the voltage between FDR PWB GND <=>
Replace the FDR TRAY NO
P/J85-3 Pin.
4 PWB PAPER
Does the voltage change when the TRAY NO PAPER
(REP14.15) SENSOR
SENSOR is blocked/exposed to light by using paper,
(REP14.20)
etc.?

2-61
 Chapter 2 Troubleshooting
2.3 FIP

FIP2.17 TURN CLUTCH (PL14.3.3 / PL15.3.3) (Tray 2/3/4)

Check the tray where the problem has occurred.

Procedure Check and Action Yes No

Parts considered to be the cause
TURN CLUTCH (PL14.3.3 / PL15.3.3)
HARNESS ASSY PH FDR (PL14.2.23 / PL15.2.23)
FDR PWB (PL14.2.18 / PL15.2.18)
Check the connection of the TURN CLUTCH
Connect
Check the connection between TURN CLUTCH and
1 Go to Step 2 P/J8330 and
FDR PWB.
P/J83 securely
Are P/J8330 and P/J83 connected securely?
Check the conductivity of the HARNESS ASSY PH FDR Replace the
2 Is the wire between P/J8330 <=> P/J83 conducting Go to Step 3 HARNESS
properly? ASSY PH FDR
Check the resistance of the TURN CLUTCH
Replace the
Disconnect P/J8330 and measure the wiring resistance
3 Go to Step 4 TURN CLUTCH
between the two TURN CLUTCH Pins.
(REP14.16)
Is the wiring resistance 144 Ohm ± 10% (at 20°C)?
Check the voltage supply to the TURN CLUTCH
Measure the voltage between FDR PWB GND <=>
Replace the Replace the
P/J83-9 Pin.
4 TURN CLUTCH FDR PWB
Close the Interlock Switch (HARNESS ASSY
(REP14.16) (REP14.15)
INTERLOCK) before checking.
Is there a voltage (approx. +24VDC) output?

2-62
Chapter 2 Troubleshooting
2.3 FIP

FIP2.18 FEED CLUTCH (PL14.3.4 / PL15.3.4) (Tray 2/3/4)

Check the tray where the problem has occurred.

Procedure Check and Action Yes No

Parts considered to be the cause
FEED CLUTCH (PL14.3.4 / PL15.3.4)
HARNESS ASSY PH FDR (PL14.2.23 / PL15.2.23)
FDR PWB (PL14.2.18 / PL15.2.18)
Check the connection of the FEED CLUTCH
Connect
Check the connection between FEED CLUTCH and
1 Go to Step 2 P/J8320 and
FDR PWB.
P/J83 securely
Are P/J8320 and P/J83 connected securely?
Check the conductivity of the HARNESS ASSY PH FDR Replace the
2 Is the wire between P/J8320 <=> P/J83 conducting Go to Step 3 HARNESS
properly? ASSY PH FDR
Check the resistance of the FEED CLUTCH
Replace the
Disconnect P/J8320 and measure the wiring resistance
3 Go to Step 4 FEED CLUTCH
between the two FEED CLUTCH Pins.
(REP14.17)
Is the wiring resistance 144 Ohm ± 10% (at 20°C)?
Check the voltage supply to the FEED CLUTCH
Measure the voltage between FDR PWB GND <=>
Replace the Replace the FDR
P/J83-7 Pin.
4 FEED CLUTCH PWB
Close the Interlock Switch (HARNESS ASSY
(REP14.17) (REP14.15)
INTERLOCK) before checking.
Is there a voltage (approx. +24VDC) output?

2-63
 Chapter 2 Troubleshooting
2.3 FIP

FIP2.19 Feed Motor [DRIVE ASSY OPTION] (PL14.2.6 / PL15.2.6 )

(Tray 2/3/4)

Check the tray where the problem has occurred.

Procedure Check and Action Yes No

Parts considered to be the cause
Feed Motor [DRIVE ASSY OPTION] (PL14.2.6 /
PL15.2.6 )
HARNESS ASSY PH FDR (PL14.2.23 / PL15.2.23)
FDR PWB (PL14.2.18 / PL15.2.18)
Check the connection of the Feed Motor
Connect P/J8310
Check the connection between Feed Motor and FDR
1 Go to Step 2 and P/J83
PWB.
securely
Are P/J8310 and P/J83 connected securely?
Check the conductivity of the HARNESS ASSY PH FDR Replace the
2 Is the wire between P/J8310 <=> P/J83 conducting Go to Step 3 HARNESS
properly? ASSY PH FDR
Check the voltage supply to the Feed Motor
Measure the voltage between FDR PWB GND <=> Replace the
Replace the FDR
P/J83-5 Pin. DRIVE ASSY
3 PWB
Close the Interlock Switch (HARNESS ASSY OPTION
(REP14.15)
INTERLOCK) before checking. (REP14.9)
Is there a voltage (approx. +24VDC) output?

2-64
Chapter 2 Troubleshooting
2.3 FIP

FIP2.20 Unstable DC voltage Supply to the MCU PWB

Procedure Check and Action Yes No

Parts considered to be the cause
HARNESS ASSY PS (PL11.1.9)
LVPS (PL11.1.6)
MCU PWB (PL11.1.3)
Connect P/J21,
Check the connection between LVPS and the MCU
P/J33, P/J20,
PWB
1 Go to Step 2 and P/J34
Are P/J21, P/J33, P/J20, and P/J34 connected
securely
securely?

Check the conductivity of the HARNESS ASSY PS Replace the

2 Is the wire between P/J21 <=> P/J33, as well as Go to Step 3 HARNESS
between P/J20 <=> P/J34 conducting properly? ASSY PS
Check the voltage output from the LVPS
Measure the voltage between LVPS GND <=> P/J33-7
Pin.
Is there a voltage (approx. +5VDC) output?

Measure the voltage between LVPS GND <=> P/J33-5

Pin.
Replace the Replace the
Is there a voltage (approx. +3.3VDC) output?
3 MCU PWB LVPS.
(REP11.2) (REP11.5)
Measure the voltage of the following:
between LVPS GND <=> P/J34-1 Pin,
between LVPS GND <=> P/J34-2 Pin, and
between LVPS GND <=> P/J34-3 Pin.
Close the Interlock Switch (HARNESS ASSY
INTERLOCK) before checking.
Is there a voltage (approx. +24VDC) output?

2-65
 Chapter 2 Troubleshooting
2.4 CE Mode

2.4 CE Mode
This mode is used by the service engineers to solve problems in the field and is intended to identify the fault
areas in units of replaceable components. The ESS diagnosis, test print, and parameter settings, etc. can be
performed from the operation panel.

HMR04001FA IBG

Display: Displays the menus and their results.

[ ], [ ]:
Menu selection/parameter settings data selection
[ ], [ ]:
Moves the cursor left or right
[Eject/Set]:
Confirms a Diag. menu/Executes a Diag./Confirms the parameter value for parameter setting
Moves one level lower in the menu structure
[Cancel Job]:
Cancels a Diag. menu (return one level higher in the menu structure)
Terminates every item of the IOT Diag Digital Output Test
[Menu]:
Moves one level higher in the menu structure when IOT Diag Digital Input Test/Digital Output Test
is performed

2-66
Chapter 2 Troubleshooting
2.4 CE Mode

2.4.1 How to Enter the CE Mode

1 Start the CE Mode

Press and hold down both the [ ] button and the [ ] button, and turn ON the power.

ＣＥ Ｍｏｄｅ
 Ｐａｓｓｗｏｒｄ

2 Enter the password

Press the [ ] button twice and then press the [Eject/Set] button.

ＣＥ Ｍｏｄｅ
   ＥＳＳ Ｄｉａｇ

2.4.2 Overview of Operation Procedures in CE Mode

1 Selecting a Diag Item

Select the Diag item using the [ ] and [ ] buttons.

2 Confirming a Diag Item

Press the [Eject/Set] button to confirm the selected Diag item.

3 Running the Diag item

Follow the message and press the [Eject/Set] button until the Diag item runs.
If the Diag requires a change in parameter value, use the [ ] and [ ] buttons to select and
change the parameter value, and press the [Eject/Set] button.

4 Stopping a Diag
To stop a Diag when it is running, press the [Cancel Job] button.

To run another Diag item, press the [Cancel Job] button to return to the level that contains the Diag item you
want to run.

When an error has occurred in the middle of a Diag/Setting, the error is displayed and the Diag/Setting stops,
while the items that have not been executed are left untouched.
Press the [Cancel Job] or [Eject/Set] button to cancel the error and display the menu items.

2-67
 Chapter 2 Troubleshooting
2.4 CE Mode

2.4.3 How to Exit from the CE Mode

1 Return to the top level of the CE mode, press the [ ] and [ ] buttons to display "Exit Mode",
then press the [Eject/Set] button.

ＣＥ Ｍｏｄｅ Ｅｘｉｔ Ｍｏｄｅ
   Ｅｘｉｔ Ｍｏｄｅ  Ｃｏｍｐｌｅｔｅ Ｅｘｉｔ

2 Press the [Eject/Set] button.

Ｃｏｍｐｌｅｔｅ Ｅｘｉｔ
    Ｅｘｉｔ？

3 Press the [Eject/Set] button to exit from the CE mode.

2-68
Chapter 2 Troubleshooting
2.4 CE Mode

2.4.4 Menu Tree

The menu tree of the CE mode is as shown below.

CAUTION
Do not access the menu items highlighted in red. These items are used to change the machine-
specific settings. Improper operation may cause the settings to be deleted or cause fatal errors.
Operate these items only when there are instructions from the technical support department.

CAUTION
All TEST patterns for CE (3 types) that is output during Test Print are printed in A3 size.
They should be printed using A3 paper loaded in Tray 1.
If any other paper size is loaded, the test patterns are not printed, while the control panel continues
to display [Processing...].
When this happens, replace the paper with A3 paper, turn the power OFF then ON, and then instruct
to print again in the CE mode.

CAUTION
When printing the following reports, load A4 (LEF) paper in Tray 1.
If any other paper size is loaded, the reports are not printed, while the control panel continues to
display [Processing...].
When that happens, replace the paper with A4 paper, turn the power OFF then ON, and then instruct
to print again in the CE mode.
• IOT Diag/NVM Settings/Print NVM Info
• Print Info/Config Page
• Print Info/Print Settings
• Parameter/Print

2-69
 Chapter 2 Troubleshooting
2.4 CE Mode

ESS Diag All Test

CodeROM Test
FontROM Test
EEPROM Test
DRAM Test
MAC+PHY Test
ASIC Test
PANEL Test
IOT Test
HD Test＊

IOT Diag Digital Input

Digital Output
NVM Setting Edit NVM
Save NVM
Load NVM
Print NVM Info

Print Info Config Page

Print Settings

Exit Mode Complete Exit

Installation Serial No.

IOT Calibration
Display Counter Dip Switch 0
HexDump Dip Switch 1
Pixel Counter Dip Switch 2
Configuration Dip Switch 3
Counter Type
Print Counter B/W Print
CopyCounter MtoB B/W Backup
CopyCounter BtoM B/W Error
Clear All NVM
Clear JobHistory
Clear AuditronPV
Erase Hard Disk＊1

HMR04002AA

*1 Not displayed when the HD option is not installed.

2-70
Chapter 2 Troubleshooting
2.4 CE Mode

Test Print Pattern IOT

Black20% ESS
Gradation ESS

PaperFeed Bypass
PaperFeed Tray1
PaperFeed Tray2
PaperFeed Tray3
PaperFeed Tray4
Parameter REG Process PaperFeed Duplex
REG Scan
REG ProcessThick Scan Bypass
Life Counter Scan Tray1
Print Scan Tray2
Scan Tray3
Scan Tray4
Scan Duplex

Fuser / Trans
Tray 1 Roll
Tray 2 Roll
Tray 3 Roll
Tray 4 Roll
Bypass Tray Roll
ROS/Regist/Drive
Tray 1 Chute
Tray 2 Chute
Tray 3 Chute
Tray 4 Chute

HMR04003AA

2-71
 Chapter 2 Troubleshooting
2.4 CE Mode
The following shows the Diag/Setting Items that can be executed in the CE mode.

Table 2-7 Process Overview

Function Contents Details

Calculates the CodeROM checksum and compares it
CodeROM Test
with the stored value.
Calculates the FontROM checksum and compares it
FontROM Test
with the stored value.
EEPROM Test Writes/reads/verifies the EEPROM Diag area.
OPEN/SHORT test of DRAM address line.
DRAM Test
Writes/reads/verifies the whole DRAM area.
MAC+PHY Test 1 PHY Internal Loopback Test
Section
ESS Diag ASIC Test Performs a register check test. 2.4.5
Tests the LED, LCD, and buttons on the Control
PANEL Test
Panel.
IOT Test Performs a communication test for the IOT.
Performs the Hard Disk test. To be performed only
HD Test
when the HD option is installed.
Performs the ESS Diag except for the following. (HD
All Test Diag is only performed when HD is installed).
• CENTRONICS/MAC+PHY/PANEL Test
Section
Digital Input Digital Input Component Test
2.4.6.1
Section
Digital Output Digital Output Component Test
2.4.6.2

IOT Diag NVM Settings Edit NVM Edits NVM values.

NVM Settings Save NVM Saves the IOT NVM data in the ESS.
Section
Loads all the NVM data that is saved in the ESS into 2.4.6.3
NVM Settings Load NVM
the IOT.
NVM Settings Print NVM Info Outputs the IOT NVM data on A4 paper.
Config Page Outputs the printer configuration data on A4 paper. -
Print Data
Print Settings Outputs the printer setting data on A4 paper. -
Section
Exit Mode Complete Exit Exit from the Diag mode and reboot.
2.4.3

2-72
Chapter 2 Troubleshooting
2.4 CE Mode
Table 2-7 Process Overview

Function Contents Details

Serial No. Displays/sets serial numbers
IOT Calibration Sets the IOT Calibration mode to ON/OFF
Display Counter Sets the Billing counter display to ON/OFF
HexDump Sets the HexDump mode to ON/OFF
Displays the number of pixels for Black as the
Pixel Counter
percentage (coverage) within the A4 paper.
Performs the operations for the Dip switch on the
Configuration
ESS NVM.
Section
Installation Counter Type Sets a counter type (Types 1 to 4)
2.4.7
Print Counter Performs operations for the Billing counter.
CopyCounter MtoB Copies data from Master NVM to the Backup NVM.
CopyCounter BtoM Copies data from Backup NVM to the Master NVM.
Clear All NVM Clears all ESS NVM including billing.
Clear JobHistory Deletes the Job History data
Clear AuditronPV Initializes the Auditron/PV Settings
Deletes data in the HD. To be performed only when
Erase Hard Disk
the HD option is installed.
Outputs the test patterns (Grid) stored in the IOT on
IOT Pattern
A3 paper.
Test Outputs the solid fill pattern using 20% of Black on Section
Black20% [ESS]
Print A3 paper. 2.4.8
Outputs the gradation pattern using 0% to 100% of
Gradation [ESS]
Black on A3 paper.
Performs Regi Adjustment in the paper feed direction
REG Process
for each Tray 1, 2, 3, 4, Duplex, and Bypass (MSI).
Performs Regi Adjustment in the scan direction for
REG Scan
each Tray 1, 2, 3, 4, Duplex, and Bypass (MSI).
Section
Parameter Reads and initializes the life counters of Trays1/2/3/ 2.4.9
Life Counter 4, Bypass (MSI) Roll, Fuser, Trans (BTR), ROS,
Regi, Drive, and Trays1/2/3/4 CHUTE.
Outputs the parameter and error count values stored
Print
in the IOT on A4 paper.

2-73
 Chapter 2 Troubleshooting
2.4 CE Mode

2.4.5 ESS Diagnostics Details (ESS Diag)

This section describes the details of each ESS Diag.

Table 2-8 CodeROM Test

Display after Diag

Contents During
normal When an error occurs
operation
Calculates the checksum of each ROM.
CodeROM #* ERROR
Compares the value with the correct
S=xxxx V=yyyy
checksum for each chip that has been stored CHECK OK
(xxxx: calculated value, yyyy: ROM stored
and determines that the chip is normal when
value *: 0, 1)
the values match.

Table 2-9 FontROM Test

Display after Diag

Contents During
normal When an error occurs
operation
Calculates the checksum of each Font ROM.
FontROM ERROR
Compares the value with the correct
S=xxxx V=yyyy
checksum for each chip that has been stored CHECK OK
(xxxx: calculated value, yyyy: ROM stored
and determines that the chip is normal when
value)
the values match.

Table 2-10 EEPROM Test

Display after Diag

Contents During
normal When an error occurs
operation
Reads/writes/verifies the test patterns (0xff,
0xaa, 0x55, 0x00) for one byte of each 0x400 CHECK OK EEPROM ID* ERROR (*:1,2)
starting from the EEPROM first byte.

Table 2-11 DRAM Test

Display after Diag

Contents During
normal When an error occurs
operation
Reads/writes/verifies the test patterns
(0xffffffff, 0xaaaaaaaa, 0x55555555,
CHECK OK DRAM slot* ERROR (*:0,1)
0x0000000) for the whole tested area in the
unit of words.

2-74
Chapter 2 Troubleshooting
2.4 CE Mode

Table 2-12 MAC+PHY Test

Display after Diag

Contents During
normal When an error occurs
operation
PHY external loopback test CHECK OK MAC+PHY ERROR

Table 2-13 ASIC Test

Display after Diag

Contents During
normal When an error occurs
operation
Checks the ASIC register (Status Register). CHECK OK ASIC ERROR

Table 2-14 IOT Test

Display after Diag

Contents During
normal When an error occurs
operation
Performs a communication test for the IOT.
Checks whether commands can be sent/
CHECK OK IOT ERROR
received to/from IOT by reading the IOT status
register.

Table 2-15 HD Test

Display after Diag

Contents During
normal When an error occurs
operation
Checks for insertion and performs the Execute
Device Diagnostic Command when it detects CHECK OK HD ERROR
insertion.

2-75
 Chapter 2 Troubleshooting
2.4 CE Mode

Table 2-16 PANEL Test

Contents Display after Diag

When the panel is normal, the LED and LCD indications are shown below when the
buttons are pressed.

Button LED LCD

Displays "UP" on the LCD.
Displays "DOWN" on the LCD.
Displays "LEFT" on the LCD.
Displays "RIGHT" on the LCD.

Performs the Eject/Set Displays "SET" on the LCD.

Control Panel Menu Displays "MENU" on the LCD.
input/output test.
Cancel Job Displays "CANCEL JOB" on the LCD.
Online Displays "ON LINE" on the LCD.
Displays "POWER SAVER" on the
Power Saver
LCD.
pressed at - (Test
- (Test completed)
the same time completed)

: Indicates the Ready LED (green), Alarm LED (amber), and Power
Saver LED.
Off On

Table 2-17 All Test

Display after Diag

Contents During
normal When an error occurs
operation
Performs all ESS Diag tests except for the
CHECK OK *** ERROR
MAC+PHY/PANEL Test.

***: Displays the failed test name

(CodeROM/FontROM/EEPROM/DRAM/ASIC/IOT/HD)

2-76
Chapter 2 Troubleshooting
2.4 CE Mode

2.4.6 IOT Diagnostics (IOT Diag)

2.4.6.1 Digital Input (DI) Test

The DI test is a function for checking whether the DI components are operating normally.
Displays each component status as "H" or "L".
Also, displays the number 0 when DI test starts and counts up the number when the DI component is turned
ON. The DI test covers all the DI components.

Other Diag. functions cannot be executed when the DI test is running. Therefore, during this time, the printer
does not accept operations other than the DI component operations and DI test completion operation. At
completion of the DI test, the display returns to the CE mode menu.

Table 2-18 Digital Input Test Parameter Table

Menu No. Component Display

DI-d Regi Sensor No paper: L
No paper: L
DI-e Fuser Exit Sensor This works only for the models with Duplex
installed.
DI-f Duplex Jam Sensor No paper: L
DI-38 Duplex Cover Open Sensor No paper: L
DI-39 Front Cover Interlock Switch Front Cover Closed: L
DI-3a MSI No Paper Sensor No paper: L
DI-3b Tray 1 No Paper Sensor No paper: L
No paper: L
DI-3c Tray 2 No Paper Sensor This works only when the optional Feeder is
installed.
No paper: L
DI-3d Tray 3 No Paper Sensor This works only when the optional Feeder is
installed.
No paper: L
DI-3e Tray 4 No Paper Sensor This works only when the optional Feeder is
installed.

Example of DI Test Execution

The following shows the example where a test is performed to check the Front Cover operation.

1 Enter the CE Mode. (Refer to [2.4.1 How to Enter the CE Mode])

2 Press the [ ] button once and then press the [Eject/Set] button.

ＣＥ Ｍｏｄｅ ＩＯＴ Ｄｉａｇ
   ＩＯＴ Ｄｉａｇ  Ｄｉｇｉｔａｌ Ｉｎｐｕｔ

2-77
 Chapter 2 Troubleshooting
2.4 CE Mode

3 Press the [Eject/Set] button.

ＩＯＴ Ｄｉａｇ Ｄｉｇｉｔａｌ Ｉｎｐｕｔ
 Ｄｉｇｉｔａｌ Ｉｎｐｕｔ  ＤＩ− ｄ ＯＦＦ

4 Press the [ ] button several times until "DI-39 OFF" is displayed.

Ｄｉｇｉｔａｌ Ｉｎｐｕｔ
 ＤＩ−３９ ＯＦＦ

5 Press the [Eject/Set] button.

6 Open and close the Front Cover to check that the display changes as follows:

Ｄｉｇｉｔａｌ Ｉｎｐｕｔ
 ＤＩ−３９ Ｌ ０

Cover Open

Ｄｉｇｉｔａｌ Ｉｎｐｕｔ
 ＤＩ−３９ Ｈ ０
Cover Close

Ｄｉｇｉｔａｌ Ｉｎｐｕｔ
 ＤＩ−３９ Ｌ １

7 To stop the test, press the [Cancel Job] button. To return to one level higher and perform another
test, press the [Menu] button.

2-78
Chapter 2 Troubleshooting
2.4 CE Mode

2.4.6.2 Digital Output (DO) Test

The DO test is a function for checking the DO components operation.
The operation can be enabled for every DO component, and whether or not the component is operating
properly can be determined by checking the operation from outside.

The DO components can operate at the same time during the DO test. When the Interlock is opened during
the DO test, components stop their operations.

Table 2-19 Digital Output Test Parameter Table

Menu No. Component Remarks

DO-10 Main Motor
This works only for the models with Duplex
DO-11 Exit Motor (CW: Nomal speed)
installed.
This works only for the models with Duplex
DO-12 Exit Motor (CCW: High speed)
installed.
This works only for the models with Duplex
DO-13 Exit Motor (CCW: Nomal speed)
installed.
This works only for the models with Duplex
DO-14 Dup Motor (CW: High speed)
installed.
This works only for the models with Duplex
DO-15 Dup Motor (CW: Nomal speed)
installed.
DO-16 MSI Feed Solenoid Turns OFF automatically after it is turned ON.
DO-1c Regi Clutch
High-voltage system. Active only when the DO-10
DO-1d Charge Roll (BCR ) AC
Main Motor is turned ON.
High-voltage system. Active only when the DO-10
DO-1e Charge Roll (BCR ) DC
Main Motor is turned ON.
High-voltage system. Active only when the DO-10
DO-1f Developer Bias AC
Main Motor is turned ON.
High-voltage system. Active only when the DO-10
DO-20 Developer Bias DC Main Motor and DO-21 Transfer Roll (BTR) are
turned ON.
High-voltage system. Active only when the DO-10
DO-21 Transfer Roll (BTR) -
Main Motor is turned ON.
High-voltage system. Active only when the DO-10
DO-22 Transfer Roll (BTR) +
Main Motor is turned ON.
High-voltage system. Active only when the DO-10
DO-23 Detack Saw Main Motor and DO-21 Transfer Roll (BTR) are
turned ON.
DO-24 Fan Motor (High speed)
DO-25 Scanner Motor [ROS ASSY]
Active only when the DO-25 Scanner Motor is
DO-26 Laser Diode [ROS Assy]
turned ON.
High-voltage system. Active only when the DO-10
DO-2a Pressure Roll DC Bias +
Main Motor is turned ON.

2-79
 Chapter 2 Troubleshooting
2.4 CE Mode
Table 2-19 Digital Output Test Parameter Table

Menu No. Component Remarks

This works only when the optional Feeder is
DO-2b Option Feed Motor (Tray 2)
installed.
This works only when the optional Feeder is
DO-2c Option Feed Motor (Tray 3)
installed.
This is active only when the DO-2b Option Feed
Motor (Tray 2) is turned ON.
DO-2d Option Turn Clutch (Tray 2)
This works only when the optional Feeder is
installed.
This is active only when the DO-2c Option Feed
Motor (Tray 3) is turned ON.
DO-2e Option Turn Clutch (Tray 3)
This works only when the optional Feeder is
installed.
DO-2f Fan Motor (Nomal speed)
DO-30 Pick Motor (Tray 1)
This is active only when the DO-30 Pick Motor
(Tray 1) is turned ON.
DO-31 Turn Clutch (Tray 1)
This works only for the standard 550-sheet tray
models.
This is active only when the DO-30 Pick Motor
(Tray 1) is turned ON.
DO-32 Feed Clutch (Tray 1)
This works only for the standard 550-sheet tray
models.
This works only when the optional Feeder is
DO-33 Option Feed Motor (Tray 4)
installed.
This is active only when the DO-33 Option Feed
Motor (Tray 4) is turned ON.
DO-34 Option Turn Clutch (Tray 4)
This works only when the optional Feeder is
installed.
This is active only when the DO-2b Option Feed
Motor (Tray 2) is turned ON.
DO-35 Option Feed Clutch (Tray 2)
This works only when the optional Feeder is
installed.
This is active only when the DO-2c Option Feed
Motor (Tray 3) is turned ON.
DO-36 Option Feed Clutch (Tray 3)
This works only when the optional Feeder is
installed.
This is active only when the DO-33 Option Feed
Motor (Tray 4) is turned ON.
DO-37 Option Feed Clutch (Tray 4)
This works only when the optional Feeder is
installed.

Example of DO Test Execution

The following shows the example where a test is performed to check the Pick Motor operation and the
Turn Clutch operation.

1 Enter the CE Mode. (Refer to [2.4.1 How to Enter the CE Mode])

2-80
Chapter 2 Troubleshooting
2.4 CE Mode
2 Press the [ ] button once and then press the [Eject/Set] button.

ＣＥ Ｍｏｄｅ ＩＯＴ Ｄｉａｇ
   ＩＯＴ Ｄｉａｇ  Ｄｉｇｉｔａｌ Ｉｎｐｕｔ

3 Press the [ ] button once and then press the [Eject/Set] button.

ＩＯＴ Ｄｉａｇ Ｄｉｇｉｔａｌ Ｏｕｔｐｕｔ
 Ｄｉｇｉｔａｌ Ｏｕｔｐｕｔ  Ｄ０−１０ ＲＥＡＤＹ

4 Press the [ ] button several times until "DO-30 READY" is displayed.

Ｄｉｇｉｔａｌ Ｏｕｔｐｕｔ
 Ｄ０−３０ ＲＥＡＤＹ

5 Press the [Eject/Set] button. (The Fan Motor starts operation)

Check the operating sound.

Ｄｉｇｉｔａｌ Ｏｕｔｐｕｔ
 Ｄ０−３０ ＥＸＥＣ

6 To stop the test, press the [Cancel Job] button.

7 To check the Turn Clutch operation at the same time, do not press the [Cancel Job] button but
press the [ ] button to display "DO-31 READY".

Ｄｉｇｉｔａｌ Ｏｕｔｐｕｔ
 Ｄ０−３１ ＲＥＡＤＹ

8 Press the [Eject/Set] button. (The Turn Clutch starts operation.)

Ｄｉｇｉｔａｌ Ｏｕｔｐｕｔ
 Ｄ０−３１ ＥＸＥＣ

2-81
 Chapter 2 Troubleshooting
2.4 CE Mode
9 To stop the Turn Clutch operation, press the [Cancel Job] button.

Ｄｉｇｉｔａｌ Ｏｕｔｐｕｔ
 Ｄ０−３１ ＲＥＡＤＹ

10 To stop the Pick Motor operation, press the [ ] button once to display the Pick Motor menu "DO-
30 EXEC" and then press the [Cancel Job] button.

Ｄｉｇｉｔａｌ Ｏｕｔｐｕｔ Ｄｉｇｉｔａｌ Ｏｕｔｐｕｔ
 Ｄ０−３０ ＥＸＥＣ  Ｄ０−３０ ＲＥＡＤＹ

11 To return to one level higher and perform another test, press the [Menu] button.

2-82
Chapter 2 Troubleshooting
2.4 CE Mode

2.4.6.3 NVM Access

Access to the NVM (EEPROM in the MCU PWB) and performing read/write of data can be done by key
operation of the Control Panel. The following functions are available:
• Edit the contents of the NVM .
• Save the NVM data.
• Revert to the saved data in the NVM.
• Printout the NVM data.

CAUTION
Normally, there is no need to access items other than [Save NVM] or [Load NVM]. These items are
used to change the machine-specific settings. Improper operation may cause the settings to be
deleted or cause fatal errors. Operate these items only when there are instructions from the
technical support department.

CAUTION
Before printing the NVM (Print NVM Info), always save the NVM data (Save NVM).

CAUTION
Do not execute "Load NVM" when "Save NVM" is not executed at all.
When data is loaded without the NVM saved at all, the MCU PWB NVM is damaged.

NVM Read/Write

The following is the sample procedure for editing data.

1 Enter the CE Mode. (Refer to [2.4.1 How to Enter the CE Mode])

2 Press the [ ] button once and then press the [Eject/Set] button.

ＣＥ Ｍｏｄｅ ＩＯＴ Ｄｉａｇ
   ＩＯＴ Ｄｉａｇ  Ｄｉｇｉｔａｌ Ｉｎｐｕｔ

3 Press the [ ] button once and then press the [Eject/Set] button.

ＩＯＴ Ｄｉａｇ ＮＶＭ Ｓｅｔｔｉｎｇｓ

 ＮＶＭ Ｓｅｔｔｉｎｇｓ   Ｅｄｉｔ ＮＶＭ
2-83
 Chapter 2 Troubleshooting
2.4 CE Mode
4 Press the [Eject/Set] button.
The data stored in the NVM is loaded.
Press the [ ] and [ ] button to move the cursor to the left/right.
Press the [ ] and [ ] button to change the number at the cursor. When the number in the
address section (Ad) is changed, the data after "=" is loaded and displayed.

5 Change the data.

When the data is changed, the * mark disappears, indicating that it has been changed from the
NVM value.

Ｅｄｉｔ ＮＶＭ
 A d 0 1 0 0 = 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1

6 Press the [Eject/Set] button.

The changed value is written in the NVM.

Ｅｄｉｔ ＮＶＭ
 A d 0 1 0 0 = 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 ＊

2-84
Chapter 2 Troubleshooting
2.4 CE Mode
Save NVM

Saves the IOT NVM data into the EEPROM of ESS PWB.
The following is the sample procedure for editing data.

1 Enter the CE Mode. (Refer to [2.4.1 How to Enter the CE Mode])

2 Press the [ ] button once and then press the [Eject/Set] button.

ＣＥ Ｍｏｄｅ ＩＯＴ Ｄｉａｇ
   ＩＯＴ Ｄｉａｇ  Ｄｉｇｉｔａｌ Ｉｎｐｕｔ

3 Press the [ ] button twice and then press the [Eject/Set] button.

ＩＯＴ Ｄｉａｇ ＮＶＭ Ｓｅｔｔｉｎｇｓ

 ＮＶＭ Ｓｅｔｔｉｎｇｓ   Ｅｄｉｔ ＮＶＭ

4 Press the [ ] button once and then press the [Eject/Set] button.

ＮＶＭ Ｓｅｔｔｉｎｇｓ Ｓａｖｅ ＮＶＭ ＭＣＵ−＞ＥＳＳ

Ｓａｖｅ ＮＶＭ   ＯＫ？

5 Press the [Eject/Set] button to save the NVM data.

Ｓａｖｅ ＮＶＭ ＭＣＵ−＞ＥＳＳ Ｓａｖｅ ＮＶＭ ＭＣＵ−＞ＥＳＳ

Ｐｒｏｃｅｓｓｉｎｇ..   Ｓａｖｅｄ.

Load NVM

Loads the data that was saved in the EEPROM of ESS PWB into the IOT NVM.
The operation procedures are the same as those for "Save NVM".

Print NVM Info

Prints all the NVM data that is saved in the ESS PWB on A4 paper.

2-85
 Chapter 2 Troubleshooting
2.4 CE Mode

2.4.6.4 NVM List

Table 2-20 NVM List

35 ppm 35 ppm
26
Memory Code 250 550
ppm
Tray Tray Setting Data
Initial Initial Initial
Add Item
Value Value Value
bit 7 * Capacity of the standard cassette
0=250 sheets 1=500 sheets
bit 6 0
bit 5 0
00 bit 4 0
Configuration 1/
01 00 80 00
Configuration 2 bit 3 0
02
bit 2 0 Long Paper support 0=Supported,
1=Not supported
bit 1 0
bit 0 0
bit 7 0
bit 6 * Power supply specification
0=100V/110V spec.
1=200V spec. (Flicker function enabled)
03
Configuration 3/ bit 5 0
04 01 01 00
Resolution
05 bit 4 0
bit 0 to 3 *
0: 600dpi
1: 1200 dpi (ROS model selection)
* 35ppm: 1, 26ppm: 0
bits 4 to 7 Laser diode output adjustment
06 value
Laser Power/ 8 grades from 0 to 7, the center value is 4
07 48 48 48
Print Density
08 bits 0 to 3 Print density setting
16 grades from 0 to F, the center value is 8
bit 4 to 7
Number of shifted dots between LD1 and
LD2 Initial value: A
16 grades from 0 to F
09 Number of Dots Between
0a VDO1 and VDO2/ A0 A0 A0 bit 3 0
0b Adjustment Option
bit 2 0
bit 1 0
bit 0 0

2-86
Chapter 2 Troubleshooting
2.4 CE Mode
Table 2-20 NVM List

35 ppm 35 ppm
26
Memory Code 250 550
ppm
Tray Tray Setting Data
Initial Initial Initial
Add Item
Value Value Value
bit 7 0 Permission to overwrite test
parameters
0=Disable, 1=Enable
* Make sure to return to 0 (Disable) after
changing the test parameters.
0c
Interface Option/
0d 00 00 00 bit 6 0
U2 Detailed Code
0e
bit 5 0
bit 4 0
bits 0 to 3 U2 (ROS) Fail details *The
latest data

0f bits 4 to 7 U4 (Fuser) Fail details *The

U4 Detailed Code/ latest data
10 00 00 00
Test Parameter L0
11 bit 0 to 3 0
bits 4 to 7 Adjustment value for MSI
registration in the paper feed direction
12 16 grades from 0 to F, the center value is 8
Test Parameter L1/
13 88 88 88 bits 0 to 3 Adjustment value for Tray 1
Test Parameter L2
14 (standard cassette) registration in the
paper feed direction
16 grades from 0 to F, the center value is 8
bits 4 to 7 Adjustment value for Tray 2
(Option Feeder 1) registration in the paper
feed direction
15 16 grades from 0 to F, the center value is 8
Test Parameter L3/
16 88 88 88
Test Parameter L4 bits 0 to 3 Adjustment value for Tray 3
17
(Option Feeder 2) registration in the paper
feed direction
16 grades from 0 to F, the center value is 8
bits 4 to 7 Adjustment value for Tray 4
(Option Feeder 3) registration in the paper
feed direction
18 16 grades from 0 to F, the center value is 8
Test Parameter L5/
19 88 88 88
Test Parameter L6 bits 0 to 3 Adjustment value for Duplex
1a
(Side 2) registration in the paper feed
direction
16 grades from 0 to F, the center value is 8
bit 4 to 7 0
1b
Test Parameter S0/ bits 0 to 3 Adjustment value for MSI
1c 08 08 08
Test Parameter S1 registration in the scan direction
1d
16 grades from 0 to F, the center value is 8

2-87
 Chapter 2 Troubleshooting
2.4 CE Mode
Table 2-20 NVM List

35 ppm 35 ppm
26
Memory Code 250 550
ppm
Tray Tray Setting Data
Initial Initial Initial
Add Item
Value Value Value
bits 4 to 7 Adjustment value for Tray 1
(standard cassette) registration in the scan
direction
1e 16 grades from 0 to F, the center value is 8
Test Parameter S2/
1f 88 88 88
Test Parameter S3 bits 0 to 3 Adjustment value for Tray 2
20
(Option Feeder 1) registration in the scan
direction
16 grades from 0 to F, the center value is 8
bits 4 to 7 Adjustment value for Tray 3
(Option Feeder 2) registration in the scan
direction
21 16 grades from 0 to F, the center value is 8
Test Parameter S4/
22 88 88 88
Test Parameter S5 bits 0 to 3 Adjustment value for Tray 4
23
(Option Feeder 3) registration in the scan
direction
16 grades from 0 to F, the center value is 8
bits 4 to 7 Adjustment value for Duplex
(Side 2) relative registration in the scan
direction
24 16 grades from 0 to F, the center value is 8
Test Parameter S6/
25 88 88 88
Test Parameter L7 bits 0 to 3 Adjustment value for Heavy
26
Paper and Heavy Paper 2 relative
registration in the paper feed direction
16 grades from 0 to F, the center value is 8
27 bits 4 to 7 0
Test Parameter R1/
28 00 00 00
Test Parameter R2 bits 0 to 3 0
29
2a bits 4 to 7 0
Test Parameter R3/
2b 08 08 08
Test Parameter P1 bits 0 to 3 8
2c

2-88
Chapter 2 Troubleshooting
2.4 CE Mode

2.4.7 Installation

CAUTION
Normally, there is no need to access this item. These items are used to change the machine-specific
settings. Improper operation may cause the settings to be deleted or cause fatal errors. Operate
these items only when there are instructions from the technical support department.

Display and set the following parameters:

Table 2-21 Installation

Range Contents
Serial No. 9 digits Displays/sets the currently set serial numbers
Sets the IOT Calibration Correction to ON/OFF
IOT Calibration is done to keep the IOT print density constant. When
IOT Calibration ON, OFF
the correction limit is exceeded due to the difference between
models, Calibration can be turned OFF.
Display Counter ON, OFF Sets the Billing counter display to ON/OFF.
HexDump ON, OFF Sets the HexDump mode to ON/OFF
Pixel Counter
Pixel Counter 0-100% Displays the number of pixels for each color as the percentage (%)
within 4mm area of the A3 or A4 paper for the last print.
Configuration
Configuration - Sets values for the four Dip Switches (Dip Switches 0, 1, 2, and 3) on
the ESS NVM.
Counter Type Type1 to 4 Sets a counter type
Print Counter Displays the current value of each Counter.
B/W Print - Displays the current value of the B/W Print Counter.
B/W Backup - Displays the current value of the B/W Backup Counter.
B/W Error - Displays the current value of the B/W Print Error Counter.
CopyCounter MtoB - Copies the Master NVM value to the Backup NVM.
CopyCounter BtoM - Copies the Backup NVM value to the Master NVM.
Clear All NVM - Clears all ESS NVM
Clear JobHistory - Deletes the Job History data
Deletes the Auditron or PrintVolume data
Clear AuditronPV -
The Auditron and PrintVolume operate exclusively.
Erase Hard Disk - Deletes all data in the HD

2-89
 Chapter 2 Troubleshooting
2.4 CE Mode

2.4.8 Print Function Test (Test Print)

Prints the specified pattern. When Jam/No Paper occurs during printing, the print operation is not guaranteed.
Test Print can be performed using A3 paper only.

2.4.8.1 Test Pattern 600

Prints the IOT test patterns. Checks the IOT print function.

2.4.8.2 Density 20% Pattern

Prints a solid fill pattern using 20% of Black density.

2.4.8.3 Gradation Pattern

Prints a pattern with 0 to 100% density gradation of black.

2-90
Chapter 2 Troubleshooting
2.4 CE Mode

2.4.9 Parameter Settings

CAUTION
Normally, there is no need to access this item. These items are used to change the machine-specific
settings. Improper operation may cause the settings to be deleted or cause fatal errors. Operate
these items only when there are instructions from the technical support department.

2.4.9.1 Example of Registration Adjustment

Display the current adjustment value that is set for each tray in Duplex printing.
The adjustment value can be changed within the setting range.

Table 2-22 Example of Registration Adjustment

Item Range Contents

REG Process Sets the Regi in paper feed direction
PaperFeed Bypass 0 to 15 Sets the Regi in MSI paper feed direction
Sets the Tray 1 (standard cassette) Regi in paper feed
PaperFeed Tray 1 0 to 15
direction
PaperFeed Tray 2 0 to 15 Sets the Tray 2 (optional) Regi in paper feed direction
PaperFeed Tray 3 0 to 15 Sets the Tray 3 (optional) Regi in paper feed direction
PaperFeed Tray 4 0 to 15 Sets the Tray 4 (optional) Regi in paper feed direction
PaperFeed Duplex 0 to 15 Sets the Regi in paper feed direction for Duplex
REG Scan 0 to 15 Scan Direction Regi Adjustment
Scan Bypass 0 to 15 Sets the Regi in MSI scan direction
Scan Tray 1 0 to 15 Sets the Tray 1 (standard cassette) Regi in scan direction
Scan Tray 2 0 to 15 Sets the Tray 2 (optional) Regi in scan direction
Scan Tray 3 0 to 15 Sets the Tray 3 (optional) Regi in scan direction
Scan Tray 4 0 to 15 Sets the Tray 4 (optional) Regi in scan direction
Scan Duplex 0 to 15 Sets the Regi in scan direction for Duplex

2-91
 Chapter 2 Troubleshooting
2.4 CE Mode
Example of a Registration Adjustment

The following shows an example of MSI registration adjustment:

1 Enter the CE Mode. (Refer to [2.4.1 How to Enter the CE Mode])

2 Press the [ ] button 6 times and then press the [Eject/Set] button.

ＣＥ Ｍｏｄｅ Ｐａｒａｍｅｔｅｒ
   Ｐａｒａｍｅｔｅｒ  ＲＥＧ Ｐｒｏｃｅｓｓ

3 Press the [Eject/Set] button.

ＲＥＧ Ｐｒｏｃｅｓｓ
ＰａｐｅｒＦｅｅｄ Ｂｙｐａｓｓ

4 At this point, press the [Eject/Set] button to display the current value that is set.

ＰａｐｅｒＦｅｅｄ Ｂｙｐａｓｓ
８＊

5 Use the [ ] and [ ] buttons to change the value.

The [ ] button increases the value, and the [ ] button decreases the value.
When a value is changed, the "*" mark disappears.

6 Press the [Eject/Set] button to confirm the changed setting value.

2-92
Chapter 2 Troubleshooting
2.4 CE Mode

2.4.9.2 Life Counter

Displays/clears the current value of each life counter.

The life counters are cleared in order to clear the display of replacement warning messages for each
component.
The replacement warning message is displayed when the counter value specified for a component has been
exceeded. Clear the life counter of the appropriate component after replacement.
The life counters hold a maximum of 4 histories. When a life counter is cleared, the oldest counter in the
history is deleted and the latest counter is set to 0.
Only the latest counter is displayed.
The following life counters are displayed.

Table 2-23 Life Counter

Item Contents
Fuser / Trans Life counters of FUSER ASSY (PL8.1.11) and BTR (PL4.1.3)
Life counter of KIT ROLL ASSY FEED (PL2.1.99/PL2.4.99) in Tray 1
Tray 1 Roll
(standard cassette)
Life counter of KIT ROLL ASSY FEED (PL14.3.99/PL15.3.99) in Tray 2
Tray 2 Roll
(standard cassette)
Life counter of KIT ROLL ASSY FEED (PL14.3.99/PL15.3.99) in Tray 3
Tray 3 Roll
(standard cassette)
Life counter of KIT ROLL ASSY FEED (PL14.3.99/PL15.3.99) in Tray 4
Tray 4 Roll
(standard cassette)
Bypass Tray Roll Life counter of KIT ROLL MSI (PL3.1.20)
Life counters of ROS ASSY (PL7.1.1), KIT REGIST (PL5.1.1) and DRIVE
ROS / Regist / Drive
ASSY (PL9.1.2)
Life counter of CHUTE RETARD CST (PL2.2.15/PL2.5.15) in Tray 1
Tray 1 Chute
(standard cassette)
Tray 2 Chute Life counter of CHUTE RETARD CST (PL2.2.15/PL2.5.15) in Tray 2 (option)
Tray 3 Chute Life counter of CHUTE RETARD CST (PL2.2.15/PL2.5.15) in Tray 3 (option)
Tray 4 Chute Life counter of CHUTE RETARD CST (PL2.2.15/PL2.5.15) in Tray 4 (option)

2-93
 Chapter 2 Troubleshooting
2.4 CE Mode
Example of Reading/Clearing a Life Counter

The following shows the example where the Tray 1 Roll life counter is read and cleared.

1 Enter the CE Mode. (Refer to [2.4.1 How to Enter the CE Mode])

2 Press the [ ] button 6 times and then press the [Eject/Set] button.

ＣＥ Ｍｏｄｅ Ｐａｒａｍｅｔｅｒ
   Ｐａｒａｍｅｔｅｒ  ＲＥＧ Ｐｒｏｃｅｓｓ

3 Press the [ ] button 3 times and then press the [Eject/Set] button.

Ｐａｒａｍｅｔｅｒ Ｌｉｆｅ Ｃｏｕｎｔｅｒ

Ｌｉｆｅ Ｃｏｕｎｔｅｒ  Ｆｕｓｅｒ / Ｔｒａｎｓ

4 Press the [ ] button once and then press the [Eject/Set] button.

Ｌｉｆｅ Ｃｏｕｎｔｅｒ Ｔｒａｙ １ Ｒｏｌｌ

Ｔｒａｙ １ Ｒｏｌｌ   Ｒｅａｄ

5 Display the life counter

Press the [Eject/Set] button to display the current value of the life counter.

Ｔｒａｙ １ Ｒｏｌｌ
７９

6 Clear the life counter

After the life counter is displayed, press the [Cancel Job] button to return to one level higher.

Ｔｒａｙ １ Ｒｏｌｌ
  Ｒｅａｄ

2-94
Chapter 2 Troubleshooting
2.4 CE Mode
7 Press the [ ] button once and then press the [Eject/Set] button.

Ｔｒａｙ １ Ｒｏｌｌ Ｒｅｓｅｔ Ｃｏｕｎｔｅｒ

Ｒｅｓｅｔ Ｃｏｕｎｔｅｒ   ＯＫ？

8 Press the [Eject/Set] button to clear the life counter.

Ｒｅｓｅｔ Ｃｏｕｎｔｅｒ
Ｉｎｉｔｉａｌｉｚｅｄ．

2.4.9.3 Print Parameter List

Outputs the parameter values in the IOT, errors, and life count value on a A4 paper.

2-95
 Chapter 2 Troubleshooting
2.4 CE Mode

2-96
Chapter 3 Image Quality Troubleshooting
Table of Contents
3.1 Image Quality Problem ...............................................................................................3-1
3.1.1 Image Quality Troubleshooting Flow .............................................................................................. 3-1
3.1.2 Cycle for Each Roll ......................................................................................................................... 3-3
FIP.P1 Printout is Light (weak gradation) ............................................................................................ 3-5
FIP.P2 Printout is Blank ....................................................................................................................... 3-7
FIP.P3 Printout is Solid Black .............................................................................................................. 3-9
FIP.P4 Printout has Vertical White Streaks (In Paper Feed Direction) .............................................. 3-10
FIP.P5 Printout has Horizontal White Streaks ................................................................................... 3-11
FIP.P6 Vertical Streaks...................................................................................................................... 3-12
FIP.P7 Horizontal Streaks.................................................................................................................. 3-13
FIP.P8 Partial Image Omission.......................................................................................................... 3-14
FIP.P9 Spots...................................................................................................................................... 3-15
FIP.P10 Ghost Image ........................................................................................................................ 3-16
FIP.P11 High Background ................................................................................................................. 3-17
FIP.P12 Skewed Image ..................................................................................................................... 3-18
FIP.P13 Damaged Print Paper .......................................................................................................... 3-19
FIP.P14 Unfused Image..................................................................................................................... 3-20
Chapter 3 Image Quality Troubleshooting
3.1 Image Quality Problem

3.1 Image Quality Problem

3.1.1 Image Quality Troubleshooting Flow

Start

Obtain test print

None
Does an appropriate FIP exist?

Yes

Perform the appropriate troubleshooting Replace the CRU ASSY, followed

by the FUSER ASSY

No No

Is the problem repaired? Is the problem repaired?

Yes Yes

Completed Completed

Figure 3-1 Image Quality Problem Entry Chart

3-1
 Chapter 3 Image Quality Troubleshooting
3.1 Image Quality Problem
When a print image quality problem occurs, accurately determine and understand the details of the problem
and then obtain a printout to take the appropriate action. After that, use the Image Quality FIP Table for each
phenomenon to effectively perform the troubleshooting.
If the problem cannot be fixed by the image quality FIP, check the image quality FIP again, replace "the parts
considered to be the cause" in sequence while checking the operation for each, and perform troubleshooting
using the diagnostic function, etc. in the CE mode (refer to "2.4 CE Mode").

The Image Quality FIP describe the following typical image quality problems:
• FIP-1.P1 Printout is Light (weak gradation)
• FIP-1.P2 Printout is Blank
• FIP-1.P3 Printout is Solid Black
• FIP-1.P4 Printout has Vertical White Streaks (In Paper Feed Direction)
• FIP-1.P5 Printout has Horizontal White Streaks
• FIP-1.P6 Vertical Streaks
• FIP-1.P7 Horizontal Streaks
• FIP-1.P8 Partial Image Omission
• FIP-1.P9 Spots
• FIP-1.P10 Ghost Images
• FIP-1.P11 High Background
• FIP-1.P12 Skewed image
• FIP-1.P13 Damaged Print Paper
• FIP-1.P14 Unfused Image

3-2
Chapter 3 Image Quality Troubleshooting
3.1 Image Quality Problem

3.1.2 Cycle for Each Roll

When horizontal streaks or spots appear in a constant cycle, the problem might be due to a particular roll.
In this case, by measuring the problem cycle on the test print and checking its relationship with the following
pitch (note that this does not always neccesarily match the roll circumference), the problem might be easily
solved.

FUSER ASSY
Pressuer Roll Exit Roll
MSI FEED ROLL
ROLL PINCH Exit Pinch Roll
ROLL DUP BCR Magnet Roll
Heat Roll

Drum
Regi Roll Metal

Nudger Roll

CRU ASSY

MSI Retard Roll

ROLL ASSY TRANS
Regi Roll Rubber

Turn Roll

Feed Roll

Retard Roll

ROLL PINCH TURN

ROLL ASSY TURN Feed Roll Retard Roll Nudger Roll

HMR06515AA

Figure 3-2 Position of each roll

3-3
 Chapter 3 Image Quality Troubleshooting
3.1 Image Quality Problem

Table 3-1 Cycle for Each Roll

External
Cycle
Unit Component Name Diameter
(mm)
(mm)
Heat Roll 30.09 94.53
FUSER FUSER ASSY (PL8.1.11) Pressure Roll 30.00 94.25
Exit Pinch Roll 10.00 31.42
EXIT COVER TOP ASSY (PL1.1.2) Exit Roll 13.80 43.35
TRANSFER BTR (PL4.1.3) 18.50 58.12
Regi Roll Rubber 11.96 37.57
REGI KIT REGIST (PL5.1.1)
Regi Roll Metal 11.96 37.57
Drum 30.025 94.33
CRU CRU ASSY BCR 12.00 37.70
Magnet Roll 16.00 50.27
MSI FEED ROLL (PL3.1.17) 37.35 117.34
MSI HOLDER ASSY RETARD (PL3.1.21) MSI Retard Roll 18.00 56.55
KIT FRAME FRONT (PL4.1.1) Turn Roll 14.30 44.92
Feed Roll 19.00 59.69
ROLL ASSY FEED
(PL2.1.4, PL2.2.19, PL2.4.10, Nudger Roll 19.00 59.69
PL2.5.19, PL14.3.10, PL15.3.10)
FEEDER Retard Roll 19.00 59.69
ROLL ASSY TURN (PL2.4.12, PL14,3,12, PL15.3.12) 13.97 43.89
ROLL PINCH TURN (PL2.3.7, PL14.2.10, PL15.2.10) 14.00 43.98
ROLL DUP (PL13.2.1) 13.80 43.35
DUPLEX
ROLL PINCH (PL13.2.3) 19.00 59.69

3-4
Chapter 3 Image Quality Troubleshooting
3.1 Image Quality Problem

FIP.P1 Printout is Light (weak gradation)

Problem Details

The overall density of the image is light.

Parts considered to be the cause

• CRU ASSY (PL6.1.1)

• BTR (PL4.1.3)
• ROS ASSY (PL7.1.1)
• MAIN MOTOR (PL9.1.3)
• ESS PWB (PL11.1.7)
HMR06501AA • MCU PWB (PL11.1.3)
• HVPS (PL11.1.5)
• FUSER ASSY (PL8.1.11)

Before performing troubleshooting, check the printer paper transport path. Check that there are no foreign
substances such as staples, paper clips, or bits of paper on the transport path.

Procedure Check and Action Yes No

Check the paper
Load a new and dry sheet of recommended paper Procedure is
1 Go to Step 2
and perform test print. complete
Is the image printed normally?
Check the laser beam path
Remove the
2 Is there any obstruction between the ROS ASSY and Go to Step 3
obstruction
the CRU ASSY?
Check the ROS window Clean the ROS
3 Go to Step 4
Is the ROS window dirty? window
Check the installation of the CRU ASSY
Procedure is
4 Reinstall the CRU ASSY and perform test print. Go to Step 5
complete
Is the image printed normally?
Check the BTR
Remove the BTR. Replace the BTR
5 Go to Step 6
Is the BTR normal without contamination, damage, (Refer to REP4.7)
or wear and tear?
Check the contact between the CRU ASSY and the
6 frame Clean the contact Go to Step 7
Is the CRU ASSY contact dirty?
Check after the replacement of CRU ASSY
Procedure is
7 Replace the CRU ASSY and perform test print. Go to Step 8
complete
Is the image printed normally?
Check after the replacement of MCU PWB
Procedure is
8 Replace the MCU PWB and perform test print. Go to Step 9
complete
Is the image printed normally?
Check after the replacement of ROS ASSY
Procedure is
9 Replace the ROS ASSY and perform test print. Go to Step 10
complete
Is the image printed normally?

3-5
 Chapter 3 Image Quality Troubleshooting
3.1 Image Quality Problem

Procedure Check and Action Yes No

Replace the parts
Check after the replacement of MAIN MOTOR
Procedure is considered to be
10 Replace the MAIN MOTOR and perform test print.
complete the cause in
Is the image printed normally?
sequence

3-6
Chapter 3 Image Quality Troubleshooting
3.1 Image Quality Problem

FIP.P2 Printout is Blank

Problem Details

Paper is printed completely white.

Parts considered to be the cause

• CRU ASSY (PL6.1.1)

• BTR (PL4.1.3)
• ROS ASSY (PL7.1.1)
• MAIN MOTOR (PL9.1.3)
• ESS PWB (PL11.1.7)
HMR06502AA • MCU PWB (PL11.1.3)
• HVPS (PL11.1.5)
• FUSER ASSY (PL8.1.11)

Before performing troubleshooting, check the printer paper transport path. Check that there are no foreign
substances such as staples, paper clips, or bits of paper on the transport path.

Procedure Check and Action Yes No

Check the laser beam path
Remove the
1 Is there any obstruction between the ROS ASSY and Go to Step 2
obstruction
the CRU ASSY?
Remove the
Check the ROS window
obstruction/
2 Is the whole ROS window completely covered by Go to Step 3
Clean the ROS
obstruction, etc? Or, is it dirty?
window
Check the connection of the ROS ASSY connectors Connect the
3 Go to Step 4
Are the ROS ASSY connectors connected properly? connectors
Check the installation of the CRU ASSY
Procedure is
4 Reinstall the CRU ASSY and perform test print. Go to Step 5
complete
Is the image printed normally?
Check the BTR
Remove the BTR. Replace the BTR
5 Go to Step 6
Is the BTR normal without contamination, damage, or (Refer to REP4.7)
wear and tear?
Check the contact between the CRU ASSY and the
6 frame Clean the contact Go to Step 7
Is the CRU ASSY contact dirty?
Check after the replacement of CRU ASSY
Procedure is
7 Replace the CRU ASSY and perform test print. Go to Step 8
complete
Is the image printed normally?
Check after the replacement of MCU PWB
Procedure is
8 Replace the MCU PWB and perform test print. Go to Step 9
complete
Is the image printed normally?
Check after the replacement of ROS ASSY
Procedure is
9 Replace the ROS ASSY and perform test print. Go to Step 10
complete
Is the image printed normally?

3-7
 Chapter 3 Image Quality Troubleshooting
3.1 Image Quality Problem

Procedure Check and Action Yes No

Replace the parts
Check after the replacement of MAIN MOTOR
Procedure is considered to be
10 Replace the MAIN MOTOR and perform test print.
complete the cause in
Is the image printed normally?
sequence

3-8
Chapter 3 Image Quality Troubleshooting
3.1 Image Quality Problem

FIP.P3 Printout is Solid Black

Problem Details

Paper is printed completely black.

Parts considered to be the cause

• CRU ASSY (PL6.1.1)

• BTR (PL4.1.3)
• ROS ASSY (PL7.1.1)
• ESS PWB (PL11.1.7)
• MCU PWB (PL11.1.3)
HMR06503AA • HVPS (PL11.1.5)

Before performing troubleshooting, check the printer paper transport path. Check that there are no foreign
substances such as staples, paper clips, or bits of paper on the transport path.

Procedure Check and Action Yes No

Check the connection of the ROS ASSY connectors Connect the
1 Go to Step 2
Are the ROS ASSY connectors connected properly? connectors
Check the contact between the CRU ASSY and the
2 frame Clean the contact Go to Step 3
Is the CRU ASSY contact dirty?
Check the charge status of the Drum
Use paper to completely cover the ROS ASSY
window and perform test print.
Replace the
Is the printout solid black?
3 HVPS Go to Step 4
(REP11.4)
(Covering the ROS ASSY window blocks the laser
beam to the Drum. Therefore, if the Drum is charged
correctly, the printout should be completely white)
Check the ROS ASSY
Use paper to cover half of the ROS ASSY window
and perform test print. Replace the MCU
4 Is the printout half white and half black? Go to Step 5 PWB
(REP11.2)
(If the ROS ASSY is normal, half of the printout
should be the test pattern instead of black.)
Check after the replacement of ROS ASSY
Procedure is
5 Replace the ROS ASSY and perform test print. Go to Step 6
complete
Is the image printed normally?
Check the ESS PWB operation
Disconnect the connector P/J1 on the ESS PWB and
perform test print.
Is the printout solid black? Replace the parts
Replace the ESS
considered to be
6 PWB
(Disconnecting the connection (P/J1) between the the cause in
(REP11.6)
ESS PWB and the ROS ASSY prevents data from sequence
being output from the ESS PWB. Therefore, the
printout should be black. This can be used to identify
a faulty ESS PWB.)

3-9
 Chapter 3 Image Quality Troubleshooting
3.1 Image Quality Problem

FIP.P4 Printout has Vertical White Streaks (In Paper Feed Direction)

Problem Details

There are extremely light or completely white parts on the image. These
parts appear vertically over an extensive area in the paper feed direction.

Parts considered to be the cause

• CRU ASSY (PL6.1.1)

• BTR (PL4.1.3)
• ROS ASSY (PL7.1.1)
• ESS PWB (PL11.1.7)
HMR06504AA • MCU PWB (PL11.1.3)
• HVPS (PL11.1.5)
• FUSER ASSY (PL8.1.11)

Before performing troubleshooting, check the printer paper transport path. Check that there are no foreign
substances such as staples, paper clips, or bits of paper on the transport path.

Procedure Check and Action Yes No

Check the paper
Load a new and dry sheet of recommended paper Procedure is
1 Go to Step 2
and perform test print. complete
Is the image printed normally?
Check the paper transport path
Is there any contamination or obstruction on the Remove the
2 Go to Step 3
paper transport path between the paper feed and obstruction
output?
Check the laser beam path
Remove the
3 Is there any obstruction between the ROS ASSY and Go to Step 4
obstruction
the CRU ASSY?
Check the ROS window Clean the ROS
4 Go to Step 5
Is the ROS window dirty? window
Check the BTR
Remove the BTR. Replace the BTR
5 Go to Step 6
Is the BTR normal without contamination, damage, or (REP4.7)
wear and tear?
Check after the replacement of CRU ASSY
Procedure is
6 Replace the CRU ASSY and perform test print. Go to Step 7
complete
Is the image printed normally?
Check after the replacement of ROS ASSY
Procedure is
7 Replace the ROS ASSY and perform test print. Go to Step 8
complete
Is the image printed normally?
Check the FUSER ASSY
WARNING: Perform servicing after the FUSER
ASSY has cooled down. Replace the parts
Replace the
considered to be
8 Remove the FUSER ASSY. FUSER ASSY
the cause in
Turn the Gear manually and inspect the Heat Roll. (REP9.1)
sequence
Is the Heat Roll normal without contamination or
damage?

3-10
Chapter 3 Image Quality Troubleshooting
3.1 Image Quality Problem

FIP.P5 Printout has Horizontal White Streaks

Problem Details

There are extremely light or completely white parts on the image. These
parts with no image appear horizontally over an extensive area
perpendicular to the paper feed direction.

Parts considered to be the cause

• CRU ASSY (PL6.1.1)

• BTR (PL4.1.3)
• ROS ASSY (PL7.1.1)
HMR06505AA • ESS PWB (PL11.1.7)
• MCU PWB (PL11.1.3)
• HVPS (PL11.1.5)
• FUSER ASSY (PL8.1.11)

Before performing troubleshooting, check the printer paper transport path. Check that there are no foreign
substances such as staples, paper clips, or bits of paper on the transport path.

Procedure Check and Action Yes No

Check the paper
Load a new and dry sheet of recommended paper Procedure is
1 Go to Step 2
and perform test print. complete
Is the image printed normally?
Check the connection of the ROS ASSY connectors Connect the
2 Go to Step 3
Are the ROS ASSY connectors connected properly? connectors
Check the BTR
Remove the BTR. Replace the BTR
3 Go to Step 4
Is the BTR normal without contamination, damage, or (Refer to REP4.7)
wear and tear?
Check the Rollers on the paper transport path Clean or replace
4 Is there a Roller with a cycle that matches the interval the corresponding Go to Step 5
of the white streaks? Roller
Check after the replacement of CRU ASSY
Procedure is
5 Replace the CRU ASSY and perform test print. Go to Step 6
complete
Is the image printed normally?
Check after the replacement of ROS ASSY
Procedure is
6 Replace the ROS ASSY and perform test print. Go to Step 7
complete
Is the image printed normally?
Check after the replacement of MCU PWB
Procedure is
7 Replace the MCU PWB and perform test print. Go to Step 8
complete
Is the image printed normally?
Check the FUSER ASSY
WARNING: Perform servicing after the FUSER
ASSY has cooled down. Replace the parts
Replace the
considered to be
8 Remove the FUSER ASSY. FUSER ASSY
the cause in
Turn the Gear manually and inspect the Heat Roll. (REP9.1)
sequence
Is the Heat Roll normal without contamination or
damage?

3-11
 Chapter 3 Image Quality Troubleshooting
3.1 Image Quality Problem

FIP.P6 Vertical Streaks

Problem Details

There are vertical black lines along the paper orientation.

Parts considered to be the cause

• CRU ASSY (PL6.1.1)

• BTR (PL4.1.3)
• ROS ASSY (PL7.1.1)
• ESS PWB (PL11.1.7)
• MCU PWB (PL11.1.3)
HMR06506AA • HVPS (PL11.1.5)
• FUSER ASSY (PL8.1.11)

Before performing troubleshooting, check the printer paper transport path. Check that there are no foreign
substances such as staples, paper clips, or bits of paper on the transport path.

Procedure Check and Action Yes No

Check the Rollers on the paper transport path Clean or replace
1 Are the Rollers on the paper transport path normal Go to Step 2 the corresponding
without contamination, damage, or wear and tear? Roller
Check the BTR
Remove the BTR. Replace the BTR
2 Go to Step 3
Is the BTR normal without contamination, damage, or (Refer to REP4.7)
wear and tear?
Check after the replacement of CRU ASSY
Procedure is
3 Replace the CRU ASSY and perform test print. Go to Step 4
complete
Is the image printed normally?
Check after the replacement of ROS ASSY
Procedure is
4 Replace the ROS ASSY and perform test print. Go to Step 5
complete
Is the image printed normally?
Check the FUSER ASSY
WARNING: Perform servicing after the FUSER
ASSY has cooled down. Replace the parts
Replace the
considered to be
5 Remove the FUSER ASSY. FUSER ASSY
the cause in
Turn the Gear manually and inspect the Heat Roll. (REP9.1)
sequence
Is the Heat Roll normal without contamination or
damage?

3-12
Chapter 3 Image Quality Troubleshooting
3.1 Image Quality Problem

FIP.P7 Horizontal Streaks

Problem Details

There are horizontal black lines perpendicular to the paper feed direction.

Parts considered to be the cause

• CRU ASSY (PL6.1.1)

• BTR (PL4.1.3)
• ROS ASSY (PL7.1.1)
• ESS PWB (PL11.1.7)
• MCU PWB (PL11.1.3)
HMR06507AA • HVPS (PL11.1.5)
• FUSER ASSY (PL8.1.11)

Before performing troubleshooting, check the printer paper transport path. Check that there are no foreign
substances such as staples, paper clips, or bits of paper on the transport path.

Procedure Check and Action Yes No

Check the connection of the ROS ASSY connectors Connect the
1 Go to Step 2
Are the ROS ASSY connectors connected properly? connectors
Check the contact between the CRU ASSY and the
2 frame Clean the contact Go to Step 3
Is the CRU ASSY contact dirty?
Check the BTR
Remove the BTR. Replace the BTR
3 Go to Step 4
Is the BTR normal without contamination, damage, or (Refer to REP4.7)
wear and tear?
Check the Rollers on the paper transport path Clean or replace
4 Is there a Roller with a cycle that matches the interval the corresponding Go to Step 5
of the horizontal streaks? Roller
Check after the replacement of CRU ASSY
Procedure is
5 Replace the CRU ASSY and perform test print. Go to Step 6
complete
Is the image printed normally?
Check after the replacement of ROS ASSY
Procedure is
6 Replace the ROS ASSY and perform test print. Go to Step 7
complete
Is the image printed normally?
Check the FUSER ASSY
WARNING: Perform servicing after the FUSER
ASSY has cooled down. Replace the parts
Replace the
considered to be
7 Remove the FUSER ASSY. FUSER ASSY
the cause in
Turn the Gear manually and inspect the Heat Roll. (REP9.1)
sequence
Is the Heat Roll normal without contamination or
damage?

3-13
 Chapter 3 Image Quality Troubleshooting
3.1 Image Quality Problem

FIP.P8 Partial Image Omission

Problem Details

There are extremely light or completely white parts on the image. These
parts with no image appear on limited areas on the paper.

Parts considered to be the cause

• CRU ASSY (PL6.1.1)

• BTR (PL4.1.3)
• ROS ASSY (PL7.1.1)
• ESS PWB (PL11.1.7)
HMR06508AA • MCU PWB (PL11.1.3)
• HVPS (PL11.1.5)
• FUSER ASSY (PL8.1.11)

Before performing troubleshooting, check the printer paper transport path. Check that there are no foreign
substances such as staples, paper clips, or bits of paper on the transport path.

Procedure Check and Action Yes No

Check the paper
Load a new and dry sheet of recommended paper Procedure is
1 Go to Step 2
and perform test print. complete
Is the image printed normally?
Check the BTR
Remove the BTR. Replace the BTR
2 Go to Step 3
Is the BTR normal without contamination, damage, or (Refer to REP4.7)
wear and tear?
Check after the replacement of CRU ASSY
Procedure is
3 Replace the CRU ASSY and perform test print. Go to Step 4
complete
Is the image printed normally?
Check the FUSER ASSY
WARNING: Perform servicing after the FUSER
ASSY has cooled down. Replace the
4 Remove the FUSER ASSY. Go to Step 5 FUSER ASSY
Turn the Gear manually and inspect the Heat Roll. (REP9.1)
Is the Heat Roll normal without contamination or
damage?
Check the connection of the MCU PWB connectors Replace the parts
Connect every MCU PWB connector securely and Procedure is considered to be
5
perform test print. complete the cause in
Is the image printed normally? sequence

3-14
Chapter 3 Image Quality Troubleshooting
3.1 Image Quality Problem

FIP.P9 Spots

Problem Details

Spots of toner are spread randomly all over the whole page.

Parts considered to be the cause

• CRU ASSY (PL6.1.1)

• BTR (PL4.1.3)
• ROS ASSY (PL7.1.1)
• ESS PWB (PL11.1.7)
• MCU PWB (PL11.1.3)
HMR06509AA • HVPS (PL11.1.5)
• FUSER ASSY (PL8.1.11)

Before performing troubleshooting, check the printer paper transport path. Check that there are no foreign
substances such as staples, paper clips, or bits of paper on the transport path.

Procedure Check and Action Yes No

Check the Rollers on the paper transport path Clean or replace
1 Are the Rollers on the paper transport path normal Go to Step 2 the corresponding
without contamination, damage, or wear and tear? Roller
Check the contact between the CRU ASSY and the
2 frame Clean the contact Go to Step 3
Is the CRU ASSY contact dirty?
Check the BTR
Remove the BTR. Replace the BTR
3 Go to Step 4
Is the BTR normal without contamination, damage, or (Refer to REP4.7)
wear and tear?
Check the Rollers on the paper transport path
(Only when the interval of the spots seems to follow a Clean or replace
4 cycle) the corresponding Go to Step 5
Is there a Roller with a cycle that matches the interval Roller
of the spots?
Check after the replacement of CRU ASSY
Procedure is
5 Replace the CRU ASSY and perform test print. Go to Step 6
complete
Is the image printed normally?
Check after the replacement of HVPS
Procedure is
6 Replace the HVPS and perform test print. Go to Step 7
complete
Is the image printed normally?
Check the FUSER ASSY
WARNING: Perform servicing after the FUSER
ASSY has cooled down. Replace the parts
Replace the
considered to be
7 Remove the FUSER ASSY. FUSER ASSY
the cause in
Turn the Gear manually and inspect the Heat Roll. (REP9.1)
sequence
Is the Heat Roll normal without contamination or
damage?

3-15
 Chapter 3 Image Quality Troubleshooting
3.1 Image Quality Problem

FIP.P10 Ghost Image

Problem Details

Ghost images appear on the paper. Parts of the previous page or current
page appear as ghost images on the paper.

Parts considered to be the cause

• CRU ASSY (PL6.1.1)

• BTR (PL4.1.3)
• ROS ASSY (PL7.1.1)
• MAIN MOTOR (PL9.1.3)
HMR06510AA • ESS PWB (PL11.1.7)
• MCU PWB (PL11.1.3)
• HVPS (PL11.1.5)
• FUSER ASSY (PL8.1.11)

Before performing troubleshooting, check the printer paper transport path. Check that there are no foreign
substances such as staples, paper clips, or bits of paper on the transport path.

Procedure Check and Action Yes No

Check for repeat prints
1 Did the problem occur after printing the same image Go to Step 2 Go to Step 3
many times?
Procedure is
complete (advise
Check for ghost image
the customer to
2 Print 30 pages for each image type. Go to Step 3
not print the same
Does the ghost image appear?
image too many
times in one go)
Check the contact between the CRU ASSY and the
3 frame Clean the contact Go to Step 4
Is the CRU ASSY contact dirty?
Check the BTR
Remove the BTR. Replace the BTR
4 Go to Step 5
Is the BTR normal without contamination, damage, or (Refer to REP4.7)
wear and tear?
Check after the replacement of CRU ASSY
Procedure is
5 Replace the CRU ASSY and perform test print. Go to Step 6
complete
Is the image printed normally?
Check the FUSER ASSY
WARNING: Perform servicing after the FUSER
ASSY has cooled down. Replace the parts
Replace the
considered to be
6 Remove the FUSER ASSY. FUSER ASSY
the cause in
Turn the Gear manually and inspect the Heat Roll. (REP9.1)
sequence
Is the Heat Roll normal without contamination or
damage?

3-16
Chapter 3 Image Quality Troubleshooting
3.1 Image Quality Problem

FIP.P11 High Background

Problem Details

The whole page or part of the page is contaminated by toner. The

contamination appears as very light grayish color.

Parts considered to be the cause

• CRU ASSY (PL6.1.1)

• BTR (PL4.1.3)
• ROS ASSY (PL7.1.1)
• ESS PWB (PL11.1.7)
HMR06511AA • MCU PWB (PL11.1.3)
• HVPS (PL11.1.5)

Before performing troubleshooting, check the printer paper transport path. Check that there are no foreign
substances such as staples, paper clips, or bits of paper on the transport path.

Procedure Check and Action Yes No

Check the connection of the ROS ASSY connectors Connect the
1 Go to Step 2
Are the ROS ASSY connectors connected properly? connectors
Check the contact between the CRU ASSY and the
2 frame Clean the contact Go to Step 3
Is the CRU ASSY contact dirty?
Check after the replacement of CRU ASSY
Procedure is
3 Replace the CRU ASSY and perform test print. Go to Step 4
complete
Is the image printed normally?
Replace the parts
Check after the replacement of HVPS
Procedure is considered to be
4 Replace the HVPS and perform test print.
complete the cause in
Is the image printed normally?
sequence

3-17
 Chapter 3 Image Quality Troubleshooting
3.1 Image Quality Problem

FIP.P12 Skewed Image

Problem Details

Printed images are not parallel to the edges of the paper.

Parts considered to be the cause

• CRU ASSY (PL6.1.1)

• BTR (PL4.1.3)
• ESS PWB (PL11.1.7)
• FEEDER ASSY SUB (PL2.1.2)
• FEEDER ASSY SUB 550 (PL2.4.1)
HMR06512AA • FEEDER ASSY SUB SP (PL14.2.1 / PL15.2.1)
• CASSETTE ASSY 250 (PL2.2.1)
• CASSETTE ASSY 550 (PL2.5.1)
• PLATE ASSY BOTTOM (PL2.2.5 / PL2.5.5)

Before performing troubleshooting, check the printer paper transport path. Check that there are no foreign
substances such as staples, paper clips, or bits of paper on the transport path.

Procedure Check and Action Yes No

Check the installation surface for the device
Correct the
1 Is the installation surface for the device level? Go to Step 2
installation surface
And, are the legs of the device installed properly?
Check the load status of paper
Remove the Paper Cassette, align the guides, and
load the paper properly. Procedure is
2 Go to Step 3
Install the Paper Cassette properly and perform test complete
print.
Is the image printed normally?
Check the PLATE ASSY BOTTOM operation within
the Paper Cassette Reinstall the
3 Remove the Paper Cassette. Go to Step 4 PLATE ASSY
Does the PLATE ASSY BOTTOM within the Paper BOTTOM
Cassette rise correctly without skewing?
Check the Rollers on the paper transport path Clean or replace
Are the Rollers on the paper transport path normal the corresponding
4 Go to Step 5
without contamination, damage, or wear and tear? Roller, or reinstall
Also, are those Rollers installed properly? it
Check the installation of the CRU ASSY Reinstall the CRU
5 Go to Step 6
Is the CRU ASSY installed properly? ASSY
Replace the parts
Check after the replacement of CRU ASSY
Procedure is considered to be
6 Replace the CRU ASSY and perform test print.
complete the cause in
Is the image printed normally?
sequence

3-18
Chapter 3 Image Quality Troubleshooting
3.1 Image Quality Problem

FIP.P13 Damaged Print Paper

Problem Details

The printed paper is creased, folded or torn.

Parts considered to be the cause

• FUSER ASSY (PL8.1.11)

• CRU ASSY (PL6.1.1)
• BTR (PL4.1.3)
• ESS PWB (PL11.1.7)
• FEEDER ASSY SUB (PL2.1.2)
HMR06513AA • FEEDER ASSY SUB 550 (PL2.4.1)
• FEEDER ASSY SUB SP (PL14.2.1 / PL15.2.1)
• CASSETTE ASSY 250 (PL2.2.1)
• CASSETTE ASSY 550 (PL2.5.1)
• PLATE ASSY BOTTOM (PL2.2.5 / PL2.5.5)

Before performing troubleshooting, check the printer paper transport path. Check that there are no foreign
substances such as staples, paper clips, or bits of paper on the transport path.

Procedure Check and Action Yes No

Check the paper
Load a new and dry sheet of recommended paper Procedure is
1 Go to Step 2
and perform test print. complete
Is the image printed normally?
Check the paper transport path
Is there any contamination or obstruction on the Remove the
2 Go to Step 3
paper transport path between the paper feed and obstruction
output?
Check the Rollers on the paper transport path Clean or replace
3 Are the Rollers on the paper transport path normal Go to Step 4 the corresponding
without contamination, damage, or wear and tear? Roller
Check the installation of the FUSER ASSY Reinstall the
4 Go to Step 5
Is the FUSER ASSY installed properly? FUSER ASSY
Check after the replacement of FUSER ASSY
Replace the parts
WARNING: Perform servicing after the FUSER
ASSY has cooled down. Procedure is considered to be
5
complete the cause in
Replace the FUSER ASSY and perform test print.
sequence
Is the image printed normally?

3-19
 Chapter 3 Image Quality Troubleshooting
3.1 Image Quality Problem

FIP.P14 Unfused Image

Problem Details

Printed images are not properly fused onto the paper. When rubbed, the
image comes off easily.

Parts considered to be the cause

• FUSER ASSY (PL8.1.11)

• ESS PWB (PL11.1.7)
• MCU PWB (PL11.1.3)

HMR06514AA

Before performing troubleshooting, check the printer paper transport path. Check that there are no foreign
substances such as staples, paper clips, or bits of paper on the transport path.

Procedure Check and Action Yes No

Check the paper type settings
Set the correct
1 Does the printed paper match the paper type that is Go to Step 2
paper type
set?
Check the paper
Load a new and dry sheet of recommended paper Procedure is
2 Go to Step 3
and perform test print. complete
Is the image printed normally?
Check after the replacement of FUSER ASSY
WARNING: Perform servicing after the FUSER
ASSY has cooled down. Procedure is
3 Go to Step 4
complete
Replace the FUSER ASSY and perform test print.
Is the image printed normally?
Replace the parts
Check after the replacement of MCU PWB
Procedure is considered to be
4 Replace the MCU PWB and perform test print.
complete the cause in
Is the image printed normally?
sequence

3-20
Chapter 4 Disassembly/Assembly and
Adjustment
Table of Contents
4.1 Preface .......................................................................................................................4-1
4.1.1 Before Servicing.............................................................................................................................. 4-2
4.1.2 Procedure Notations ....................................................................................................................... 4-4
4.1.3 How to Use the Disassembly/Assembly and Adjustment ............................................................... 4-5
4.1.4 Terms and Symbols ........................................................................................................................ 4-7
4.2 Disassembly/Assembly...............................................................................................4-8
PL1 COVERS .......................................................................................................................................... 4-8
REP1.1 COVER STACK (PL1.1.4) ..................................................................................................... 4-8
REP1.2 COVER RIGHT SIDE (PL1.1.9) ............................................................................................ 4-9
REP1.3 COVER LEFT SIDE (PL1.1.14) / SIDE FAN (PL10.1.5) ..................................................... 4-10
REP1.4 CONSOLE ASSY (PL1.1.3)................................................................................................. 4-12
REP1.5 COVER TOP ASSY (PL1.1.2) ............................................................................................. 4-14
REP1.6 KIT COVER FRONT (PL1.1.11) .......................................................................................... 4-17
REP1.7 COVER RIGHT FRONT (PL1.1.10) .................................................................................... 4-19
REP1.8 COVER LEFT FRONT (PL1.1.13)....................................................................................... 4-20
REP1.9 COVER DUP TOP (PL1.1.1) ............................................................................................... 4-21
REP1.10 COVER REAR (PL1.1.7) ................................................................................................... 4-22
REP1.11 KIT COVER MIDDLE (PL1.1.8)......................................................................................... 4-23
PL2 250/550 FEEDER & CASSETTE.................................................................................................... 4-25
REP2.1 GUIDE ASSY CST (PL2.1.1/PL2.3.1) ................................................................................. 4-25
REP2.2 (SCC) FEEDER ASSY SUB 250 (PL2.1.2) ......................................................................... 4-29
REP2.3 (SCC) FEEDER ASSY SUB 550 (PL2.4.1) ......................................................................... 4-30
REP2.4 (SCC) TRAY NO PAPER SENSOR (PL2.1.3/PL2.4.11) ..................................................... 4-32
REP2.5 ROLL ASSY FEED (PL2.1.4/PL2.4.10)............................................................................... 4-33
REP2.6 ACTUATOR NO PAPER (PL2.1.8/PL2.4.6) ........................................................................ 4-35
REP2.7 BRACKET ASSY FDR (PL2.1.11/PL2.3.3) ......................................................................... 4-36
REP2.8 (SCC) SIZE SWITCH (PL2.1.13/PL2.3.8) ........................................................................... 4-37
REP2.9 (SCC) COVER CST (PL2.1.14/PL2.3.9) ............................................................................. 4-38
REP2.10 CHUTE TURN ASSY IOT 550 (PL2.3.13)......................................................................... 4-39
REP2.11 (SCC) TURN CLUTCH (PL2.4.3) ...................................................................................... 4-40
REP2.12 (SCC) FEED CLUTCH (PL2.4.4)....................................................................................... 4-41
REP2.13 ROLL ASSY TURN (PL2.4.12).......................................................................................... 4-42
REP2.14 GUIDE AS SD R A3 (PL2.2.2/PL2.5.2) / GUIDE AS SD L A3 (PL2.2.4/PL2.5.4) ............. 4-44
REP2.15 PLATE ASSY BTM SP (PL2.2.5/PL2.5.5) ......................................................................... 4-47
REP2.16 HOLDER ASSY RETARD (PL2.2.17/PL2.5.17) ................................................................ 4-50
REP2.17 ROLL ASSY FEED (PL2.2.19/PL2.5.19)........................................................................... 4-52
REP2.18 HOUSING EXIT CST (PL2.2.20/PL2.5.23) ....................................................................... 4-55
REP2.19 KIT PLATE GEAR LOCK (PL2.2.23/PL2.5.25) ................................................................. 4-56
REP2.20 KIT EXT CST 550 (PL2.5.29) ............................................................................................ 4-58
REP2.21 HANDLE CST (PL2.2.27/PL2.5.35)................................................................................... 4-60
REP2.22 WHEEL SIZE ASSY (PL2.2.28/PL2.5.36) ......................................................................... 4-61
REP2.23 KIT LEVER BTM LOCK 250 (PL2.2.31) ............................................................................ 4-62
REP2.24 KIT LEVER BTM LOCK 550 (PL2.5.39) ............................................................................ 4-64
REP2.25 CHUTE RETARD CST (PL2.2.15/PL2.5.15) ..................................................................... 4-66
PL3 MSI ................................................................................................................................................. 4-68
 REP3.1 MSI FEED SOLENOID (PL3.1.1) ........................................................................................ 4-68
REP3.2 KIT GEAR MSI (PL3.1.2)..................................................................................................... 4-71
REP3.3 COVER ROLL FEED (PL3.1.13) ......................................................................................... 4-73
REP3.4 CHUTE ASSY DUP (PL3.1.7) ............................................................................................. 4-74
REP3.5 KIT ACTUATOR NO PAPER MSI (PL3.1.8) ....................................................................... 4-76
REP3.6 (SCC) MSI NO PAPER SENSOR (PL3.1.11)...................................................................... 4-78
REP3.7 CAM MSI/PIN MSI (PL3.1.14/PL3.1.15).............................................................................. 4-79
REP3.8 MSI FEED ROLL (PL3.1.17) ............................................................................................... 4-82
REP3.9 KIT FRAME RETARD BASE (PL3.1.19) ............................................................................. 4-83
REP3.10 HOLDER ASSY RETARD (PL3.1.21) ............................................................................... 4-84
REP3.11 TRAY ASSY MSI (PL3.1.22) ............................................................................................. 4-85
PL4 FRONT FRAME.............................................................................................................................. 4-86
REP4.1 KIT FRAME FRONT (PL4.1.1) ............................................................................................ 4-86
REP4.2 COVER ASSY FRAME FRONT (PL4.1.2) .......................................................................... 4-90
REP4.3 BTR (PL4.1.3)...................................................................................................................... 4-91
REP4.4 KIT LEVER FRONT (PL4.1.4) ............................................................................................. 4-94
PL5 REGI............................................................................................................................................... 4-95
REP5.1 KIT REGIST/(SCC) REGI CLUTCH (PL5.1.1/PL5.1.2) ....................................................... 4-95
REP5.2 (SCC) REGI SENSOR (PL5.1.4)......................................................................................... 4-98
PL6 XEROGRAPHICS......................................................................................................................... 4-100
PL7 ROS.............................................................................................................................................. 4-101
REP7.1 (SCC) ROS ASSY (PL7.1.1) ............................................................................................. 4-101
PL8 FUSER ......................................................................................................................................... 4-104
REP8.1 KIT LEVER FUSER (PL8.1.1) ........................................................................................... 4-104
REP8.2 (SCC) FUSER ASSY (PL8.1.11) ....................................................................................... 4-106
PL9 DRIVE........................................................................................................................................... 4-107
REP9.1 (SCC) BRACKET ASSY EXIT (PL9.1.1) ........................................................................... 4-107
REP9.2 (SCC) DRIVE ASSY (PL9.1.2) .......................................................................................... 4-110
REP9.3 (SCC) MAIN MOTOR (PL9.1.3) ........................................................................................ 4-111
PL10 FAN ............................................................................................................................................ 4-112
REP10.1 DUCT ASSY FAN MIDDLE (PL10.1.1) ........................................................................... 4-112
REP10.2 (SCC) MIDDLE FAN (PL10.1.2) ...................................................................................... 4-115
REP10.3 REAR FAN (PL10.1.4)..................................................................................................... 4-116
PL11 ELECTRICAL ............................................................................................................................. 4-119
REP11.1 SHIELD ASSY ESS (PL11.1.1) ....................................................................................... 4-119
REP11.2 (SCC) MCU PWB (PL11.1.3) .......................................................................................... 4-120
REP11.3 CHASSIS ESS ASSY (and (SCC) MCU PWB,(ISC) (SCC) ESS PWB)(PL11.1.4)......... 4-123
REP11.4 (SCC) HVPS (PL11.1.5) .................................................................................................. 4-126
REP11.5 (SCC) LVPS (PL11.1.6)................................................................................................... 4-128
REP11.6 (ISC) (SCC) ESS PWB (PL11.1.7) .................................................................................. 4-130
PL12 FRAME ....................................................................................................................................... 4-132
REP12.1 KIT BASE ASSY INTERLOCK (PL12.1.1) ...................................................................... 4-132
REP12.2 KIT ARM SHUTTER (PL12.1.2) ...................................................................................... 4-136
REP12.3 HARNESS ASSY INTERLOCK (PL12.1.4) ..................................................................... 4-138
REP12.4 BRACKET ASSY CRUM SP (PL12.1.17)........................................................................ 4-140
PL13 DUPLEX ..................................................................................................................................... 4-142
REP13.1 (SCC) DUPLEX ASSY (PL13.1.1)................................................................................... 4-142
 REP13.2 (SCC) EXIT DRIVE ASSY (PL13.1.2) ............................................................................. 4-143
REP13.3 ROLL DUP (PL13.2.1)..................................................................................................... 4-144
REP13.4 KIT ACTUATOR DUP (PL13.2.4).................................................................................... 4-147
REP13.5 (SCC) SENSOR PHOTO (Dup Jam Sensor) (PL13.2.7)................................................. 4-148
REP13.6 (SCC) SENSOR PHOTO (Dup Cover Open Sensor) (PL13.2.7) .................................... 4-149
REP13.7 (SCC) DUP MOTOR (PL13.2.13).................................................................................... 4-151
REP13.8 COVER R (PL13.2.16) .................................................................................................... 4-153
REP13.9 CHUTE COVER (PL13.2.18)........................................................................................... 4-154
REP13.10 COVER L (PL13.2.19) ................................................................................................... 4-155
REP13.11 DUP PWB (PL13.2.21) .................................................................................................. 4-156
REP13.12 CHUTE UNDER (PL13.2.23)......................................................................................... 4-157
REP13.13 COVER REAR (PL13.2.24) ........................................................................................... 4-158
PL14 OPTION FEEDER & CASSETTE............................................................................................... 4-159
REP14.1 FEEDER ASSY (PL14.1.1/PL15.1.1) .............................................................................. 4-159
REP14.2 (SCC) COVER CST (PL14.1.2/PL15.1.2) ....................................................................... 4-161
REP14.3 (SCC) COVER FDR R (PL14.1.4/PL15.1.4).................................................................... 4-162
REP14.4 (SCC) COVER FDR FRONT R (PL14.1.6/PL15.1.6) ...................................................... 4-163
REP14.5 (SCC) COVER FDR L (PL14.1.7/PL15.1.7) .................................................................... 4-164
REP14.6 FEEDER ASSY SUB SP (PL14.2.1/PL15.2.1) ................................................................ 4-165
REP14.7 PLATE CHUTE (PL14.2.2/PL15.2.2)............................................................................... 4-167
REP14.8 (SCC) PAPER EDGE SENSOR (PL14.2.4/PL15.2.4)..................................................... 4-169
REP14.9 DRIVE ASSY OPTION (PL14.2.6/PL15.2.6) ................................................................... 4-170
REP14.10 CHUTE ASSY TURN OPT (PL14.2.7/PL15.2.7) ........................................................... 4-171
REP14.11 KIT ACTUATOR EDGE OPTFDR (PL14.2.12/PL15.2.12) ............................................ 4-172
REP14.12 KIT GUIDE CST R (PL14.2.15/PL15.2.15).................................................................... 4-174
REP14.13 KIT GUIDE CST L (PL14.2.16/PL15.2.16) .................................................................... 4-176
REP14.14 (SCC) SIZE SWITCH (PL14.2.17/PL15.2.17) ............................................................... 4-178
REP14.15 (SCC) FDR PWB (PL14.2.18/PL15.2.18)...................................................................... 4-179
REP14.16 (SCC) TURN CLUTCH (PL14.3.3/PL15.3.3)................................................................. 4-180
REP14.17 (SCC) FEED CLUTCH (PL14.3.4/PL15.3.4) ................................................................. 4-181
REP14.18 ACTUATOR NO PAPER (PL14.3.6/PL15.3.6) .............................................................. 4-182
REP14.19 ROLL ASSY FEED (PL14.3.10/PL15.3.10)................................................................... 4-184
REP14.20 (SCC) TRAY NO PAPER SENSOR (PL14.3.11/PL15.3.11) ......................................... 4-186
REP14.21 ROLL ASSY TURN (PL14.3.12/PL15.3.12) .................................................................. 4-187
4.3 Adjustment..............................................................................................................4-188
4.3.1 Firmware Download ((ISC) (SCC) ESS PWB / MPC) ................................................................. 4-188
4.3.2 Things to take note when replacing Important Information Stored Components ........................ 4-191
Chapter 4 Disassembly/Assembly and Adjustment
4.1 Preface

4.1 Preface
This chapter is organized into 14 sections, each of which corresponds to a unit in Parts List and describes
how to remove the main parts.
PL1 COVERS
PL2 250/550 FEEDER & CASSETTE*1
PL3 MSI
PL4 FRONT FRAME
PL5 REGI
PL6 XEROGRAPHICS
PL7 ROS
PL8 DEVELOPMENT
PL9 FUSER
PL10 DRIVE
PL11 ELECTRICAL
PL12 FRAME
PL13 DUPLEX
PL14 OPTION FEEDER & CASSETTE*2

Closely observe the installation status before servicing a part that is managed as spare parts that does not
have its procedure described here.
In principle, optional parts must be removed when servicing. However, if it is not necessary, you can perform
servicing with the parts installed.

*1. The Feeder/Cassette attached to the main machine comes in 2 different specifications: the 250 Sheet model and the
550 Sheet model. In the Parts List, PL2.1 and PL2.2 refer to the 250 Sheet model while PL2.3, PL2.4, and PL2.5 refer
to the 550 Sheet model.
*2. The same removal/installation procedures can be applied to the optional Feeder/Cassette, which also comes in 250
Sheet and 550 Sheet models. Although PL15 is also a 550 Sheet model in the Parts List, here, its removal/installation
procedures are explained as PL14. The illustration used is a 550 Sheet model.

4-1
 Chapter 4 Disassembly/Assembly and Adjustment
4.1 Preface

4.1.1 Before Servicing

• Turn OFF the power and disconnect the power plug from the outlet before servicing.
• When servicing, as much as possible, perform grounding for the service personnel with wrist bands
etc. to remove static electricity from the body.
• Remove the CRU ASSY (PL6.1.1) and disassemble it when necessary.
• Wait until the FUSER ASSY and surrounding temperatures get low enough before servicing around
the FUSER ASSY.
• Be careful not to use extreme force during servicing as it may damage parts and cause malfunction.
• Place the CRU ASSY, CASSETTE ASSY, and etc. in a place where they would not interfere with
servicing. (However, if it is not necessary, you can perform servicing with them remaining installed)

CRU ASSY

CASSETTE ASSY

HMR07020AA
Figure 4-1 Before Servicing

• As many different types of screws are being used, do not use them in the wrong places. Be extra
careful when differentiating between the plastic screw and the metal screw. Wrong installation will
cause damage to the screw holes. Wrong installation may also crush the screw thread, and cause
problems to occur.

For the screw installation positions on the circuit board and metal parts that are marked with "TAP", use the
plastic tap screw.

4-2
Chapter 4 Disassembly/Assembly and Adjustment
4.1 Preface

Table 4-1 Screw Types

Mainly used
No. Type Usage Shape How To Identify CAUTION
at
This has the
function that
Plastic • Silver
drills a hole by
Plastic • The screw thread
itself. Therefore,
Screw is coarser than the
1 if it is fastened
Coarse metal type
askew, the
Silver Tapped • The screw tip is
Parts etc Plastic screw thread
sharper
will be
damaged.
This has the
• Silver function that
Plastic Plastic • Collared drills a hole by
Screw
• The screw thread itself. Therefore,
2 is coarser than the if it is fastened
With Silver Coarse metal type askew, the
Collar
Parts etc Plastic • The screw tip is screw thread
Tapped
sharper will be
damaged.
Metal
Metal
• Silver
Screw
3 • The thread
diameter is even
Silver Parts etc Sheet metal

Metal Metal
• Silver
Screw
• Collared
4
• The thread
With Silver
Parts etc Sheet metal
diameter is even
Collar

Metal Metal • Check the

• Silver
Screw installation
• With Washer
5 location of
• The thread
Silver, with MAINSW
diameter is even
Washer Parts etc Sheet metal Ground Wire

4-3
 Chapter 4 Disassembly/Assembly and Adjustment
4.1 Preface

4.1.2 Procedure Notations

• The phrase "REPX.Y "AAAAA"" indicates that the parts named "AAAAA" is the one to be removed/
installed.
• The note "(PLX.Y.Z)" appearing after a parts name in the procedure indicates that the parts
corresponds to item "Z" of the plate (PL) "X.Y" in "Chapter 5 Parts List". Therefore, you can refer to
"Chapter 5 Parts List" for more information on the shape and installation position, etc. of the parts.
• When the description "For ... machine" appears in the procedures, you need to do the procedure for
the appropriate machines. (Do not perform the procedure for other machines.)
• The phrase "(REPX.Y)" appearing in or at the end of a procedure indicates that the procedures
related to "REPX.Y" are described.
• The screws in figures are to be fastened/removed with a cross-slot screwdriver, unless otherwise
specified.
• Black arrows in the figures indicate that you must move the part in the direction of the arrow.
Numbers in the figures indicate that you must move the parts in the order of the numbers.
• Refer to "Chapter 7 Wiring Data" for the positions of connectors (P/J).
• In PL2 250/550 FEEDER & CASSETTE, if the procedures for 250 Sheet and 550 Sheet models
differ due to components exclusive to the respective models, "250 Sheet model" or "550 Sheet
model" will be indicated just below the title.
When the procedures are the same, nothing will be indicated.

4-4
Chapter 4 Disassembly/Assembly and Adjustment
4.1 Preface

4.1.3 How to Use the Disassembly/Assembly and Adjustment

The following are some of the rules for procedures involving the disassembly, assembly, replacement, and
adjustment of parts that are required during field service.

1 [Sub System]: The DocuPrint 2065/3055 are proportioned and listed as 14 Sub Systems. Each
sub system is in turn divided into several items (titles), and each title has an item number set for
it. This number matches the Plate No. that is listed in Chapter 5 Parts List. This way, searching is
simplified by the configuration that makes it possible to refer to the various procedures from the
Parts List, and vice versa.

[Example]
Disassembly/Assembly/Adjustment: 1.1.1XXX Assembly
Parts List: PL1.1 XXX Unit

2 [Figure -]: The (Figure -1) at the end of the text indicates that the detailed procedure is the
procedure that is in the illustration.
The illustration only shows one side of the top/bottom, left/right symmetrical parts.

3 [Installation]: Installation only indicates things that you have to note when performing the removal
procedures in reverse.

4 [Replacement Procedure]: Simple replacement procedures that do not require removal and
installation steps are not listed here. However, notes are provided for cases that may require
related adjustments.

5 [Referral Procedure]: The (REP or ADJ 2.1.3) after a procedure indicates the Disassembly/
Assembly/Adjustment item to refer to.

6 [Prerequisite]: Make sure to verify this as it is stated in the notes before the procedure.

7 [Modification]: When there are differences due to modifications to the title item or procedure, a
modification number will be listed at the start of that procedure.

[Example 1]
X. X. X "A" Roller [Models with 5V]
*Indicates that the entire procedure under this title applies to models with 5V modification.

[Example 2]
2. [Models without 3V]: Remove Roller "B".
*Indicates that this procedure only applies to machines without 3V modification.

[Example 3]
Figure 1 [Models with 3V]
*Indicates that Figure 1 is a reference figure consisting of a model with 3V modification.

4-5
 Chapter 4 Disassembly/Assembly and Adjustment
4.1 Preface
[Example 4]
This symbol shows the configuration after the part was modified by the Tag No. within the circle.

This symbol shows the configuration before the part was modified by the Tag No. within the circle.

8 [Names for machine orientation]: Positions or directions of the machine and directions of the
machine interior used in procedures are defined as follows.

• Front: Front of the machine

• Right: Right-hand side when facing the front of the machine
• Left: Left-hand side when facing the front of the machine
• Rear: Rear when facing the front of the machine

REAR

LEFT

RIGHT

FRONT HMR07022FA
Figure 4-2 Machine

4-6
Chapter 4 Disassembly/Assembly and Adjustment
4.1 Preface

4.1.4 Terms and Symbols

The terminology and symbols used throughout this service manual are described as follows.
• The terms and symbols used at the beginning of a text are defined as follows:

DANGER

Indicates an imminently hazardous situation, such as death or serious injury if operators do not handle
the machine correctly by disregarding the statement.

WARNING

Indicates a potentially hazardous situation, such as death or serious injury if operators do not handle
the machine correctly by disregarding the statement.

CAUTION

Indicates a potentially hazardous situation, such as injury or property damage if operators do not
handle the machine correctly by disregarding the statement.

Point

Used to alert you to a procedure, if not strictly observed, could result in damage to the machine or
equipment.

Note

Used when work procedures and rules are emphasized.

Reference

Used when other explanations are given.

Purpose

Used to explain purpose of adjustment.

• REP: Indicates the disassembly/assembly procedure for reference.

• ADJ: Adjustment Indicates the adjustment procedure for reference.
• PL: Indicates the Parts List for reference.

Safety Critical Components (SCC)

For the safety control of the Safety Critical Components and the components specified, follow the
regulations regarding the Safety Critical Components set by Fuji Xerox Co., Ltd.

Important Information Stored Component (ISC)

This component stores all the important customer information that is input after the installation. When
performing replacement, follow the procedures in "Chapter 4 Disassembly/Assembly and Adjustment"
to replace/discard. Make absolutely sure that no customer information gets leaked outside.

4-7
 Chapter 4 Disassembly/Assembly and Adjustment
4.2 Disassembly/Assembly

4.2 Disassembly/Assembly
PL1 COVERS
REP1.1 COVER STACK (PL1.1.4)

Removal

1 Remove the screws (x2, Silver, with Washer, 8mm) that secure the COVER STACK to the
machine.

2 Remove the COVER STACK from the machine.

COVER STACK

HMR07030AA
Figure 4-3 COVER STACK

4-8
Chapter 4 Disassembly/Assembly and Adjustment
4.2 Disassembly/Assembly

REP1.2 COVER RIGHT SIDE (PL1.1.9)

Removal

1 Remove the COVER STACK. (REP1.1)

2 Release the Latch and open the FRAME FRONT.

3 Open the COVER TOP ASSY.

4 Remove the screw (Silver, with Washer, 8mm) that secures the COVER RIGHT SIDE to the
machine.

5 Shift the COVER RIGHT SIDE to the rear to release the hook, and then lift it up to remove it from
the machine.

COVER RIGHT SIDE

HMR07031AA
Figure 4-4 COVER RIGHT SIDE

4-9
 Chapter 4 Disassembly/Assembly and Adjustment
4.2 Disassembly/Assembly

REP1.3 COVER LEFT SIDE (PL1.1.14) / SIDE FAN (PL10.1.5)

Removal

1 Remove the COVER STACK. (REP1.1)

2 Release the Latch and open the FRAME FRONT.

3 Open the COVER TOP ASSY.

4 Remove the screw (Silver, with Washer, 8mm) that secures the COVER LEFT SIDE to the
machine.

5 Shift the COVER LEFT SIDE to the rear to release the hook, and then lift it up to remove it from
the machine.

6 Disconnect the connector (P/J1610) that is connected to the SIDE FAN (PL10.1.5) from the
machine.

7 Remove the screws (x2, Silver, Tapped, 30mm) that secure the SIDE FAN to the COVER LEFT
SIDE.

8 Remove the SIDE FAN from the COVER LEFT SIDE.

NOTE

Install the SIDE FAN such that the labeled side is facing left (outwards).

4-10
Chapter 4 Disassembly/Assembly and Adjustment
4.2 Disassembly/Assembly

COVER LEFT SIDE

SIDE FAN

LABEL

HMR07032AA
Figure 4-5 COVER LEFT SIDE/SIDE FAN

4-11
 Chapter 4 Disassembly/Assembly and Adjustment
4.2 Disassembly/Assembly

REP1.4 CONSOLE ASSY (PL1.1.3)

Removal

1 Release the Latch and open the FRAME FRONT.

2 Open the COVER TOP ASSY.

3 Release the hooks (x2 locations) that secure the CONSOLE ASSY to the machine, and then
release the catches (x3 locations) at the front to remove the CONSOLE ASSY.

4 Disconnect the connector (P/J300) that is connected to the CONSOLE ASSY.

5 Remove the CONSOLE ASSY from the COVER TOP ASSY.

4-12
Chapter 4 Disassembly/Assembly and Adjustment
4.2 Disassembly/Assembly

CONSOLE ASSY

HMR07033AA
Figure 4-6 CONSOLE ASSY

4-13
 Chapter 4 Disassembly/Assembly and Adjustment
4.2 Disassembly/Assembly

REP1.5 COVER TOP ASSY (PL1.1.2)

Removal

1 Remove the COVER STACK. (REP1.1)

2 Remove the SHIELD ASSY ESS. (REP11.1)

3 Remove the COVER RIGHT SIDE. (REP1.2)

4 Remove the COVER LEFT SIDE. (REP1.3)

5 Remove the CONSOLE ASSY. (REP1.4)

6 Open the Saddle Edge that is attached to the CHASSIS ESS (PL11.1.4).

7 Remove the screw (Silver, with Washer, 8mm) that secures the COVER MCU to the SHIELD
ASSY ESS and remove the COVER MCU.

8 Disconnect the connector (P/J5) that is connected to the ESS PWB, release the clamps (x4
locations) that secure the harness, and then remove the harness.

9 Remove the harness from the Harness Guide at the left side of the KIT COVER MIDDLE
(PL1.1.8).

10 One side at a time, open the left and right installation section of the COVER TOP ASSY
outwards to remove the COVER TOP ASSY from the machine.

11 Pull out the harness and connector through the hole at the left installation section of the COVER
TOP ASSY and remove the COVER TOP ASSY.

NOTE

When installing the COVER TOP ASSY, make sure that the harness fits properly through the
groove at the left installation section of the COVER TOP ASSY, and that it does not get
pinched.

4-14
Chapter 4 Disassembly/Assembly and Adjustment
4.2 Disassembly/Assembly

COVER MCU

HMR07168AA

Figure 4-7 COVER TOP ASSY

4-15
 Chapter 4 Disassembly/Assembly and Adjustment
4.2 Disassembly/Assembly

NOTE

COVER TOP ASSY

HMR07035AA
Figure 4-8 COVER TOP ASSY

4-16
Chapter 4 Disassembly/Assembly and Adjustment
4.2 Disassembly/Assembly

REP1.6 KIT COVER FRONT (PL1.1.11)

Removal

1 Open the KIT COVER FRONT.

2 Open the TRAY ASSY MSI (PL3.1.22) links (x2 locations) at the front of the KIT COVER FRONT
to the right and the left to remove the Bosses and release the TRAY ASSY MSI.

3 Turn the knob of the PIN CVR FRONT (PL1.1.12) upwards and pull it out.

4 Slide out the right installation section of the KIT COVER FRONT from the boss and remove the
KIT COVER FRONT from the machine.

TRAY ASSY MSI

KIT COVER FRONT

HMR07036AA
Figure 4-9 KIT COVER FRONT

4-17
 Chapter 4 Disassembly/Assembly and Adjustment
4.2 Disassembly/Assembly

PIN COVER FRONT

HMR07037AA
Figure 4-10 KIT COVER FRONT

4-18
Chapter 4 Disassembly/Assembly and Adjustment
4.2 Disassembly/Assembly

REP1.7 COVER RIGHT FRONT (PL1.1.10)

Removal

1 Remove the KIT COVER FRONT. (REP1.6)

2 Open the COVER DUP TOP.

3 Release the Latch and open the FRAME FRONT.

4 Remove the screw (Silver, Tapped, 8mm) that secures the COVER RIGHT FRONT to the
FRAME FRONT.

5 Release the hooks (x4 locations) that secure the COVER RIGHT FRONT to the FRAME FRONT
to remove the COVER RIGHT FRONT.

COVER RIGHT FRONT

HMR07038AA
Figure 4-11 COVER RIGHT FRONT

4-19
 Chapter 4 Disassembly/Assembly and Adjustment
4.2 Disassembly/Assembly

REP1.8 COVER LEFT FRONT (PL1.1.13)

Removal

1 Remove the KIT COVER FRONT. (REP1.6)

2 Open the COVER DUP TOP.

3 Release the Latch and open the FRAME FRONT.

4 Remove the screw (Silver, Tapped, 8mm) that secures the COVER LEFT FRONT to the FRAME
FRONT.

5 Release the hooks (x4 locations) that secure the COVER LEFT FRONT to the FRAME FRONT
to remove the COVER LEFT FRONT.

COVER LEFT FRONT

HMR07039AA
Figure 4-12 COVER LEFT FRONT

4-20
Chapter 4 Disassembly/Assembly and Adjustment
4.2 Disassembly/Assembly

REP1.9 COVER DUP TOP (PL1.1.1)

Removal

1 Remove the KIT COVER FRONT. (REP1.6)

2 Remove the COVER RIGHT FRONT. (REP1.7)

3 Remove the COVER LEFT FRONT. (REP1.8)

4 One side at a time, open the left and right installation section of the COVER DUP TOP outwards,
slide them out from the bosses and remove the COVER DUP TOP from the FRAME FRONT.

COVER DUP TOP HMR07040AA

Figure 4-13 COVER DUP TOP

4-21
 Chapter 4 Disassembly/Assembly and Adjustment
4.2 Disassembly/Assembly

REP1.10 COVER REAR (PL1.1.7)

Removal

1 Remove the COVER STACK. (REP1.1)

2 Remove the COVER RIGHT SIDE. (REP1.2)

3 Remove the COVER LEFT SIDE. (REP1.3)

4 Remove the SHIELD ASSY ESS. (REP11.1)

5 Remove the screws (x2, Silver, with Washer, 8mm) that secure the CHASSIS ESS ASSY
(PL11.1.4).

6 Remove the screws (x2, Silver, with Washer, 8mm) that secure the COVER REAR.

NOTE

Because the front of the CHASSIS ESS ASSY is fixed in place, perform lifting only up to the
minimum required height when performing the next step. Lifting too high may cause the front
installation section of the CHASSIS ESS ASSY to deform.

7 Lift the rear of the CHASSIS ESS ASSY slightly, release the top of the COVER REAR, and then
release the hooks (x3 locations) to remove the COVER REAR.

COVER REAR HMR07041AA

Figure 4-14 COVER REAR

4-22
Chapter 4 Disassembly/Assembly and Adjustment
4.2 Disassembly/Assembly

REP1.11 KIT COVER MIDDLE (PL1.1.8)

Removal

1 Remove the COVER STACK. (REP1.1)

2 Remove the COVER RIGHT SIDE. (REP1.2)

3 Remove the COVER LEFT SIDE. (REP1.3)

4 Remove the CONSOLE ASSY. (REP1.4)

5 Remove the COVER TOP ASSY. (REP1.5)

6 Remove the KIT LEVER FUSER. (REP8.1)

7 Remove the screws (x1, Silver, with Washer, 8mm, and x2, Silver, Tapped, 8mm) that secure the
KIT COVER MIDDLE to the machine.

8 Remove the harness from the Harness Guide of the KIT COVER MIDDLE.

9 Release the hooks (x2 locations) that secure the KIT COVER MIDDLE and remove the KIT
COVER MIDDLE from the machine.

4-23
 Chapter 4 Disassembly/Assembly and Adjustment
4.2 Disassembly/Assembly

KIT COVER MIDDLE

COVER REAR

HMR07042AA
Figure 4-15 KIT COVER MIDDLE

4-24
Chapter 4 Disassembly/Assembly and Adjustment
4.2 Disassembly/Assembly

PL2 250/550 FEEDER & CASSETTE

REP2.1 GUIDE ASSY CST (PL2.1.1/PL2.3.1)

Removal

NOTE

This procedure requires the machine to be lifted up, so it must be lightened. Depending on
circumstances, remove the CRU and FUSER ASSY, etc. before servicing.

1 Remove the COVER STACK. (REP1.1)

2 Remove the COVER RIGHT SIDE. (REP1.2)

3 Remove the COVER LEFT SIDE. (REP1.3)

4 Remove the DRIVE ASSY. (REP9.2)

5 Remove the SHIELD ASSY ESS. (REP11.1)

6 Open the Saddle Edge that is attached to the CHASSIS ESS (PL11.1.4).

7 Remove the screw (Silver, with Washer, 8mm) that secures the COVER MCU to the SHIELD
ASSY ESS and remove the COVER MCU.

NOTE

The step for disconnecting P/J27 applies only to 550 Sheet models. P/J27 does not exist for
250 Sheet models.

8 Disconnect the connectors (P/J11, P/J24, and P/J27) that are connected to the MCU, pull out the
harnesses from the Saddle Edge, and then remove the harnesses from the Harness Guide at the
left of the machine.

9 Disconnect the connector (P/J31) that is connected to the LVPS (PL11.1.6) from the right side of
the machine.

10 Remove the screw (Silver, with Washer, 8mm) that secures the ground wire to the metal frame at
the right side of the machine and disconnect the ground wire.

11 Remove the screw (Silver, with Washer, 8mm) that secures the BREAKER.

12 Remove the screws (x10, Silver, Tapped, 12mm) to separate the main machine from the GUIDE
ASSY CST.

NOTE

Hold on to the front and the rear of the machine when performing the next step.

13 Maintain the machine in horizontal position, lift it straight up and allow the disconnected
harnesses at the right and left sides to slip free.

4-25
Chapter 4 Disassembly/Assembly and Adjustment
4.2 Disassembly/Assembly

COVER MCU

MCU PWB
P/J27

P/J24

P/J11

HMR07043AA

HMR07044AA
Figure 4-16 GUIDE ASSY CST

4-26
Chapter 4 Disassembly/Assembly and Adjustment
4.2 Disassembly/Assembly

HMR07045AA

Figure 4-17 GUIDE ASSY CST

4-27
 Chapter 4 Disassembly/Assembly and Adjustment
4.2 Disassembly/Assembly

GUIDE ASSY CST

HMR07046AA
Figure 4-18 GUIDE ASSY CST

4-28
Chapter 4 Disassembly/Assembly and Adjustment
4.2 Disassembly/Assembly

REP2.2 (SCC) FEEDER ASSY SUB 250 (PL2.1.2)

250 Sheet model

Removal

1 Remove the GUIDE ASSY CST. (REP2.1)

2 Disconnect the connector (P/J1110) that is connected to the SIZE SWITCH (PL2.1.13).

3 Disconnect the connector (P/J1120) that is connected to the BRACKET ASSY FDR (PL2.1.11).

4 Remove the screws (x4, Silver, Tapped, 12mm) that secure the FEEDER ASSY SUB 250 to the
GUIDE ASSY CST.

5 Remove the FEEDER ASSY SUB 250 from the GUIDE ASSY CST.

SIZE SWITCH

FEEDER ASSY SUB

HMR07047AA
Figure 4-19 FEEDER ASSY SUB 250

4-29
 Chapter 4 Disassembly/Assembly and Adjustment
4.2 Disassembly/Assembly

REP2.3 (SCC) FEEDER ASSY SUB 550 (PL2.4.1)

550 Sheet model

Removal

1 Remove the GUIDE ASSY CST. (REP2.1)

2 Disconnect the connector (P/J1110) that is connected to the SIZE SWITCH (PL2.3.8).

3 Disconnect the connector (P/J1120) that is connected to the BRACKET ASSY FDR (PL2.3.3).

4 Remove the screws (x4, Silver, Tapped, 12mm) that secure the FEEDER ASSY SUB 550 to the
GUIDE ASSY CST.

5 Remove the FEEDER ASSY SUB 550 from the GUIDE ASSY CST.

NOTE

When installing the FEEDER ASSY SUB, make sure that the depressed part of FEED CLUTCH
(PL2.4.4) is inserted into the groove of GUIDE ASSY CST.

4-30
Chapter 4 Disassembly/Assembly and Adjustment
4.2 Disassembly/Assembly

SIZE SWITCH

FEEDER ASSY SUB

FEED CLUTCH

HMR07048AA
Figure 4-20 FEEDER ASSY SUB 550

4-31
 Chapter 4 Disassembly/Assembly and Adjustment
4.2 Disassembly/Assembly

REP2.4 (SCC) TRAY NO PAPER SENSOR (PL2.1.3/PL2.4.11)

Removal

1 Remove the GUIDE ASSY CST. (REP2.1)

2 Disconnect the connector (P/J1130) that is connected to the TRAY NO PAPER SENSOR.

3 Release the hooks that secure the TRAY NO PAPER SENSOR to the FEEDER ASSY SUB to
remove the TRAY NO PAPER SENSOR.

TRAY NO PAPER SENSOR

HMR07049AA
Figure 4-21 TRAY NO PAPER SENSOR

4-32
Chapter 4 Disassembly/Assembly and Adjustment
4.2 Disassembly/Assembly

REP2.5 ROLL ASSY FEED (PL2.1.4/PL2.4.10)

Removal

1 Remove the CASSETTE ASSY of the main machine.

NOTE

When removing the ROLL ASSY FEED in the following steps, take note of the CLUTCH ONE
WAY FEED (PL2.1.5/PL2.4.9) that might drop off.

2 Release the hook that secures the ROLL ASSY FEED to the FEEDER ASSY SUB (PL2.1.2/
PL2.4.1) shaft, and pull out the ROLL ASSY FEED to remove it.

NOTE

When installing the ROLL ASSY FEED, make sure that the hook is securely latched on.

NOTE

After replacing the ROLL ASSY FEED, you must also clear the corresponding life counter.
To clear the life counter, enter CE mode and go to the menu: Parameter / Life Counter / Tray 1 Roll.
(Refer to "2.4.4 Menu Tree" of "2.4 CE Mode" in "Chapter 2 Troubleshooting")

4-33
Chapter 4 Disassembly/Assembly and Adjustment
4.2 Disassembly/Assembly

CLUTCH ONE WAY FEED

ROLL ASSY FEED HMR07050AA

Figure 4-22 ROLL ASSY FEED

4-34
Chapter 4 Disassembly/Assembly and Adjustment
4.2 Disassembly/Assembly

REP2.6 ACTUATOR NO PAPER (PL2.1.8/PL2.4.6)

Removal

1 Remove the GUIDE ASSY CST. (REP2.1)

2 Remove the FEEDER ASSY SUB. (REP2.2)/(REP2.3)

3 While simultaneously pushing in the bosses (x2 locations) at the left side of the FEEDER ASSY
SUB, slide the HOLDER NO PAPER L (PL2.1.7/PL2.4.7) to the front, release the hooks (x4
locations) and remove the HOLDER NO PAPER L.

4 Pull out the ACTUATOR NO PAPER shaft from the installation section of ACTUATOR NO
PAPER of HOLDER NO PAPER R.

HOLDER NO PAPER L

ACTUATOR NO PAPER

HMR07051AA
Figure 4-23 ACTUATOR NO PAPER

4-35
 Chapter 4 Disassembly/Assembly and Adjustment
4.2 Disassembly/Assembly

REP2.7 BRACKET ASSY FDR (PL2.1.11/PL2.3.3)

Removal

1 Remove the GUIDE ASSY CST. (REP2.1)

2 Remove the FEEDER ASSY SUB. (REP2.2)/(REP2.3)

3 Remove the screws that secure the BRACKET ASSY FDR to the GUIDE ASSY CST.
250 Sheet models: screw x1, Silver, Tapped, 8mm
550 Sheet models: screw x2, Silver, Tapped, 8mm

4 Remove the BRACKET ASSY FDR from the GUIDE ASSY CST.

BRACKET ASSY FDR

(550FEEDER)

BRACKET ASSY FDR

(250FEEDER)

HMR07052AA

Figure 4-24 BRACKET ASSY FDR

4-36
Chapter 4 Disassembly/Assembly and Adjustment
4.2 Disassembly/Assembly

REP2.8 (SCC) SIZE SWITCH (PL2.1.13/PL2.3.8)

Removal

1 Remove the GUIDE ASSY CST. (REP2.1)

2 Disconnect the connector (P/J1110) that is connected to the SIZE SWITCH.

3 Release the hooks at the bottom of the GUIDE ASSY CST that secure the SIZE SWITCH and
remove the SIZE SWITCH.

SIZE SWITCH

HMR07053AA
Figure 4-25 SIZE SWITCH

4-37
 Chapter 4 Disassembly/Assembly and Adjustment
4.2 Disassembly/Assembly

REP2.9 (SCC) COVER CST (PL2.1.14/PL2.3.9)

Removal

1 Remove the CASSETTE ASSY of the main machine.

2 Pull out the COVER CST to the rear until it stop and bend the right and left installation sections
downwards to remove it.

COVER CST

HMR07054AA
Figure 4-26 COVER CST

4-38
Chapter 4 Disassembly/Assembly and Adjustment
4.2 Disassembly/Assembly

REP2.10 CHUTE TURN ASSY IOT 550 (PL2.3.13)

550 Sheet model

Removal

1 Remove the GUIDE ASSY CST. (REP2.1)

2 Remove the CASSETTE ASSY of the main machine.

3 Remove the screws (x2, Silver, Tapped, 8mm) that secure the CHUTE TURN ASSY IOT 550 to
the GUIDE ASSY CST.

4 Remove the notches of the CHUTE TURN ASSY IOT 550 from the right and left BEARINGs, and
remove the CHUTE TURN ASSY IOT 550.

CHUTE TURN ASSY IOT 550

HMR07055AA
Figure 4-27 CHUTE TURN ASSY IOT 550

4-39
 Chapter 4 Disassembly/Assembly and Adjustment
4.2 Disassembly/Assembly

REP2.11 (SCC) TURN CLUTCH (PL2.4.3)

550 Sheet model

Removal

1 Remove the GUIDE ASSY CST. (REP2.1)

2 Remove the FEEDER ASSY SUB. (REP2.3)

3 Disconnect the connector (P/J2710) (White) on the harness that is connected to the TURN
CLUTCH, and remove the harness from the Saddle Edge.

4 Remove the plastic clip that secures the TURN CLUTCH.

5 While slipping off the depressed part of the TURN CLUTCH from the protrusion of the FEEDER
ASSY SUB, remove the TURN CLUTCH from the shaft.

TURN CLUTCH

HMR07056AA
Figure 4-28 TURN CLUTCH

4-40
Chapter 4 Disassembly/Assembly and Adjustment
4.2 Disassembly/Assembly

REP2.12 (SCC) FEED CLUTCH (PL2.4.4)

550 Sheet model

Removal

1 Remove the GUIDE ASSY CST. (REP2.1)

2 Remove the FEEDER ASSY SUB. (REP2.3)

3 Disconnect the connector (P/J2720) (Yellow) on the harness that is connected to the FEED
CLUTCH, and remove the harness from the Saddle Edge.

4 Remove the plastic clip that secures the FEED CLUTCH.

5 Remove the FEED CLUTCH from the FEEDER ASSY SUB shaft.

FEED CLUTCH
HMR07057AA
Figure 4-29 FEED CLUTCH

4-41
 Chapter 4 Disassembly/Assembly and Adjustment
4.2 Disassembly/Assembly

REP2.13 ROLL ASSY TURN (PL2.4.12)

550 Sheet model

Removal

1 Remove the GUIDE ASSY CST. (REP2.1)

2 Remove the FEEDER ASSY SUB. (REP2.3)

3 Remove the TURN CLUTCH. (REP2.11)

NOTE

Because the CHUTE FDR IOT 550 is to be removed with the harness still connected, do not
apply excessive force when performing the next step.

4 Remove the screw (Silver, with Washer, 8mm) that secures the CHUTE FDR IOT 550 (PL2.4.13)
to the FEEDER ASSY SUB (PL2.4.1) and remove the CHUTE FDR IOT 550.

5 Remove the E-rings that secure the BEARINGs at the left and right sides and remove the
BEARINGs.

6 Slide the ROLL ASSY TURN to the right, slip the shaft at the left side out from the hole and
remove the ROLL ASSY TURN.

CHUTE FDR IOT 550

HMR07058AA
Figure 4-30 ROLL ASSY TURN

4-42
Chapter 4 Disassembly/Assembly and Adjustment
4.2 Disassembly/Assembly

ROLL ASSY TURN

HMR07059AA
Figure 4-31 ROLL ASSY TURN

4-43
 Chapter 4 Disassembly/Assembly and Adjustment
4.2 Disassembly/Assembly

REP2.14 GUIDE AS SD R A3 (PL2.2.2/PL2.5.2) / GUIDE AS SD L A3

(PL2.2.4/PL2.5.4)

Removal

1 Remove the CASSETTE ASSY of the main machine.

2 Release the hook that secures the GEAR PINION (PL2.2.3/PL2.5.3) and remove the GEAR
PINION.

3 Release the locks (x2 locations) and put the PLATE BTM A3 (PL2.2.11/PL2.5.11) into a raised
position.

4 Pinch the GUIDE AS SD R A3 knob and move it towards the inner side. Press down the hook,
release the catch and remove the GUIDE AS SD R A3.

5 Move the GUIDE AS SD L A3 knob towards the inner side. Press down the hook, release the
catch and remove the GUIDE AS SD L A3.

NOTE

When installing the GUIDE AS SD R A3/GUIDE AS SD L A3, make sure you install the GEAR PINION
and turn it to the left after moving the GUIDE AS SD R A3 and GUIDE AS SD L A3 to their widest
possible setting.

4-44
Chapter 4 Disassembly/Assembly and Adjustment
4.2 Disassembly/Assembly

GEAR PINION
PLATE BTM A3

HMR07060AA
Figure 4-32 GUIDE AS SD R A3/GUIDE AS SD L A3

4-45
 Chapter 4 Disassembly/Assembly and Adjustment
4.2 Disassembly/Assembly

GUIDE AS SD R A3

GUIDE AS SD L A3

HMR07061AA
Figure 4-33 GUIDE AS SD R A3/GUIDE AS SD L A3

4-46
Chapter 4 Disassembly/Assembly and Adjustment
4.2 Disassembly/Assembly

REP2.15 PLATE ASSY BTM SP (PL2.2.5/PL2.5.5)

Removal

1 Remove the CASSETTE ASSY of the main machine.

2 Remove the GUIDE AS SD R A3/GUIDE AS SD L A3. (REP2.14)

3 Pull out the GEAR PB R (PL2.2.29/PL2.5.37) shaft and remove it.

4 Push down the PLATE ASSY BTM SP shaft, remove the GEAR PB L (PL2.2.7/PL2.5.7) side
from the HOUSING BASE, and then pull out the shaft slightly to raise the front of the PLATE
ASSY BTM SP.

5 Release the catch at the rear of the PLATE ASSY BTM SP and remove the PLATE ASSY BTM
SP.

NOTE

When installing the GEAR PB R, make sure that the shaft D-cut side is facing up. This way, the
GEAR PB R hook is facing down, and the PLATE ASSY BTM SP can be set to the correct position.

NOTE

When installing the PLATE ASSY BTM SP, make sure that the SPRING BTM UP (PL2.2.14/PL2.5.14)
is installed securely.

4-47
 Chapter 4 Disassembly/Assembly and Adjustment
4.2 Disassembly/Assembly

GEAR PB R

NOTE
HMR07062AA
Figure 4-34 PLATE ASSY BTM SP

4-48
Chapter 4 Disassembly/Assembly and Adjustment
4.2 Disassembly/Assembly

PLATE ASSY BTM SP

HMR07063AA

Figure 4-35 PLATE ASSY BTM SP

4-49
 Chapter 4 Disassembly/Assembly and Adjustment
4.2 Disassembly/Assembly

REP2.16 HOLDER ASSY RETARD (PL2.2.17/PL2.5.17)

Removal

1 Remove the CASSETTE ASSY of the main machine.

2 Release the stoppers at both edges that secure the CHUTE RETARD CST (PL2.2.15/PL2.5.15)
and remove the CHUTE RETARD CST.

3 Open the installation section of the HOLDER ASSY RETARD, turn the HOLDER ASSY RETARD
90° and remove the HOLDER ASSY RETARD from the bosses.

NOTE

When installing the HOLDER ASSY RETARD, make sure that the SPRING RETARD (PL2.2.16/
PL2.5.16) is aligned to the boss position of the HOLDER ASSY RETARD.

CHUTE RETARD CST

HMR07064AA

Figure 4-36 HOLDER ASSY RETARD

4-50
Chapter 4 Disassembly/Assembly and Adjustment
4.2 Disassembly/Assembly

HOLDER ASSY RETARD

HMR07065AA

Figure 4-37 HOLDER ASSY RETARD

4-51
 Chapter 4 Disassembly/Assembly and Adjustment
4.2 Disassembly/Assembly

REP2.17 ROLL ASSY FEED (PL2.2.19/PL2.5.19)

Removal

1 Remove the CASSETTE ASSY of the main machine.

2 Release the stoppers at both edges that secure the CHUTE RETARD CST (PL2.2.15/PL2.5.15)
and remove the CHUTE RETARD CST.

3 Open the installation section of the HOLDER ASSY RETARD and rotate the HOLDER ASSY
RETARD 90°.

4 Release the hook that secures the ROLL ASSY FEED to the HOLDER ASSY RETARD
(PL2.2.17/PL2.5.17) shaft to remove the ROLL ASSY FEED.

NOTE

When installing the ROLL ASSY FEED, make sure that the hook is securely latched on.

NOTE

After replacing the ROLL ASSY FEED, you must also clear the corresponding life counter.
To clear the life counter, enter CE mode and go to the menus under: Parameter / Life Counter. Tray
1: Tray 1 Roll, Tray 2: Tray 2 Roll, Tray 3: Tray 3 Roll, Tray 4: Tray 4 Roll
(Refer to "2.4.4 Menu Tree" of "2.4 CE Mode" in "Chapter 2 Troubleshooting")

4-52
Chapter 4 Disassembly/Assembly and Adjustment
4.2 Disassembly/Assembly

CHUTE RETARD CST

HMR07064AA

Figure 4-38 ROLL ASSY FEED

4-53
Chapter 4 Disassembly/Assembly and Adjustment
4.2 Disassembly/Assembly

ROLL ASSY FEED

HMR07066AA

Figure 4-39 ROLL ASSY FEED

4-54
Chapter 4 Disassembly/Assembly and Adjustment
4.2 Disassembly/Assembly

REP2.18 HOUSING EXIT CST (PL2.2.20/PL2.5.23)

Removal

1 Remove the CASSETTE ASSY of the main machine.

2 Turn the CASSETTE ASSY upside down and remove the screw (Silver, Tapped, 8mm).

3 Release the 5 items that secure the CASSETTE ASSY (x2 protrusions, x1 screw, and x2 lock
lever protrusions), and pull the HOUSING EXIT CST 550 to the rear to remove it.

HOUSING EXIT CST

HMR07067AA
Figure 4-40 HOUSING EXIT CST

4-55
 Chapter 4 Disassembly/Assembly and Adjustment
4.2 Disassembly/Assembly

REP2.19 KIT PLATE GEAR LOCK (PL2.2.23/PL2.5.25)

Removal

1 Remove the CASSETTE ASSY of the main machine.

2 Release the locks (x2 locations) and put the PLATE BTM A3 (PL2.2.11/PL2.5.11) into a raised
position.

3 Remove the screw (Silver, Tapped, 8mm) that secures the PLATE GEAR LOCK (PL2.2.24/
PL2.5.26) to the HOUSING BASE and release the hook to remove the PLATE GEAR LOCK.

4 Remove the screw (Silver, Tapped, 8mm) that secures the PLATE GEAR LOCK L (PL2.2.25/
PL2.5.27) to the HOUSING BASE and release the hook to remove the PLATE GEAR LOCK L.

NOTE

When installing the PLATE GEAR LOCK, make sure that the PLATE BTM A3 is in the raised position.

4-56
Chapter 4 Disassembly/Assembly and Adjustment
4.2 Disassembly/Assembly

PLATE GEAR LOCK

PLATE GEAR LOCK L

HMR07068AA

Figure 4-41 KIT PLATE GEAR LOCK

4-57
 Chapter 4 Disassembly/Assembly and Adjustment
4.2 Disassembly/Assembly

REP2.20 KIT EXT CST 550 (PL2.5.29)

550 Sheet model

Removal

1 Remove the CASSETTE ASSY of the main machine.

2 Remove the HOUSING EXIT CST 550. (REP2.18)

3 Slide out the LINK PLATE BTM CST 550 (PL2.5.32) from the boss of PLATE BTM A3 (PL2.5.11)
and remove it together with the PIN LOCK RACK (PL2.5.31).

4 Slide out the LINK LOCK EXIT (PL2.5.34) to release it from the tab and remove it together with
the SPRING LINK LOCK (PL2.5.33).

5 Slide out the LOCK EXIT A4 (PL2.5.30) to release them from the tabs and remove them.

4-58
Chapter 4 Disassembly/Assembly and Adjustment
4.2 Disassembly/Assembly

LINK PLATE BTM CST 550 PIN LOCK RACK

LINK LOCK EXIT

SPRING LINK LOCK

LOCK EXIT A4

HMR07069AA
Figure 4-42 KIT EXT CST 550

4-59
 Chapter 4 Disassembly/Assembly and Adjustment
4.2 Disassembly/Assembly

REP2.21 HANDLE CST (PL2.2.27/PL2.5.35)

Removal

1 Remove the CASSETTE ASSY of the main machine.

2 Remove the screws (x2, Silver, Tapped, 8mm) that secure the HANDLE CST to the HOUSING
BASE.

3 Use a driver, etc. to remove the hole of the HANDLE CST from the boss at either side of the
HOUSING BASE and then pull the HANDLE CST from the HOUSING BASE to remove it.

HANDLE CST

HMR07070AA
Figure 4-43 HANDLE CST

4-60
Chapter 4 Disassembly/Assembly and Adjustment
4.2 Disassembly/Assembly

REP2.22 WHEEL SIZE ASSY (PL2.2.28/PL2.5.36)

Removal

1 Remove the CASSETTE ASSY of the main machine.

2 Remove the HANDLE CST. (REP2.21)

3 Remove the screw (Silver, Tapped, 8mm) that secures the WHEEL SIZE ASSY to the HANDLE
CST.

4 Remove the WHEEL SIZE ASSY from the HANDLE CST.

NOTE

After installing the WHEEL SIZE ASSY, make sure you turn the WHEEL to match the paper
size, and set it.

WHEEL SIZE ASSY

HMR07071AA
Figure 4-44 WHEEL SIZE ASSY

4-61
 Chapter 4 Disassembly/Assembly and Adjustment
4.2 Disassembly/Assembly

REP2.23 KIT LEVER BTM LOCK 250 (PL2.2.31)

250 Sheet model

Removal

1 Remove the CASSETTE ASSY of the main machine.

2 Remove the screw (Silver, Tapped, 8mm) that secures the COVER BTM UP (PL2.2.32) and
remove the COVER BTM UP.

NOTE

When removing various components of the KIT LEVER BTM LOCK 250 in the next step, be
careful not to drop or lose them.

3 Remove the KIT LEVER BTM LOCK 250 components.

NOTE

When installing the components of the KIT LEVER BTM LOCK 250, they must be aligned
correctly.
Install the RACK BTM LOCK such that its marks (x2 positions) are aligned to the correct
positions before finally installing the GEAR BTM LOCK PINION.

COVER BTM UP 250

HMR07072AA
Figure 4-45 KIT LEVER BTM LOCK 250

4-62
Chapter 4 Disassembly/Assembly and Adjustment
4.2 Disassembly/Assembly

LEVER BTM LOCK

GEAR LEVER BTM LOCK

SPRING BTM LOCK

NOTE

RACK BTM LOCK 550

GEAR BTM LOCK PINION

HMR07073AA

Figure 4-46 KIT LEVER BTM LOCK 250

4-63
 Chapter 4 Disassembly/Assembly and Adjustment
4.2 Disassembly/Assembly

REP2.24 KIT LEVER BTM LOCK 550 (PL2.5.39)

550 Sheet model

Removal

1 Remove the CASSETTE ASSY of the main machine.

2 Remove the screws (x2, Silver, Tapped, 8mm) that secure the COVER BTM UP (PL2.5.43) and
remove the COVER BTM UP.

NOTE

When removing various components of the KIT LEVER BTM LOCK 550 in the next step, be
careful not to drop or lose them.

3 Remove the KIT LEVER BTM LOCK 550 components.

NOTE

When installing the components of the KIT LEVER BTM LOCK 550, they must be aligned
correctly.
Install the RACK BTM LOCK such that its marks (x2 positions) are aligned to the correct
positions before finally installing the GEAR BTM LOCK PINION (x2).

COVER BTM UP 550

HMR07074AA
Figure 4-47 KIT LEVER BTM LOCK 550

4-64
Chapter 4 Disassembly/Assembly and Adjustment
4.2 Disassembly/Assembly

LEVER BTM LOCK

GEAR LEVER BTM LOCK

GEAR 40 BTM LOCK

SPRING BTM LOCK

NOTE

RACK BTM LOCK 550

GEAR BTM LOCK PINION

HMR07075AA

Figure 4-48 KIT LEVER BTM LOCK 550

4-65
 Chapter 4 Disassembly/Assembly and Adjustment
4.2 Disassembly/Assembly

REP2.25 CHUTE RETARD CST (PL2.2.15/PL2.5.15)

Removal

1 Remove the CASSETTE ASSY of the main machine.

2 Release the stoppers at both edges that secure the CHUTE RETARD CST and remove the
CHUTE RETARD CST.

3 Open the right and left installation sections of the CHUTE RETARD CST, slide out the boss from
the hole, and remove the CHUTE RETARD CST.

NOTE

After replacing the CHUTE RETARD CST, you must also clear the corresponding life counter.
To clear the life counter, enter CE mode and go to the menus under: Parameter / Life Counter.
Tray 1: Tray 1 Chute, Tray 2: Tray 2 Chute, Tray 3: Tray 3 Chute, Tray 4: Tray 4 Chute
(Refer to "2.4.4 Menu Tree" of "2.4 CE Mode" in "Chapter 2 Troubleshooting")

CHUTE RETARD CST

HMR07064AA
Figure 4-49 CHUTE RETARD CST

4-66
Chapter 4 Disassembly/Assembly and Adjustment
4.2 Disassembly/Assembly

CHUTE RETARD CST

HMR07165AA

Figure 4-50 CHUTE RETARD CST

4-67
 Chapter 4 Disassembly/Assembly and Adjustment
4.2 Disassembly/Assembly

PL3 MSI
REP3.1 MSI FEED SOLENOID (PL3.1.1)

Removal

1 Remove the DUPLEX ASSY. (REP13.1)

2 Remove the KIT COVER FRONT. (REP1.6)

3 Remove the COVER RIGHT FRONT. (REP1.7)

4 Remove the COVER LEFT FRONT. (REP1.8)

5 Remove the COVER DUP TOP. (REP1.9)

6 Remove the COVER ASSY FRAME FRONT. (REP4.2)

7 Disconnect the connector (P/J2320) on the harness that is connected to the MSI FEED
SOLENOID, and remove the harness from the Harness Guide.

NOTE

In the next step, do not remove the SPRING FEED MSI (PL3.1.3) completely. Keep it attached
at the GEAR MSI (PL3.1.4) side.

8 Release the SPRING FEED MSI at the FRAME FRONT side only.

9 Remove the screw (Silver, Tapped, 8mm) that secures the MSI FEED SOLENOID.

10 Release the MSI FEED SOLENOID from the GEAR MSI and remove it.

4-68
Chapter 4 Disassembly/Assembly and Adjustment
4.2 Disassembly/Assembly

HMR07076AA

Figure 4-51 MSI FEED SOLENOID

4-69
 Chapter 4 Disassembly/Assembly and Adjustment
4.2 Disassembly/Assembly

CAM SPRING FEED MSI

MSI FEED SOLENOID

NOTE
HMR07077AA

Figure 4-52 MSI FEED SOLENOID

NOTE

When installing, attach the SPRING FEED MSI to the FRAME FRONT side with the tip of the movable
part of MSI FEED SOLENOID attached to the protrusion on the surface of the GEAR MSI CAM.
Figure 4-52 shows the GEAR MSI in standby state.
If the installation was not performed in this state, the MSI will malfunction during the initialization
after power ON.

4-70
Chapter 4 Disassembly/Assembly and Adjustment
4.2 Disassembly/Assembly

REP3.2 KIT GEAR MSI (PL3.1.2)

Removal

1 Remove the KIT COVER FRONT. (REP1.6)

2 Remove the COVER RIGHT FRONT. (REP1.7)

3 Remove the screws (x2, Silver, Tapped, 8mm, and x2, Silver, with Washer, 8mm) that secure the
DRIVE ASSY FRONT A (PL3.1.25) to the FRAME FRONT and remove the ground wire along
with the DRIVE ASSY FRONT A.

4 Pull out the CLUTCH ASSY LIMIT (PL3.1.24) from the shaft and remove it.

5 Remove the SPRING FEED MSI from the GEAR MSI.

6 Release the hook that secures the GEAR MSI to the shaft and remove it.

CLUTCH ASSY LIMIT

DRIVE ASSY FRONT A

HMR07078AA

Figure 4-53 KIT GEAR MSI

4-71
 Chapter 4 Disassembly/Assembly and Adjustment
4.2 Disassembly/Assembly

CAM GEAR MSI

SPRING FEED MSI

NOTE
HMR07079AA

Figure 4-54 KIT GEAR MSI

NOTE

When installing, attach the SPRING FEED MSI to the FRAME FRONT side with the tip of the movable
part of MSI FEED SOLENOID attached to the protrusion on the surface of the GEAR MSI CAM.
Figure 4-54 shows the GEAR MSI in standby state.
If the installation was not performed in this state, the MSI will malfunction during the initialization
after power ON.

4-72
Chapter 4 Disassembly/Assembly and Adjustment
4.2 Disassembly/Assembly

REP3.3 COVER ROLL FEED (PL3.1.13)

Removal

1 Open the COVER DUP TOP (PL1.1.1).

2 Open the KIT COVER FRONT (PL1.1.11).

3 Pull the knob at the right side, slide the COVER ROLL FEED to the left and remove the COVER
ROLL FEED.

COVER ROLL FEED

HMR07080AA

Figure 4-55 COVER ROLL FEED

4-73
 Chapter 4 Disassembly/Assembly and Adjustment
4.2 Disassembly/Assembly

REP3.4 CHUTE ASSY DUP (PL3.1.7)

Removal

1 Remove the DUPLEX ASSY. (REP13.1)

2 Remove the KIT COVER FRONT. (REP1.6)

3 Remove the COVER RIGHT FRONT. (REP1.7)

4 Remove the COVER ROLL FEED. (REP3.3)

5 Remove the screws (x2, Silver, Tapped, 8mm, and x2, Silver, with Washer, 8mm) that secure the
DRIVE ASSY FRONT A (PL3.1.25) to the FRAME FRONT and remove the ground wire along
with the DRIVE ASSY FRONT A.

6 Pull out the CLUTCH ASSY LIMIT (PL3.1.24) from the shaft and remove it.

7 Remove the screws (x2, Silver, Tapped, 8mm) that secure the DRIVE ASSY FRONT B
(PL3.1.23) to the FRAME FRONT and remove the DRIVE ASSY FRONT B.

8 Remove the screws (x2, Silver, Tapped, 8mm) that secure the CHUTE ASSY DUP to the
FRAME FRONT and remove the CHUTE ASSY DUP.

9 Disconnect the connector (P/J2311) that is connected to the MSI NO PAPER SENSOR
(PL3.1.11), release the harness from the Harness Guide, and remove the CHUTE ASSY DUP.

DRIVE ASSY FRONT B

CLUTCH ASSY LIMIT

DRIVE ASSY FRONT A

HMR07081AA
Figure 4-56 CHUTE ASSY DUP

4-74
Chapter 4 Disassembly/Assembly and Adjustment
4.2 Disassembly/Assembly

CHUTE ASSY DUP

ACTUATOR NO PAPER

HMR07082AA
Figure 4-57 CHUTE ASSY DUP

NOTE

When installing the CHUTE ASSY DUP, insert the tip of the ACTUATOR NO PAPER MSI (PL3.1.10)
into the long hole of the PLATE BOTTOM MSI.

4-75
 Chapter 4 Disassembly/Assembly and Adjustment
4.2 Disassembly/Assembly

REP3.5 KIT ACTUATOR NO PAPER MSI (PL3.1.8)

Removal

1 Remove the DUPLEX ASSY. (REP13.1)

2 Remove the KIT COVER FRONT. (REP1.6)

3 Remove the COVER RIGHT FRONT. (REP1.7)

4 Remove the COVER ROLL FEED. (REP3.3)

5 Remove the CHUTE ASSY DUP. (REP3.4)

6 Pull out the center part of the ACTUATOR NO PAPER MSI (PL3.1.10) shaft from the notch at the
hole and slide out the tip of the shaft from the hole to remove the ACTUATOR NO PAPER MSI.

7 Remove the SPRING NO PAPER MSI (PL3.1.9) from the ACTUATOR NO PAPER MSI.

NOTE

When installing, make sure that the SPRING is securely attached.

4-76
Chapter 4 Disassembly/Assembly and Adjustment
4.2 Disassembly/Assembly

ACTUATOR NO PAPER

SPRING NO PAPER MSI

NOTE

HMR07083AA
Figure 4-58 KIT ACTUATOR NO PAPER MSI

4-77
 Chapter 4 Disassembly/Assembly and Adjustment
4.2 Disassembly/Assembly

REP3.6 (SCC) MSI NO PAPER SENSOR (PL3.1.11)

Removal

1 Remove the DUPLEX ASSY. (REP13.1)

2 Remove the KIT COVER FRONT. (REP1.6)

3 Remove the COVER RIGHT FRONT. (REP1.7)

4 Remove the COVER ROLL FEED. (REP3.3)

5 Remove the CHUTE ASSY DUP. (REP3.4)

6 Release the hooks that secure the MSI NO PAPER SENSOR to the CHUTE ASSY DUP and slip
off the ACTUATOR NO PAPER MSI to remove the MSI NO PAPER SENSOR.

MSI NO PAPER SENSOR

ACTUATOR NO PAPER

HMR07084AA
Figure 4-59 MSI NO PAPER SENSOR

4-78
Chapter 4 Disassembly/Assembly and Adjustment
4.2 Disassembly/Assembly

REP3.7 CAM MSI/PIN MSI (PL3.1.14/PL3.1.15)

Removal

1 Remove the DUPLEX ASSY. (REP13.1)

2 Remove the KIT COVER FRONT. (REP1.6)

3 Remove the COVER RIGHT FRONT. (REP1.7)

4 Remove the COVER LEFT FRONT. (REP1.8)

5 Remove the KIT GEAR MSI. (REP3.2)

6 Remove the COVER ROLL FEED. (REP3.3)

7 Remove the CHUTE ASSY DUP. (REP3.4)

8 Remove the plastic clips that secure the BEARINGs at the left and right sides of the SHAFT
ASSY MSI (PL3.1.16) and remove the BEARINGs.

NOTE

In the next step, be careful not to drop or lose the PIN MSI.

9 Remove the plastic clip that secures the left CAM MSI and slide the CAM MSI to the right to
remove the PIN MSI.

10 While keeping the right CAM MSI in place, slide the SHAFT ASSY MSI to the left to remove the
SHAFT ASSY MSI from the right installation hole.

11 Pull out the right CAM MSI from the SHAFT ASSY MSI and remove the PIN MSI.

4-79
 Chapter 4 Disassembly/Assembly and Adjustment
4.2 Disassembly/Assembly

PIN MSI CAM MSI

HMR07085AA

Figure 4-60 CAM MSI/PIN MSI

4-80
Chapter 4 Disassembly/Assembly and Adjustment
4.2 Disassembly/Assembly

CAM MSI

PIN MSI
CAM MSI HMR07086AA

Figure 4-61 CAM MSI/PIN MSI

4-81
 Chapter 4 Disassembly/Assembly and Adjustment
4.2 Disassembly/Assembly

REP3.8 MSI FEED ROLL (PL3.1.17)

Removal

1 Remove the COVER ROLL FEED. (REP3.3)

2 Release the hook that secures the right ROLL CORE MSI (PL3.1.18) to the shaft and slide the
ROLL CORE MSI to the right.

3 Slide the MSI FEED ROLL to the right, slide it off from the PIN on the shaft, turn the MSI FEED
ROLL in the direction that makes it easy to remove, and remove it.

NOTE

After replacing the MSI FEED ROLL, you must also clear the corresponding life counter.
To clear the life counter, enter CE mode and go to the menu: Parameter / Life Counter / Bypass Tray
Roll. (Refer to "2.4.4 Menu Tree" of "2.4 CE Mode" in "Chapter 2 Troubleshooting")

MSI FEED ROLL

ROLL CORE MSI

HMR07087AA
Figure 4-62 MSI FEED ROLL

4-82
Chapter 4 Disassembly/Assembly and Adjustment
4.2 Disassembly/Assembly

REP3.9 KIT FRAME RETARD BASE (PL3.1.19)

Removal

1 Release the Latch and open the FRAME FRONT.

2 Remove the HOLDER ASSY RETARD. (REP3.10)

3 Remove the screws (x4, Silver, with Washer, 10mm) that secure the KIT FRAME RETARD
BASE to the machine and remove the COLLAR MSI (PL3.1.26) (x2).

4 Remove the KIT FRAME RETARD BASE from the machine.

KIT FRAME RETARD BASE

HMR07088AA
Figure 4-63 KIT FRAME RETARD BASE

4-83
 Chapter 4 Disassembly/Assembly and Adjustment
4.2 Disassembly/Assembly

REP3.10 HOLDER ASSY RETARD (PL3.1.21)

Removal

1 Release the Latch and open the FRAME FRONT.

2 Release the hooks of the HOLDER ASSY RETARD, lift the rear side and remove it from the
catch at the front.

NOTE

When installing the HOLDER ASSY RETARD, make sure that the HOLDER ASSY RETARD is
attached to the mark of the KIT FRAME RETARD BASE.

NOTE

After replacing the MSI FEED ROLL, you must also clear the corresponding life counter.
To clear the life counter, enter CE mode and go to the menu: Parameter / Life Counter / Bypass Tray
Roll. (Refer to "2.4.4 Menu Tree" of "2.4 CE Mode" in "Chapter 2 Troubleshooting")

HOLDER ASSY RETARD

HMR07089AA
Figure 4-64 HOLDER ASSY RETARD

4-84
Chapter 4 Disassembly/Assembly and Adjustment
4.2 Disassembly/Assembly

REP3.11 TRAY ASSY MSI (PL3.1.22)

Removal

1 Remove the KIT COVER FRONT. (REP1.6)

2 Remove the COVER RIGHT FRONT. (REP1.7)

3 Remove the E-rings that secure the right side of the TRAY ASSY MSI and remove the SHAFT
HINGE TRAY (PL3.1.6).

4 Slide out the boss at the right side of the TRAY ASSY MSI from the hole and remove the TRAY
ASSY MSI.

TRAY ASSY MSI HMR07090AA

Figure 4-65 TRAY ASSY MSI

4-85
 Chapter 4 Disassembly/Assembly and Adjustment
4.2 Disassembly/Assembly

PL4 FRONT FRAME

REP4.1 KIT FRAME FRONT (PL4.1.1)

Removal

1 Remove the DUPLEX ASSY. (REP13.1)

2 Remove the BTR. (REP4.3)

3 Remove the COVER STACK. (REP1.1)

4 Remove the COVER LEFT SIDE. (REP1.3)

5 Remove the KIT COVER FRONT. (REP1.6)

6 Remove the COVER RIGHT FRONT. (REP1.7)

7 Remove the COVER LEFT FRONT. (REP1.8)

8 Remove the COVER DUP TOP. (REP1.9)

9 Remove the TRAY ASSY MSI. (REP3.11)

10 Remove the SHIELD ASSY ESS. (REP11.1)

11 Open the Saddle Edge that is attached to the CHASSIS ESS (PL11.1.4).

12 Remove the screw (Silver, with Washer, 8mm) that secures the COVER MCU to the SHIELD
ASSY ESS and remove the COVER MCU.

13 Disconnect the connector (P/J23) that is connected to the MCU, pull out the harnesses from the
Saddle Edge, and then remove the harnesses from the Harness Guide at the left of the machine.

14 Disconnect the connectors (VD, TR, and VG) that are connected to the LVPS, release the clamp
and remove the harness.

15 Remove the harnesses that are connected to the KIT FRAME FRONT, which were disconnected
in steps 13 and 14, from the Harness Route at the left side of the machine.

16 Remove the screw (Silver, with Washer, 8mm) that secures the ground wire to the hinge at the
right of the KIT FRAME FRONT and disconnect the ground wire.

NOTE

In the next step, be careful not to drop the KIT FRAME FRONT

17 Shift the STRAP FRONT (PL4.1.10) at the right and left sides of the KIT FRAME FRONT
horizontally, and then remove it.

18 Hold onto the KIT FRAME FRONT, pull out the right and left PIVOT FRONT (PL4.1.9), and
remove the KIT FRAME FRONT.

4-86
Chapter 4 Disassembly/Assembly and Adjustment
4.2 Disassembly/Assembly

COVER MCU

MCU PWB
P/J23

HMR07091AA

Figure 4-66 KIT FRAME FRONT

4-87
Chapter 4 Disassembly/Assembly and Adjustment
4.2 Disassembly/Assembly

HMR07092AA
Figure 4-67 KIT FRAME FRONT

HMR07093AA
Figure 4-68 KIT FRAME FRONT

4-88
Chapter 4 Disassembly/Assembly and Adjustment
4.2 Disassembly/Assembly

KIT FRAME FRONT

STRAP FRONT

HMR07094AA
Figure 4-69 KIT FRAME FRONT

4-89
 Chapter 4 Disassembly/Assembly and Adjustment
4.2 Disassembly/Assembly

REP4.2 COVER ASSY FRAME FRONT (PL4.1.2)

Removal

1 Remove the DUPLEX ASSY. (REP13.1)

2 Remove the KIT COVER FRONT. (REP1.6)

3 Remove the COVER RIGHT FRONT. (REP1.7)

4 Remove the COVER LEFT FRONT. (REP1.8)

5 Remove the COVER DUP TOP. (REP1.9)

6 Compress the SPRINGs and remove SPRING LEVER FRONTs (PL4.1.7) at the right and left
sides.

7 Remove the screws (x3, Silver, Tapped, 8mm) that secure the COVER ASSY FRAME FRONT
and remove the COVER ASSY FRAME FRONT.

COVER ASSY FRAME FRONT

HMR07095AA
Figure 4-70 COVER ASSY FRAME FRONT

4-90
Chapter 4 Disassembly/Assembly and Adjustment
4.2 Disassembly/Assembly

REP4.3 BTR (PL4.1.3)

Removal

1 Release the Latch and open the FRAME FRONT.

[Up to 07.2]
2 Open the hooks of the CAP BTR BEARINGs (PL4.1.11) at the left and right sides outwards and
remove them.

[07.2 and later]

3 Turn the knobs of the LEVER-CRU TRANS (PL4.1.11) at the left and right sides in the direction
of the arrows and remove them.

4 Hold to the left and right ends of the BTR and pull it out from its installation section to remove it.

NOTE

After replacing the BTR, you must also clear the corresponding life counter.
To clear the life counter, enter CE mode and go to the menu: Parameter / Life Counter / Fuser /
Trans. (Refer to "2.4.4 Menu Tree" of "2.4 CE Mode" in "Chapter 2 Troubleshooting")

4-91
 Chapter 4 Disassembly/Assembly and Adjustment
4.2 Disassembly/Assembly

BTR

HMR07096AA

Figure 4-71 BTR [Up to 07.2]

4-92
Chapter 4 Disassembly/Assembly and Adjustment
4.2 Disassembly/Assembly

BTR

HMR07167AA
Figure 4-72 BTR [07.2 and later]

NOTE

When installing the CAP BTR BEARING and the LEVER CRU TRANS, press the top surface to make
sure that that the hooks are securely locked.

CAP BTR BEARING [ 07.2] LEVER-CRU TRANS [07.2 ]

HMR07166AA

4-93
 Chapter 4 Disassembly/Assembly and Adjustment
4.2 Disassembly/Assembly

REP4.4 KIT LEVER FRONT (PL4.1.4)

Removal

1 Remove the DUPLEX ASSY. (REP13.1)

2 Remove the KIT COVER FRONT. (REP1.6)

3 Remove the COVER RIGHT FRONT. (REP1.7)

4 Remove the COVER LEFT FRONT. (REP1.8)

5 Remove the COVER DUP TOP. (REP1.9)

6 Remove the COVER ASSY FRAME FRONT. (REP4.2)

7 Compress the SPRING and remove SPRING LEVER FRONT (PL4.1.7) at the right and left
sides.

8 Open the installation section of the KIT LEVER FRONT, slip off the boss from the hole and
remove the left and right KIT LEVER FRONTs.

KIT LEVER FRONT HMR07097AA

Figure 4-73 KIT LEVER FRONT

4-94
Chapter 4 Disassembly/Assembly and Adjustment
4.2 Disassembly/Assembly

PL5 REGI
REP5.1 KIT REGIST/(SCC) REGI CLUTCH (PL5.1.1/PL5.1.2)

Removal

1 Remove the COVER STACK. (REP1.1)

2 Remove the COVER LEFT SIDE. (REP1.3)

3 Disconnect the connector (P/J1230) on the harness that is connected to the KIT REGIST, and
remove the harness from the Harness Guide.

4 Remove the screws (x4, Silver, Tapped, 8mm) that secure the KIT REGIST to the machine.

5 Pull out the harness that is connected to the KIT REGIST through the square hole, lay down the
KIT REGIST with its left side facing up, pull out the REGI CLUTCH from the hole and remove the
KIT REGIST.

6 Remove the harness that is connected to the REGI CLUTCH from the Harness Guide of the KIT
REGIST.

7 Remove the plastic clip that secures the REGI CLUTCH to the KIT REGIST shaft.

8 Slide off the depressed part of REGI CLUTCH and remove the REGI CLUTCH from the shaft.

NOTE

When installing the KIT REGIST to the machine, make sure that the ACTUATOR underneath the KIT
REGIST is slotted under the ACTUATOR ASSY REGI (PL5.1.3) at the machine side.

NOTE

After replacing the KIT REGIST, you must also clear the corresponding life counter.
To clear the life counter, enter CE mode and go to the menu: Parameter / Life Counter / ROS / Regist
/ Drive. (Refer to "2.4.4 Menu Tree" of "2.4 CE Mode" in "Chapter 2 Troubleshooting")

4-95
 Chapter 4 Disassembly/Assembly and Adjustment
4.2 Disassembly/Assembly

KIT REGIST

NOTE

HMR07098AA
Figure 4-74 KIT REGIST/REGI CLUTCH

4-96
Chapter 4 Disassembly/Assembly and Adjustment
4.2 Disassembly/Assembly

REGI CLUTCH

HMR07099AA
Figure 4-75 KIT REGIST/REGI CLUTCH

4-97
 Chapter 4 Disassembly/Assembly and Adjustment
4.2 Disassembly/Assembly

REP5.2 (SCC) REGI SENSOR (PL5.1.4)

Removal

1 Remove the COVER STACK. (REP1.1)

2 Remove the COVER LEFT SIDE. (REP1.3)

3 Disconnect the connector (P/J1230) on the harness that is connected to the KIT REGIST, and
remove the harness from the Harness Guide.

NOTE

Because the KIT BASE ASSY INTERLOCK (PL12.1.1) is to be removed with the harness still
connected, do not apply excessive force when performing the next step.

4 Remove the screws (x3, Silver, Tapped, 3x8mm, and x1, Silver, Tapped, 4x8mm) that secure the
KIT BASE ASSY INTERLOCK to the machine.

5 Open the front of the KIT BASE ASSY INTERLOCK.

6 Disconnect the connector (P/J1211) that is connected to the REGI SENSOR.

7 Release the hooks that secure the REGI SENSOR to the KIT BASE ASSY INTERLOCK to
remove the REGI SENSOR.

4-98
Chapter 4 Disassembly/Assembly and Adjustment
4.2 Disassembly/Assembly

REGI SENSOR

HMR07100AA
Figure 4-76 REGI SENSOR

4-99
 Chapter 4 Disassembly/Assembly and Adjustment
4.2 Disassembly/Assembly

PL6 XEROGRAPHICS
There is no relevant Disassembly/Assembly and Adjustment items.

4-100
Chapter 4 Disassembly/Assembly and Adjustment
4.2 Disassembly/Assembly

PL7 ROS
REP7.1 (SCC) ROS ASSY (PL7.1.1)

Removal

1 Remove the EXIT DRIVE ASSY. (REP13.1)

2 Remove the COVER STACK. (REP1.1)

3 Remove the COVER RIGHT SIDE. (REP1.2)

4 Remove the COVER LEFT SIDE. (REP1.3)

5 Remove the CONSOLE ASSY. (REP1.4)

6 Remove the COVER TOP ASSY. (REP1.5)

7 Remove the KIT LEVER FUSER. (REP8.1)

8 Remove the KIT COVER MIDDLE. (REP1.11)

9 Remove the SHIELD ASSY ESS. (REP11.1)

10 Remove the BRACKET ASSY EXIT. (REP9.1)

11 Remove the CHASSIS ESS ASSY. (REP11.3)

12 Remove the COVER REAR.(REP1.10)

13 Remove the harness that is connected to the DRIVE ASSY and the REAR FAN from the
Harness Guide of the ROS ASSY.

14 Remove the screws (x2, Silver, Tapped, 8mm, and x2, Silver, with Washer, 8mm) that secure the
ROS ASSY to the machine and remove the ROS ASSY.

NOTE

After replacing the ROS ASSY, you must also clear the corresponding life counter.
To clear the life counter, enter CE mode and go to the menu: Parameter / Life Counter / ROS / Regist
/ Drive. (Refer to "2.4.4 Menu Tree" of "2.4 CE Mode" in "Chapter 2 Troubleshooting")

4-101
Chapter 4 Disassembly/Assembly and Adjustment
4.2 Disassembly/Assembly

HMR07101AA

Figure 4-77 ROS ASSY

4-102
Chapter 4 Disassembly/Assembly and Adjustment
4.2 Disassembly/Assembly

ROS ASSY

HMR07102AA
Figure 4-78 ROS ASSY

4-103
 Chapter 4 Disassembly/Assembly and Adjustment
4.2 Disassembly/Assembly

PL8 FUSER
REP8.1 KIT LEVER FUSER (PL8.1.1)

Removal

1 Remove the FUSER ASSY. (REP8.2)

2 Remove the screws (x1, Silver, Tapped, 8mm, and x1, Silver, with Washer, 8mm) that secure the
COVER SAFETY RH (PL8.1.5) to the machine and remove the COVER SAFETY RH.

3 Remove the LEVER CRU FSR RH (PL8.1.6) from the COVER SAFETY RH.

4 Remove the screws (x1, Silver, Tapped, 8mm, and x1, Silver, with Washer, 8mm) that secure the
COVER SAFETY LH (PL8.1.3) to the machine and remove the COVER SAFETY LH.

5 Remove the LEVER CRU FSR LH (PL8.1.2) from the COVER SAFETY LH.

6 Remove the screw (Silver, Tapped, 8mm) from the COVER SAFETY LH and remove the ground
wire along with the SPRING PRB (PL8.1.4).

4-104
Chapter 4 Disassembly/Assembly and Adjustment
4.2 Disassembly/Assembly

LEVER CRU FSR LH

COVER SAFETY LH

COVER SAFETY RH

LEVER CRU FSR RH

SPRING PRB

HMR07103AA

Figure 4-79 KIT LEVER FUSER

4-105
 Chapter 4 Disassembly/Assembly and Adjustment
4.2 Disassembly/Assembly

REP8.2 (SCC) FUSER ASSY (PL8.1.11)

Removal

1 Release the Latch and open the FRAME FRONT.

2 Open the COVER TOP ASSY.

3 Lift the left and right LEVER CRU FSRs (PL8.1.2/PL8.1.6) and remove the FUSER ASSY.

NOTE

After replacing the FUSER ASSY, you must also clear the corresponding life counter.
To clear the life counter, enter CE mode and go to the menu: Parameter / Life Counter / Fuser /
Trans. (Refer to "2.4.4 Menu Tree" of "2.4 CE Mode" in "Chapter 2 Troubleshooting")

FUSER ASSY

HMR07104AA

Figure 4-80 FUSER ASSY

NOTE

Things to Note During Installation

Some gears may not interlock properly with each other due to their positions. Hence, you may
encounter difficulties when inserting the gears.
Make sure that the FUSER ASSY has been completely inserted before locking the LEVER CRU FSR.

4-106
Chapter 4 Disassembly/Assembly and Adjustment
4.2 Disassembly/Assembly

PL9 DRIVE
REP9.1 (SCC) BRACKET ASSY EXIT (PL9.1.1)

Removal

1 Remove the EXIT DRIVE ASSY. (REP13.2)

2 Remove the COVER STACK. (REP1.1)

3 Remove the COVER RIGHT SIDE. (REP1.2)

4 Remove the COVER LEFT SIDE. (REP1.3)

5 Remove the CONSOLE ASSY. (REP1.4)

6 Remove the COVER TOP ASSY. (REP1.5)

7 Remove the KIT LEVER FUSER. (REP8.1)

8 Remove the KIT COVER MIDDLE. (REP1.11)

9 Remove the SHIELD ASSY ESS. (REP11.1)

10 Open the Saddle Edge that is attached to the CHASSIS ESS (PL11.1.4).

11 Remove the screw (Silver, with Washer, 8mm) that secures the COVER MCU to the SHIELD
ASSY ESS and remove the COVER MCU.

12 Disconnect the connector (P/J26) that is connected to the MCU PWB (PL11.1.3).

13 Disconnect the clamps (x3 locations) to release the harness that is connected to the BRACKET
ASSY EXIT, and remove it from the Saddle Edge.

14 Remove the screws (x2, Silver, with Washer, 8mm, and x2, Silver, Tapped, 12mm, and x1,
Silver, Tapped, 8mm) that secure the BRACKET ASSY EXIT to the machine and remove the
BRACKET ASSY EXIT.

4-107
 Chapter 4 Disassembly/Assembly and Adjustment
4.2 Disassembly/Assembly

COVER MCU

MCU PWB
P/J26

HMR07105AA
Figure 4-81 BRACKET ASSY EXIT

4-108
Chapter 4 Disassembly/Assembly and Adjustment
4.2 Disassembly/Assembly

BRACKET ASSY EXIT

HMR07106AA
Figure 4-82 BRACKET ASSY EXIT

4-109
 Chapter 4 Disassembly/Assembly and Adjustment
4.2 Disassembly/Assembly

REP9.2 (SCC) DRIVE ASSY (PL9.1.2)

Removal

1 Remove the EXIT DRIVE ASSY. (REP13.2)

2 Remove the COVER STACK. (REP1.1)

3 Remove the COVER RIGHT SIDE. (REP1.2)

4 Remove the screws (x4, Silver, with Washer, 8mm, and x4, Silver, Tapped, 8mm) that secure the
DRIVE ASSY to the machine and remove the DRIVE ASSY.

5 Disconnect the connector (P/J220) that is connected to the MAIN MOTOR (PL9.1.3) to remove
the DRIVE ASSY from the machine.

NOTE

After replacing the DRIVE ASSY, you must also clear the corresponding life counter.
To clear the life counter, enter CE mode and go to the menu: Parameter / Life Counter / ROS / Regist /
Drive. (Refer to "2.4.4 Menu Tree" of "2.4 CE Mode" in "Chapter 2 Troubleshooting")

DRIVE ASSY

HMR07107AA
Figure 4-83 DRIVE ASSY

4-110
Chapter 4 Disassembly/Assembly and Adjustment
4.2 Disassembly/Assembly

REP9.3 (SCC) MAIN MOTOR (PL9.1.3)

Removal

1 Remove the COVER STACK. (REP1.1)

2 Remove the COVER RIGHT SIDE. (REP1.2)

3 Remove the DRIVE ASSY. (REP9.2)

4 Remove the screws (x4, Silver, with Washer, 6mm) that secure the MAIN MOTOR to the DRIVE
ASSY and remove the MAIN MOTOR.

MAIN MOTOR

HMR07108AA
Figure 4-84 MAIN MOTOR

4-111
 Chapter 4 Disassembly/Assembly and Adjustment
4.2 Disassembly/Assembly

PL10 FAN
REP10.1 DUCT ASSY FAN MIDDLE (PL10.1.1)

Removal

1 Remove the EXIT DRIVE ASSY. (REP13.2)

2 Remove the COVER STACK. (REP1.1)

3 Remove the COVER RIGHT SIDE. (REP1.2)

4 Remove the COVER LEFT SIDE. (REP1.3)

5 Remove the CONSOLE ASSY. (REP1.4)

6 Remove the COVER TOP ASSY. (REP1.5)

7 Remove the KIT LEVER FUSER. (REP8.1)

8 Remove the KIT COVER MIDDLE. (REP1.11)

9 Remove the BRACKET ASSY EXIT. (REP9.1)

10 Remove the SHIELD ASSY ESS. (REP11.1)

11 Remove the CHASSIS ESS ASSY. (REP11.3)

12 Remove the screws (x2, Silver, with Washer, 12mm) that secure the KIT BRACKET FSR RH to
the machine and remove the KIT BRACKET FSR RH (PL8.1.8).

13 Remove the harness that is connected to the KIT BRACKET FSR RH from the Harness Guide of
the DUCT ASSY FAN MIDDLE.

14 Remove the screw (Silver, Tapped, 8mm) that secures the DUCT ASSY FAN MIDDLE to the
machine and remove the DUCT ASSY FAN MIDDLE.

4-112
Chapter 4 Disassembly/Assembly and Adjustment
4.2 Disassembly/Assembly

HMR07109AA
Figure 4-85 DUCT ASSY FAN MIDDLE

4-113
 Chapter 4 Disassembly/Assembly and Adjustment
4.2 Disassembly/Assembly

DUCT ASSY FAN MIDDLE

HMR07110AA
Figure 4-86 DUCT ASSY FAN MIDDLE

4-114
Chapter 4 Disassembly/Assembly and Adjustment
4.2 Disassembly/Assembly

REP10.2 (SCC) MIDDLE FAN (PL10.1.2)

Removal

1 Remove the EXIT DRIVE ASSY. (REP13.2)

2 Remove the COVER STACK. (REP1.1)

3 Remove the COVER RIGHT SIDE. (REP1.2)

4 Remove the COVER LEFT SIDE. (REP1.3)

5 Remove the CONSOLE ASSY. (REP1.4)

6 Remove the COVER TOP ASSY. (REP1.5)

7 Remove the KIT LEVER FUSER. (REP8.1)

8 Remove the KIT COVER MIDDLE. (REP1.11)

9 Remove the SHIELD ASSY ESS. (REP11.1)

10 Remove the BRACKET ASSY EXIT. (REP9.1)

11 Remove the CHASSIS ESS ASSY. (REP11.3)

12 Remove the DUCT ASSY FAN MIDDLE. (REP10.1)

13 Remove the harness that is connected to the MIDDLE FAN from the Harness Guide of the DUCT
ASSY FAN MIDDLE (PL10.1.1).

14 Remove the screws (x2, Silver, Tapped, 30mm) that secure the MIDDLE FAN to the DUCT
ASSY FAN MIDDLE and remove the MIDDLE FAN.

NOTE

Install the MIDDLE FAN such that the labeled side is facing front.

MIDDLE FAN

HMR07111AA
Figure 4-87 MIDDLE FAN

4-115
 Chapter 4 Disassembly/Assembly and Adjustment
4.2 Disassembly/Assembly

REP10.3 REAR FAN (PL10.1.4)

Removal

1 Remove the EXIT DRIVE ASSY. (REP13.2)

2 Remove the COVER STACK. (REP1.1)

3 Remove the COVER RIGHT SIDE. (REP1.2)

4 Remove the COVER LEFT SIDE. (REP1.3)

5 Remove the CONSOLE ASSY. (REP1.4)

6 Remove the COVER TOP ASSY. (REP1.5)

7 Remove the KIT LEVER FUSER. (REP8.1)

8 Remove the KIT COVER MIDDLE. (REP1.11)

9 Remove the SHIELD ASSY ESS. (REP11.1)

10 Remove the BRACKET ASSY EXIT. (REP9.1)

11 Remove the CHASSIS ESS ASSY. (REP11.3)

12 Remove the harness that is connected to the REAR FAN from the Harness Guide of the ROS
ASSY (PL7.1.1).

13 Remove the screw (Silver, Tapped, 8mm) that secures the REAR FAN to the FRAME ASSY
BASE (PL12.1.22) and remove the REAR FAN from the FRAME ASSY BASE.

NOTE

Install the REAR FAN such that the labeled side is facing back (outwards).

4-116
Chapter 4 Disassembly/Assembly and Adjustment
4.2 Disassembly/Assembly

HMR07112AA
Figure 4-88 REAR FAN

4-117
 Chapter 4 Disassembly/Assembly and Adjustment
4.2 Disassembly/Assembly

REAR FAN

LABEL

HMR07113AA
Figure 4-89 REAR FAN

4-118
Chapter 4 Disassembly/Assembly and Adjustment
4.2 Disassembly/Assembly

PL11 ELECTRICAL
REP11.1 SHIELD ASSY ESS (PL11.1.1)

Removal

1 Remove the COVER STACK. (REP1.1)

2 Remove the screws (x3 locations) that secure the SHIELD ASSY ESS to the CHASSIS ESS
ASSY (PL11.1.4) and remove the SHIELD ASSY ESS.

SHIELD ASSY ESS

HMR07114AA
Figure 4-90 SHIELD ASSY ESS

4-119
 Chapter 4 Disassembly/Assembly and Adjustment
4.2 Disassembly/Assembly

REP11.2 (SCC) MCU PWB (PL11.1.3)

Removal

NOTE

The NVM data in the old MCU PWB must be transferred to the new MCU PWB.
Enter the CE mode and execute IOT Diag/NVM Setting/Save NVM to backup the NVM data of the old
MCU PWB into the ESS PWB.
After replacing the MCU PWB, enter the CE mode and execute IOT Diag/NVM Setting/Load NVM to
write the NVM data of the old MCU PWB that was saved in the ESS PWB into the new MCU PWB.

1 Remove the COVER STACK. (REP1.1)

2 Remove the SHIELD ASSY ESS. (REP11.1)

3 Open the Saddle Edge that is attached to the CHASSIS ESS (PL11.1.4).

4 Remove the screw (Silver, with Washer, 8mm) that secures the COVER MCU to the SHIELD
ASSY ESS and remove the COVER MCU.

5 Release the clamps (x3) that are adjacent to the MCU PWB to remove the harness.

6 Disconnect all connectors that are connected to the MCU PWB.

7 Remove the screws (x4, Silver, with Washer, 8mm) that secure the MCU PWB to the CHASSIS
ESS and remove the MCU PWB.

4-120
Chapter 4 Disassembly/Assembly and Adjustment
4.2 Disassembly/Assembly

COVER MCU

MCU PWB
P/J22 P/J26 P/J23 P/J28
P/J25 P/J27

P/J21 P/J24
P/J20 P/J11

P/J19 P/J12
P/J18
P/J13

P/J17 P/J16 P/J15 P/J14

HMR07115AA

Figure 4-91 MCU PWB

4-121
Chapter 4 Disassembly/Assembly and Adjustment
4.2 Disassembly/Assembly

MCU PWB

HMR07116AA

Figure 4-92 MCU PWB

4-122
Chapter 4 Disassembly/Assembly and Adjustment
4.2 Disassembly/Assembly

REP11.3 CHASSIS ESS ASSY

(and (SCC) MCU PWB,(ISC) (SCC) ESS PWB)(PL11.1.4)

Removal

1 Remove the EXIT DRIVE ASSY. (REP13.2)

2 Remove the COVER STACK. (REP1.1)

3 Remove the COVER RIGHT SIDE. (REP1.2)

4 Remove the COVER LEFT SIDE. (REP1.3)

5 Remove the CONSOLE ASSY. (REP1.4)

6 Remove the COVER TOP ASSY. (REP1.5)

7 Remove the KIT LEVER FUSER. (REP8.1)

8 Remove the KIT COVER MIDDLE. (REP1.11)

9 Remove the SHIELD ASSY ESS. (REP11.1)

10 Remove the BRACKET ASSY EXIT. (REP9.1)

11 Open the Saddle Edge that is attached to the CHASSIS ESS (PL11.1.4).

12 Remove the screw (Silver, with Washer, 8mm) that secures the COVER MCU to the SHIELD
ASSY ESS and remove the COVER MCU.

13 Release the clamps (x3) that are adjacent to the MCU PWB to remove the harness.

NOTE

In the next step, there is no need to disconnect the flat cable that connects the MCU PWB to
the ESS PWB.

14 Disconnect all connectors that are connected to the MCU PWB.

NOTE

If any optional board is installed on the ESS PWB, remove them before performing the next
step.

15 Disconnect all connectors that are connected to the ESS PWB.

16 Remove the harness from the Saddle Edge that is attached to the CHASSIS ESS.

17 Remove the screws (x2, Silver, Tapped, 8mm, and x4, Silver, with Washer, 8mm) that secure the
CHASSIS ESS ASSY to the machine and remove the CHASSIS ESS ASSY.

4-123
 Chapter 4 Disassembly/Assembly and Adjustment
4.2 Disassembly/Assembly

COVER MCU

MCU PWB
P/J22 P/J26 P/J23 P/J28
P/J25 P/J27

P/J21 P/J24
P/J20 P/J11
FLAT
CABLE P/J12
P/J18
P/J13

P/J17 P/J16 P/J15 P/J14

P/J5 ESS PWB

P/J4

FLAT
CABLE

P/J1

HMR07117AA

Figure 4-93 CHASSIS ESS ASSY (and MCU PWB,ESS PWB)

4-124
Chapter 4 Disassembly/Assembly and Adjustment
4.2 Disassembly/Assembly

CHASSIS ESS ASSY

HMR07118AA

Figure 4-94 CHASSIS ESS ASSY (and MCU PWB,ESS PWB)

4-125
 Chapter 4 Disassembly/Assembly and Adjustment
4.2 Disassembly/Assembly

REP11.4 (SCC) HVPS (PL11.1.5)

Removal

1 Remove the EXIT DRIVE ASSY. (REP13.2)

2 Remove the COVER STACK. (REP1.1)

3 Remove the COVER RIGHT SIDE. (REP1.2)

4 Remove the COVER LEFT SIDE. (REP1.3)

5 Remove the CONSOLE ASSY. (REP1.4)

6 Remove the COVER TOP ASSY. (REP1.5)

7 Remove the KIT LEVER FUSER. (REP8.1)

8 Remove the KIT COVER MIDDLE. (REP1.11)

9 Remove the SHIELD ASSY ESS. (REP11.1)

10 Remove the BRACKET ASSY EXIT. (REP9.1)

11 Remove the CHASSIS ESS ASSY. (REP11.3)

12 Remove the COVER REAR.(REP1.10)

13 Remove the ROS ASSY. (REP7.1)

14 Disconnect all connectors that are connected to the HVPS.

15 Remove the screws (x4, Silver, with Washer, 8mm) that secure the HVPS to the machine and
remove the HVPS.

4-126
Chapter 4 Disassembly/Assembly and Adjustment
4.2 Disassembly/Assembly

P/J32 HVPS
P/J31

P/J33
P/J35
HVPS P/J34

HMR07119AA
Figure 4-95 HVPS

4-127
 Chapter 4 Disassembly/Assembly and Adjustment
4.2 Disassembly/Assembly

REP11.5 (SCC) LVPS (PL11.1.6)

Removal

1 Remove the EXIT DRIVE ASSY. (REP13.2)

2 Remove the COVER STACK. (REP1.1)

3 Remove the COVER RIGHT SIDE. (REP1.2)

4 Remove the COVER LEFT SIDE. (REP1.3)

5 Remove the CONSOLE ASSY. (REP1.4)

6 Remove the COVER TOP ASSY. (REP1.5)

7 Remove the KIT LEVER FUSER. (REP8.1)

8 Remove the KIT COVER MIDDLE. (REP1.11)

9 Remove the SHIELD ASSY ESS. (REP11.1)

10 Remove the BRACKET ASSY EXIT. (REP9.1)

11 Remove the CHASSIS ESS ASSY. (REP11.3)

12 Remove the COVER REAR. (REP1.10)

13 Remove the ROS ASSY. (REP7.1)

14 Disconnect all connectors that are connected to the LVPS.

15 Remove the screws (x4, Silver, with Washer, 8mm) that secure the LVPS to the machine and
remove the LVPS.

4-128
Chapter 4 Disassembly/Assembly and Adjustment
4.2 Disassembly/Assembly

LVPS

P/J56
VG
TR
VD
DB
PR

P/J51

HMR07120AA
Figure 4-96 LVPS

4-129
 Chapter 4 Disassembly/Assembly and Adjustment
4.2 Disassembly/Assembly

REP11.6 (ISC) (SCC) ESS PWB (PL11.1.7)

Removal

NOTE

When replacing the ESS PWB, do not forget to remove the EEPROMs (x3, from the left - U20, U19,
and U18) from the old board and install them to the new board.
As the installation position for each EEPROM is fixed, replace them one by one to ensure that you
do not mix them up.

1 Remove the COVER STACK. (REP1.1)

2 Remove the SHIELD ASSY ESS. (REP11.1)

NOTE

If any optional board is installed on the ESS PWB, remove them before proceeding to step 3.

3 Disconnect all connectors that are connected to the ESS PWB.

4 Remove the screws (x9, Silver, with Washer, 8mm) that secure the ESS PWB to the CHASSIS
ESS and remove the ESS PWB.

4-130
Chapter 4 Disassembly/Assembly and Adjustment
4.2 Disassembly/Assembly

U18
U19

U20

EEPROM

P/J5 ESS PWB

P/J4

P/J7

P/J1

HMR07121AA
Figure 4-97 ESS PWB

4-131
 Chapter 4 Disassembly/Assembly and Adjustment
4.2 Disassembly/Assembly

PL12 FRAME
REP12.1 KIT BASE ASSY INTERLOCK (PL12.1.1)

Removal

1 Remove the COVER STACK. (REP1.1)

2 Remove the COVER LEFT SIDE. (REP1.3)

3 Remove the SHIELD ASSY ESS. (REP11.1)

4 Open the Saddle Edge that is attached to the CHASSIS ESS (PL11.1.4).

5 Remove the screw (Silver, with Washer, 8mm) that secures the COVER MCU to the SHIELD
ASSY ESS and remove the COVER MCU.

6 From among the connectors that are connected to the MCU PWB and ESS PWB, disconnect
those with harnesses that pass through the Saddle Edge at the left side of the machine and
release the harnesses from the Saddle Edge.

7 Remove the screws (x1, Silver, Tapped, 8mm, and x1, Silver, with Washer, 8mm) that secure the
COVER SAFETY LH (PL8.1.3) to the machine and remove the COVER SAFETY LH.

8 Disconnect the connector (P/J4410) that is connected to the HARNESS ASSY FSR (PL8.1.10)
and release the harness from the Saddle Edge.

9 Disconnect the connector (P/J1230) on the harness that is connected to the KIT REGIST, and
remove the harness from the Harness Guide.

10 Remove the screws (x3, Silver, Tapped, 3x8mm, and x1, Silver, Tapped, 4x8mm) that secure the
KIT BASE ASSY INTERLOCK to the machine.

11 Remove the harness from the Harness Guide of the KIT BASE ASSY INTERLOCK and remove
the KIT BASE ASSY INTERLOCK from the machine.

4-132
Chapter 4 Disassembly/Assembly and Adjustment
4.2 Disassembly/Assembly

COVER MCU

MCU PWB
P/J22 P/J23 P/J28
P/J25 P/J27

P/J21 P/J24
P/J20 P/J11

P/J12
P/J18
P/J13

P/J17 P/J16 P/J15 P/J14

P/J5 ESS PWB

P/J4

P/J1

MHR07122AA
Figure 4-98 KIT BASE ASSY INTERLOCK

4-133
 Chapter 4 Disassembly/Assembly and Adjustment
4.2 Disassembly/Assembly

COVER SAFETY LH

MHR07123AA

Figure 4-99 KIT BASE ASSY INTERLOCK

4-134
Chapter 4 Disassembly/Assembly and Adjustment
4.2 Disassembly/Assembly

KIT BASE ASSY INTERLOCK

MHR07124AA

Figure 4-100 KIT BASE ASSY INTERLOCK

4-135
 Chapter 4 Disassembly/Assembly and Adjustment
4.2 Disassembly/Assembly

REP12.2 KIT ARM SHUTTER (PL12.1.2)

Removal

1 Remove the COVER STACK. (REP1.1)

2 Remove the COVER LEFT SIDE. (REP1.3)

3 Remove the SHIELD ASSY ESS. (REP11.1)

4 Remove the KIT BASE ASSY INTERLOCK. (REP12.1)

5 Turn the ARM SHUTTER B (PL12.1.11) and ARM SHUTTER A (PL12.1.23) towards the rear,
pull out the ARM SHUTTER B together with the SPRING ARM SHUTTER (PL12.1.10) towards
the left and pull out the ARM SHUTTER A upwards.

NOTE

When installing, make sure that the SPRING is securely attached.

4-136
Chapter 4 Disassembly/Assembly and Adjustment
4.2 Disassembly/Assembly

NOTE

ARM SHUTTER A

ARM SHUTTER B

SPRING ARM SHUTTER

MHR07125AAa
Figure 4-101 KIT ARM SHUTTER

4-137
 Chapter 4 Disassembly/Assembly and Adjustment
4.2 Disassembly/Assembly

REP12.3 HARNESS ASSY INTERLOCK (PL12.1.4)

Removal

1 Remove the COVER STACK. (REP1.1)

2 Remove the COVER LEFT SIDE. (REP1.3)

3 Remove the SHIELD ASSY ESS. (REP11.1)

4 Open the Saddle Edge that is attached to the CHASSIS ESS (PL11.1.4).

5 Remove the screw (Silver, with Washer, 8mm) that secures the COVER MCU to the SHIELD
ASSY ESS and remove the COVER MCU.

6 Disconnect the connector (P/J28) that is connected to the MCU PWB and release the harness
from the Saddle Edge.

7 Remove the HOLDER INTERLOCK SW (PL12.1.5) using a mini screwdriver, etc.

8 Remove the HARNESS ASSY INTERLOCK from the machine.

COVER MCU

MCU PWB
P/J28

HMR07126AA
Figure 4-102 HARNESS ASSY INTERLOCK

4-138
Chapter 4 Disassembly/Assembly and Adjustment
4.2 Disassembly/Assembly

HOLDER INTERLOCK SW
HARNESS ASSY INTERLOCK HMR07127AA

Figure 4-103 HARNESS ASSY INTERLOCK

4-139
 Chapter 4 Disassembly/Assembly and Adjustment
4.2 Disassembly/Assembly

REP12.4 BRACKET ASSY CRUM SP (PL12.1.17)

Removal

1 Remove the COVER STACK. (REP1.1)

2 Remove the COVER LEFT SIDE. (REP1.3)

3 Remove the SHIELD ASSY ESS. (REP11.1)

4 Remove the KIT BASE ASSY INTERLOCK. (REP12.1)

5 Remove the screw (Silver, Tapped, 8mm) that secures the HARNESS ASSY INTERLOCK to the
machine and remove the BRACKET ASSY CRUM SP.

4-140
Chapter 4 Disassembly/Assembly and Adjustment
4.2 Disassembly/Assembly

BRACKET ASSY CRUM SP

HMR07128AA
Figure 4-104 BRACKET ASSY CRUM SP

4-141
 Chapter 4 Disassembly/Assembly and Adjustment
4.2 Disassembly/Assembly

PL13 DUPLEX
REP13.1 (SCC) DUPLEX ASSY (PL13.1.1)

Removal

1 Open the KIT COVER FRONT.

2 Open the COVER DUP TOP.

3 Turn the screws at the left and right of the DUPLEX ASSY counter-clock wise to release them,
hold the knob of the DUPLEX ASSY and pull towards the front to remove it.

DUPLEX ASSY

HMR07129AA
Figure 4-105 DUPLEX ASSY

4-142
Chapter 4 Disassembly/Assembly and Adjustment
4.2 Disassembly/Assembly

REP13.2 (SCC) EXIT DRIVE ASSY (PL13.1.2)

Removal

1 Release the Latch and open the FRAME FRONT.

2 Open the COVER TOP ASSY.

3 Turn the screw of the EXIT DRIVE ASSY counter-clock wise to release it, press the lock lever
and remove the EXIT DRIVE ASSY upwards.

EXIT DRIVE ASSY

HMR07130AA
Figure 4-106 EXIT DRIVE ASSY

4-143
 Chapter 4 Disassembly/Assembly and Adjustment
4.2 Disassembly/Assembly

REP13.3 ROLL DUP (PL13.2.1)

Removal

1 Remove the DUPLEX ASSY. (REP13.1)

2 Remove the COVER R. (REP13.8)

3 Remove the COVER L. (REP13.10)

4 Remove the CHUTE COVER. (REP13.9)

5 Remove the CHUTE UNDER. (REP13.12)

6 Remove the COVER REAR.(REP13.13)

7 Remove the DUP PWB. (REP13.11)

8 Remove the DUP MOTOR. (REP13.7)

9 Remove the harness from the clamp that is attached to the BRACKET PWB (PL13.2.20).

10 Remove the screws (x2, Silver, Tapped, 8mm) that secure the BRACKET PWB to the FRAME
DUP and remove the BRACKET PWB along with the ground wire.

NOTE

As the PLATE FG also gets removed when removing the BRACKET MOTOR in the next step,
take note not to lose it.

11 Remove the screws (x4, Silver, Tapped, 8mm) that secure the BRACKET MOTOR (PL13.2.15)
to the FRAME DUP and remove the BRACKET MOTOR along with the DAMPER ASSY MOTOR
(PL13.2.14).

12 Remove the gears (x5) from the FRAME DUP.

13 Release the hooks that secure the BEARING DUPs (x4) to the FRAME DUP and remove the
BEARING DUPs.

14 Slide the ROLL DUP to the left and pull the right end towards you to remove it.

4-144
Chapter 4 Disassembly/Assembly and Adjustment
4.2 Disassembly/Assembly

BRACKET PWB

HMR07131AA
Figure 4-107 ROLL DUP

PLATE FG

BRACKET MOTOR

HMR07132AA
Figure 4-108 ROLL DUP

4-145
Chapter 4 Disassembly/Assembly and Adjustment
4.2 Disassembly/Assembly

ROLL DUP

ROLL DUP

HMR07133AA
Figure 4-109 ROLL DUP

4-146
Chapter 4 Disassembly/Assembly and Adjustment
4.2 Disassembly/Assembly

REP13.4 KIT ACTUATOR DUP (PL13.2.4)

Removal

1 Remove the DUPLEX ASSY. (REP13.1)

2 Remove the COVER REAR.(REP13.13)

3 Remove the ACTUATOR DUP from the notch that holds the ACTUATOR DUP (PL13.2.5) shaft.

4 Remove the SPRING ACTUATOR (PL13.2.6) from the ACTUATOR DUP.

NOTE

When installing, make sure that the SPRING is securely attached.

NOTE

SPRING ACTUATOR
ACTUATOR DUP HMR07134AA
Figure 4-110 KIT ACTUATOR DUP

4-147
 Chapter 4 Disassembly/Assembly and Adjustment
4.2 Disassembly/Assembly

REP13.5 (SCC) SENSOR PHOTO (Dup Jam Sensor) (PL13.2.7)

Removal

1 Remove the DUPLEX ASSY. (REP13.1)

2 Remove the COVER REAR.(REP13.13)

3 Disconnect the connector (P/J740D) that is connected to the DUP SENSOR.

4 Release the hooks that secure the DUP JAM SENSOR to the FRAME DUP and remove the DUP
JAM SENSOR.

DUP JAM SENSOR

HMR07135AA
Figure 4-111 SENSOR PHOTO (Dup Jam Sensor)

4-148
Chapter 4 Disassembly/Assembly and Adjustment
4.2 Disassembly/Assembly

REP13.6 (SCC) SENSOR PHOTO (Dup Cover Open Sensor) (PL13.2.7)

Removal

1 Remove the DUPLEX ASSY. (REP13.1)

2 Remove the COVER L. (REP13.10)

3 Remove the DUP PWB. (REP13.11)

4 Remove the harness from the clamp that is attached to the BRACKET PWB (PL13.2.20).

5 Remove the screws (x2, Silver, Tapped, 8mm) that secure the BRACKET PWB to the FRAME
DUP and remove the BRACKET PWB along with the ground wire.

6 Disconnect the connector (P/J730D) that is connected to the DUP COVER OPEN SENSOR.

7 Release the hooks that secure the DUP COVER OPEN SENSOR to the FRAME DUP and
remove the DUP COVER OPEN SENSOR.

BRACKET PWB

HMR07131AA
Figure 4-112 SENSOR PHOTO (Dup Cover Open Sensor)

4-149
 Chapter 4 Disassembly/Assembly and Adjustment
4.2 Disassembly/Assembly

DUP COVER OPEN SENSOR

HMR07136AA

Figure 4-113 SENSOR PHOTO (DUP COVER OPEN SENSOR)

4-150
Chapter 4 Disassembly/Assembly and Adjustment
4.2 Disassembly/Assembly

REP13.7 (SCC) DUP MOTOR (PL13.2.13)

Removal

1 Remove the DUPLEX ASSY. (REP13.1)

2 Remove the COVER R. (REP13.8)

3 Remove the COVER L. (REP13.10)

4 Remove the COVER REAR.(REP13.13)

5 Remove the DUP PWB. (REP13.11)

6 Remove the harness from the clamp that is attached to the BRACKET PWB (PL13.2.20).

7 Remove the screws (x2, Silver, Tapped, 8mm) that secure the BRACKET PWB to the FRAME
DUP and remove the BRACKET PWB along with the ground wire.

8 Remove the harness from the Harness Guide of the FRAME DUP.

9 Remove the screws (x2, Silver, 8mm) that secure the DUP MOTOR to the FRAME DUP and
remove the DUP MOTOR.

BRACKET PWB

HMR07131AA
Figure 4-114 DUP MOTOR

4-151
Chapter 4 Disassembly/Assembly and Adjustment
4.2 Disassembly/Assembly

DUP MOTOR

HMR07137AA
Figure 4-115 DUP MOTOR

4-152
Chapter 4 Disassembly/Assembly and Adjustment
4.2 Disassembly/Assembly

REP13.8 COVER R (PL13.2.16)

Removal

1 Remove the DUPLEX ASSY. (REP13.1)

2 Pull the screw that secures the COVER R to the DUP ASSY towards you while turning it counter-
clockwise to remove it.

3 Remove the screws (x2, Silver, Tapped, 8mm) that secure the COVER R to the FRAME DUP
and release the hook (x1 location) to remove the COVER R.

COVER R HMR07138AA
Figure 4-116 COVER R

4-153
 Chapter 4 Disassembly/Assembly and Adjustment
4.2 Disassembly/Assembly

REP13.9 CHUTE COVER (PL13.2.18)

Removal

1 Remove the DUPLEX ASSY. (REP13.1)

2 Open the CHUTE COVER 90°.

3 Lift the right installation section of the CHUTE COVER to remove it from the boss and slide off
the boss at the left installation section to remove the CHUTE COVER.

CHUTE COVER

HMR07139AA
Figure 4-117 CHUTE COVER

4-154
Chapter 4 Disassembly/Assembly and Adjustment
4.2 Disassembly/Assembly

REP13.10 COVER L (PL13.2.19)

Removal

1 Remove the DUPLEX ASSY. (REP13.1)

2 Pull the screw that secures the COVER L to the DUP ASSY towards you while turning it counter-
clockwise to remove it.

3 Remove the screw (Silver, Tapped, 8mm) that secures the COVER L to the FRAME DUP and
release the hooks (x2 location) to remove the COVER L.

COVER L
HMR07140AA
Figure 4-118 COVER L

4-155
 Chapter 4 Disassembly/Assembly and Adjustment
4.2 Disassembly/Assembly

REP13.11 DUP PWB (PL13.2.21)

Removal

1 Remove the DUPLEX ASSY. (REP13.1)

2 Remove the COVER L. (REP13.10)

3 Disconnect all connectors that are connected to the DUP PWB.

4 Remove the screws (x3, Silver, 8mm) that secure the DUP PWB to the FRAME DUP and remove
the DUP PWB.

DUP PWB

P/J72

P/J75

P/J73

P/J71

P/J74

HMR07141AA
Figure 4-119 DUP PWB

4-156
Chapter 4 Disassembly/Assembly and Adjustment
4.2 Disassembly/Assembly

REP13.12 CHUTE UNDER (PL13.2.23)

Removal

1 Remove the DUPLEX ASSY. (REP13.1)

2 Push the side surfaces at the installation sections of the CHUTE UNDER to widen the gap, and
slide out the bosses of the CHUTE UNDER from the holes at the side surfaces to remove the
CHUTE UNDER.

CHUTE UNDER HMR07142AA

Figure 4-120 CHUTE UNDER

4-157
 Chapter 4 Disassembly/Assembly and Adjustment
4.2 Disassembly/Assembly

REP13.13 COVER REAR (PL13.2.24)

Removal

1 Remove the DUPLEX ASSY. (REP13.1)

2 Remove the screws (x2, Silver, Tapped, 8mm) that secure the COVER REAR to the FRAME
DUP and release the hooks (x4 locations) to remove the COVER REAR.

COVER REAR HMR07143AA

Figure 4-121 COVER REAR

4-158
Chapter 4 Disassembly/Assembly and Adjustment
4.2 Disassembly/Assembly

PL14 OPTION FEEDER & CASSETTE

REP14.1 FEEDER ASSY (PL14.1.1/PL15.1.1)

Removal

NOTE

As the machine is very heavy, make sure you have 3 persons when performing any lifting.

1 Remove the CASSETTE ASSY of the main machine.

2 Remove the optional CASSETTE ASSY.

3 Remove the JOINT FEEDERs (PL14.1.3/PL15.1.3) (x4 locations) that connect the machine to
the FEEDER ASSY.

4 Make sure that the machine is in a level position before lifting it directly upwards to remove it
from the FEEDER ASSY.

4-159
 Chapter 4 Disassembly/Assembly and Adjustment
4.2 Disassembly/Assembly

DETAIL A

DETAIL B A C

FEEDER ASSY

DETAIL C
HMR07144AA

Figure 4-122 FEEDER ASSY

4-160
Chapter 4 Disassembly/Assembly and Adjustment
4.2 Disassembly/Assembly

REP14.2 (SCC) COVER CST (PL14.1.2/PL15.1.2)

Removal

1 Remove the optional CASSETTE ASSY.

2 Pull out the COVER CST to the rear until it stop and bend the right and left installation sections
downwards to remove it.

COVER CST

HMR07145AA
Figure 4-123 COVER CST

4-161
 Chapter 4 Disassembly/Assembly and Adjustment
4.2 Disassembly/Assembly

REP14.3 (SCC) COVER FDR R (PL14.1.4/PL15.1.4)

Removal

NOTE

The COVER FDR R can also be removed with the machine still mounted on the FEEDER ASSY.

1 Remove the FEEDER ASSY. (REP14.1)

2 Remove the COVER FDR FRONT R. (REP14.4)

3 Remove the screws (x5, Silver, 8mm) that secure the COVER FDR R to the FEEDER ASSY.

4 Open the front of the COVER FDR R and slide out the boss at the rear to remove the COVER
FDR R.

COVER FDR R

HMR07146AA
Figure 4-124 COVER FDR R

4-162
Chapter 4 Disassembly/Assembly and Adjustment
4.2 Disassembly/Assembly

REP14.4 (SCC) COVER FDR FRONT R (PL14.1.6/PL15.1.6)

Removal

NOTE

The COVER FDR FRONT R can also be removed with the machine still mounted on the FEEDER
ASSY.

1 Remove the FEEDER ASSY. (REP14.1)

2 Remove the screw (Silver, Tapped, 8mm) that secures the COVER FDR FRONT R to the
FEEDER ASSY.

3 Release the hooks (x2 locations) that secure the COVER FDR FRONT R to the FEEDER ASSY
to remove the COVER FDR FRONT R.

COVER FDR FRONT R

HMR07147AA
Figure 4-125 COVER FDR FRONT R

4-163
 Chapter 4 Disassembly/Assembly and Adjustment
4.2 Disassembly/Assembly

REP14.5 (SCC) COVER FDR L (PL14.1.7/PL15.1.7)

Removal

1 Remove the FEEDER ASSY. (REP14.1)

2 Remove the CHUTE ASSY TURN OPT. (REP14.10)

3 Remove the screws (x5, Silver, 8mm) that secure the COVER FDR L to the FEEDER ASSY.

4 Open the front of the COVER FDR L and slide out the boss at the rear to remove the COVER
FDR L.

COVER FDR L

HMR07148AA
Figure 4-126 COVER FDR L

4-164
Chapter 4 Disassembly/Assembly and Adjustment
4.2 Disassembly/Assembly

REP14.6 FEEDER ASSY SUB SP (PL14.2.1/PL15.2.1)

Removal

1 Remove the FEEDER ASSY. (REP14.1)

2 Remove the COVER FDR FRONT R. (REP14.4)

3 Remove the COVER FDR R. (REP14.3)

4 Remove the CHUTE ASSY TURN OPT. (REP14.10)

5 Remove the COVER FDR L. (REP14.5)

6 Disconnect the connector (P/J8330) on the harness that is connected to the TURN CLUTCH
(PL14.3.3/PL15.3.3) and the connector (P/J8320) on the harness that is connected to the FEED
CLUTCH (PL14.3.4/PL15.3.4), release the clamps and remove the harnesses.

7 Disconnect the connectors (P/J84 and P/J85) that are connected to the FDR PWB and release
the harness from the Harness Guide.

8 Remove the screws (x4, Silver, 4x8mm) that secure the FEEDER ASSY SUB SP to the FEEDER
ASSY.

9 Lift the left side of the FEEDER ASSY SUB SP and shift it to the left, and then release the
CLUTCH at the right side from the frame hole to remove the FEEDER ASSY SUB SP.

NOTE

When installing the FEEDER ASSY SUB SP, make sure that the depressed part of FEED
CLUTCH (PL14.3.4/PL15.3.4) is inserted into the protrusion of KIT GUIDE CST R.

4-165
 Chapter 4 Disassembly/Assembly and Adjustment
4.2 Disassembly/Assembly

FEEDER ASSY SUB SP

NOTE
HMR07149AA
Figure 4-127 FEEDER ASSY SUB SP

4-166
Chapter 4 Disassembly/Assembly and Adjustment
4.2 Disassembly/Assembly

REP14.7 PLATE CHUTE (PL14.2.2/PL15.2.2)

Removal

1 Remove the FEEDER ASSY. (REP14.1)

2 Remove the screws (x2, Silver, with Washer, 8mm) that secure the PLATE CHUTE to the
FEEDER ASSY SUB SP (PL14.2.1/PL15.2.1).

3 Turn the PLATE CHUTE upside-down and disconnect the connector (P/J840) that is connected
to the PAPER EDGE SENSOR (PL14.2.4/PL15.2.4).

4 Release the clamps (x2 locations) that are attached to the PLATE CHUTE to remove the
harness.

4-167
Chapter 4 Disassembly/Assembly and Adjustment
4.2 Disassembly/Assembly

PLATE CHUTE

HMR07150AA
Figure 4-128 PLATE CHUTE

4-168
Chapter 4 Disassembly/Assembly and Adjustment
4.2 Disassembly/Assembly

REP14.8 (SCC) PAPER EDGE SENSOR (PL14.2.4/PL15.2.4)

Removal

1 Remove the FEEDER ASSY. (REP14.1)

2 Remove the PLATE CHUTE. (REP14.7)

3 Remove the screw (Silver, 8mm) that secures the BRACKET SENSOR (PL14.2.3/PL15.2.3) to
the PLATE CHUTE and remove the BRACKET SENSOR.

4 Release the hooks that secure the PAPER EDGE SENSOR to the BRACKET SENSOR and
remove the PAPER EDGE SENSOR.

PAPER EDGE SENSOR

HMR07151AA
Figure 4-129 PAPER EDGE SENSOR

4-169
 Chapter 4 Disassembly/Assembly and Adjustment
4.2 Disassembly/Assembly

REP14.9 DRIVE ASSY OPTION (PL14.2.6/PL15.2.6)

Removal

NOTE

The DRIVE ASSY OPTION can also be removed with the machine still mounted on the FEEDER
ASSY.

1 Remove the FEEDER ASSY. (REP14.1)

2 Remove the COVER FDR FRONT R. (REP14.4)

3 Remove the COVER FDR R. (REP14.3)

4 Disconnect the connector (P/J8310) on the harness that is connected to the DRIVE ASSY
OPTION, release the clamp and remove the harness.

5 Remove the screws (x4, Silver, 8mm) that secure the DRIVE ASSY OPTION to the FEEDER
ASSY.

6 Slide the DRIVE ASSY OPTION to the rear to remove it.

DRIVE ASSY OPTION HMR07152AA

Figure 4-130 DRIVE ASSY OPTION

4-170
Chapter 4 Disassembly/Assembly and Adjustment
4.2 Disassembly/Assembly

REP14.10 CHUTE ASSY TURN OPT (PL14.2.7/PL15.2.7)

Removal

1 Remove the FEEDER ASSY. (REP14.1)

2 Remove the screws (x2, Silver, Tapped, 8mm) that secure the CHUTE ASSY TURN OPT to the
FEEDER ASSY.

3 Remove the notches of the CHUTE ASSY TURN OPT from the right and left BEARINGs, and
remove the CHUTE ASSY TURN OPT.

CHUTE ASSY TURN OPT HMR07153AA

Figure 4-131 CHUTE ASSY TURN OPT

4-171
 Chapter 4 Disassembly/Assembly and Adjustment
4.2 Disassembly/Assembly

REP14.11 KIT ACTUATOR EDGE OPTFDR (PL14.2.12/PL15.2.12)

Removal

1 Remove the FEEDER ASSY. (REP14.1)

2 Remove the CHUTE ASSY TURN OPT. (REP14.10)

3 Remove the screw (Silver, Tapped, 8mm) that secures the HOLDER ACTUATOR (PL14.2.11/
PL15.2.11) to the CHUTE ASSY TURN OPT and remove the HOLDER ACTUATOR.

4 Open the HOLDER ACTUATOR and remove the ACTUATOR EDGE OPTFDR (PL14.2.13/
PL15.2.13) shaft.

5 Remove the SPRING SNSR OPTFDR (PL14.2.14/PL15.2.14) from the ACTUATOR EDGE
OPTFDR.

NOTE

When installing, make sure that the SPRING is securely attached.

4-172
Chapter 4 Disassembly/Assembly and Adjustment
4.2 Disassembly/Assembly

ACTUATOR EDGE
OPTFDR SPRING SNSR
OPTFDR

HOLDER ACTUATOR

HMR07154AA
Figure 4-132 KIT ACTUATOR EDGE OPTFDR

4-173
 Chapter 4 Disassembly/Assembly and Adjustment
4.2 Disassembly/Assembly

REP14.12 KIT GUIDE CST R (PL14.2.15/PL15.2.15)

Removal

1 Remove the FEEDER ASSY. (REP14.1)

2 Remove the COVER CST. (REP14.2)

3 Remove the COVER FDR FRONT R. (REP14.4)

4 Remove the COVER FDR R. (REP14.3)

5 Remove the CHUTE ASSY TURN OPT. (REP14.10)

6 Remove the COVER FDR L. (REP14.5)

7 Remove the FEEDER ASSY SUB SP. (REP14.6)

8 Disconnect the connector (P/J8310) on the harness that is connected to the DRIVE ASSY
OPTION, release the clamp and remove the harness.

9 Remove the screws (x2, Silver, Tapped, 8mm) that secure the KIT GUIDE CST R to the
FEEDER ASSY.

10 Press the boss of the KIT GUIDE CST R and slide it towards the front, then release the hooks
(x5 locations) and incline the KIT GUIDE CST R to its side.

11 Pull the harness through the square hole of the KIT GUIDE CST R and remove the KIT GUIDE
CST R through the front.

4-174
Chapter 4 Disassembly/Assembly and Adjustment
4.2 Disassembly/Assembly

KIT GUIDE CST R

HMR07155AA

Figure 4-133 KIT GUIDE CST R

4-175
 Chapter 4 Disassembly/Assembly and Adjustment
4.2 Disassembly/Assembly

REP14.13 KIT GUIDE CST L (PL14.2.16/PL15.2.16)

Removal

1 Remove the FEEDER ASSY. (REP14.1)

2 Remove the COVER CST. (REP14.2)

3 Remove the COVER FDR FRONT R. (REP14.4)

4 Remove the COVER FDR R. (REP14.3)

5 Remove the CHUTE ASSY TURN OPT. (REP14.10)

6 Remove the COVER FDR L. (REP14.5)

7 Remove the FEEDER ASSY SUB SP. (REP14.6)

8 Disconnect the connector (P/J83) that is connected to the FDR PWB, release the clamp and
remove the harness.

9 Remove the screws (x2, Silver, Tapped, 8mm) that secure the KIT GUIDE CST L to the FEEDER
ASSY.

10 From the inner side of the machine, release the boss of the KIT GUIDE CST L and slide it
towards the front, then release the hooks (x5 locations) and incline the KIT GUIDE CST L to its
side.

11 Pull the harness through the square hole of the KIT GUIDE CST L and remove the KIT GUIDE
CST L through the front.

4-176
Chapter 4 Disassembly/Assembly and Adjustment
4.2 Disassembly/Assembly

KIT GUIDE CST L HMR07156AA

Figure 4-134 KIT GUIDE CST L

4-177
 Chapter 4 Disassembly/Assembly and Adjustment
4.2 Disassembly/Assembly

REP14.14 (SCC) SIZE SWITCH (PL14.2.17/PL15.2.17)

Removal

1 Remove the FEEDER ASSY. (REP14.1)

2 Remove the CHUTE ASSY TURN OPT. (REP14.10)

3 Remove the COVER FDR L. (REP14.5)

4 Release the hooks that secure the SIZE SWITCH and remove the SIZE SWITCH.

5 Disconnect the connector (P/J820) that is connected to the SIZE SWITCH.

SIZE SWITCH

HMR07157AA
Figure 4-135 SIZE SWITCH

4-178
Chapter 4 Disassembly/Assembly and Adjustment
4.2 Disassembly/Assembly

REP14.15 (SCC) FDR PWB (PL14.2.18/PL15.2.18)

Removal

1 Remove the FEEDER ASSY. (REP14.1)

2 Remove the CHUTE ASSY TURN OPT. (REP14.10)

3 Remove the COVER FDR L. (REP14.5)

4 Disconnect all connectors that are connected to the FDR PWB.

5 Remove the screws (x4, Silver, 8mm) that secure the FDR PWB to the FEEDER ASSY and
remove the FDR PWB.

FDR PWB

P/J81
P/J83

P/J86
P/J82
P/J85 P/J84 HMR07158AA
Figure 4-136 FDR PWB

4-179
 Chapter 4 Disassembly/Assembly and Adjustment
4.2 Disassembly/Assembly

REP14.16 (SCC) TURN CLUTCH (PL14.3.3/PL15.3.3)

Removal

1 Remove the FEEDER ASSY. (REP14.1)

2 Remove the COVER FDR FRONT R. (REP14.4)

3 Remove the COVER FDR R. (REP14.3)

4 Remove the CHUTE ASSY TURN OPT. (REP14.10)

5 Remove the COVER FDR L. (REP14.5)

6 Remove the FEEDER ASSY SUB SP. (REP14.6)

7 Remove the plastic clip that secures the TURN CLUTCH to the ROLL ASSY TURN (PL14.3.12/
PL15.3.12) shaft.

8 While slipping off the depressed part of the TURN CLUTCH from the protrusion of the FEEDER
ASSY SUB, remove the TURN CLUTCH from the shaft.

TURN CLUTCH

HMR07159AA
Figure 4-137 TURN CLUTCH

4-180
Chapter 4 Disassembly/Assembly and Adjustment
4.2 Disassembly/Assembly

REP14.17 (SCC) FEED CLUTCH (PL14.3.4/PL15.3.4)

Removal

1 Remove the FEEDER ASSY. (REP14.1)

2 Remove the COVER FDR FRONT R. (REP14.4)

3 Remove the COVER FDR R. (REP14.3)

4 Remove the CHUTE ASSY TURN OPT. (REP14.10)

5 Remove the COVER FDR L. (REP14.5)

6 Remove the FEEDER ASSY SUB SP. (REP14.6)

7 Remove the plastic clip that secures the FEED CLUTCH to the ROLL ASSY FEED shaft.

8 Remove the FEED CLUTCH from the shaft.

FEED CLUTCH

HMR07160AA
Figure 4-138 FEED CLUTCH

4-181
 Chapter 4 Disassembly/Assembly and Adjustment
4.2 Disassembly/Assembly

REP14.18 ACTUATOR NO PAPER (PL14.3.6/PL15.3.6)

Removal

1 Remove the FEEDER ASSY. (REP14.1)

2 Remove the COVER FDR FRONT R. (REP14.4)

3 Remove the COVER FDR R. (REP14.3)

4 Remove the CHUTE ASSY TURN OPT. (REP14.10)

5 Remove the COVER FDR L. (REP14.5)

6 Remove the FEEDER ASSY SUB SP. (REP14.6)

7 While simultaneously pushing in the bosses (x2 locations) at the left side of the FEEDER ASSY
SUB SP, slide the HOLDER NO PAPER L (PL14.3.7/PL15.3.7) to the front, then release the
hooks (x4 locations) and remove the HOLDER NO PAPER L.

8 Pull out the ACTUATOR NO PAPER shaft from the installation section of the ACTUATOR NO
PAPER of HOLDER NO PAPER R.

4-182
Chapter 4 Disassembly/Assembly and Adjustment
4.2 Disassembly/Assembly

HOLDER NO PAPER L

ACTUATOR NO PAPER

HMR07161AA

Figure 4-139 ACTUATOR NO PAPER

4-183
 Chapter 4 Disassembly/Assembly and Adjustment
4.2 Disassembly/Assembly

REP14.19 ROLL ASSY FEED (PL14.3.10/PL15.3.10)

Removal

1 Remove the optional CASSETTE ASSY.

NOTE

When removing the ROLL ASSY FEED in the following steps, take note of the CLUTCH ONE
WAY FEED (PL14.3.9/PL15.3.9) that might drop off.

2 Release the hook that secures the ROLL ASSY FEED to the FEEDER ASSY SUB SP (PL14.2.1/
PL15.2.1) shaft, and pull out the ROLL ASSY FEED to remove it.

NOTE

When installing the ROLL ASSY FEED, make sure that the hook is securely latched on.

NOTE

After replacing the ROLL ASSY FEED, you must also clear the corresponding life counter.
To clear the life counter, enter CE mode and go to the menus under: Parameter / Life Counter. Tray
2: Tray 2 Roll, Tray 3: Tray 3 Roll, Tray 4: Tray 4 Roll
(Refer to "2.4.4 Menu Tree" of "2.4 CE Mode" in "Chapter 2 Troubleshooting")

4-184
Chapter 4 Disassembly/Assembly and Adjustment
4.2 Disassembly/Assembly

ROLL ASSY FEED CLUTCH ONE WAY FEED

HMR07162AA
Figure 4-140 ROLL ASSY FEED

4-185
 Chapter 4 Disassembly/Assembly and Adjustment
4.2 Disassembly/Assembly

REP14.20 (SCC) TRAY NO PAPER SENSOR (PL14.3.11/PL15.3.11)

Removal

1 Remove the FEEDER ASSY. (REP14.1)

2 Disconnect the connector (P/J850) that is connected to the TRAY NO PAPER SENSOR.

3 Release the hooks that secure the TRAY NO PAPER SENSOR to the FEEDER ASSY SUB SP
to remove the TRAY NO PAPER SENSOR.

TRAY NO PAPER SENSOR

HMR07163AA
Figure 4-141 TRAY NO PAPER SENSOR

4-186
Chapter 4 Disassembly/Assembly and Adjustment
4.2 Disassembly/Assembly

REP14.21 ROLL ASSY TURN (PL14.3.12/PL15.3.12)

Removal

1 Remove the FEEDER ASSY. (REP14.1)

2 Remove the COVER FDR FRONT R. (REP14.4)

3 Remove the COVER FDR R. (REP14.3)

4 Remove the CHUTE ASSY TURN OPT. (REP14.10)

5 Remove the COVER FDR L. (REP14.5)

6 Remove the FEEDER ASSY SUB SP. (REP14.6)

7 Remove the PLATE CHUTE. (REP14.7)

8 Remove the TURN CLUTCH. (REP14.16)

9 Remove the E-rings that secure the BEARINGs at the left and right sides and remove the
BEARINGs.

10 Slide the ROLL ASSY TURN to the right, slip the shaft at the left side out of the hole and remove
the ROLL ASSY TURN.

ROLL ASSY TURN

HMR07164AA
Figure 4-142 ROLL ASSY TURN

4-187
 Chapter 4 Disassembly/Assembly and Adjustment
4.3 Adjustment

4.3 Adjustment
4.3.1 Firmware Download ((ISC) (SCC) ESS PWB / MPC)

Upgrade the firmware by downloading it from the PC to the Printer.

Network (Port9100), USB port and parallel port are supported as communication interfaces. In this document,
an example using a USB port will be described.

NOTE

There are two kinds of firmware: one for the ESS PWB and one for the MPC (optional multi protocol
LAN card). Both share a common download procedure and the printer will automatically reboot
after the download is complete. The work time required for each firmware is as follows:

NOTE

When a USB port or parallel port is to be used, check that "Enable bi-directional support" is
disabled (not ticked) in the Printer Port Settings on a PC.

Procedure

Work Time: 2' 00''

1 When "Ready to Print" is displayed in the Control Panel on a printer, activate FWDLMgr.exe.

4-188
Chapter 4 Disassembly/Assembly and Adjustment
4.3 Adjustment
2 Click on the [Agree] button.

3 Click the [Next] button.

4 Specify [USB Port] and click the [Next] button.

4-189
 Chapter 4 Disassembly/Assembly and Adjustment
4.3 Adjustment
5 Click on the [Finish] button.

6 The printer will automatically reboot after the firmware download has been completed.

NOTE

Print the "Printer Settings" and check that the "Firmware Version" column under "General" for the
ESS PWB or the "Firmware Version" column under "Network" for the MPC has been updated.

4-190
Chapter 4 Disassembly/Assembly and Adjustment
4.3 Adjustment

4.3.2 Things to take note when replacing Important Information Stored

Components

After installation, any data that the customer has registered are very important. To lose or leak the data would
be an unforgivable offence. To gain the trust of customers, it is essential for CE to be knowledgeable about the
name of components that store these data. The CE must also have full understanding on how to handle these
components when replacing them.

Procedure

This product stores important data in the following components. Perform the operation according to the
following procedures.
• HDD ASSY [Additional Hard Disk] (PL11.1.12)
• NVM on the ESS PWB (PL11.1.7) board

NOTE

Domestic) Collect/discard components according to the FTO (2-027) that is common to all models.
IBG) Collect/discard components according to the separately pre-determined procedures.

4-191
 Chapter 4 Disassembly/Assembly and Adjustment
4.3 Adjustment

HDD ASSY ESS PWB

1 Remaining data (the data left behind)
• Fonts (downloaded item) Parameters that can be set by users
• Forms (downloaded item) (IP address, etc.) as well as all ESS system
• Logo, etc. (downloaded item) data (excluding the MCU).
• Secure Print • User Job Registration
Stored • Sample Print • Job History
Information 2 Deleted data
(data that has been deleted but still
• Error History (Fault History, Counters)
physically remain in the HDD. Usually,
• DV Log/Auditron Settings/PV Total
Data
this is difficult to recover.)
• Temporarily stored image data that is • Network Settings
used for printing
• Procedures before servicing • Procedures before servicing
As the data cannot be backed up or To restore the settings later, print the
restored, first print the reports and check reports. (The settings cannot be backed
the items that has been downloaded by up using the tools)
the user. • Printer Settings
• Stored Documents • Job History
• Fonts List • Error History
• PCL Font List • Print Meter
• PS Font List • Panel Settings
• User Defined List • ESC/P Logical
Pre- • ART EX Form List • PS Logical
replacement • PCL Macro List • Printer Settings (CE Mode)
operation • Delete Data Operation • Backup Data
For items that has been downloaded by After replacing the NVM, perform billing
the users, either request their assistance data backup in the CE Mode through the
to delete them, or obtain their [Installation / CopyCounter M to B] menu.
persmission to do so. • Delete Data Operation
Furthermore, when the ESS PWB is also If there is a need to delete the NVM user
to be replaced on top of the HDD ASSY data, perform initialization from the
replacement, transfer the NVM. [Initialization] Menu.
• Total Deletion
Execute "Installation / Clear ALL NVM"
menu in the CE Mode.
• Handling of replaced PWB
• Handling of replaced HDD ASSY
Always initialize the PWB before bringing
Before you bring back the HDD ASSY,
it back. Inform the customer that even if it
always notify the customer. Explain that
cannot be initialized at the customer's
the removed HDD ASSY will be sent to
machine, it will be done in the FX
an FX Recycling Station where it will
Post- Recycling Station, so there will be no
either undergo the "Overwriting Process"
replacement security problems.
or the "Destruction Process" in order to
operation • Procedures after servicing
prevent security problems from occurring.
Print the reports and verify that the
If the customer would like to personally
settings have been retained.
confirm that the removed HDD ASSY is
Re-set the user registered data, and verify
destroyed, destroy the HDD ASSY on the
that they have been set by printing the
spot (charges applies).
reports.

4-192
Chapter 5 Parts List
Table of Contents
5.1 About the Parts List ....................................................................................................5-1
5.1.1 How to use the Parts List ................................................................................................................ 5-1
5.1.2 Precautions ..................................................................................................................................... 5-1
5.1.3 Plate Composition........................................................................................................................... 5-2
5.1.4 Terms and Symbols ........................................................................................................................ 5-3
5.2 Parts Navigation .........................................................................................................5-5
5.3 Parts List...................................................................................................................5-10
PL1 COVERS ........................................................................................................................................ 5-10
PL1.1 Cover ...................................................................................................................................... 5-10
PL2 FEEDER & CASSETTE.................................................................................................................. 5-12
PL2.1 250 Feeder ............................................................................................................................. 5-12
PL2.2 250 Cassette .......................................................................................................................... 5-14
PL2.3 550 Feeder (1/2)..................................................................................................................... 5-16
PL2.4 550 Feeder (2/2)..................................................................................................................... 5-18
PL2.5 550 Cassette .......................................................................................................................... 5-20
PL3 MSI ................................................................................................................................................. 5-22
PL3.1 MSI ......................................................................................................................................... 5-22
PL4 FRONT FRAME.............................................................................................................................. 5-24
PL4.1 Front Frame............................................................................................................................ 5-24
PL5 REGI............................................................................................................................................... 5-26
PL5.1 Regi ........................................................................................................................................ 5-26
PL6 XEROGRAPHICS........................................................................................................................... 5-28
PL6.1 CRU........................................................................................................................................ 5-28
PL7 ROS................................................................................................................................................ 5-30
PL7.1 ROS........................................................................................................................................ 5-30
PL8 FUSER ........................................................................................................................................... 5-32
PL8.1 Fuser ...................................................................................................................................... 5-32
PL9 DRIVE............................................................................................................................................. 5-34
PL9.1 Drive ....................................................................................................................................... 5-34
PL10 Nohad ........................................................................................................................................... 5-36
PL10.1 Nohad ................................................................................................................................... 5-36
PL11 ELECTRICAL ............................................................................................................................... 5-38
PL11.1 Electrical ............................................................................................................................... 5-38
PL12 FRAME ......................................................................................................................................... 5-40
PL12.1 Frame ................................................................................................................................... 5-40
PL13 DUPLEX ....................................................................................................................................... 5-42
PL13.1 Duplex (1/2) .......................................................................................................................... 5-42
PL13.2 Duplex (2/2) .......................................................................................................................... 5-44
PL14 OPTION 250 FEEDER ................................................................................................................. 5-46
PL14.1 250 Feeder (1/3)................................................................................................................... 5-46
PL14.2 250 Feeder (2/3)................................................................................................................... 5-48
PL14.3 250 Feeder (3/3)................................................................................................................... 5-50
PL15 OPTION 550 FEEDER ................................................................................................................. 5-52
PL15.1 550 Feeder (1/3)................................................................................................................... 5-52
PL15.2 550 Feeder (2/3)................................................................................................................... 5-54
PL15.3 550 Feeder (3/3)................................................................................................................... 5-56
Chapter 5 Parts List
5.1 About the Parts List

5.1 About the Parts List

5.1.1 How to use the Parts List
Chapter 5 Parts List contains the information on the spare parts. It is used for purposes such as a request for
parts replacement and making an area code entry. Before using, read the following explanations carefully and
use it correctly.

5.1.2 Precautions
• To make the list simple and easy to read, screws and related parts are indicated by alphabets and
numbers without any illustrations.
• When "Note" is indicated on the DESCRIPTION column, read the note carefully before ordering and
replacing parts.
• The parts with (SCC) indicated in front of their names in the DESCRIPTION column are the Safety
Critical Components. When handling the Safety Critical Components, follow the regulations
regarding the Safety Critical Components set by Fuji Xerox Co., Ltd.
• The parts with (ISC) indicated in front of their names in the DESCRIPTION column are the Important
Information Stored Component, and this component stores all the important customer information.
Perform the replacement/discarding operation according to the procedures found in Chapter 4.
• Area codes are indicated on the respective plates.
Area codes that cannot be described by parts on the respective plates (toner, current value
adjustment, etc.) are indicated on related plates or in the Area Code Table at the end of this chapter.
• The orientation of the machine is defined as follows.

REAR

LEFT

RIGHT

FRONT HMR07022FA

Figure 5-1 Definition of Printer Orientation

5-1
 Chapter 5 Parts List
5.1 About the Parts List

5.1.3 Plate Composition

(1) PLATE Name

Module name.

(2) SUB PLATE NO.

Corresponds to the reference number in the Parts List indicated in each chapter.

(3) SUB PLATE NAME

Title name of the illustration that divides each module mechanically.

(4) ITEM

Corresponds to the number indicated in the illustration of the same SUB PLATE NO.

(5) PART NO.

The number to be entered for ordering parts and recording on the service report.

(6) DESCRIPTION

Indicates the parts name, V (MOD) code and note, etc.

(7) AREA CODE

Code to be entered in the failure column on the service report.

1
4 5
2 3 6

5-2
Chapter 5 Parts List
5.1 About the Parts List

5.1.4 Terms and Symbols

Symbol and
Description
Terminology

Used to alert you that the adjustment procedures of the corresponding parts are
described in Chapter 4 Disassembly/Assembly and Adjustment.

Used to alert you that the removal, installation and replacement procedures are
described in Chapter 4 Disassembly/Assembly and Adjustment.

Used to alert you that the removal, installation, replacement and adjustment
procedures are described in Chapter 4 Disassembly/Assembly and Adjustment.

This is located at the top left or top right side of an illustration to indicate that an
3 (with 4-10) assembly of the parts is listed as an item.
This example indicates that Item 3 is an assembly of Items 4 to 10.
Used to alert you that 4 identical parts are installed but only a representative part
(1/4 Pcs.)
is indicated in the illustration.
When this symbol is indicated in the PARTS NO. column, that parts is not
--
individually managed as a spare part.
When this symbol is indicated in the DESCRIPTION column, that parts is not
(P/O Item 5)
managed as a spare part. This indicates that the assembly is Item 5.
When this is indicated in the DESCRIPTION column, the interchangeable parts
(New) (Old) comes in New and Old versions. When there are no specific instructions or
reasons, order Old parts.
When this is indicated in the DESCRIPTION column, order either one of the parts
(Alternative)
as a replacement part.

When this symbol is indicated in the PARTS No. column, a number within a circle
shows that the whole and framed areas of the figure are the configurations after
the part was modified by the Tag No. within the circle.

When this symbol is indicated in the PARTS No. column, a number within a circle
shows that the whole and framed areas of the figure are the configurations before
the part was modified by the Tag No. within the circle.

The symbol shows the part item number within a circle is the configuration after
the part was modified by the Tag No. within the circle.

The symbol shows the part item number within a circle is the configuration before
the part was modified by the Tag No. within the circle.

When this is indicated in the DESCRIPTION column, the number shows the
[Models with 5V]
configuration of the part after the part was modified.

5-3
 Chapter 5 Parts List
5.1 About the Parts List

Symbol and
Description
Terminology
When this is indicated in the DESCRIPTION column, the number shows the
[Models without 5V]
configuration of the part before the part was modified.
The parts with (SCC) indicated in front of their names in the DESCRIPTION
column are the Safety Critical Components. When handling the Safety Critical
(SCC) Fuser Assembly
Components, follow the regulations regarding the Safety Critical Components set
by Fuji Xerox Co., Ltd.
The parts with (ISC) indicated in front of their names in the DESCRIPTION column
are the Important Information Stored Component, and this component stores all
(ISC) NVMPWB
the important customer information. Perform the replacement/discarding
operation according to the procedures found in Chapter 4.

5-4
Chapter 5 Parts List
5.2 Parts Navigation

5.2 Parts Navigation

PL1.1

PL1.1 HMR08011FA

Figure 5-2 Cover

PL2.1

PL2.2 HMR08012FA

Figure 5-3 250 Feeder & Cassette

5-5
 Chapter 5 Parts List
5.2 Parts Navigation

PL2.4

PL2.3
PL2.5 HMR08019FA

Figure 5-4 550 Feeder & Cassette

PL3.1

PL4.1 HMR08013FA

Figure 5-5 MSI & Frame Front

5-6
Chapter 5 Parts List
5.2 Parts Navigation

PL8.1

PL5.1
PL6.1 HMR08014FA

Figure 5-6 Regi & CRU & Fuser

PL9.1

PL12.1 PL9.1
HMR08015FA

Figure 5-7 Drive & Frame

5-7
 Chapter 5 Parts List
5.2 Parts Navigation

PL10.1
PL11.1

PL10.1 PL10.1
PL7.1
PL11.1 HMR08016FA

Figure 5-8 ROS & Nohad & Elec.

PL13.1

PL13.1, PL13.2
HMR08017FA

Figure 5-9 Duplex

5-8
Chapter 5 Parts List
5.2 Parts Navigation

PL14.3

PL14.2

PL14.1
PL14.2
PL2.2 HMR08020AA

Figure 5-10 Option 250 Feeder

PL15.1
PL15.3

PL15.2

PL15.1
PL15.2

PL2.5 HMR08018AA

Figure 5-11 Option 550 Feeder

5-9
 Chapter 5 Parts List
5.3 Parts List

5.3 Parts List

PL1 COVERS
PL1.1 Cover

(J5)
5 4
3
(J300)

8 7
14 PL10.1

13 12

11 10

HMR08101FA

5-10
Chapter 5 Parts List
5.3 Parts List

ITEM PARTS No DESCRIPTION A.C

848K 05740 COVER DUP TOP 26 IBG
1 32A1
848K 05730 COVER DUP TOP 35 IBG
2 848K 02283 COVER TOP ASSY 32A2
848K 02401 CONSOLE ASSY 26
3 32A3
848K 02391 CONSOLE ASSY35
4 848E 02492 COVER STACK 32A4
5 -- HARNESS ASSY PUI 32A5
6 848E 02510 COVER STACK A3 32A6
7 848E 06880 COVER REAR 32A7
8 604K 39430 KIT COVER MIDDLE 32A8
9 848E 02431 COVER RIGHT SIDE 32A9
10 848E 02371 COVER RIGHT FRONT 32B0
11 604K 39410 KIT COVER FRONT L DUP 32B1
12 029E 45210 PIN CVR FRONT 32B2
13 848E 02391 COVER LEFT FRONT 32B3
14 848E 02411 COVER LEFT SIDE 32B4

5-11
 Chapter 5 Parts List
5.3 Parts List

PL2 FEEDER & CASSETTE

PL2.1 250 Feeder
(J11)

18
3
(J1130)
(J1110)
2 (with 3-9,18)

(J1120)
4

5
6

8 9

10

11

14

13

(J31)
(J24)
1 (with 2-13,15-18)
(J310)

17 (P2481)
12
16 15
12
HMR08201AA

5-12
Chapter 5 Parts List
5.3 Parts List

ITEM PARTS No DESCRIPTION A.C

1 032K 04850 GUIDE ASSY CST 250 (with 2-13, 15-18) 50E1
2 059K 53474 (SCC) FEEDER ASSY SUB (with 3-9, 18) 50E2
3 130E 89320 (SCC) TRAY NO PAPER SENSOR 50E3
4 -- ROLL ASSY FEED 5033
5 005E 16941 CLUTCH ONE WAY FEED 50E4
6 005E 16951 CLUTCH ONE WAY NUDGER 50E5
7 -- HOLDER NO PAPER L 50E6
8 120E 26903 ACTUATOR NO PAPER 50E7
9 -- HOLDER NO PAPER R 50E8
10 -- PLATE ASSY HINGE 50E9
11 068K 53612 BRACKET ASSY FDR 250 50F0
12 017E 98680 RUBBER FOOT3 FH 50F1
13 110E 10500 (SCC) SIZE SWITCH 50F2
14 848E 06900 (SCC) COVER CST 50F3
15 962K 55631 (SCC) HARNESS ASSY SW 50F4
16 848E 06920 (SCC) COVER SW 250 50F5
17 962K 54230 (SCC) HARNESS ASSY FEEDER 1 50F6
18 962K 54101 (SCC) HARNESS ASSY PH 50F7
--
99 604K 11192 KIT ROLL ASSY FEED (with 4, PL2.2.19) 50F8

5-13
 Chapter 5 Parts List
5.3 Parts List

PL2.2 250 Cassette

2 1 (with 2-37)
3
4

11 10 5 (with 6-13,29,30)
13 12

14 E
9
8 7
15 14
17(with 18,19) 20
21
31 (with 32-37)
16
32 33 18
34 35 19
36 25

37
22
24
30 29

28 23 (with 24,25)

26
27 26
HMR08202AA

5-14
Chapter 5 Parts List
5.3 Parts List

ITEM PARTS No DESCRIPTION A.C

1 050K 60640 CASSETTE ASSY 250 IBG (with 2-37) 50G1
2 038K 88730 GUIDE AS SD R 250 A3 50G2
3 -- GEAR PINION 50G3
4 038K 86533 GUIDE AS SD L 250 A3 50G4
5 015K 75420 PLATE ASSY BTM SP (with 6-13, 29, 30) 50G5
6 -- DAMPER BTM 50G6
7 -- GEAR PB L 50G7
8 -- GEAR BTM DMP ONEWAY 50G8
9 -- SHAFT PB 50G9
10 019E 54180 PAD PB 50H0
11 -- PLATE BTM A3 50H1
12 -- GEAR BTM LOCK ONEWAY 50H2
13 -- STOPPER PB 50H3
14 809E 38673 SPRING BTM UP 250 50H4
15 054E 29142 CHUTE RETARD CST 50H5
16 809E 37500 SPRING RETARD 50H6
17 019K 98186 HOLDER ASSY RETARD (with 18, 19) 50H7
18 -- CLUTCH FRICTION 50H8
19 -- ROLL ASSY FEED (PL2.1 Item99) 50H9
20 -- HOUSING EXIT CST 250 50I0
21 032K 05050 GUIDE ASSY END 250 50I1
22 -- HOUSING BASE CST 250 50I2
23 604K 39480 KIT PLATE GEAR LOCK 250 (with 24, 25) 50I3
24 -- PLATE GEAR LOCK 250 50I4
25 -- PLATE GEAR LOCK 250 L 50I5
26 -- LOCK EXT A4 50I6
27 003E 74461 HANDLE CST 250 50I7
28 020K 15630 WHEEL SIZE ASSY 50I8
29 -- GEAR PB R 50I9
30 -- ROLL PB 50J0
31 604K 39470 KIT LEVER BTM LOCK 250 (with 32-37) 50J1
32 -- COVER BTM UP 250 50J2
33 -- RACK BTM LOCK 250 50J3
34 -- SPRING BTM LOCK 50J4
35 -- GEAR BTM LOCK PINION 50J5
36 -- LEVER BTM LOCK 50J6
37 -- GEAR LEVER BTM LOCK 50J7

5-15
 Chapter 5 Parts List
5.3 Parts List

PL2.3 550 Feeder (1/2)

PL2.4

(J24)
(J31)
10 11 (J310)

4
(P2481)

12

4 1 (with 2-8,10-12,PL2.4)
5
6 13 (with 5-7)
7

HMR08203AA

5-16
Chapter 5 Parts List
5.3 Parts List

ITEM PARTS No DESCRIPTION A.C

1 032K 04870 GUIDE ASSY CST 550 (with 2-8, 10-12, PL2.4) 50K1
2 -- PLATE ASSY HINGE 50K2
3 068K 53623 BRACKET ASSY FDR 550 50K3
4 017E 98680 RUBBER FOOT3 FH 50K4
5 -- CHUTE TURN 50K5
6 -- SPRING PINCH 50K6
7 -- ROLL PINCH TURN 50K7
8 110E 10500 (SCC) SIZE SWITCH 50K8
9 848E 06900 (SCC) COVER CST 50K9
10 962K 54230 (SCC) HARNESS ASSY FEEDER 1 50L0
11 848E 06940 (SCC) COVER SW 550 50L1
12 962K 55631 (SCC) HARNESS ASSY SW 50L2
13 054K 33741 CHUTE TURN ASSY IOT 550 (with 5-7) 50L3

5-17
 Chapter 5 Parts List
5.3 Parts List

PL2.4 550 Feeder (2/2)

13

15
(J27)
(J11)

14
(R2710)

(R2720)

(J1130)
(J1110)

2 12 (J1120)

E
11 1 (with 2-15)

(J2710)

10
2
3
E

E
9
8 (J2720)

7 4

6 5

HMR08204AA

Figure 5-12 8-10

5-18
Chapter 5 Parts List
5.3 Parts List

ITEM PARTS No DESCRIPTION A.C

1 059K 53485 (SCC) FEEDER ASSY SUB 550 (with 2-15) 50L4
2 -- BEARING EARTH 50L5
3 121K 40041 (SCC) TURN CLUTCH 50L6
4 121K 40031 (SCC) FEED CLUCTH 50L7
5 -- HOLDER NO PAPER R 50L8
6 120E 26903 ACTUATOR NO PAPER 50L9
7 -- HOLDER NO PAPER L 50M0
8 005E 16951 CLUTCH ONE WAY NUDGER 50M1
9 005E 16941 CLUTCH ONE WAY FEED 50M2
10 -- ROLL ASSY FEED 50M3
11 130E 89320 (SCC) TRAY NO PAPER SENSOR 50M4
12 059K 47280 ROLL ASSY TURN 50M5
13 054E 32681 CHUTE FDR IOT 550 50M6
14 962K 54101 (SCC) HARNESS ASSY PH 50M7
15 -- (SCC) HARNESS ASSY CLUTCH 50M8
-- 50M9
99 604K 11192 KIT ROLL ASSY FEED (with 10, PL2.5.19) 50N0

5-19
 Chapter 5 Parts List
5.3 Parts List

PL2.5 550 Cassette

1 (with 2-46)
2

3 4

10
11 5 (with 6-13,37,38)
13 12

E
20
14 9
8 7
14
15 21
17(with 18,19)
22 23
39 (with 40-46)
43 44 16
45 18
40 46 19
27

24
42 41
40 26

36 38
37 28

31
30
33
32 30 25 (with 26,27)
35 34
29 (with 30-33) HMR08205AA

5-20
Chapter 5 Parts List
5.3 Parts List

ITEM PARTS No DESCRIPTION A.C

1 050K 60660 CASSETTE ASSY 550 (with 2-46) 50P1
2 038K 89600 GUIDE ASSY SD R 550 A3 50P2
3 -- GEAR PINION 50P3
4 038K 89110 GUIDE ASSY SD L 550 A3 50P4
5 015K 75420 PLATE ASSY BTM SP (with 6-13, 37, 38) 50P5
6 -- DAMPER BTM 50P6
7 -- GEAR PB L 50P7
8 -- GEAR BTM DMP ONEWAY 50P8
9 -- SHAFT PB 50P9
10 019E 54180 PAD PB 50Q0
11 -- PLATE BTM A3 50Q1
12 -- GEAR BTM LOCK ONEWAY 50Q2
13 -- STOPPER PB 50Q3
14 809E 38663 SPRING BTM UP 550 50Q4
15 054E 29141 CHUTE RETARD CST 50Q5
16 809E 37500 SPRING RETARD 50Q6
17 019K 98186 HOLDER ASSY RETARD (with 18, 19) 50Q7
18 -- CLUTCH FRICTION 50Q8
19 -- ROLL ASSY FEED (PL2.4 Item99) 50Q9
20 032K 05060 GUIDE ASSY END 550 50R0
21 -- RACK GUIDE END 550 50R1
22 -- SPRING RACK GD 50R2
23 -- HOUSING EXIT CST 550 50R3
24 -- HOUSING BASE CST550 50R4
25 604K 39490 KIT PLATE GEAR LOCK L 550 (with 26, 27) 50R5
26 -- PLATE GEAR LOCK 550 50R6
27 -- PLATE GEAR LOCK L 550 50R7
28 -- COVER EXIT CST 50R8
29 604K 39450 KIT EXT CST 550 (with 30-33) 50R9
30 -- LOCK EXT A4 50S0
31 -- PIN LOCK RACK 50S1
32 -- LINK PLATE BTM CST 550 50S2
33 -- SPRING LINK LOCK 50S3
34 -- LINK LOCK EXIT 50S4
35 003E 74471 HANDLE CST 550 50S5
36 020K 15630 WHEEL SIZE ASSY IBG 50S6
37 -- GEAR PB R 50S7
38 -- ROLL PB 50S8
39 604K 39460 KIT LEVER BTM LOCK 550 (with 40-46) 50S9
40 -- GEAR BTM LOCK PINION 50T0
41 -- GEAR 40 BTM LOCK 50T1
42 -- GEAR LEVER BTM LOCK 50T2
43 -- COVER BTM UP 550 50T3
44 -- RACK BTM LOCK 550 50T4
45 -- SPRING BTM LOCK 50T5
46 -- LEVER BTM LOCK 50T6

5-21
 Chapter 5 Parts List
5.3 Parts List

PL3 MSI
PL3.1 MSI

(J2320)

1
5
13

E
12
5
6 4
3
11 2 (with 3,4)
9 7 (with 8-12)
14 15 10 8 (with 9,10)
16
23
E 17 24
15 25
14
18
26 18
E
21
19

20 (with 17,21)
E

22

HMR08301AA

5-22
Chapter 5 Parts List
5.3 Parts List

ITEM PARTS No DESCRIPTION A.C

1 121E 92901 (SCC) MSI FEED SOLENOID 5BA1
2 604K 39380 KIT GEAR MSI (with 3, 4) 5BA2
3 -- SPRING FEED MSI 5BA3
4 -- GEAR MSI 5BA4
5 -- BEARING EARTH 5BA5
6 -- SHAFT HINGE TRAY 5BA6
7 054K 33780 CHUTE ASSY DUP (with 8-12) 5BA7
8 604K 39390 KIT ACTUATOR NO PAPER MSI (with 9, 10) 5BA8
9 809E 73940 SPRING NO PAPER MSI 5BA9
10 120E 28070 ACTUATOR NO PAPER MSI 5BB0
11 130E 89320 (SCC) MSI NO PAPER SENSOR 5BB1
12 -- CHUTE DUP 5BB2
13 848E 07000 COVER ROLL FEED 5BB3
14 -- CAM MSI 5BB4
15 029E 36920 PIN MSI 5BB5
16 -- SHAFT ASSY MSI 5BB6
17 059K 36730 MSI FEED ROLL 5BB7
18 -- ROLL CORE MSI 5BB8
19 604K 39400 KIT FRAME RETARD BASE 5BB9
20 604K 39500 KIT ROLL MSI (with 17, 21) 5BC0
21 -- HOLDER ASSY RETARD 5BC1
22 050K 60690 TRAY ASSY MSI 5BC2
23 -- DRIVE ASSY FRONT B 5BC3
24 -- CLUTCH ASSY LIMIT 5BC4
25 -- DRIVE ASSY FRONT A 5BC5
26 -- COLLAR MSI 5BC6

5-23
 Chapter 5 Parts List
5.3 Parts List

PL4 FRONT FRAME

PL4.1 Front Frame

1 (with 2,4-9)
2

11 *1
REF. 3
11
(J23)
(VD)
(TR)
(VG)

6 11
3 11
7

10
5
8 7 4 (with 5-6)
10

HMR08401AA

5-24
Chapter 5 Parts List
5.3 Parts List

ITEM PARTS No DESCRIPTION A.C

1 604K 39340 KIT FRAME FRONT (with 2, 4-9) 13A0
2 848K 02600 COVER ASSY FRAME FRONT 13A1
3 -- BTR 13A2
4 604K 39362 KIT LEVER FRONT (with 5, 6) 13A3
5 -- LEVER FRONT RIGHT 13A4
6 -- LEVER FRONT LEFT 13A5
7 -- SPRING LEVER FRONT 13A6
8 -- FRAME FRONT BASE ASSY 13A7
9 -- PIVOT FRONT 13A8
10 849E 92751 STRAP FRONT 13A9
-- CAP BTR BEARING
11 13B1
011E 19240 LEVER CRU TRANS (CL)*1
--
99 604K 39530 KIT SP 100K (with 3, PL8.1.11) 13B0

*1 For machines shipped after February 2007

5-25
 Chapter 5 Parts List
5.3 Parts List

PL5 REGI
PL5.1 Regi

(J1230)
2

4
E
3

HMR08501AA

5-26
Chapter 5 Parts List
5.3 Parts List

ITEM PARTS No DESCRIPTION A.C

1 604K 39240 KIT REGIST 13B1
2 121K 39360 (SCC) REGI CLUTCH 13B2
3 120K 92140 ACTUATOR ASSY REGI 13B3
4 130E 89320 (SCC) REGI SENSOR 13B4
--
99 604K 39560 KIT SP 600K 35 (with 1, PL7.1.1, PL9.1.2) *1 13B5
*1. 35-Sheet machines only

5-27
 Chapter 5 Parts List
5.3 Parts List

PL6 XEROGRAPHICS
PL6.1 CRU

HMR08601AA

5-28
Chapter 5 Parts List
5.3 Parts List

ITEM PARTS No DESCRIPTION A.C

1 -- CRU ASSY *1 4510
*1. Consumables

5-29
 Chapter 5 Parts List
5.3 Parts List

PL7 ROS
PL7.1 ROS

(J9)
(J17)
(J18)

HMR08701AA

5-30
Chapter 5 Parts List
5.3 Parts List

ITEM PARTS No DESCRIPTION A.C

604K 39290 (SCC) ROS ASSY 26
1 1310
604K 39300 (SCC) ROS ASSY 35

5-31
 Chapter 5 Parts List
5.3 Parts List

PL8 FUSER
PL8.1 Fuser

1 (with 2-6)

3
12
4 5
9 6
10 (J57)

8 (with 9,10)
7

11

HMR08801AA

5-32
Chapter 5 Parts List
5.3 Parts List

ITEM PARTS No DESCRIPTION A.C

1 604K 39330 KIT LEVER FUSER (with 2-6) 43A1
2 -- LEVER CRU FSR LH 43A2
3 -- COVER SAFETY LH 43A3
4 -- SPRING PRB 43A4
5 -- COVER SAFETY RH 43A5
6 -- LEVER CRU FSR RH 43A6
7 849E 89160 BRACKET FSR RH 43A7
8 604K 39320 KIT BRACKET FSR LH (with 9, 10) 43A8
9 -- BRACKET FSR LH 43A9
10 -- HARNESS ASSY FSR 43B0
126K 24190 (SCC) FUSER ASSY (110V) (IBG)
11 4340
126K 24200 (SCC) FUSER ASSY (220V) (IBG)
12 962K 54270 (SCC) HARNESS ASSY PR 43B1

5-33
 Chapter 5 Parts List
5.3 Parts List

PL9 DRIVE
PL9.1 Drive

(J26)

(J22)

3 2 (with 3)
(J220)

HMR08901AA

5-34
Chapter 5 Parts List
5.3 Parts List

ITEM PARTS No DESCRIPTION A.C

1 068K 53740 (SCC) BRACKET ASSY EXIT 30A1
007K 97801 (SCC) DRIVE ASSY 26 (with 3)
2 30A2
007K 97811 (SCC) DRIVE ASSY 35 (with 3)
127K 51060 (SCC) MAIN MOTOR 26
3 30A3
127K 51070 (SCC) MAIN MOTOR 35
4 962K 54060 (SCC) HARNESS ASSY MOTOR 30A4

5-35
 Chapter 5 Parts List
5.3 Parts List

PL10 Nohad
PL10.1 Nohad

1 (with 2)

3
4

(J14)

(J15)

6
(J16)

PL1.1
(R1610)
(J1610)
5

HMR08A01AA

5-36
Chapter 5 Parts List
5.3 Parts List

ITEM PARTS No DESCRIPTION A.C

1 054K 33762 DUCT ASSY FAN MIDDLE (with 2) 30A5
2 127E 85330 (SCC) MIDDLE FAN 30A6
3 -- DUCT FAN REAR 30A7
4 035K 83750 REAR FAN 30A8
5 127E 85320 SIDE FAN 30A9
6 962K 54390 HARNESS ASSY SIDE FAN 30B0

5-37
 Chapter 5 Parts List
5.3 Parts List

PL11 ELECTRICAL
PL11.1 Electrical

13

12 2
11
10
7
8 (J20)
9
(J21)
(J92)
(J13A/J13B)
(H13)

4 (J33)
(J34)
(J35)
(J51)

14
HMR08B01AA IBG

5-38
Chapter 5 Parts List
5.3 Parts List

ITEM PARTS No DESCRIPTION A.C

1 -- SHIELD ASSY ESS 70A1
2 -- COVER MCU 70A2
675K 49840 (SCC) MCU PWB 26 (FX)
675K 49830 (SCC) MCU PWB 35 (FX)
675K 55320 (SCC) KIT MCU IBG 35 (220V)
3 70A3
675K 55330 (SCC) KIT MCU IBG 26 (220V)
675K 55340 (SCC) KIT MCU IBG 35 (110V)
675K 55350 (SCC) KIT MCU IBG 26 (110V)
4 -- CHASSIS ESS 70A4
105K 22681 (SCC) HVPS 26
5 7610
105K 22691 (SCC) HVPS 35
105K 22881 (SCC) LVPS 100 (26)
6 105K 22891 (SCC) LVPS 100 (35) 70A5
105K 22710 (SCC) LVPS 200V
960K 30280 (ISC) (SCC) ESS PWB 26
7 70A6
960K 30240 (ISC) (SCC) ESS PWB 35
8 962K 54050 FFC VIDEO 70A7
9 -- HARNESS ASSY PS 70A8
540K 05450 PS ROM H2
10 70A9
540K 05470 PS ROM M2
133K 23251 256MB SDRAM (Expansion Memory: 256MB) 70B0
11
133K 23351 512MB SDRAM (Expansion Memory: 512MB) 70B1
12 960K 02631 (ISC) (SCC) HDD Assy (Option) 7811
KIT PKG MPC
13 960K 28221 70B3
(Multi Protocol LAN Card)
917W 03106 Power Cord (FXA, FXNZ)
917W 03110 Power Cord (China)
917W 03111 Power Cord (Korea)
14 917W 03109 Power Cord (Philippine) 70B4
917W 03108 Power Cord (Indonesia, Thailand, Vietnam)
917W 03107 Power Cord (Singapore, Malaysia, Hong Kong)
117E 26280 Power Cord (Taiwan)

5-39
 Chapter 5 Parts List
5.3 Parts List

PL12 FRAME
PL12.1 Frame

1 (with 3,4,6,25)
25 (with 5,7-9,12-14)

3 22
(P4410)
(J12)

(R1210) (J28)
(J1210)
6
(R1230) 5 4 20
7 9
19 (J25)
(P1211) 8 (P/J250) 18
17 (with 18-20)
23
12 11 2 (with 10,11,23)
10
14
21
13

15
(J56) 24
16
(J55) 26

(FG)

PL2.1

HMR08C01AA

5-40
Chapter 5 Parts List
5.3 Parts List

ITEM PARTS No DESCRIPTION A.C

1 604K 39310 KIT BASE ASSY INTERLOCK (with 3, 4, 6, 25) 44A1
2 604K 39250 KIT ARM SHUTTER (with 10, 11, 23) 44A2
3 -- HARNESS ASSY MAIN FRM 44A3
4 -- HARNESS ASSY INTERLOCK 44A4
5 -- HOLDER INTERLOCK SW 44A5
6 -- HARNESS ASSY SNR REGI 44A6
7 -- LEVER INTERLOCK TOP 44A7
8 -- SPRING INTERLOCK TOP 44A8
9 -- BASE INTERLOCK 44A9
10 -- SPRING ARM SHUTTER 44B0
11 -- ARM SHUTTER B 44B1
12 -- LEVER INTERLOCK FRONT 44B2
13 -- LEVER INTERLOCK SW 44B3
14 -- SPRING INTERLOCK FRONT 44B4
15 -- HARNESS ASSY CR 44B5
16 -- HARNESS ASSY DB 44B6
17 068K 53760 BRACKET ASSY CRUM SP (with 18-20) 44B7
18 -- BRACKET CRUM CONN 44B8
19 -- SCREW SHOULDER CRUM 44B9
20 -- HARNESS ASSY CRU 44C0
21 801K 28330 FRAME ASSY MAIN SUB 44C1
22 -- FRAME ASSY BASE 44C2
23 -- ARM SHUTTER A 44C3
24 908W 01201 BREAKER 44C4
25 -- BASE ASSY-INTERLOCK (with 5, 7-9, 12-14) 44C5
26 962K 55650 (SCC) HARNESS ASSY PE 44C6

5-41
 Chapter 5 Parts List
5.3 Parts List

PL13 DUPLEX
PL13.1 Duplex (1/2)

HMR08D01AA

5-42
Chapter 5 Parts List
5.3 Parts List

ITEM PARTS No DESCRIPTION A.C

1 059K 53582 (SCC) DUPLEX ASSY 5AA1
2 059K 53592 (SCC) EXIT DRIVE ASSY 5AA2

5-43
 Chapter 5 Parts List
5.3 Parts List

PL13.2 Duplex (2/2)

2 1
3 2
3 2
2 3 2
3 2 3
3 2 4 (with 5,6)
3 2
3
(J74D) 5
(DR2731)
26 6
(J71D)

21 22
20 9 (J740D) 7
8 24

9 25
7 9 10
(J730D)
11
27 12
17 11
(J73D)
9 10
19
(J72D)
18 17

16
15
14
13

23
HMR08D02AA

5-44
Chapter 5 Parts List
5.3 Parts List

ITEM PARTS No DESCRIPTION A.C

1 059E 02750 ROLL DUP 5AA3
2 809E 37140 SPRING PINCH 5AA4
3 059E 97500 ROLL PINCH 5AA5
4 604K 39520 KIT ACTUATOR DUP (with 5, 6) 5AA6
5 -- ACTUATOR DUP 5AA7
6 -- SPRING ACTUATOR 5AA8
7 130E 89320 (SCC) SENSOR PHOTO 5AA9
8 -- FRAME DUP 5AB0
9 013E 22671 BEARING DUP 5AB1
10 -- GEAR ROLL 35 5AB2
11 -- GEAR 37 5AB3
12 -- GEAR 23-34 5AB4
13 127K 51720 (SCC) DUP MOTOR 5AB5
14 -- DAMPER ASSY MOTOR 5AB6
15 -- BRACKET MOTOR 5AB7
16 -- COVER R 5AB8
17 -- SCREW 5AB9
18 054E 32751 CHUTE COVER 5AC0
19 -- COVER L 5AC1
20 BRACKET PWB 5AC2
21 960K 25071 DUP PWB 5AC3
22 962K 54300 (SCC) HARNESS ASSY DUP 5AC4
23 -- CHUTE UNDER 5AC5
24 -- COVER REAR 5AC6
25 -- PLATE FG 5AC7
26 -- HARNESS ASSY SNR DUP 5AC8
27 -- HARNESS ASSY COVER DUP 5AD9

5-45
 Chapter 5 Parts List
5.3 Parts List

PL14 OPTION 250 FEEDER

PL14.1 250 Feeder (1/3)

1 (with 2-7, PL14.2, PL14.3)

7 3

3
3

PL14.2,
PL14.3
5

5 5 4
6

5
PL2.2

HMR08E01AA

5-46
Chapter 5 Parts List
5.3 Parts List

ITEM PARTS No DESCRIPTION A.C

1 059K 53497 FEEDER ASSY 250 (with 2-7, PL14.2, PL14.3) 57A1
2 848E 06900 (SCC) COVER CST 57A2
3 113E 36900 JOINT FEEDER 57A3
4 848E 07301 (SCC) COVER FDR 250 R 57A4
5 017E 94972 FOOT 57A5
6 848E 07320 (SCC) COVER FDR FRONT R250 57A6
7 848E 07280 (SCC) COVER FDR 250 L 57A7

5-47
 Chapter 5 Parts List
5.3 Parts List

PL14.2 250 Feeder (2/3)

1 (with 2-4,22, PL14.3)

22 2
(J84)

(J840)
3
20 4 PL14.3
(DR2481)

(J81) (J83)
5
23
19
(J86)
(DP8610) (R8330)
18 (R8320)
(R8310)
21 (J82)
6 (J8310)
(J820)

17

8
9
7 (with 8-14)
11 10
12 (with 13,14)
14 13

16

15

HMR08E02AA

5-48
Chapter 5 Parts List
5.3 Parts List

ITEM PARTS No DESCRIPTION A.C

1 059K 53640 FEEDER ASSY SUB SP (with 2-4, 22, PL14.3) 57A8
2 -- PLATE CHUTE 57A9
3 -- BRACKET SENSOR 57B0
4 130E 89320 (SCC) PAPER EDGE SENSOR 57B1
5 809E 64101 SPRING EATH 57B2
6 007K 97851 DRIVE ASSY OPTION 57B3
7 054K 33301 CHUTE ASSY TURN OPT 57B4
8 -- CHUTE TURN 57B5
9 -- SPRING PINCH 57B6
10 -- ROLL PINCH TURN 57B7
11 -- HOLDER ACTUATOR 57B8
12 604K 39510 KIT ACTUATOR EDGE OPTFDR (with 13, 14) 57B9
13 -- ACTUATOR EDGE OPTFDR 57C0
14 -- SPRING SNSR OPTFDR 57C1
15 032K 04950 KIT GUIDE CST R250 57C2
16 032K 04990 KIT GUIDE CST L250 57C3
17 110E 10500 (SCC) SIZE SWITCH 57C4
18 960K 29530 (SCC) FDR PWB 250 57C5
19 962K 54340 (SCC) HARNESS ASSY FEEDER3 (DRAWER LOW) 57C6
20 962K 54331 (SCC) HARNESS ASSY FEEDER2 (DRAWER UP) 57C7
21 962K 54350 (SCC) HARNESS ASSY SIZE FDR 57C8
22 962K 54360 (SCC) HARNESS ASSY EDGE FDR 57C9
23 962K 54381 (SCC) HARNESS ASSY PH FDR 57D0

5-49
 Chapter 5 Parts List
5.3 Parts List

PL14.3 250 Feeder (3/3)

12
(J84)

2
11 13
E 1 (with 2-13)
(J840)
(J8330)

10
2
3
E
(J8320)
E
9
8
E

4
7

5
6

HMR08E03AA

5-50
Chapter 5 Parts List
5.3 Parts List

ITEM PARTS No DESCRIPTION A.C

1 -- FEEDER ASSY SUB (with 2-13) 57D1
2 -- BEARING EARTH 57D2
3 121K 40041 (SCC) TURN CLUTCH 57D3
4 121K 40031 (SCC) FEED CLUCTH 57D4
5 -- HOLDER NO PAPER R 57D5
6 120E 26903 ACTUATOR NO PAPER 57D6
7 -- HOLDER NO PAPER L 57D7
8 005E 16951 CLUTCH ONE WAY NUDGER 57D8
9 005E 16941 CLUTCH ONE WAY FEED 57D9
10 -- ROLL ASSY FEED 57E0
11 130E 89320 (SCC) TRAY NO PAPER SENSOR 57E1
12 059K 47280 ROLL ASSY TURN 57E2
13 962K 54371 (SCC) HARNESS ASSY NO PAPER FDR 57E3

5-51
 Chapter 5 Parts List
5.3 Parts List

PL15 OPTION 550 FEEDER

PL15.1 550 Feeder (1/3)

1 (with 2-7, PL15.2, PL15.3)

7 3

3
3

PL15.2,
PL15.3 5

5 5

6 4
5

PL2.5

HMR08F01AA

5-52
Chapter 5 Parts List
5.3 Parts List

ITEM PARTS No DESCRIPTION A.C

1 059K 53517 FEEDER ASSY 550 (with 2-7, PL15.2, PL15.3) 57F1
2 843E 06900 COVER CST 57F2
3 113E 36900 JOINT FEEDER 57F3
4 848E 07311 (SCC) COVER FDR 550 R 57F4
5 017E 94972 FOOT 57F5
6 848E 07340 (SCC) COVER FDR FRONT R550 57F6
7 848E 07290 (SCC) COVER FDR 550 L 57F7

5-53
 Chapter 5 Parts List
5.3 Parts List

PL15.2 550 Feeder (2/3)

1 (with 2-4,22, PL15.3)

22 2
(J84)

(J840)
3
20 4 PL15.3
(DR2481)

(J81) (J83)
5
19 23
(J86)
(DP8610) (R8330)
(R8320)
18 (R8310)
21 (J82) 6 (J8310)
(J820)

17

8
9 7 (with 8-14)
11 10
12 (with 13,14)
14 13

16

15

HMR08F02AA

5-54
Chapter 5 Parts List
5.3 Parts List

ITEM PARTS No DESCRIPTION A.C

1 059K 53640 FEEDER ASSY SUB SP (with 2-4, 22, PL15.3) 57F8
2 -- PLATE CHUTE 57F9
3 -- BRACKET SENSOR 57G0
4 130E 89320 (SCC) PAPER EDGE SENSOR 57G1
5 809E 64101 SPRING EATH 57G2
6 007K 97851 DRIVE ASSY OPTION 57G3
7 054K 33301 CHUTE ASSY TURN OPT 57G4
8 -- CHUTE TURN 57G5
9 -- SPRING PINCH 57G6
10 -- ROLL PINCH TURN 57G7
11 -- HOLDER ACTUATOR 57G8
12 604K 39510 KIT ACTUATOR EDGE OPTFDR (with 13, 14) 57G9
13 -- ACTUATOR EDGE OPTFDR 57H0
14 -- SPRING SNSR OPTFDR 57H1
15 032K 04970 KIT GUIDE CST R550 57H2
16 032K 05010 KIT GUIDE CST L550 57H3
17 110E 10500 (SCC) SIZE SWITCH 57H4
18 960K 29542 FDR PWB 550 57H5
19 962K 54340 (SCC) HARNESS ASSY FEEDER3 (DRAWER LOW) 57H6
20 962K 54331 (SCC) HARNESS ASSY FEEDER2 (DRAWER UP) 57H7
21 962K 54350 (SCC) HARNESS ASSY SIZE FDR 57H8
22 962K 54360 (SCC) HARNESS ASSY EDGE FDR 57H9
23 962K 54381 (SCC) HARNESS ASSY PH FDR 57I0

5-55
 Chapter 5 Parts List
5.3 Parts List

PL15.3 550 Feeder (3/3)

12
(J84)

2
11 13
E 1 (with 2-13)
(J840)
(J8330)

10
2
3
E
(J8320)
E
9
8
E

4
7

5
6

HMR08F03AA

5-56
Chapter 5 Parts List
5.3 Parts List

ITEM PARTS No DESCRIPTION A.C

1 -- FEEDER ASSY SUB (with 2-13) 57I1
2 -- BEARING EARTH 57I2
3 121K 40041 (SCC) TURN CLUTCH 57I3
4 121K 40031 (SCC) FEED CLUCTH 57I4
5 -- HOLDER NO PAPER R 57I5
6 120E 26903 ACTUATOR NO PAPER 57I6
7 -- HOLDER NO PAPER L 57I7
8 005E 16951 CLUTCH ONE WAY NUDGER 57I8
9 005E 16941 CLUTCH ONE WAY FEED 57I9
10 -- ROLL ASSY FEED 57J0
11 130E 89320 (SCC) TRAY NO PAPER SENSOR 57J1
12 059K 47280 ROLL ASSY TURN 57J2
13 962K 54371 (SCC) HARNESS ASSY NO PAPER FDR 57J3

5-57
 Chapter 5 Parts List
5.3 Parts List

5-58
Chapter 6 General
Table of Contents
6.1 Specifications .............................................................................................................6-1
6.1.1 Product Name/Product Code/XJ-Code/FWSS Code ...................................................................... 6-1
6.1.2 Main Processor Dimensions and Weight ........................................................................................ 6-1
6.1.3 Installation Space............................................................................................................................ 6-2
6.1.4 Printer System Configuration .......................................................................................................... 6-3
6.1.4.1 Printer Overview ..................................................................................................................... 6-3
6.1.4.2 Function List............................................................................................................................ 6-4
6.1.5 Standard/Optional Parts.................................................................................................................. 6-9
6.1.5.1 Standard Parts ........................................................................................................................ 6-9
6.1.5.2 Optional Parts ....................................................................................................................... 6-10
6.1.5.3 Throughput *2 ....................................................................................................................... 6-13
6.1.6 FPOT (First Print Output Time)..................................................................................................... 6-14
6.1.6.1 FPOT when the IOT receives a Print signal while in Standby state. *1 *2............................ 6-14
6.1.6.2 FPOT when the IOT receives a Print signal while in Power Saver state. *1 *2 .................... 6-14
6.1.7 Warm-up time and recovery time from Power Saver mode .......................................................... 6-14
6.1.8 Paper Source ................................................................................................................................ 6-15
6.1.8.1 Standard Bypass Tray (MSI)................................................................................................. 6-15
6.1.8.2 Standard Universal Paper Tray (machine standard)............................................................. 6-15
6.1.9 Tray Module (Optional) ................................................................................................................. 6-16
6.1.10 Paper Feed Control..................................................................................................................... 6-16
6.1.11 Paper Output............................................................................................................................... 6-17
6.1.11.1 Face Down Stacker (standard) ........................................................................................... 6-17
6.1.12 Duplex......................................................................................................................................... 6-17
6.1.12.1 Duplex Unit (optional) ......................................................................................................... 6-17
6.1.13 Duplex Control ............................................................................................................................ 6-17
6.1.14 Other Paper Handling ................................................................................................................. 6-18
6.1.14.1 Transparency Separator ..................................................................................................... 6-18
6.1.14.2 Load While Run .................................................................................................................. 6-18
6.1.15 Load Capacity ............................................................................................................................. 6-18
6.1.16 Summary of Paper Size and Paper Quality Restrictions ............................................................ 6-19
6.1.16.1 Size Restrictions ................................................................................................................. 6-19
6.1.16.2 Paper Type Restrictions...................................................................................................... 6-20
6.1.17 Host Interface.............................................................................................................................. 6-21
6.1.17.1 Machines to be Connected (Supported Clients/Servers).................................................... 6-21
6.1.17.2 IEEE1284............................................................................................................................ 6-22
6.1.17.3 Wireless (Post Launch)....................................................................................................... 6-22
6.1.17.4 Ethernet .............................................................................................................................. 6-23
6.1.17.5 USB .................................................................................................................................... 6-25
6.1.17.6 Function Specifications ....................................................................................................... 6-26
6.1.17.7 Job Control.......................................................................................................................... 6-30
6.1.17.8 Job History Function ........................................................................................................... 6-31
6.1.17.9 Diagnostics/Maintenance.................................................................................................... 6-32
6.1.17.10 User Maintenance............................................................................................................. 6-32
6.1.17.11 Operating Mode ................................................................................................................ 6-33
6.1.17.12 Utility Print Function .......................................................................................................... 6-35
 6.1.17.13 Multilingual Function (not supported by NPDL driver) ...................................................... 6-37
6.1.18 Software Specifications............................................................................................................... 6-38
6.1.18.1 Firmware Update Function.................................................................................................. 6-38
6.1.18.2 Utility Software .................................................................................................................... 6-38
6.1.18.3 Other Utility Software .......................................................................................................... 6-39
6.1.18.4 Linked Software .................................................................................................................. 6-39
6.1.18.5 Performance ....................................................................................................................... 6-41
6.1.19 Electrical Properties .................................................................................................................... 6-42
6.1.19.1 Power Supply Operating Voltage/Frequency...................................................................... 6-42
6.1.19.2 Power Consumption Rating ................................................................................................ 6-42
6.1.20 Noise........................................................................................................................................... 6-43
6.2 Tools and Service Consumables..............................................................................6-44
6.2.1 Tools ............................................................................................................................................. 6-44
6.2.2 Service Consumable..................................................................................................................... 6-44
6.3 Consumables............................................................................................................6-45
6.4 Periodic Replacement Parts .....................................................................................6-46
6.5 Optional Parts...........................................................................................................6-47
6.6 Installation Procedures .............................................................................................6-50
6.6.1 Check the bundled contents ......................................................................................................... 6-50
6.6.2 Decide on an Installation Location ................................................................................................ 6-52
6.6.3 Installing the Optional Accessories ............................................................................................... 6-54
6.6.4 Turn ON the Power and Follow the Message ............................................................................... 6-54
6.6.5 Loading Paper............................................................................................................................... 6-57
6.6.6 Perform Test Print......................................................................................................................... 6-59
6.7 Setting the Printer Environment................................................................................6-60
6.7.1 Supported Environment ................................................................................................................ 6-60
6.7.2 Connecting the Cables.................................................................................................................. 6-63
6.7.3 Setting the Network Environment ................................................................................................. 6-64
6.7.4 Enabling Ports to be Used ............................................................................................................ 6-67
6.7.5 Setting Printer Configurations via CentreWare Internet Services ................................................. 6-68
6.7.6 Installing the Print Driver............................................................................................................... 6-72
6.8 Control Panel Menu List ...........................................................................................6-73
Chapter 6 General
6.1 Specifications

6.1 Specifications
6.1.1 Product Name/Product Code/XJ-Code/FWSS Code
Table 6-1

Standard Product
Device Name ppm Net Dup XJ Code
CST Code
DocuPrint 2060 (FX) 26 Std. Opt 250 XJ-RGR N3300022
DocuPrint 3050 (FX) 35 Std. Opt 550 XJ-RGP N3300021
DocuPrint 2065 (TW 110V) 26 Std. Opt 250 XJ-TAN T3300017
DocuPrint 3055 (TW 110V) 35 Std. Opt 550 XJ-TAM T3300016
DocuPrint 2065 (AP 220V) 26 Std. Opt 250 XJ-TAR T3300015
DocuPrint 3055 (AP 220V) 35 Std. Opt 550 XJ-TAP T3300014
DocuPrint 2065 (CL 220V) 26 Std. Opt 250 XJ-RGU T3300013
DocuPrint 3055 (CL 220V) 35 Std. Opt 550 XJ-RGT T3300012

*1. To attain this, disable the software and cover the I/F connectors. Install the MPC to add Network
functions. (The paths to enable OnBoard Net does not exist.)

6.1.2 Main Processor Dimensions and Weight

Table 6-2

Weight [Kg]
Conditions Width [mm] Depth [mm] Height [mm]
Without CRU

250 Sheet Tray Compacted 459 506 309

19.2 Kg
installed Extended 459 640 309

550 Sheet Tray Compacted 459 506 375.3

21.9 Kg
installed Extended 459 636 375.3

6-1
 Chapter 6 General
6.1 Specifications

6.1.3 Installation Space

The minimum installation space is as follows.

660 437 270

100

459

100

203 208

390
178

309

203 208
単位:mm
660 437 270

Figure 6-1 Installation Space

6-2
Chapter 6 General
6.1 Specifications

6.1.4 Printer System Configuration

DocuPrint C3055 is the name of a printer system with ESS added to the IOT as shown in the following figure.
The overview of each block is as follows:

6.1.4.1 Printer Overview

1 Client Computer
The target are personal computers such as PC98, IBM PC AT compatible machine, Macintosh,
and etc.

2 ESS
ESS interprets the print information (control code data, character code data, graphics data,
image data etc.) sent from the client computer, converts it into video data and transfers it to the
IOT.

3 IOT
The video data received from the ESS is printed to make it visible. Two types of machines
(26ppm/35ppm) that employ the A3 Laser Xerography Method are available.
26ppm 600dpi
35ppm 600/1200dpi

Figure 6-2 Printer Overview

6-3
 Chapter 6 General
6.1 Specifications

6.1.4.2 Function List

• IOT Functions Overview
Table 6-3 IOT Functions Overview

Contents
Configuration FX (local) AP (IBG)
100V 110V 220V
26 PPM 600 dpi
Recorder
35 PPM 600/1200 dpi (2 beam)
Recording System OPC Drum Electrophotographic method
Charging System Roller method
Development
Magnetic 1-component Magnet Roller method
System
Exposure System Semiconductor laser beam scanning method
Transfer System Roller method
Fusing System Fusing method
Drum/Toner Cartridge
CRU Drum/Toner Cartridge
Maintenance Kit *1
Standard Bypass Tray (150 sheets)
Standard Tray (250 or 550 sheets at 1 level)
Paper Source
Optional Tray (250 or 550 sheets at 26ppm Max. 2 levels/35ppm Max. 3
levels) can be added in any combination.
Paper Output Face Down Output Tray (250 sheets)
LCD 16 digits x2 rows
Control Panel Button 9 unit
LED 2 LEDs + Power Saver LED
AC100V ± 10% 110 - 120V ± 10% 220 - 240V ± 10%
LVPS
50/60Hz ± 3Hz

Duplex O: Standard, : Optional X: Not supported

*1 Maintenance Kit = Fuser Unit + Trans Assy + Cassette Roll Assy KIT + MSI Roll Assy Kit

6-4
Chapter 6 General
6.1 Specifications
Table 6-4 IOT Functions Overview

AP (IBG)
Configuration Item FX (local) 110V 220V
Series Series
IOT unit 26ppm/35ppm O
AC 100V 50/60Hz O X X
Power Supply AC 110V 50/60Hz X O X
AC 220V 50/60Hz X X O
MSI Standard Bypass Tray O
Paper Source 1 Standard Tray O
Paper Source 2 Tray Module (optional)
Paper Source 3 Tray Module (optional)
Paper Source 4 Tray Module (optional) (35ppm only)
Paper Output 250 Sheet Tray O
ESS Hakugin O
Low Toner Sensor X
Sensor No Paper Sensor (Paper Source) O
Stack Full Sensor X
LCD: 16 digits x 2 rows, Key: 9 units,
O
LED: 3 units
Control Panel
Character Generator supported Japanese/English
English
Languages (switchable)
CPU RM5231A O 300 (26ppm)/400 (35ppm) MH
Onboard 64MB O
Expansion RAM 128MB X
RAM
Expansion RAM 256MB
Expansion RAM 512MB
Onboard FW: 16MB O
Onboard FONT O 8MB
PostScript Expansion + Heisei 2 Font
X
ROM
PostScript Expansion + Morisawa 2
ROM X
Font ROM
PostScript Expansion + European
X
Language 136 Font ROM
TC/SC Font ROM X
KR Font ROM X
HDD 2.5' 40GB
MPC Multi Protocol Card
Wireless LAN USB Wireless LAN *8
IEEE1284 O
Host I/F Ethernet (10Base-T, 100Base-TX) O
USB2.0 O (1 Port only)

6-5
 Chapter 6 General
6.1 Specifications
Table 6-4 IOT Functions Overview

AP (IBG)
Configuration Item FX (local) 110V 220V
Series Series
LPD O
Port9100 O
FTP O
IPP/IPPS
SMB
Netware (Pserver)
AppleTalk (EtherTalk)
SNMP (TCP/IP) O
SNMP (IPX)
HTTP (EWS) O
Network HTTPS (EWS)
DHCP O
BOOTP O
RARP O
AutoIP O
SMTP O
WINS
Bonjour (mDNS)
Web Print X
DNS O
DDNS
ART-EX (PLW) O X
ART IV O X
NPDL X X
FX-PDF O O
PCL XL O O
PCL5e O O
PDL ESC/P O O
ESC/P-K X *3
KS, KSSM, KS5895 (PostLaunch) X *4
Adobe PostScript 3 *1
HP-GL/2 (PostLaunch) O O
TIFF Direct Print (PostLaunch) O O
PC-PR201 (PostLaunch) O X
*1: PostScript version is 3015.103.
*3: Valid when the TC/SC Font ROM is installed.
*4: Valid when the KR Font ROM is installed.

6-6
Chapter 6 General
6.1 Specifications
Table 6-4 IOT Functions Overview

AP (IBG)
Configuration Item FX (local) 110V 220V
Series Series
For ART EX (Japanese: 4,
O X
Alphabet: 15)
For NPDL (Japanese: 2) X X
PostScript +
PS European Language 136 Font + X
Heisei 2 Font
Font
PostScript +
PS European Language 136 Font + X
Morisawa 2 Font
PostScript Adobe 136 Font -
PCL: Agfa81 Font O O
MMF: 2 Font for PDF O O
ESC/P-K, SC/TC4 Font for PCL5 X
Localized Font KS, KSSM, KS5895, for PCL5
X
Hangul 6 Font
PostScript +
PS European Language 136 Font
X
+ PS Heisei 2 Font
+ PCL Heisei 2 Font
JPN Kit
PostScript +
PS European Language 136 Font
X
+ PS Morisawa 2 Font
+ PCL Heisei 2 Font
ART EX O X
ART IV X X
NDPL X X
ESC/P X X
PCL XL X O
PostScript 3 *1
Driver FX-PDF O O
ESC/P-K X X
KS, KSSM, KS5895 X X
PCL5 X X
HP-GL/2 (PostLaunch) X X
TIFF (PostLaunch) X X
PC-PR201 (PostLaunch) X X
Linux Print NPDL - -
Driver FX-PDF O O

6-7
 Chapter 6 General
6.1 Specifications
Table 6-4 IOT Functions Overview

AP (IBG)
Configuration Item FX (local) 110V 220V
Series Series
CentreWare O*5
SimpleMonitor O*6
O
TrustMarkingBasic X
(ART-EX)
Utility
Contents Bridge O O
Print Log Utility (PL) X X
Driver distribution function (At Launch:
X X
TBD)
Management DocuHouse O
Software PrintXchange O*7 X
*5 Not supported by NPDL driver.
*6 Not supported in PostScript driver and ContentsBridge driver.
*7 Not supported by NPDL driver.

6-8
Chapter 6 General
6.1 Specifications

6.1.5 Standard/Optional Parts

6.1.5.1 Standard Parts

Table 6-5 Standard Parts

Contents
Standard Parts
FX (local) AP (IBG)
Printer Main Processor Bundled

CRU/MRU/ERU
Bundled (Initial 6K and CRUM Bundled (Initial 6K and CRUM
Integrated Drum/Toner Cartridge
available) available)
Fuser Unit
Installed Installed
Trans Assy
Installed Installed
Cassette Roll Assy Kit
Installed Installed
MSI Roll Assy Kit
Installed Installed
Duplex Unit Not Installed Not Installed
Standard Tray Installed Installed
Standard Bypass Tray (MSI) Installed Installed
FX recommended parts are
Bundled
AC Cable provided by the HUB in each
(2P type with earthing, 1.5m)
country
1) Setup Guide
1) Setup Guide
2) Quick Reference Guide
2) Quick Reference Guide
3) Driver CD-ROM
Set of Manuals 3) Driver CD-ROM
4) Online Registration Card
4) Control Panel Sheet
5) Maintenance Contact Card
5) MSI Caution Label
& Holder
Bundled (pasted to the inner
Warranty Card None
side of the package box)

6-9
 Chapter 6 General
6.1 Specifications

6.1.5.2 Optional Parts

• IOT Options
Table 6-6 IOT Options

Optional Parts FX (local) AP (IBG) Remarks

Product Product
Product Name
Code Code
250 Sheet Tray (Cassette)
A3 Universal Cassette (250 sheets) E3300096
250 Cassette E3300107
550 Sheet Tray (Cassette)
A3 Universal Cassette (550 sheets) E3300097
550 Cassette E3300108
250 Sheet Feeder (hopper)
Tray Module (250 sheets) E3300098
250 Sheet Feeder E3300109
550 Sheet Feeder (hopper)
Tray Module (550 sheets) E3300099
550 Sheet Feeder E3300110
Duplex Unit
Duplex Unit E3300100
*1
Duplex Unit E3300111
PostScript 3 + Morisawa 2 Font ROM
PostScript Software Kit (Morisawa 2 Font) E3300101 *2
PostScript 3 + Heisei 2 Font ROM
PostScript Software Kit (Heisei 2 Font) E3300102 *2
PostScript 3 + European Language 136 Font ROM
PostScript Software Kit E3300112 *2
TC/SC Font ROM
Chinese Font Kit EL300584 Existing
KR Font ROM
KR Font Kit EL300585 Existing
MPC (Multi Protocol Card) *7
Multi Protocol LAN Card E3300103
Existing *5
Network Expansion Card EL300631
*1: Operates with standard RAM
*2: PostScript version is 3015.103
*5: Not configured in machines for China
*7: Used as expansion card when Standard LAN is used in multi protocol and used as a LAN option for
MultiWriter8200.

6-10
Chapter 6 General
6.1 Specifications
Table 6-6 IOT Options

Optional Parts FX (local) AP (IBG) Remarks

Product Product
Product Name
Code Code
Wireless LAN Option *8
Wireless LAN Module E3300104
Existing *6
Wireless LAN Unit E3300122
HDD Option
Built-in Additional Hard Disk EL300580
Existing
Internal Hard Disk EL300586
JPN KIT (PS Morisawa 2 Font + PCL Heisei 2 Font)
Japan Font Kit (Morisawa) E3300116
JPN KIT (PS Heisei 2 Font + PCL Heisei 2 Font)
Japan Font Kit (Heisei) E3300117
Expansion RAM Module (256MB)
Expansion Memory (256MB) EC100235
Existing
256MB Memory E3300061
Expansion RAM Module (512MB)
Expansion Memory (512MB) EC100236
Existing
512MB Memory EL300452
*6: The countries to which this product can be shipped (authorized countries) are still TBD
*8: This is a USB wireless stick to be attached to the MPC. To use it, MPC is required.

6-11
 Chapter 6 General
6.1 Specifications

Optional Parts FX (local) AP (IBG) Remarks

Product Product
Product Name
Code Code
Parallel Interface Cable *5 E3200011 Existing
Parallel Interface Cable *6 VD14 Existing
Printer Connection Cable *7 YH57 Existing
Earthquake Preparedness Kit -- --
SSP (scanner)
Existing
DocuScan C3200 A NS100008 TS100004
*4
DocuScan C4250 NS100007 TS100003

*4: This comes with 1 USB. It is used exclusively as the printer I/F.
*5: Centronics Cable (for PC/AT) S-Sub 25 Pins
*6: Centronics Cable (for PC98) Full pitch 36 Pins
*7: Centronics Cable (for PC98) Half pitch 36 Pins

6-12
Chapter 6 General
6.1 Specifications
Engine Specifications

6.1.5.3 Throughput *2
The throughput speed is defined as the number of sheets that can printed within 1 minute. It is calculated by
taking the time between the output of the first tail edge until the output of the 11th tail edge as t sec, and then
applying the formula [60/t x 10]. The result is rounded to the first decimal place. Note that this is a theoretical
value. The actual value will have a ±0.3ppm variance from this value.

Throughput *1 (ppm)

Paper Feed 26 ppm 35ppm

Type Direction 2 Sided 2 Sided
1 Sided 1 Sided
1 Batch 2.5 Batch 1 Batch 2.5 Batch
A4 LEF 26.5 16.6 21 35.1 21.1 25.2
A4 SEF 20.0 13.8 - 24.6 17.6 -
A3 SEF 15.0 11 - 19.6 14.3 -
A5 LEF 34.2 19.2 27.1 42.3 24.5 30.3
B4 SEF 17.0 12.2 - 22.2 15.7 -
B5 LEF 29.5 17.7 23.3 36.4 22.5 26.1
Letter LEF 26 16.3 20.6 34.3 20.8 24.6

*1 This value is for the Standard 250 Sheet Cassette. The print speed of the 150 Sheet MSI is the same as
that of the 250 Sheet Cassette.
*2 For some paper types, the throughput speed may decrease after a certain number of sheets have been
printed.

6-13
 Chapter 6 General
6.1 Specifications

6.1.6 FPOT (First Print Output Time)

This is the theoretical time taken for the tail edge of the first sheet of paper to travel from the feed position until
it leaves the Exit Roller, when the machine receives a print signal in the Standby or Power Saver state.
(Rounded to the first decimal place)

6.1.6.1 FPOT when the IOT receives a Print signal while in Standby state. *1 *2
FPOT (sec)
Feed
Paper Type 26 ppm 35 ppm
Direction
250 FDR feed MSI feed 250 FDR feed 550 FDR feed MSI feed
A4 LEF 6.5 6.5 7.5 7.8 7.5
A3 SEF 8.2 8.2 8.8 9.1 8.8
A5 LEF 6.0 6.0 7.1 7.4 7.1
B4 SEF 7.8 7.8 8.5 8.8 8.5
B5 LEF 6.3 6.3 7.3 7.6 7.3
Letter LEF 6.5 6.5 7.5 7.8 7.5

*1 When the Scanner Motor has stopped and the Fuser is in standby state at the rated temperature.
*2 When the nominal voltage of 100V is applied at 22°C

6.1.6.2 FPOT when the IOT receives a Print signal while in Power Saver state. *1 *2
FPOT (sec)
Feed
Paper Type 26 ppm 35 ppm
Direction
250 FDR feed MSI feed 250 FDR feed 550 FDR feed MSI feed
A4 LEF 18.1 18.1 19.1 19.4 19.1
A3 SEF 19.8 19.8 20.4 20.7 20.4
A5 LEF 18.6 18.6 18.7 19.0 18.7
B4 SEF 19.4 19.4 20.1 20.4 20.1
B5 LEF 17.9 17.9 18.9 19.2 18.9
Letter LEF 18.1 18.1 19.1 19.4 19.1

*1 When the Scanner Motor has stopped, and the Fuser and Fan are OFF.
*2 When the nominal voltage of 100V is applied at 22°C

6.1.7 Warm-up time and recovery time from Power Saver mode
Status Time Conditions
Within 16 Until the IOT issues a Ready signal after Power ON in
Power ON *1
seconds cold state
Recovery from Low Power Until the IOT outputs the ** signal after a print request
** *1
mode signal is received in Low Power mode
Until the IOT outputs the ** signal after a print request
Recovery from Sleep mode ** *1
signal is received in Sleep mode

*1 When the nominal voltage of 100V is applied at 22°C

6-14
Chapter 6 General
6.1 Specifications

6.1.8 Paper Source

6.1.8.1 Standard Bypass Tray (MSI)
Table 6-7 Bypass Tray (MSI)

SEF A3/B4/A4/Ledger/Legal (13)/Legal (14)/Letter/Postcard/Prepaid Postcard/Youkei 4

Envelope/ Commercial 10/5.5 x 8.5"/Monarch Envelope/DL Envelope/Choukei 3
Envelope (120 x 235mm)
Supported paper LEF A4/B5/A5/Letter/C5 Envelope/7.25 x 10.5"
sizes Supports paper that is within the minimum and maximum size ranges of Custom Paper
Minimum: 75mm wide (namecard width) x 148mm long
Maximum: 297mm wide (A3) x 431.8mm long (Ledger)
Long Paper: up to 900mm long
Paper Detection: Installed
Sensor Remaining Paper Detection: Not installed
Paper Size Detection: Not Installed
Load capacity 150 sheets of standard paper, or under 17.5mm
Plain 1, Plain 2, Transparency, Heavyweight 1, Heavyweight 2
Media *1
Paper weight: 60 g/m2 or more and 216 g/m2 or less.

6.1.8.2 Standard Universal Paper Tray (machine standard)

Table 6-8 Standard Universal Paper Tray (machine standard)

SEF A3/B4/A4/Ledger/Legal (13)/Legal (14)/Letter/Postcard/Prepaid Postcard/Youkei 4

Envelope/ Commercial 10/5.5 x 8.5"/Monarch Envelope/DL Envelope/Choukei 3
Envelope (120 x 235mm)
Supported paper
LEF A4/B5/A5/Letter/C5 Envelope/7.25 x 10.5"
sizes
Supports paper that is within the minimum and maximum size ranges of Custom Paper
Minimum: 75mm wide x 148mm long
Maximum: 297mm wide (A3) x 431.8mm long (Ledger)
Paper Tray Detection: Installed
Paper Detection: Installed
Sensor
Remaining Paper Detection: Not installed
Paper Size Detection: Manual (dial type)
Machines with 250 Sheet Tray: 250 sheets of standard paper, or under 27.6mm
Load capacity
Machines with 550 Sheet Tray: 550 sheets of standard paper, or under 59.4mm
Plain 1, Plain 2, Transparency, Heavyweight 1, Heavyweight 2
Media *1
Paper weight: 60 g/m2 or more and 216 g/m2 or less.

The following conditions apply to both the Bypass Tray (machine standard MSI) and Standard Universal
Paper Tray (machine standard)
*1 • Plain Paper 1 complies with Japanese plain paper (60 to 70 g/m2). Plain Paper 2 complies with
Overseas plain paper (70 to 80 g/m2). Can be switched in the ESS.
• The following cannot be used - prepaid postcards with folding lines, postcards for ink jet printers,
and illustrated postcards.
• Youkei 4 Envelope (E506) manufactured by LIFE is used as the standard for envelopes. Other
than that, the load capacity will change depending on the state of the envelopes.
• The load capacities indicated above are based on fresh paper usage. (Thickness must be
between 70 g/m2 [JIS standard] to 80 g/m2.)
• Foil stamped and embossed paper cannot be used.
• Paper with ribbons and/or hooks cannot be used.

6-15
 Chapter 6 General
6.1 Specifications

6.1.9 Tray Module (Optional)

Table 6-9 Tray Module (Optional)

SEF A3/B4/A4/Ledger/Legal (13)/Legal (14)/Letter/Postcard/Prepaid Postcard/Youkei

4 Envelope/ Commercial 10/5.5 x 8.5"/Monarch Envelope/DL Envelope/Choukei 3
Envelope (120 x 235mm)
Supported paper
LEF A4/B5/A5/Letter/C5 Envelope/7.25 x 10.5"
sizes
Supports paper that is within the minimum and maximum size ranges of Custom Paper
Minimum: 75mm wide x 148mm long
Maximum: 297mm wide (A3) x 431.8mm long (Ledger)
Paper Tray Detection: Installed
Paper Detection: Installed
Sensor
Remaining Paper Detection: Not installed
Paper Size Detection: Manual (dial type)
Machines with 250 Sheet Tray: 250 sheets of standard paper, or under 27.6mm
Load capacity
Machines with 550 Sheet Tray: 550 sheets of standard paper, or under 59.4mm
Plain1, Plain2, Transparency, Heavyweight 1, Heavyweight 2
Media *1
Paper weight: 60 g/m2 or more and 216 g/m2 or less.

*1 • Plain Paper 1 complies with Japanese plain paper (60 to 70 g/m2). Plain Paper 2 complies with
Overseas plain paper (70 to 80 g/m2). Can be switched in the ESS.
• The following cannot be used - prepaid postcards with folding lines, postcards for ink jet printers,
and illustrated postcards.
• Youkei 4 Envelope (E506) manufactured by LIFE is used as the standard for envelopes. Other
than that, the load capacity will change depending on the state of the envelopes.
• The load capacities indicated above are based on fresh paper usage. (Thickness must be
between 70 g/m2 [JIS standard] to 80 g/m2.)
• Foil stamped and embossed paper cannot be used.
• Paper with ribbons and/or hooks cannot be used. *1 Plain 1 complies with Japanese plain paper
(60 to 70 g/m2). Plain 2 complies with Overseas plain paper (70 to 80 g/m2). This can be
switched in the ESS.

6.1.10 Paper Feed Control

1 Auto Tray Select

Searches for and automatically selects the Tray in which the specified paper size is loaded.
The logic of the auto selection is as follows.
Priority is given in the order of the Tray 1, Tray 2, Tray 3, and Tray 4.
Any combination with the paper that cannot be used is prohibited by the print driver.

2 Tray Select

Selects one from Tray 1, Tray 2, Tray 3, Tray 4, and Bypass Tray.
Any combination with the paper that cannot be used is prohibited by the print driver.

3 Remaining Paper Indication

None.

6-16
Chapter 6 General
6.1 Specifications

6.1.11 Paper Output

6.1.11.1 Face Down Stacker (standard)

Table 6-10 Face Down Stacker (standard)

Output Location Top part of Printer Main Processor

Output capacity* 250 sheets (Letter/A4 standard paper or smaller)
Output Paper Size All paper sizes supported by this machine
Loadable Media All media supported by this machine
Full Stack Detection None
Finishing Capability Can easily sort without folding or messing up the order
Paper Curl** 20mm and less (standard paper, 22 Degree Celsius/55% RH)

* Defined for fresh paper under normal environment (22 Degree Celsius/55% RH). Fresh paper refers
to paper that has been left alone for 12H in the operating location after its packaging was opened.
** Applicable for 1 Sided printing.

6.1.12 Duplex
6.1.12.1 Duplex Unit (optional)
The specifications for Duplex Unit is shown below.

Table 6-11 Duplex Unit (optional)

Plain 1, Plain 2, Heavyweight 1, Heavyweight 2

Media usable for Duplex
Paper weight: 60 g/m2 or more and 190 g/m2 or less.
Minimum: 100mm wide x 148mm long (A5 LEF)
Sizes usable for Duplex Maximum: 297mm wide (A3) x 431.8mm long (Ledger)
Custom Paper: 100 to 297mm wide x 148 to 431.8mm long

6.1.13 Duplex Control

Selects between 1 Sided and Duplex. "Long-Edge Binding" and "Short-Edge Binding" can be selected.
Any combination with the paper that cannot be used is prohibited by the print driver.
Also, the automatic duplex print function can perform printing from both the Cassette and the MSI.
Makes use of batch mode as required for higher speed.

6-17
 Chapter 6 General
6.1 Specifications

6.1.14 Other Paper Handling

6.1.14.1 Transparency Separator
A separator function is provided for transparencies. It inserts a blank paper or a paper with the same printed
image as the transparency. When printing images on separators, a transparency screen is used.
The paper source can be set to automatically select a tray loaded with paper that has the same size as the
transparency (default) or to select the tray that has been specified for as a separator tray with no other
conditions.

6.1.14.2 Load While Run

Printing continues without stopping when a cassette that is not in operation is pulled out. This allows you to
load paper in the middle of a print job. (When a cassette at the higher level is pulled put, Load While Run
cannot be performed from all tray modules that are located lower than the one that was pulled out)
* When the optional tray modules are installed

6.1.15 Load Capacity

The numbers enclosed by () indicate the number of sheets in the case of 64 g/m2.
Table 6-12 Load Capacity

Paper Capacity (sheets)

Paper Type 250 Sheet Cassette 550 Sheet Cassette 150 Sheet MSI
Standard Paper (A4 P) 250 sheets (305 sheets) 550 sheets (670 sheets) 150 sheets (190 sheets)
Postcard *2 100 sheets 230 sheets 50 sheets
Envelope *3 20 sheets 60 sheets 10 sheets
Labels 180 sheets 250 sheets 75 sheets
Transparency 100 sheets 100 sheets 75 sheets

*1 Fresh paper refers to paper that has been left alone for 12H in the operating location after its packaging
was opened.
*2 • The following cannot be used: prepaid postcards with folding lines, postcards for ink jet printers, and
illustrated postcards.
• Load prepaid postcards as shown in the following figure.
*3 • Youkei 4 Envelope is based on the E506 Envelope manufactured by LIFE.
• For gummed closure envelopes with closed flap, load them as shown in the following figure.
• For plain closure envelopes with open flap (those with tape cannot be used), load them as shown in the
following figure.
• The load capacities indicated above are based on fresh paper usage. (Thickness must be between
70 g/m2 [JIS standard] to 80 g/m2.)
• Foil stamped and embossed paper cannot be used.
• Paper with ribbons and/or hooks cannot be used.

6-18
Chapter 6 General
6.1 Specifications

6.1.16 Summary of Paper Size and Paper Quality Restrictions

The Driver Settings and Restrictive Conditions relevant to Paper Handling are summarized in the following
table.

6.1.16.1 Size Restrictions

Table 6-13 Size Restrictions

Paper Size Standard Bypass Auto Driver

OPT Tray Remarks
Selected Paper (Width x Tray Tray Screen Select *1
Size Length) in
mm 250 550 250 550

A3 SEF 297 x 420 O O O O O O O

A4 SEF 210 x 297 O O O O O O O
A4 LEF 297 x 210 O O O O O O O
A5 LEF 210 x 148 O O O O O O O
B4 SEF 257 x 364 O O O O O O
B5 LEF 257 x 182 O O O O O O O
Letter LEF 279.4 x 215.9 O O O O O O O 8.5 x 11
Postcard SEF 100 x 148 O O O O O O O Postcard
Prepaid
148 x 200 O O O O O O O
Postcard SEF
Envelope (105
Youkei 4 SEF 105 x 234 O O O O O X O
x 235mm)
Ledger SEF 279.4 x 431.8 O O O O O O O 11 x 17
Commercial
Com-10 SEF 104.8 x 241.3 O O O O O X O
10
Legal 13 SEF 215.9 x 330.2 O O O O O O O 8.5 x 13
Legal 14 SEF 215.9 x 355.6 O O O O O O O 8.5 x 14
Statement SEF 139.7 x 215.9 O O O O O O O 5.5 x 8.5"
Executive LEF 266.7 x 184.2 O O O O O O O 7.25 x 10.5
Monarch
Monarch SEF 98.4 x 190.5 O O O O O X O
Envelope
C5 Envelope
162.0 x 229.0 O O O O O X O C5 Envelope
LEF
DL Envelope
220.0 x 110.0 O O O O O X O DL Envelope
SEF
Choukei 3 SEF 120.0 x 235.0 O O O O O X O
75 to 297 x
Non-standard O O O O O ¢*3 O
148 to 431.8
Long Paper 297X 900 X X O X X X O

O: OK X: NG
*1: The standard paper sizes that can be selected in the driver are indicated by O.
The non-standard sizes*2 are set or selected from Custom (UI or Device). The selection range of
(75 to 297) x (148 to 431.8) is supported.
*2: Standard size refers to A3 SEF, A4 SEF, A4 LEF, A5 LEF, B4 SEF, and B5 LEF.
*3: Sizes within 100 to 297mm x 148 to 431.8mm can be used for 2 sided printing.

6-19
 Chapter 6 General
6.1 Specifications

6.1.16.2 Paper Type Restrictions

Table 6-14 Paper Type Restrictions

Bypass Duplex Driver

Selected Paper Standard Tray OPT Tray
Tray Unit Select *1
Size
250 550 250 550
Plain 1 O O O O O O O
Plain 2 O O O O O O O
Transparency O O O O O X O
Heavyweight 1 O O O O O O O
Heavyweight 2 O O O O O O O

O: OK X: NG
*1: The paper type that can be selected in the driver are indicated by O.
*2: The paper type selection prompts the appropriate internal settings and changes the record and
fusing speeds.

6-20
Chapter 6 General
6.1 Specifications

6.1.17 Host Interface

6.1.17.1 Machines to be Connected (Supported Clients/Servers)
1 Client Hardware

The supported client hardware is as follows.

Table 6-15 Supported Client Hardware

Hardware Guaranteed Conditions

PC/AT compatible machines Operation that is guaranteed on Windows 95/98/ME, Windows 2000,
(DOS/V) Windows XP, and NT4.0.
Machine models supporting the two-directional parallel port that are sold
PC-9800 Series*1 after November 1993, and with operation that is guaranteed on Windows
95/98/ME, Windows 2000, Windows XP, and NT4.0.
Macintosh (Intel Mac Operation that is guaranteed on Mac OS Classic: 8.6 and 9.2, and Mac
included) OS X: 10.2.8/10.3.9/10.4

*1: Includes PC9801 series and PC9821 series.

*2: Includes Macs with Intel CPU.

2 Client OS

The Japanese/English/TC/SK/KO version of supported client OS is shown in the following table.

When each language version is provided, support is on a 1 to 1 basis with the language version of the
client OS.
When there is only the English version of the software, it supports all the E/SC/TC/OK versions of client
OS.

Table 6-16 Supported Client OS

Driver Direct Print

Client OS
ART- EX NPDL PCL PS FX-PDF Utility

Windows 95/98/ME *1 O O O O O O
Windows NT4.0 O O O O O -
Windows 2000 O O O O O -
Windows XP O O O O O -
Windows XP x64 Edition O O O O O -
Windows Vista (PL) O - O O O -
Mac OS 7.6.1 and later *1 - - - O - -
Mac OS X *1 - - - O O*2 -

O: Supported -: Not supported

*1: Supported OS: Mac OS 8.6 and 9.2, and Mac OS X 10.2, 10.3, 10.4
*2: Supported MAC OS: Mac OS X 10.3.9, 10.4

6-21
 Chapter 6 General
6.1 Specifications
3 Server OS

The following Server OS are supported. For OS support, FX standard (latest OS/release version)
support is required even for those that are not found in the following list.
1) Windows NT 4.0 Server
2) Windows 2000 Server
3) Windows Server 2003
4) NetWare 3.12J, 3.2J, 4.1J, 4.11J, 4.2J, 5J, 6, 6.5
5) Windows 95/98/ME (common by printer)

6.1.17.2 IEEE1284
1 Connector

Amphenol Full 36 Pin

2 IEEE1284 Support

The IEEE1284 (nibble, ECP mode) are supported as standard. However, if the host computer does not
support IEEE1284, the two-directional function cannot be used.

3 Supported OS

Windows 95/98/Me, Windows NT4.0, Windows 2000/XP, Windows Server 2003

6.1.17.3 Wireless (Post Launch)

Can connect to IEEE802.11g or 11b networks.
The physical specifications comply with IEEE 802.11 standards.
(1) Supported OS
Windows 98/Me/NT4.0/2000/XP/Server2003, Mac OS X 10.2/10.3/10.4, Linux (*1)
*1: Only for Infrastructure connections and wired LAN connections using Linux terminals.

Limitations
1. A PC running Windows 2000 or later is required to setup the wireless network.
2. Linux wireless capability is not guaranteed.

(2) Printing Protocol

Same as the Ethernet printing protocol.

6-22
Chapter 6 General
6.1 Specifications

6.1.17.4 Ethernet
Network connection is available via both 100BASE-TX and 10BASE-T, and is able to switch between
Auto/Manual and Full Duplex/Half Duplex. The physical specifications comply with IEEE 802.3 standards.

1 Connector

RJ-45

2 Printing Protocol

The following protocols for printing are supported.

Standard: lpd, Port9100, IPP, SMB, NetWare, AppleTalk, ftp, and pop3

1) Standard

Table 6-17 Printing Protocol

Maximum No. of
Protocol Transport Supported Client
Sessions*2
Win95/98/Me/NT4.0/2000/XP/Server2003
Linux
Lpd TCP/IP 1
Mac OS X: 10.2/10.3/10.4
Win95/98 and Me are supported by DPU
Win95/98/Me/2000/XP/Server2003
Port9100 TCP/IP 1
Win95/98 and Me are supported by DPU
WinMe/2000/XP/Server2003/
IPP/IPPS*1 TCP/IP 5
Mac OS X: 10.2/10.3/10.4
TCP/IP 5 Win95/98/Me/NT4.0/2000/XP/Server2003
SMB*1
NetBEUI 5 Win95/98/Me/NT4.0/2000

NetWare NCP/IPX NetWare3.12, 3.2 (NDS not supported)

1
(Pserver)*1 TCP/IP NetWare4.1, 4.11, 4.2, 5, 6, 6.5*3

AppleTalk Mac OS Classic: 8.6 and 9.2, and Mac OS

ATP/DDP 1
(EtherTalk)*1, *4 X: 10.2/10.3/10.4
Win95/98/Me/NT4.0/2000/XP/Server2003
ftp TCP/IP 1
RedHat 7 to 9, SuSE Linux 9
pop3 TCP/IP 1 E-mail Print

*1: Optional Multi Protocol LAN Card required.

*2: Maximum no. of sessions is defined as the number of commands that can be received at the same
time.
*3: NetWare 6.5 is applicable to SP1.1 or later.
*4: Only PS is supported.

6-23
 Chapter 6 General
6.1 Specifications
2) Other Protocol
Other protocols are listed in Table 6-18.

Table 6-18 Management Protocol

Protocol Transport Support

TCP/IP [Supported MIB]
MIB-II (RFC1213)
SNMP HostResources MIB (RFC1514)
IPX*1 Printer MIB (RFC1759)
XCMI5.3
[Client]
Windows 95/98/Me/NT4.0/2000/Xp
Internet Explorer 6.0 or later
HTTP/HTTPS*1 TCP/IP FireFox 1.5 or later
(Mac OS X 10.3 or later)
SAFARI 2.0 or later
FireFox 1.5 or later
[Supported OS] DHCP Server
DHCP TCP/IP WinNT4.0Server/2000Server/Server2003,
RedHat Linux 8/9, Unix Solaris 9 (OS bundle)
[Supported OS] Server
bootp TCP/IP WinNT4.0Server/2000Server/Server2003,
RedHat Linux 8/9, Unix Solaris 9 (OS bundle)
[Supported OS]
rarp TCP/IP
Unix Solaris 9 (OS bundle)
AutoIP TCP/IP
[Supported OS]
WINS*1 TCP/IP
WinNT4.0Server/Server2000/Server2003
SMTP/POP3 TCP/IP Status Messenger
[Supported OS]
Bonjour (mDNS)*1 UDP/IP
Mac OS X 10.2 or later
FTP TCP/IP Firmware Update
[Supported OS]
DNS/DDNS*1 TCP/IP
Windows 2000Server/Server2003, UNIX

*1: Optional Multi Protocol LAN Card required.

6-24
Chapter 6 General
6.1 Specifications

6.1.17.5 USB
Complies with the USB2.0 (High Speed (hereafter HS)) as standard.
2.0 (HS) Slave 1 port

1 Connector

4 Pins, B connector

2 Supported OS

Windows 98SE/ME, Windows 2000, Windows XP, Windows Server 2003

Mac OS 9.2, OS X: 10.2, 10.3, or later
Pre-install version

3 Authentication

Obtain the USB authentication.

6-25
 Chapter 6 General
6.1 Specifications

6.1.17.6 Function Specifications

O: Standard, : Optional X: Not supported

Table 6-19 Function Specifications

AP (IBG)
Configuration Item FX (local) 110V 220V
Series Series
IOT unit 26ppm/35ppm O
AC 100V 50/60Hz O X X
Power Supply AC 110V 50/60Hz X O X
AC 220V 50/60Hz X X O
MSI Standard Bypass Tray O
Paper Source 1 Standard Tray O
Paper Source 2 Tray Module (optional)
Paper Source 3 Tray Module (optional)
Paper Source 4 Tray Module (optional) (35ppm only)
Paper Output 250 Sheet Tray O
ESS Hakugin O
Low Toner Sensor X
Sensor No Paper Sensor (Paper Source) O
Stack Full Sensor X
LCD: 16 digits x 2 rows, Key: 9 units, LED: 3 units O
Control Panel Japanese/English
Character Generator supported Languages English
(switchable)
CPU RM5231A O 300 (26ppm)/400 (35ppm) MH
Onboard 64MB O
Expansion RAM 128MB X
RAM
Expansion RAM 256MB
Expansion RAM 512MB
Onboard FW: 16MB O
Onboard FONT O 8MB
PostScript Expansion + Heisei 2 Font ROM X
PostScript Expansion + Morisawa 2 Font ROM X
ROM
PostScript Expansion + European Language 136
X
Font ROM
TC/SC Font ROM X
KR Font ROM X
HDD 2.5' 40GB
MPC Multi Protocol Card

6-26
Chapter 6 General
6.1 Specifications
Table 6-19 Function Specifications

AP (IBG)
Configuration Item FX (local) 110V 220V
Series Series
Wireless LAN USB Wireless LAN *8
IEEE1284 O
Host I/F Ethernet (10Base-T, 100Base-TX) O
USB2.0 O (1 Port only)
LPD O
Port9100 O
FTP O
IPP/IPPS
SMB
Netware (Pserver)
AppleTalk (EtherTalk)
SNMP (TCP/IP) O
SNMP (IPX)
HTTP (EWS) O
Network HTTPS (EWS)
DHCP O
BOOTP O
RARP O
AutoIP O
SMTP O
WINS
Bonjour (mDNS)
Web Print X
DNS O
DDNS
*8: Not configured in machines for China

6-27
 Chapter 6 General
6.1 Specifications
Table 6-19 Function Specifications

AP (IBG)
Configuration Item FX (local) 110V 220V
Series Series
ART-EX (PLW) O X
ART IV O X
NPDL X X
FX-PDF O O
PCL XL O O
PCL5e O O
PDL ESC/P O O
ESC/P-K X *3
KS, KSSM, KS5895 (PostLaunch) X *4
Adobe PostScript 3 *1
HP-GL/2 (PostLaunch) O O
TIFF Direct Print (PostLaunch) O O
PC-PR201 (PostLaunch) O X
For ART EX (Japanese: 4, Alphabet: 15) O X
For NPDL (Japanese: 2) X X
PostScript + PS European Language 136 Font +
X
Heisei 2 Font
Font PostScript + PS European Language 136 Font +
X
Morisawa 2 Font
PostScript Adobe 136 Font -
PCL: Agfa81 Font O O
MMF: 2 Font for PDF O O
ESC/P-K, SC/TC4 Font for PCL5 X
Localized Font KS, KSSM, KS5895, for PCL5
X
Hangul 6 Font
PostScript + PS European Language 136 Font
+ PS Heisei 2 Font X
+ PCL Heisei 2 Font
JPN Kit
PostScript + PS European Language 136 Font
+ PS Morisawa 2 Font X
+ PCL Heisei 2 Font
*1: PostScript version is 3015.103.
*3: Valid when the TC/SC Font ROM is installed.
*4: Valid when the KR Font ROM is installed.

6-28
Chapter 6 General
6.1 Specifications
Table 6-19 Function Specifications

AP (IBG)
Configuration Item FX (local) 110V 220V
Series Series
ART EX O X
ART IV X X
NDPL X X
ESC/P X X
PCL XL X O
PostScript 3 *1
Driver FX-PDF O O
ESC/P-K X X
KS, KSSM, KS5895 X X
PCL5 X X
HP-GL/2 (PostLaunch) X X
TIFF (PostLaunch) X X
PC-PR201 (PostLaunch) X X

Linux Print NPDL - -

Driver FX-PDF O O
CentreWare O*5
SimpleMonitor O*6
TrustMarkingBasic O (ART-EX) X
Utility
Contents Bridge O O
Print Log Utility (PL) X X
Driver distribution function (PL) X X

Management DocuHouse O
Software PrintXchange O*7 X
*5 Not supported by NPDL driver.
*6 Not supported in PostScript driver and ContentsBridge driver.
*7 Not supported by NPDL driver.

6-29
 Chapter 6 General
6.1 Specifications

6.1.17.7 Job Control

6.1.17.7.1 Cancel Job

A job in progress can be canceled (aborted) from the Control Panel.

6.1.17.7.2 Force Print

When the machine is still waiting for data from the host during job processing, this function forcedly
prints any data that is already received.

6.1.17.7.3 Job Time-Out

When a pause occurs for a period of time (this can be changed or set as unlimited at the control panel)
during a job transfer, the data transferred halfway will be aborted as an error.

6.1.17.7.4 Job Recovery

When a paper jam causes a job to fail, the job will resume automatically when the jammed paper is
removed.

6.1.17.7.5 Print Guaranteed mode

By the addition of Option RAM, even documents with the worst compression rate (256MB for page data
only) during 1200 dpi, A3, and 2 Sided print can be printed uncompressed. Printing is always possible
in this mode.

6.1.17.7.6 Job Separator (NPDL only)

A4 paper can be alternately output in vertical and horizontal direction per job.

6-30
Chapter 6 General
6.1 Specifications

6.1.17.8 Job History Function

Able to keep and print a job history of up to a maximum of 22 items. The log can be printed immediately from
the Control Panel. It is also possible to automatically print the log when the maximum number of retainable log
is reached.
Log details are as follows:

1 Job Received (Date/Time)

2 Input Interface (Input Port - Centronics, lpd, etc.)

3 File Name (Document Name)

4 Host/User Name

5 No. of Sheets

6 No. of Pages

7 Paper Size

8 Result (Completed, Error, etc.)

9 Others, title, total print volume, rights display, etc.

6-31
 Chapter 6 General
6.1 Specifications

6.1.17.9 Diagnostics/Maintenance
6.1.17.9.1 Self Diagnosis

Self Diagnosis is performed during power ON.

6.1.17.9.2 Maintenance Mode

By entering the maintenance mode (CE mode) through a special panel operation, various tests can be
performed.

6.1.17.9.3 Firmware Update Function

The printer control software can be downloaded from the host by a CE or user.
For details, refer to the CentreWare Firmware Download Tool manual.
The ESS firmware can be overwritten (updated) externally by a user. Overwriting is available via the
ways shown in the following table.

Table 6-20 Firmware Overwrite Paths

Overwrite Target Via IEEE1284 Via network (ftp) Via internet (web) Via USB
ESS Yes Yes No Yes*2
MCU Yes*1 Yes*1 No Yes*1
MPC Yes Yes No Yes

*1: Although this overwrite process may be removed later because there are plans to apply a Mask
during mass-production, it is currently left as available. However, it is designed so that it can be
removed when it has been decided to apply the Mask.
*2: The CentreWare Firmware Download Tool cannot be downloaded through USB for
Windows95/98/Me.

6.1.17.10 User Maintenance

The following tasks can be routinely maintained by a user, or as required.
• Replacement of consumables (CRU)
• Clearing Jams
• Replacement of Periodic Replacement Parts (IBG machines only)

6-32
Chapter 6 General
6.1 Specifications

6.1.17.11 Operating Mode

6.1.17.11.1 Running mode

Operating states such as running or recording, etc.

Table 6-21 Running mode

ESS ESS Full Power

Maintaining the operating
Fusing System
temperature
IOT
Exposure System Rotating at run speed
Recording System In operation

6.1.17.11.2 Standby mode

This is the standby state. It is possible to enter this mode within 30 seconds after power Off then On or
from the Sleep mode.

Table 6-22 Standby mode

ESS ESS Full Power

Fusing System Maintaining the standby temperature
IOT Exposure System Pause
Recording System Pause

6.1.17.11.3 Power Saver mode 1

To reduce power consumption, the machine enters Power Saver mode 1 when it has not received print
data for a certain time. The waiting time before switching to this mode is set as 3 minutes by default. It
can be set in increments of 1 minute in the range between 1 and 60 minutes from the operation panel.
The machine cannot be prohibited from entering this mode.

Table 6-23 Power Saver mode 1

ESS Sleep
Fusing System Pause
Exposure System Pause
IOT
Recording System Pause
MCU Full Power

6-33
 Chapter 6 General
6.1 Specifications
6.1.17.11.4 Power Saver mode 2 (Deep Sleep)

To save power consumption, the machine enters Power Saver mode 2 when it has not received print
data for a certain time after it has entered Power Saver mode 1. The waiting time before switching to
the mode is set as 5 minutes by default. It can be set in increments of 1 minute in the range between 1
and 120 minutes from the operation panel. The machine can be prohibited from entering this Power
Saver mode. However, this prohibition cannot be set in machines that are meant for China market.
This satisfies the energy saving requirements of E-Star and New-BAM. This is not guaranteed when a
non-standard HDD etc. is installed as an option.

Table 6-24 Power Saver mode 2 (Deep Sleep)

ESS ESS Sleep

Fusing System Pause
Exposure System Pause
IOT
Recording System Pause
MCU Pause

6.1.17.11.5 Resume from Power Saver mode

1 Power Saver mode 1

The printer returns to Ready mode when a print job is received or any button on the Control Panel is
pressed during Power Saver mode 1.

2 Power Saver mode 2

The printer returns to Ready mode when a print job is received or the Power Saver button on the
Control Panel is pressed during Power Saver mode 2.

6-34
Chapter 6 General
6.1 Specifications

6.1.17.12 Utility Print Function

6.1.17.12.1 Printer Settings

Printer Settings can be printed by Panel operation.

Prints on A4 by selecting Auto Tray.
The content of Printer Settings is as follows:
(The Default Paper Size is A4. The output size and Default Paper Size cannot be changed)
[Title]
[Company Name Logo]
[Product Name Logo]
[General] Serial No.
Built-in memory capacity, Number of built-in fonts, Built-in PDL names & versions, F/W version, IOT
version, Billing counter: Total print volume, PS version, PS Serial No., BOOT version
[Network]
F/W version
Ethernet: MAC Address, 10 or 100 base & half or full
TCP/IP: IP address, Subnet mask, Gateway address, IP address retrieval method, receiving IP
restriction
Status Information
IPX/SPX: Frame Type, Network Address
Built-in Protocols
Wireless LAN: SSID, Network Type, Link Quality, Link Channel (when wireless LAN is operating)
[Printer Options]
Shows the trays that can be used as "Tray Module" (Tray 1 to 3, MSI)
Availability of "Multi Protocol Card"
Availability of "Hard Disk"
"Duplex Unit"

6.1.17.12.2 Font List

Font List can be printed by Panel operation.

Prints on A4 (default) by selecting Auto Tray.

6.1.17.12.3 Print Job History

The Job History can be printed.

Prints on A4 (default) by selecting Auto Tray.

6.1.17.12.4 Print Error History

The Error History can be printed. Prints on A4 by selecting Auto Tray.

6.1.17.12.5 Demo Print

Not supported.

6-35
 Chapter 6 General
6.1 Specifications
6.1.17.12.6 Panel Settings

The list of menu setting items can be printed.

6.1.17.12.7 ART-EX Form List

The form registration status for ART-EX can be printed.

6.1.17.12.8 User Defined List

The ART-IV, form for ESC/P, and log registration status can be printed.

6.1.17.12.9 Print Meter

The PV Management Function or Total Printer Auditron can be printed by Panel operation.

6.1.17.12.10 Dump Printing

Prints the received data in the hexadecimal format.

6.1.17.12.11 Logical Printers List

ESC/P, PostScript, 5 sets each.

Each of the logical printer list can be indicated.

6.1.17.12.12 CRUM ID

Prints just as it is even when the destination IDs are different.

6.1.17.12.13 Periodic Replacement Parts Counter

Supported.
The maintenance menu enhancement (such as displaying a message to prompt replacement of Periodic
Replacement Parts, etc.) complies with the following specifications:
1. Replacement warning display
• The display should clearly indicate which parts is to be replaced. (Display using the Fail/Error
code (xxx-xxx).)

• When there is an overlap in parts that need to be replaced, they are displayed alternately.

• Printing is still possible even when a replacement warning is being displayed.

2. After replacement, reset the counter from the Control Panel (operation panel).
• The reset function can be found in the Diag Menu for FX domestic models and in the User Menu
for IBG models.

• When a reset is instructed (executed), the value is recorded in the replacement history.

6-36
Chapter 6 General
6.1 Specifications
• Each parts will have 1 to 4 entries in the log history. When the entries are full, the oldest value is
overwritten.

3. Added a maintenance counter in the setting sheet

• Prints the current value and history for each parts.

• The current counter value is obtained by subtracting the nearest replacement value from the
current counter.

4. Counter definition
• Calculation based on A4 LEF (calculated using the area ratio of A4 LEF +1, A3 +2, and A4 LEF).

5. Status sheet
• The machine has a function to print the warning status.

Table 6-25

Reference
Maintenance KIT *1 Lifespan History Remarks
FX IBG counter

Maintenance Kit *2 100K - CRU Count in ESS 4

Fuser Unit 100K ERU CRU
Count in ESS 4 Simultaneous replacement
Trans Assy 100K ERU CRU
This is managed at the Feeder
Cassette Roll Assy
200K ERU CRU 2 since it cannot be managed
Kit Count in ESS individually for each Cassette
MSI Roll Assy Kit 200K ERU CRU 2

*1 Target parts are classified by their lifespan and grouped in Kits.

*2 There is one counter for the Maintenance Kit. For more details on the KIT, refer to "6.4. Periodic
Replacement Parts".

6.1.17.12.14 Barcode Mode

This mode maintains the reproducibility of fine and small texts while printing barcodes.

6.1.17.13 Multilingual Function (not supported by NPDL driver)

Table 6-26 Multilingual Function (not supported by NPDL driver)

UI FX (local) AP (IBG)
Panel Japanese/English English
English
Driver UI Japanese/English *1
TC, SC, KO
English
SimpleMonitor Japanese/English
TC, SC, KO
Report Japanese/English English
Japanese/English
EWS
TC, SC, KO

*1 ART-EX English drivers are provided through the Web.

6-37
 Chapter 6 General
6.1 Specifications

6.1.18 Software Specifications

6.1.18.1 Firmware Update Function
The printer control software can be downloaded from the host by a CE or user.
The ESS firmware can be overwritten (updated) externally by a user. Overwriting is available via the ways
shown in the following table.

Table 6-27 Firmware Overwrite Paths

Overwrite Target Via IEEE1284 Via network (ftp) Via internet (web) Via USB
ESS Yes Yes No Yes*2
MCU Yes*1 Yes*1 No Yes*1
MPC Yes Yes No Yes

*1: Although this overwrite process may be removed later because there are plans to apply a Mask
during mass-production, it is currently left as available. However, it is designed so that it can be
removed when it has been decided to apply the Mask.
*2: The CentreWare Firmware Download Tool cannot be downloaded through USB for
Windows95/98/Me.

6.1.18.2 Utility Software

6.1.18.2.1 Print Driver/Installer

The print drivers for Win95/98/Me, WinNT4.0, Win2000, WinXP, Windows Server 2003, Mac OS 8.2
and 9.2, Mac OS X 10.2, 10.3, and 10.4 are provided.
These print drivers can be installed using the Installer.
The NPDL driver can be installed together with the SimpleMonitor by using the Installer.

6.1.18.2.2 TCP/IP Direct Print Utility

Provides the utility that allows peer-to-peer network printing for Windows95/98/Me. These can be easily
installed using the Installer.

6.1.18.2.3 Network Settings Tool

Allows various network settings

IP address settings tool
NetWare settings tool

6-38
Chapter 6 General
6.1 Specifications
6.1.18.2.4 SimpleMonitor

Allows users to check the printer status (Wait/Ready), remaining toner (gas gauge), Drum status
(OK/Empty), Cover (open/close), etc.
This is not supported by Win95. Also not supported by PC-9800 Series.

6.1.18.3 Other Utility Software

The following Software is supported.
CentreWare (not supported by NPDL driver)

6.1.18.4 Linked Software

6.1.18.4.1 Link with Software developed by FX or FXPS

The following Software provided by FX or FXPS works with the printer.

6.1.18.4.2 DocuHouse

Supports DocuHouse.
Function and Performance: Complies with the pass criteria of the DocuHouse program.

6.1.18.4.3 PrintXchange

Supports PrintXchange. (Not supported by NPDL driver)

Function and Performance: Complies with the pass criteria of the PrintXchange program.

6.1.18.4.4 ARC-opl

Does not support ARC-opl.

6.1.18.4.5 TrustMarkBasic

Supports TrustMarkBasic. (ART-EX and NPDL)

Function and Performance: Complies with the pass criteria of the TrustMarkBasic program.
Supported version: ART-EX*1 in TMB 3.0 and NPDL*2 in TMB 2.2
*1 HDD must be installed, *2 Supported as standard

6.1.18.4.6 Link with Software developed by vendors

The following Software provided by vendors (other than FX or FXPS) works with the printer.
• MetaFrame and Presentation Server by Citrix Systems, Inc.
• Interstage by FUJITSU
• SAP R/3 by SAP AG
• AS400 by IBM Corporation

6-39
 Chapter 6 General
6.1 Specifications
6.1.18.4.7 Print Utility for MetaFrame (Citrix Systems MetaFrame Link)

Supports MetaFrame and Presentation Server by Citrix Systems, Inc.

Used to develop the backbone linked software "Print Utility for Metaframe" and works with it.
Function and Performance: Complies with the standard of mainframe distributed output programs.
However, it should operate as standard even without linkage to PUMF.

6.1.18.4.8 SAP R/3 Support

1 Standard Device Type File Support (for FX)

Output verification is performed using the standard scripts from SAP Japan.
The evaluation results are sent to SAP Japan via the mainframe linked program in order to be posted
on the "SAP R/3 Enterprise Japanese Printer List" on SAP AG Homepage.
http://www30.sap.com/japan/contactsap/printer/printer.epx
The following standard device type files are supported. (Must support the built-in PDL)
• JPPOST

• JPFXART

• JPESCPFX

• JPHPLJ (NEW)

2 FX Device Type File Support (for FX and IBG)

FX device type file support is provided. (Refer to Table 1 and Table 2)

Table 6-28 Table 1. Language & DeviceTypeName (V1.x.x)

Language Device type name (PCL) Device type name (PS)

English ZFXPCL ZFXPST
Japanese ZJPFXPCL ZJPFXPST
Korean ZKPFXPCL -
Chinese (Simplified) ZCNFXPCL -
Chinese (Traditional) ZTWFXPCL -

Table 6-29 Table 2. Language & DeviceTypeName (V2.x.x)

Language Device type name (PCL) Device type name (PS)

English - ZFXPST
Japanese - ZJPFXPST
Korean - -
Chinese (Simplified) - -
Chinese (Traditional) - -

3 Support for IBU Barcode (for own local destinations)

Can print with IBU (Image Barcode Utility) developed by XC.

6-40
Chapter 6 General
6.1 Specifications
6.1.18.4.9 Support for IBM AS400 (Print Utility for IBM® Personal Communication)

This is a target device of the print utility for IBM® personal communication.
Function and Performance: No failures can be found when using the test script.

6.1.18.5 Performance
6.1.18.5.1 PC Conditions/Print Driver Settings

PC conditions, print driver settings, and printer settings are shown in Tables 6-30, 6-31, 6-32,
respectively.

Table 6-30 PC Conditions

Item Conditions
1) WindowsXP: PC/AT compatible machine
PC/OS (high-speed Pentium 4-2.4GHz), 512MB
2) MacOS X: Macintosh G4 (733MHz), 256MB
Connection Interface 100Base-TX
Application Software Office XP, PhotoShop CS, Adobe Reader 7.0
FPOT: Single-page FX reference charts J6 and J4
* The time to print the first page when printing all J11 pages is also
Test File
measured as a reference.
Throughput: J11 (for ART-EX/PostScript), J12 (for PDF)

Table 6-31 Print Driver Settings

Item Conditions
High Quality mode Standard
Driver processing method
Foreground processing (application specification)
specification

Table 6-32 Printer Settings

Item Conditions
ART- EX Default settings for all (600 dpi and binary mode)
PostScript Default settings for all (600 dpi and binary mode)
PCL XL Default settings for all (600 dpi and binary mode)
NPDL Default settings for all (600 dpi and binary mode)

6-41
 Chapter 6 General
6.1 Specifications

6.1.19 Electrical Properties

6.1.19.1 Power Supply Operating Voltage/Frequency
The machine can operate based on the following conditions.

Table 6-33 Power Supply Operating Voltage/Frequency

FX (local) AP (for Taiwan) AP (for other countries)

Phase Two wire line single phase Two wire line single phase Two wire line single phase
Power Supply 100 ± 10% 110 - 120V ± 10% 220 - 240V ± 10%
Frequency 50Hz/60Hz ± 3Hz 50Hz/60Hz ± 3Hz 50Hz/60Hz ± 3Hz

6.1.19.2 Power Consumption Rating

The power consumption rating are as follows.

Table 6-34 Power Consumption Rating

Power Consumption
Mode ppm Prerequisite
100V Series 110V Series 220V Series
26 < (incl.) 1150W < (incl.) 1090W < (incl.) 1120W Full Option*
Operating (Max.)
35 < (incl.) 1230W < (incl.) 1160W < (incl.) 1180W Full Option*

Operating 26 < (incl.) 590W < (incl.) 570W < (incl.) 460W
average 35 < (incl.) 690W < (incl.) 580W < (incl.) 470W
Average
power 26 < (incl.) 70W < (incl.) 70W < (incl.) 70W
Standby
35 < (incl.) 105W < (incl.) 105W < (incl.) 105W
26 < (incl.) 20W < (incl.) 20W < (incl.) 20W
Power Saver - Light Sleep
35 < (incl.) 20W < (incl.) 20W < (incl.) 20W
26 < (incl.) 5W < (incl.) 5W < (incl.) 5W
Power Saver - Deep Sleep
35 < (incl.) 5W < (incl.) 5W < (incl.) 5W

* The optional tray module with 2-drawer configuration and Duplex Unit are included.

6-42
Chapter 6 General
6.1 Specifications

6.1.20 Noise
The noise levels for the 60Hz M/C model evaluation are lower than the following values.
The measurement is based on the ISO7779 measurement standards.

Table 6-35 Noise

26 ppm 35 ppm
Item Full Full
Machine Machine
System*1 System*1
Surrounding A characteristic power level during Standby
4.3 4.3 5.3 5.3
(Units: B)*2
Surrounding A characteristic power level during operation
6.6 7.1 7.1 7.8
(Units: B)*2
A characteristic impulse power level during operation
6.8 7.5 7.1 8.0
(Units: B)*3
A characteristic surface projection noise pressure during
operation (Units: B)*4 - - - -
(Bystander position) (Units: dB)

*1: Full SYSTEM CONFIG: Main Processor + Options*5

*2: LwAd: Surrounding power level = measured LwA (1 device) + 0.3B
*3: LwAI: Impulse Power Level
*4: LpAm: Surface projection noise pressure level (bystander position)
*5: Duplex and Tray Modules (26ppm: 2 level Trays, 35ppm: 3 level Trays) that are installed as options.

6-43
 Chapter 6 General
6.2 Tools and Service Consumables

6.2 Tools and Service Consumables

6.2.1 Tools
There are no tools that are specific to this machine. Basic Tool

6.2.2 Service Consumable

There are no service consumables that are specific to this machine.

6-44
Chapter 6 General
6.3 Consumables

6.3 Consumables
The consumables are shown in the table.

Table 6-36 Consumables

Product Code
Consumables Remarks
FX (local) AP (IBG)
Drum/Toner Cartridge (6K) CT350515 - 6K
Drum/Toner Cartridge (14K) CT350516 - 14K
Print Cartridge (10K) - CWAA0710 (CL) 10K
Print Cartridge (10K) - CWAA0711 (AP) 10K

6-45
 Chapter 6 General
6.4 Periodic Replacement Parts

6.4 Periodic Replacement Parts

The Periodic Replacement Parts (ERU/CRU) are shown below. The CRU is the Periodic Replacement Parts
that can be replaced by users. This is called CRU. The CRU depends on the sales/service strategy. The ERU
is the Periodic Replacement Parts that can be replaced by CE.

Table 6-37 Periodic Replacement Parts

Periodic Replacement Parts Product Code Replacement

Remarks
FX (local) AP (IBG) Type

Maintenance Kit 220V *2 -- CWAA0718 CRU

Maintenance Kit 110V *2 -- CWAA0719 CRU
100K Sheets
Fuser Unit *1 - ERU
Trans Assy *1 - ERU
MSI Roll Assy Kit *1 - ERU
100K Sheets
Cassette Roll Assy Kit *1 - ERU

*1 No product code due to ERU

*2 Maintenance Kit = Fuser Unit + Trans Assy + Cassette Roll Assy KIT + MSI Roll Assy Kit

6-46
Chapter 6 General
6.5 Optional Parts

6.5 Optional Parts

The optional parts are shown in the table.

Table 6-38 IOT Options

Optional Parts FX (local) AP (IBG) Remarks

Product Product
Product Name
Code Code
250 Sheet Tray (Cassette)
A3 Universal Cassette (250 sheets) E3300096
250 Cassette E3300107
550 Sheet Tray (Cassette)
A3 Universal Cassette (550 sheets) E3300097
550 Cassette E3300108
250 Sheet Feeder (hopper)
Tray Module (250 sheets) E3300098
250 Sheet Feeder E3300109
550 Sheet Feeder (hopper)
Tray Module (550 sheets) E3300099
550 Sheet Feeder E3300110
Duplex Unit
Duplex Unit E3300100
*1
Duplex Unit E3300111
PostScript 3 + Morisawa 2 Font ROM
PostScript Software Kit (Morisawa 2 Font) E3300101 *2
PostScript 3 + Heisei 2 Font ROM
PostScript Software Kit (Heisei 2 Font) E3300102 *2
PostScript 3 + European Language 136 Font ROM
PostScript Software Kit E3300112 *2
TC/SC Font ROM
Chinese Font Kit EL300584 Existing
KR Font ROM
KR Font Kit EL300585 Existing
MPC (Multi Protocol Card) *7
Multi Protocol LAN Card E3300103
Existing *5
Network Expansion Card EL300631
*1: Operates with standard RAM
*2: PostScript version is 3015.103
*5: Not configured in machines for China
*7: Used as expansion card when Standard LAN is used in multi protocol and used as a LAN option for
MultiWriter8200.

6-47
 Chapter 6 General
6.5 Optional Parts
Table 6-38 IOT Options

Optional Parts FX (local) AP (IBG) Remarks

Product Product
Product Name
Code Code
Wireless LAN Option *8
Wireless LAN Module E3300104
Existing *6
Wireless LAN Unit E3300122
HDD Option
Built-in Additional Hard Disk EL300580
Existing
Internal Hard Disk EL300586
JPN KIT (PS Morisawa 2 Font + PCL Heisei 2 Font)
Japan Font Kit (Morisawa) E3300116
JPN KIT (PS Heisei 2 Font + PCL Heisei 2 Font)
Japan Font Kit (Heisei) E3300117
Expansion RAM Module (256MB)
Expansion Memory (256MB) EC100235
Existing
256MB Memory E3300061
Expansion RAM Module (512MB)
Expansion Memory (512MB) EC100236
Existing
512MB Memory EL300452
*6: The countries to which this product can be shipped (authorized countries) are still TBD
*8: This is a USB wireless stick to be attached to the MPC. To use it, MPC is required.

6-48
Chapter 6 General
6.5 Optional Parts

Optional Parts FX (local) AP (IBG) Remarks

Product Product
Product Name
Code Code
Parallel Interface Cable *5 E3200011 Existing
Parallel Interface Cable *6 VD14 Existing
Printer Connection Cable *7 YH57 Existing
Earthquake Preparedness Kit -- --
SSP (scanner)
Existing
DocuScan C3200 A NS100008 TS100004
*4
DocuScan C4250 NS100007 TS100003
.
*4: This comes with 1 USB. It is used exclusively as the printer I/F.
*5: Centronics Cable (for PC/AT) S-Sub 25 Pins
*6: Centronics Cable (for PC98) Full pitch 36 Pins
*7: Centronics Cable (for PC98) Half pitch 36 Pins

6-49
 Chapter 6 General
6.6 Installation Procedures

6.6 Installation Procedures

6.6.1 Check the bundled contents
• Printer Main Processor

When lifting, follow the

instructions on the sheet.

• Drum Cartridge

• This guide

• Warranty card (pasted in the box)

• Quick Reference Guide

6-50
Chapter 6 General
6.6 Installation Procedures
• Driver CD Kit

• Power Cord

• Online User Registration Guide

• Maintenance Contact Information

Contains the contact information for users to

ask questions. Paste it to a highly visible area
on the machine.

CAUTION
• The machine (main processor) weighs approx. 21.9kg (DocuPrint 3055) or approx. 19.2kg
(DocuPrint 2065). Always lift the machine with two or more people.
• When lifting the machine, bend your knees and hold onto the recessed areas located at the
bottom left and right sides of the machine. This is to prevent back injuries.

6-51
 Chapter 6 General
6.6 Installation Procedures

6.6.2 Decide on an Installation Location

• Installation Conditions
• A location with stable and level surface
• Temperature range of 10 - 32°C and humidity range of 15 - 85% (no condensation)
• A location that is not exposed to direct sunlight

• Power Outlet, Ground

WARNING
• To prevent electric shocks or fire accidents due to electrical leakage, the green ground wire that
extends from the power plug must be connected to any of the following.
• Ground terminal of an outlet
• A copper plate that is buried 750mm or deeper underground
• An earth terminal that has undergone grounding work (type D)
• Check the ground terminal of the power outlet to be used. When unable to ground or no
grounding is performed, contact our printer support desk or sales office for consultation.
Never connect the ground wire to the following kind of places.
• Gas pipes (this may cause fire or explosion.)
• Phone dedicated ground wire and conductor rod (large amount of current might flow through
in case of lighting strike.)
• Water pipes or faucets (If there are plastic parts somewhere in the middle the pipe, it cannot
serve as ground.)
• If the machine is not properly grounded, it can cause electric shocks.
• The Power Cord must be plugged by itself, into a well-grounded outlet close to the machine. Do
not use an extension cord. Make sure that the socket does not have multiple power plugs
plugged to it. It may cause fires due to overheating.
• When you have any questions about connecting the machine to a power source, contact our
printer support desk or sales office for consultation.
• The Power Cord must be connected to a power outlet with capacity larger than the rated voltage
and current values of the machine. Check the rating plate label at the rear panel of the machine to
find out the rated voltage and current values.
• Do not use Power Cords other than the bundled one or those that has been specified by the
company. It may cause fires or electric shocks. Also, do not use the dedicated Power Cord for
other machines.
• Do not damage, break, or modify the Power Cord. The Power Cord can get damaged if it is pulled
out forcedly or bent excessively. This can cause overheating and result in a fire or electric shock.
• If the Power Cord is damaged (having exposed wire, open circuit, and etc.), contact our printer
support desk or sales office for replacement. If you do not replace it, it can cause a fire or electric
shock.

6-52
Chapter 6 General
6.6 Installation Procedures
• Installation Space
Unit: mm

660 437 270

100

459

100

203 208

390
178

309

203 208
単位:mm
660 437 270

6-53
 Chapter 6 General
6.6 Installation Procedures

6.6.3 Installing the Optional Accessories

Perform installation according to the Installation Guide that comes with each product, and the sections
"Installing the Expansion Memory" and "Built-in Additional Hard Disk" in "Chapter 8 Accessories."

6.6.4 Turn ON the Power and Follow the Message

Subsequently, follow the messages on the

Control Panel to perform the installation.

Do not expose the drum cartridge to direct sunlight or strong light.

Although the toner is not harmful to your body, wash it off immediately if your hands or clothes are
stained with it.

6-54
Chapter 6 General
6.6 Installation Procedures
Installing the Toner Cartridge

3
Front Cover

Pull Lever [A] towards you to open the Front Cover.

Open the Top Cover.

Shake the Drum/Toner Cartridge approx. 10 times.

Pull out the Toner Seal slowly and horizontally.

6-55
 Chapter 6 General
6.6 Installation Procedures
7

Install the Drum/Toner Cartridge by aligning

the protrusions at both sides to the arrow
labels at the inner side of the printer and
sliding it in.

Do not touch the photoreceptor

(Drum) protective shutter and
photoreceptor (Drum) surface.

Close the Top Cover

Be careful not to
pinch your fingers

6-56
Chapter 6 General
6.6 Installation Procedures

6.6.5 Loading Paper

1) 2)
Align the Guides according to the paper size.

Pull out the Tray

Only when loading B4/

A3/11x17"

3)

Do not exceed this line when loading paper.

6-57
 Chapter 6 General
6.6 Installation Procedures
4)

Match the Paper Size setting dial

5)

Be careful not to pinch your fingers

Point:
When other than plain paper is loaded in the Tray, change the paper type for the tray at the Control Panel.
Refer to "4. Paper" in "Quick Reference Guide" for the procedure to change paper types.

6-58
Chapter 6 General
6.6 Installation Procedures

6.6.6 Perform Test Print

Point:
If you made a mistake when operating the control panel, you can return to (1) by pressing .

6-59
 Chapter 6 General
6.7 Setting the Printer Environment

6.7 Setting the Printer Environment

When the Printer installation has been completed by following the setup guide, proceed with setting the printer
environment.

6.7.1 Supported Environment

This printer can be used as a local printer when connected directly to a computer, or as a network printer via a
network.
Set the port to be used as "Enable" at the Control Panel.

• When used as a Local Printer

Local printers can be connected in the following way:
• Parallel connection: Connect the machine to the computer using a parallel cable.
(Factory Settings: Enable)

• USB connection: Connect the machine to the computer using a USB cable.
(Factory Settings: Enable)

• When used as a Network Printer

Network printers can be used in the following environment:
• LPD: Used to enable direct transmission with the machine by using TCP/IP Protocol.
(Factory Settings: Enable)

• Port 9100: Used when using Port 9100 as the port.

(Factory Settings: Enable)

• FTP: Used when printing via FTP service.

(Factory Settings: Enable)

6-60
Chapter 6 General
6.7 Setting the Printer Environment
When the Multi Protocol LAN Card (optional) is installed, the following environments become available.
• Netware®: Used to share to machine by using the NetWare server.
(Factory Settings: Enable)

• SMB: Used when printing via Windows® network.

(Factory Settings: Enable)

• IPP: Used when printing via the internet.

(Factory Settings: Enable)

• EtherTalk®: Used to print from Macintosh®. (Factory Settings: Enable)

6-61
 Chapter 6 General
6.7 Setting the Printer Environment
• Supported OS and Environment

Note
• Supported OS are subject to change without notice. Please refer to our Web site.

Connection Local Network

Port Ether
Port Parallel USB*2 LPD NetWare*1 SMB*1 IPP*1 FTP
9100 Talk*1
TCP/ TCP/ IPX/ Net TCP/ TCP/ TCP/ Apple TCP/
Protocol - -
IP IP SPX BEUI IP IP IP Talk IP
Windows® 95 O O*4 O O O O O*4 O
® 3 4 4
Windows 98 O O* O* O O O O O* O
Windows® Me O O O*4 O O O O O O*4 O
®
Windows NT 4.0 O O O O O O O O
Windows® 2000 O O O O O O O O O O
®
Windows XP O O O O O O O O O
Windows Server®
O O O O O O O O O
2003
Mac OS®*5
O*6 O
8.6 to 9.2
Mac OS X
10.2.8*5/ O O O*8 O
10.3.9/10.4*7
*1: Multi Protocol LAN card (option) is required.
*2: Connected computer must have USB port. For Windows 98/Me, use the
USB Print Utility by Fuji Xerox Co., Ltd. The USB Print Utility can be installed
from the CD-ROM in the bundled Driver CD Kit.
*3: Supports Windows 98 Second Edition and later.
*4: For Windows 95/98/Me, use the TCP/IP Direct Print Utility by Fuji Xerox Co.,
Ltd. The TCP/IP Direct Print Utility is automatically installed when installing
the print driver.
*5: When PostScript Software Kit (optional) is installed, PostScript data can be
printed from Macintosh.
*6: Supported by Mac OS 9.2 and later.
*7: On Mac OS X 10.3.9 or later, the Macintosh print driver can be used to print.
The Macintosh print driver can be downloaded from our Web site. For more
details, please refer to the documentation posted on the same Web site.
*8: Supported by Mac OS X 10.3.9 and later.

Note
• For more information on printing from other versions of Macintosh, please
consult with our printer support desk.
• When the PostScript Software Kit is installed, it is recommended to add
128MB of Memory or more.

6-62
Chapter 6 General
6.7 Setting the Printer Environment

6.7.2 Connecting the Cables

Connect a printer and computer using interface cables that are suitable for the connection configuration.
The interface cables are not included with this product. They have to be purchased separately.

In Case of Parallel Connection

For parallel connection, prepare the parallel cable from our optional product. If a cable other than our
optional product is used, it may cause radio interference.
1 Turn OFF the machine.

2 Insert the parallel cable to the interface connector of

the machine. Secure it using the Clamps at both
sides.

3 Connect the other end of the parallel cable to the

computer.

4 Turn ON the machine.

In Case of USB Connection

For USB connection, install the print driver into the computer before connecting the cable. Refer to
[6.7.6 Installing the Print Driver.] (P. 72) and the CD-ROM Documentation (HTML) in the Driver CD Kit
for the installation procedure.
1 Turn OFF the machine. Insert the USB cable to the
interface connector of the machine.

2 Connect the other end of the USB cable to the

computer.

3 Turn ON the machine.

In Case of Network Connection

Prepare a straight cable that supports 100BASE-TX or 10BASE-T as the network cable.
1 Turn OFF the machine.

2 Insert the network cable to the interface connector of

the machine.

3 Connect the other end of the network cable to a

network device, such as the hub.

4 Turn ON the machine.

6-63
 Chapter 6 General
6.7 Setting the Printer Environment

6.7.3 Setting the Network Environment

This section explains the settings required to use the TCP/IP protocol. To use this printer in other
environments, refer to the CD-ROM Documentation (HTML) in the Driver CD Kit to configure the network
environment settings.

Setting the IP Address

To use the TCP/IP protocol, the IP address must be set.

At factory shipment, "Get IP Address" is set to "DHCP/Autonet" in the machine. Therefore, in a network
environment with a DHCP server, an IP address is automatically set when this machine is connected to
the network.
Print the "Printer Settings" to check whether an IP address has been already set.
When no IP address is set, change "Get IP Address" to "Panel" and set the IP address.

As long as an IP address is set, it is

OK.

If it is not set, or you would like to

change the settings, perform the
following procedure.

Note
• Refer to User Guide "7.2 Printing the Reports / Lists" (P. 164) for how to print the "Printer
Settings".

• This machine can automatically obtain the address information by using the BOOTP server or
RARP server. In this case, change the "Get IP Address" item to "BOOTP" or "RARP".

• When using the DHCP server, the IP address may be changed so you need to check the IP
address on a regular basis.

• When using the DHCP server in the WINS (Windows Internet Name Service) environment, the
Multi Protocol LAN card (optional) is required.

The procedure to set an IP address is as follows.

This section explains the procedure on how to set the IP address from the Control Panel. Depending on the
network environment being used, the setting of subnet mask and gateway address are required. Consult with
the Network Administrator to set the required settings.

6-64
Chapter 6 General
6.7 Setting the Printer Environment
• Setting the IP Address
1 Press the [Menu] button on the Control Panel to display the Menu Menu
screen. Print Language

2 Press the [ ] button several times until "Admin Menu" is displayed.

Menu
Note Admin Menu
• If you have gone past the item you want to select, use the [ ] button to
go back.

3 Select using the [ ] button.

Admin Menu
"Network / Port" is displayed.
Network / Port
Note
• If you have mistakenly pressed the [ ] button at the wrong item, use
the [ ] button to go back to the previous screen.

• If you want to start from the beginning, press the [Menu] button.

4 Select using the [ ] button. Network / Port

"Parallel" is displayed. Parallel

5 Press the [ ] button several times until "TCP/IP" is displayed. Network / Port
TCP/IP

6 Select using the [ ] button.

"Get IP Address" is displayed. TCP/IP
Get IP Address

7 Select using the [ ] button.

Get IP Address
The current setting value is displayed.
DHCP/Autonet *

8 Press the [ ] button several times until "Panel" is displayed. Get IP Address
Panel
9 Confirm with the [Eject/Set] button.
After "Reboot to apply settings" is displayed for three seconds, it Get IP Address
returns to the setting screen. Panel *
Set the Gateway Address before switching OFF the printer and
switching it ON again. Go to the next step.

10 Press the [ ] button to return to "Get IP Address".

TCP/IP
Get IP Address

11 Press the [ ] button to display the "IP Address".

TCP/IP
IP Address
12 Select using the [ ] button.
The current IP address is displayed. IP Address
000.000.000.000*

6-65
 Chapter 6 General
6.7 Setting the Printer Environment

13 Press the [ ] and [ ] buttons to enter value into the first field, then
IP Address
press the [ ] button.
192.000.000.000
Note
• For those that require no change, press the [ ] button to move to the
next field.

• Continuously pressing down the [ ] or [ ] button causes the value to

change in increments of 10.

• Press the [ ] button to return to the previous field.

IP Address
192.168.001.100*
14 Fill in the other fields the same way and press the [Eject/Set] button
to confirm the settings when the last (4th) field has been filled.

15 To continue and set the subnet mask and gateway address, press the
[ ] button and proceed with step 16.
To end the operation here, go to step 23.

• Setting the Subnet Mask/Gateway Address TCP/IP

16 Press the [ ] button several times until "Subnet Mask" is displayed. Subnet Mask

17 Select using the [ ] button. Subnet Mask

The current Subnet Mask is displayed. 000.000.000.000*

18 Input the Subnet Mask in the same way as the IP Address and confirm Subnet Mask
with the [Eject/Set] button. 255.255.255.000*

19 Press the [ ] button to return to "Subnet Mask". TCP/IP

Subnet Mask

20 Press the [ ] button to display the "Gateway Address".

TCP/IP
Gateway Address
21 Select using the [ ] button.
The current Gateway Address is displayed. Gateway Address
000.000.000.000*
22 Input the Gateway Address in the same way as the IP Address and
confirm with the [Eject/Set] button. Gateway Address
192.168.001.254*
23 This completes all settings.
Switch OFF the printer and then switch it ON again.

24 Print out the "Printer Settings" and check the contents that was set
earlier.

6-66
Chapter 6 General
6.7 Setting the Printer Environment

6.7.4 Enabling Ports to be Used

The port to be used must be set in advance as "Enable" at the Control Panel.
If it is not set as "Enable", follow the following steps to change the settings.
Here, the explanation uses IPP as an example.

1 Press the [Menu] button on the Control Panel to display the Menu
Menu
screen.
Print Language

2 Press the [ ] button several times until "Admin Menu" is displayed.

Menu
Admin Menu
3 Select using the [ ] button.
"Network / Port" is displayed.
Admin Menu
Network / Port
4 Select using the [ ] button.
"Parallel" is displayed.
Network / Port
Parallel
5 Press the [ ] button several times until the protocol to be set is
displayed. (Example: IPP)
Network / Port
IPP
6 Select using the [ ] button.
[Port Status] is displayed. IPP
Port Status
7 Select using the [ ] button.
The current setting value is displayed.
Port Status
Disable *
8 Press the [ ] button to display "Enable".

Port Status
9 Confirm with the [Eject/Set] button. Enable
After "Reboot to apply settings" is displayed for three seconds, it
returns to the setting screen. Port Status
Enable *

10 This completes the settings.

Switch OFF the printer and then switch it ON again.

6-67
 Chapter 6 General
6.7 Setting the Printer Environment

6.7.5 Setting Printer Configurations via CentreWare Internet Services

CentreWare Internet Services Overview

CentreWare Internet Services are services that allow the user to make use of a web browser in a
TCP/IP-enabled environment to display the printer or job printing status and to change the settings.
Some of the items that are set at the Control Panel can also be set under the [Properties] tab of this service.

Note
• CentreWare Internet Services is not available when the printer is used as a local printer.

Supported Environment and Configuration

• Supported Web Browsers

CentreWare Internet Services has been confirmed to work with the following Web browsers.
For Windows 2000 and Windows XP, and Windows Server 2003
• Microsoft® Internet Explorer 6.0

• Mozilla Firefox 1.5

For Mac OS X 10.4

• Mozilla Firefox 1.5

• Safari 2.x

6-68
Chapter 6 General
6.7 Setting the Printer Environment
• Web Browser Settings
When using the CentreWare Internet Services, the following Web browser settings is recommended.
• Specify the address of the machine directly without using a proxy server

• Enable JavaScript

Note
• When the machine address is specified via a proxy sever, the response may slow down or
screens may not be displayed.

• When JavaScript is not operating or is stopped, some buttons are not displayed. In this case,
URL links are displayed in place of the buttons.

• For the setting procedures, refer to the Help file of the Web browser that is being used.

In addition, by changing the display language setting in a Web browser, the CentreWare Internet
Services operating screen can be switched between the different language versions.

Note
• For the setting procedures, refer to the Help file of the Web browser that is being used.

• Printer Settings
When using the CentreWare Internet Services, the machine IP address must be set and "Internet
Services" must be set to "Enable" (factory shipment: "Enable"). When "Internet Services" is set to
"Disable", change it to "Enable" in the Control Panel.

Reference
• User Guide "Internet Services" (P. 112)

• User Guide "1.4 Enabling Ports" (P. 28)

6-69
 Chapter 6 General
6.7 Setting the Printer Environment
Items That Can Be Set on CentreWare Internet Services

Main features that can be set in each tab are as follows.

Tab Name Main function

• [General]
Displays the printer product name, IP address, and status of the printer.
• [Printer Information]
Status Displays the sizes of paper loaded in the paper trays and the amount remaining, output tray status,
remaining status of consumables.
• [Fault Status]
Displays the status of the Control Panel, location of the error and contents of the Fault Status.

Jobs • Displays the Job list and Job History list.

• [Machine Details]
Displays the product name and serial number. Name*, Location*, Contact Person*, and
Administrator E-mail Address*, etc. can also be set here.
• [Configuration]
Displays the printer’s specifications, Page Description Language (PDL), and information about the
memory.
• [Counters]
The Total Printed Impressions is displayed.
• [Initialization]
Initialize NV memory and restart printer.
• [Security]*
Generation/management/deletion of Self-Signed Certificate and enabling of SSL/TLS Server
Communication can be done here.
This item is displayed when the Multi Protocol LAN Card (optional) is installed.
• [Status Messenger]*
Properties
This machine can notify the printer status to specified destinations by e-mail. The destinations,
items to be notified, and etc. can be set here.
• [Internet Services Settings]*
Allows you to configure the refresh intervals by the second and whether the display of the
CentreWare Internet Services is refreshed automatically using the browser. Allows you to
configure the Administrator Name and Password and whether the Administrator Mode is to be
Enabled in CentreWare Internet Services.
The factory settings of the Administrator Login ID is "11111" and the password is "x-admin". The
factory settings Password must be changed before putting the machine to use.
• [Port Status]
Allows you to activate or deactivate the ports.
• [Port Settings]
Allows you to configure Ethernet settings.
• [Protocol Settings]*
Allows you to configure detailed settings for each protocol.

• [Print User Restrictions]*

Can limit the users who can use this machine by using the authentication function. To use this
function, enter the information of the users who use this machine.
Printer
• [Logical Printer Settings]*
Sets the PostScript and ESC/P logical printers.
PostScript is displayed when the PostScript Software Kit (optional) is installed.

Support • Displays the support information. This contains a link to Customer Support.

*: These items can only be set from the CentreWare Internet Services. They cannot be set from the Control Panel.

6-70
Chapter 6 General
6.7 Setting the Printer Environment
Using the CentreWare Internet Services

The procedure to use this service is as follows.

1 Boot up the computer, and start the web browser.

2 Enter the Printer IP Address or URL in the address input field of the Web Browser and press the
[Enter] key. The top page of CentreWare Internet Services appears.

• Entering IP address • Entering URL

Note
• When specifying a port number, specify ":" followed by "80" (port number at factory shipment)
after the address. The port number can be checked in "Printer Settings".

• The port number can be changed at the "Properties" tab > "Protocol Settings" > "HTTP". When
the port number is changed, it must be specified after the ":" that is added following an address.

• When SSL/TLS server communication is enabled to encrypt the transmission, enter an address
starting with "https" instead of "http" in the address field on the browser when accessing the
CentreWare Internet Services.

• Refer to User Guide "7.6 Security Features" (P. 172) and User Guide "7.8 Authentication and
Auditron Administration Features" (P. 181) for more about the Authentication/Billing functions
and communication encryptions.

Using Help

For details regarding the items that can be set in each screen, click the [Help] button to display the
Online Help.

6-71
 Chapter 6 General
6.7 Setting the Printer Environment

6.7.6 Installing the Print Driver.

To print from the computer, install the print driver from CD-ROM in the Driver CD Kit.
The print driver installation method differs depending on how the computer is connected to the machine.
Refer to the CD-ROM Documentation (HTML) and check the procedures before performing the installation.

Note
• When software such as ContentsBridge Utility is installed, refer to the CD-ROM documentation
(HTML) as well.

Uninstallation

• Uninstalling the Print Driver

The print driver can be uninstalled using the Print Driver Uninstallation Tool in the CD-ROM from the
Driver CD Kit. Refer to the CD-ROM Documentation (HTML) for the details.

• Uninstalling Other Applications

To uninstall other applications that was installed from the Driver CD Kit, refer to the Readme file for
each software. The Readme files can be displayed from the "Product Info (HTML)" in the Driver CD Kit.

6-72
Chapter 6 General
6.8 Control Panel Menu List

6.8 Control Panel Menu List

Basic Control Panel Functions

To move up and down the menus: < > or < > button
To select a menu or move to the right: < > button
To cancel a selection or return to the left: < > button
To confirm an entry: <Eject/Set> button
To exit the menu screen: <Menu> button

Character/Number Entry Functions

To increase or decrease a value: < > or < > button

To move between digits or fields: < > or < > button
To reset a value to the default: < > and < > buttons

Conventions for the Administrator Menus

: Main menus

: Items that appear/do not appear depending on the options

installed in the printer.

* : Default

Print Menus The print menus appear on the display only when the optional hard disk is installed.

Ready to print

< > button

Print Menu Select User ID Password+SET key Select Document All documents Specify Quantity
Secure Print User01 [ ] All documents Print and Delete Use PC settings
All documents Specify Quantity
Print and Save xxx sets
All documents
Delete

Select Document Document1 Specify Quantity

Document1 Print and Delete xxx sets
Document1
Print and Save
Document1
Delete

Print Menu Select User ID Select Document All documents Specify Quantity
Sample Print User01 All documents Print and Delete Use PC settings
All documents Specify Quantity
Print and Save xxx sets
All documents
Delete

Select Document Document1 Specify Quantity

Document1 Print and Delete xxx sets
Document1
Print and Save
Document1
Delete

6-73
 Chapter 6 General
6.8 Control Panel Menu List

Administrator Menus

Ready to print

Password If the control panel is locked with a password,

<Menu> [0000] enter the password here.
button

Print Language Quantity 1 Set(s)*

*1
2 Sided Print 1 Sided*,
Long Edge Flip,
ESC/P Short Edge Flip
See the Emulation Setting Guide for details.
Print Mode Normal*,
PDF High Quality,
High Speed
PCL See the Emulation Setting Guide for details. Password [ ]
*2
PostScript PS Error Report On*, Collated Off*,
Off On
PS Job Time-out Off*, Output Size Auto, Auto,
900 Minutes A4* *3 8.5x11* *4
Init PS Disk Ready to init Layout Auto %*,
100% (No Zoom),
PaperSelect Mode Auto*, Booklet,
Select FromTray 1 - 900 Minutes (unit: 1 min.) 2 Pages Up,
4 Pages Up

*1:1 - 999 sets

*2:32 characters
Code 0x20 - 0x7d
*3:When [DefaultPaperSize] is [A4]
*4:When [DefaultPaperSize] is [8.5 x 11]

Job History, Error History, Print Meter, Printer Settings, Panel Settings,
Report/List
Font List, PCL Font List, PS Font List, User Defined,
PCL Macro List, ESC/P Logical, PS Logical, Stored Documents

Meter Reading Meter 1, Meter 2,

Meter 3, Meter 4

Network / Port
Continued on the next page To A
System Settings
Continued on the next page To D
Admin Menu Printer Settings
Continued on the next page To F
Maintenance Mode
Continued on the next page To H
Init/Del Data
Continued on the next page To I

6-74
Chapter 6 General
6.8 Control Panel Menu List

A
Network / Port Parallel Port Status Enable*,
Disable
Print Mode Auto*, ESC/P, PDF,
PS, PCL, HexDump
Adobe Protocol TBCP*, Standard, BCP,
Auto, Binary
Bi-directional Enable*,
Disable

LPD Port Status Enable*,

Disable
Print Mode Auto*, ESC/P, PDF,
PS, PCL, HexDump

NetWare Port Status NetWare TCP/IP Enable*,

Disable
NetWare IPX/SPX Enable*,
Disable
Print Mode Auto*, ESC/P, PDF,
PS, PCL, HexDump

SMB Port Status SMB TCP/IP Enable*,

Disable
SMB NetBEUI Enable*,
Disable
Print Mode Auto*, ESC/P, PDF,
PS, PCL, HexDump

IPP Port Status Enable*,

Disable
Print Mode Auto*, ESC/P, PDF,
PS, PCL, HexDump

EtherTalk Port Status Enable*,

Disable

USB Port Status Enable*,

Disable
Print Mode Auto*, ESC/P, PDF,
PS, PCL, HexDump
Adobe Protocol Auto, Standard, BCP,
TBCP*, Binary

Port9100 Port Status Enable*,

Disable
Print Mode Auto*, ESC/P, PDF,
PS, PCL, HexDump

E-mail Printing Port Status Enable*,

Disable

SNMP Settings Port Status SNMP UDP Enable*,

Disable
SNMP IPX Enable*,
Disable

To B (top right)

6-75
 Chapter 6 General
6.8 Control Panel Menu List

From B (bottom left) ([Network / Port] continued)

TCP/IP Get IP Address DHCP/Autonet*, DHCP,

BOOTP, RARP, Panel
IP Address, 000.000.000.000* Enter when [Get IP Address]
Subnet Mask, is [Panel]
Gateway Address
nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn Displays the printer’s IP address
when [Get IP Address]
is not [Panel]

InternetServices Port Status Enable*,

Disable

FTP Port Status Enable*,

Disable

StatusMessenger Port Status Enable*,

Disable

Bonjour Port Status Enable*,

Disable

Ethernet Auto*, 100M FullDuplex, 100M HalfDuplex,

10M Full Duplex, 10M Half Duplex

IPX/SPXFrameType Auto*, Ethernet II, Ethernet 802.3,

Ethernet 802.2, Ethernet SNAP

Network Settings Adobe Protocol Auto*, Standard, BCP,

TBCP, Binary

IP Filter No.1/Address 000.000.000.000*

No.1/Mask 000.000.000.000*

No.1/Mode Off*,
Permit, Reject

No.5/Address 000.000.000.000*

No.5/Mask 000.000.000.000*

No.5/Mode Off*,
Permit, Reject

HTTP - SSL/TLS Enable / Disable Disable*,

Enable

This item appears only when a certificate is registered in the printer.

These items do not appear on the model available in China.

6-76
Chapter 6 General
6.8 Control Panel Menu List

D
System Settings Audio Tones Control Panel Off,
On*
Invalid Key Off,
On*
Machine Ready Off,
On*
Job Complete Off,
On*
Fault Tone Off,
On*
Alert Tone Off,
On*
Out of Paper Off,
On*
Low Toner Alert Off,
On*
Base Tone Off*,
On

Panel Settings Panel Lock Off*,

On
Change Password Current Password New Password
[0000] [0000]
When the 1st and 2nd
passwords match, the display
Low Power Timer 3 Minutes* returns to [Change Password]
1 - 60 Minutes (increment: 1 min.)

Sleep Mode Enable*,

Disable These items do not appear on the model available in China.

Sleep Mode Timer 5 Minutes* 1 - 120 Minutes (increment: 1 min.)

Time-out 30 Seconds* Off or 5 - 300 Seconds (increment: 1 sec.)

AutoJob History Off*,

On

2 Sided Report 1 Sided*,

2 Sided

Off*,
Banner Sheet Insert Position Start Sheet, End Sheet
Start & End
Specify Tray Tray 1*, Tray 2,
Tray 3, Tray 4, Bypass Tray

Toner Life Continue Print *,

Stop Print

mm/inch Millimeters(mm)*,
Inch (")

Overwrite HDD 3 Overwrites*,

1 Overwrites, Off

Print Auditron Off*,

On

Scanner Interrupt On*,

Off

To E (top right)

6-77
 Chapter 6 General
6.8 Control Panel Menu List

From E (bottom left) ([System Settings] continued)

Secure Print ActivateFeature Enable*,

Disable
Interrupt Print Off,
On*

Print Priority Disable*,

Enable

F
Printer Settings Density Normal*, Darken +1, Darken +2
Lighten +2, Lighten +1

Substitute Tray Off*, Larger Size,

Closest Size, Bypass Feed

Display Screen Bypass Tray Yes*,

No
Paper Tray Yes,
No*

Bypass Mode Panel Specified,

DriverSpecified*

Paper Type Tray 1 Plain Paper*, Transparency, Heavyweight 1,

Heavyweight 2, 1. User 1 - 5. User 5
Tray 2, Plain Paper*, Transparency, Heavyweight 1,
Tray 3, Tray 4 Heavyweight 2, 1. User 1 - 5. User 5
Bypass Tray Plain Paper*, Transparency, Heavyweight 1,
Heavyweight 2, 1. User 1 - 5. User 5

Paper Priority Plain Paper 1*, 2-6,

Off
1. User 1 - 1-6,
5. User 5 Off*

Tray Priority 1st Tray 1*,

Tray 2, Tray 3, Tray 4
2nd Tray 2*,
Trays other than the 1st
3rd Tray 3*,
Trays other than the 1st and 2nd

Paper Size Tray 1, Tray2, See œa

Tray 3, Tray4
Custom Portrait (Y)

Landscape (X)

Bypass See œb

Custom Portrait (Y)

Landscape (X)

œa œb
11x17, 8.5x13, 8.5x14, 7.2x10.5, 5.5x8.5, A3, B4, A4-P, A4-L, Driver*, B5, A5,
8.5x11*, 4.1x9.5, 3.9x7.5, 110x220mm, 11x17, 8.5x13, 8.5x14, 7.2x10.5, 5.5x8.5,
162x229mm, 100x148mm, 148x200mm, 120x235mm, 8.5x11, 4.1x9.5, 3.9x7.5, 110x220mm,
105x235mm 162x229mm, 100x148mm, 148x200mm,
120x235mm, 105x235mm

To G (next page)

6-78
Chapter 6 General
6.8 Control Panel Menu List

From G (previous page) ([Printer Settings] continued)

Paper Name 1. User 1* - 1 - 8 alphanumeric characters

5. User 5*

Print ID Off*,
Top Left, Top Right, Bottom Left, Bottom Right

DefaultPaperSize A4*,
8.5 x 11

Size Conflict Force Print*,

Check PaperSize

Barcode Mode Tray 1 Off*,

On
Tray 2, Off*,
Tray 3, Tray 4 On
Bypass Tray Off*,
On

H
Maintenance Mode Reset Counter Maintenance Kit Use SET to reset

Adjust PaperType Plain Paper Light, Heavy*

I
Init/Del Data Initialize NVM Ready to init

Init/NetworkPort

Hard Disk

Delete Form Delete ESCP Form 01.12345678,

Not registered

6-79
 Chapter 6 General
6.8 Control Panel Menu List

6-80
Chapter 7 Wiring Data
Table of Contents

7.1 P/J List........................................................................................................................7-1

7.1.1 Engine P/J List ................................................................................................................................ 7-1
7.1.2 250 Paper Feeder (Main) P/J List ................................................................................................... 7-2
7.1.3 550 Paper Feeder (Main) P/J List ................................................................................................... 7-3
7.1.4 Duplex/Output P/J List .................................................................................................................... 7-3
7.1.5 250 Paper Feeder (Optional) P/J List ............................................................................................. 7-4
7.1.6 550 Paper Feeder (Optional) P/J List ............................................................................................. 7-5
7.2 P/J Location Diagrams ...............................................................................................7-6
7.2.1 Engine P/J Location Diagrams........................................................................................................ 7-6
7.2.2 250 Paper Feeder (Main) P/J Location Diagrams........................................................................... 7-8
7.2.3 550 Paper Feeder (Main) P/J Location Diagrams........................................................................... 7-9
7.2.4 Duplex/Output P/J Location Diagrams.......................................................................................... 7-10
7.2.5 250 Paper Feeder (Optional) P/J Location Diagrams ................................................................... 7-11
7.2.6 550 Paper Feeder (Optional) P/J Location Diagrams ................................................................... 7-12
7.3 Connection Charts....................................................................................................7-13
7.3.1 Symbols in the Overall Connection Chart ..................................................................................... 7-13
7.3.2 Overall Connection Chart.............................................................................................................. 7-14
7.4 Connection Chart Between Parts .............................................................................7-15
7.4.1 Notes on using the Connection Chart Between Parts................................................................... 7-15
7.4.2 Organization of the Schematic Block Diagrams Between Parts ................................................... 7-17
7.4.2.1 Power Supply........................................................................................................................ 7-19
7.4.2.2 Fuser..................................................................................................................................... 7-21
7.4.2.3 Controller .............................................................................................................................. 7-23
7.4.2.4 ROS ...................................................................................................................................... 7-25
7.4.2.5 HVPS .................................................................................................................................... 7-27
7.4.2.6 Fan/Driver ............................................................................................................................. 7-29
7.4.2.7 250/550 Paper Feeder (Main)............................................................................................... 7-31
7.4.2.8 MSI/Registration ................................................................................................................... 7-33
7.4.2.9 Duplex/Output ....................................................................................................................... 7-35
7.4.2.10 250/550 Paper Feeder (Optional) ....................................................................................... 7-37
Chapter 7 Wiring Data
7.1 P/J List

7.1 P/J List

7.1.1 Engine P/J List

Table 7-1 Engine P/J List

P/J Coordinates Description

1 G-119 Connection between the ESS PWB and the HARNESS ASSY VIDEO (ROS)
4 G-117 Connection between the ESS PWB and the HARNESS ASSY PS
5 B-117 Connection between the ESS PWB and the HARNESS ASSY PUI
7 G-118 Connection between the PWB ESS and the FFC VIDEO
11 J-118 Connection between the MCU PWB and the HARNESS ASSY PH
12 J-118 Connection between the MCU PWB and the HARNESS ASSY MAIN FRM
13 J-119 Connection between the MCU PWB and the HARNESS ASSY PS
14 I-119 Connection between the MCU PWB and the MIDDLE FAN
15 I-119 Connection between the MCU PWB and the REAR FAN
16 I-119 Connection between the MCU PWB and the HARNESS ASSY SIDE FAN
Connection between the MCU PWB and the HARNESS ASSY MOTOR [ROS
17 H-119
ASSY]
18 H-119 Connection between the MCU PWB and the HARNESS ASSY ROS [ROS ASSY]
19 H-118 Connection between the MCU PWB and the FFC VIDEO
20 H-118 Connection between the MCU PWB and the HARNESS ASSY PS
21 H-117 Connection between the MCU PWB and the HARNESS ASSY PS
22 H-117 Connection between the MCU PWB and the HARNESS ASSY MOTOR
Connection between the MCU PWB and the HARNESS ASSY FRONT [KIT
23 I-117
FRAME FRONT]
24 J-117 Connection between the MCU PWB and the HARNESS ASSY FEEDER 1
25 H-117 Connection between the MCU PWB and the HARNESS ASSY CRU
Connection between the MCU PWB and the HARNESS ASSY EXIT 1 [BRACKET
26 I-117
ASSY EXIT]
27 I-117 Connection between the MCU PWB and the HARNESS ASSY CLUTCH
28 I-117 Connection between the MCU PWB and the HARNESS ASSY INTERLOCK
31 B-128 Connection between the LVPS and the HARNESS ASSY SW
32 B-127 Connection between the LVPS and the HARNESS ASSY FSR
33 F-127 Connection between the LVPS and the HARNESS ASSY PS
34 F-129 Connection between the LVPS and the HARNESS ASSY PS
35 F-128 Connection between the LVPS and the HARNESS ASSY PS
51 F-129 Connection between the HVPS and the HARNESS ASSY PS
52 I-128 Connection between the HVPS and the HARNESS ASSY VG
53 I-129 Connection between the HVPS and the HARNESS ASSY VD
54 I-129 Connection between the HVPS and the HARNESS ASSY TR

7-1
 Chapter 7 Wiring Data
7.1 P/J List
Table 7-1 Engine P/J List

P/J Coordinates Description

55 F-127 Connection between the HVPS and the HARNESS ASSY DB
56 I-127 Connection between the HVPS and the HARNESS ASSY CR
57 F-127 Connection between the HVPS and the HARNESS ASSY PR
220 J-108 Connection between the MAIN MOTOR and the HARNESS ASSY MOTOR
Connection between the CRUM [BRACKET ASSY CRUM SP] and the HARNESS
250 D-107
ASSY CRU
300 D-106 Connection between the CONSOLE ASSY and the HARNESS ASSY PUI
Connection between the HARNESS ASSY SNR REGI and the HARNESS ASSY
1210 H-123
MAIN FRM
1211 I-124 Connection between the REGI SENSOR and the HARNESS ASSY SNR REGI
1230 H-124 Connection between the REGI CLUTCH and the HARNESS ASSY MAIN FRM
1610 H-123 Connection between the SIDE FAN and the HARNESS ASSY SIDE FAN
Connection between the HARNESS ASSY SNR MSI and the HARNESS ASSY
2310 A-108
FRONT
Connection between the MSI NO PAPER SENSOR and the HARNESS ASSY SNR
2311 C-108
MSI
2320 G-108 Connection between the MSI FEED SOLENOID and the HARNESS ASSY FRONT
2371 C-107 Connection between the HARNESS ASSY FRONT and the HARNESS ASSY DUP
4410 C-106 Connection between the FUSER ASSY and the HARNESS ASSY MAIN FRM

7.1.2 250 Paper Feeder (Main) P/J List

Table 7-2 250 Paper Feeder (Main) P/J List

P/J Coordinates Description

310 J-139 Connection between the BREAKER and the HARNESS ASSY SW
311 J-138 Connection between the BREAKER and the HARNESS ASSY PH
1110 B-139 Connection between the SIZE SWITCH and the HARNESS ASSY PH
Connection between the PICK MOTOR [BRACKET ASSY FDR] and the
1120 H-140
HARNESS ASSY PH
1130 D-139 Connection between the TRAY NO PAPER SENSOR and the HARNESS ASSY PH
Connection between the HARNESS ASSY FEEDER 1 and the HARNESS ASSY
2481 D-138
FEEDER 2

7-2
Chapter 7 Wiring Data
7.1 P/J List

7.1.3 550 Paper Feeder (Main) P/J List

Table 7-3 550 Paper Feeder (Main) P/J List

P/J Coordinates Description

310 J-154 Connection between the BREAKER and the HARNESS ASSY SW
311 J-153 Connection between the BREAKER and the HARNESS ASSY PH
1110 B-154 Connection between the SIZE SWITCH and the HARNESS ASSY PH
Connection between the PICK MOTOR [BRACKET ASSY FDR] and the
1120 H-155
HARNESS ASSY PH
1130 D-154 Connection between the TRAY NO PAPER SENSOR and the HARNESS ASSY PH
Connection between the HARNESS ASSY FEEDER 1 and the HARNESS ASSY
2481 D-154
FEEDER 2
Connection between the TURN CLUTCH [550 FEEDER] and the HARNESS ASSY
2710 F-154
CLUTCH
Connection between the FEED CLUTCH [550 FEEDER] and the HARNESS ASSY
2720 F-154
CLUTCH

7.1.4 Duplex/Output P/J List

Table 7-4 Duplex/Output P/J List

P/J Coordinates Description

71D I-166 Connection between the DUP PWB and the HARNESS ASSY DUP
Connection between the EXIT PWB [EXIT DRIVE ASSY] and the HARNESS
71E A-166
ASSY EXIT 2
72D I-165 Connection between the DUP PWB and the DUP MOTOR
72E B-165 Connection between the EXIT PWB [EXIT DRIVE ASSY] and the EXIT MOTOR
73D I-165 Connection between the DUP PWB and the HARNESS ASSY COVER DUP
74D I-166 Connection between the DUP PWB and the HARNESS ASSY SNR DUP
Connection between the SENSOR PHOTO and the HARNESS ASSY COVER
730D J-170
DUP
740D G-169 Connection between the SENSOR PHOTO and the HARNESS ASSY SNR DUP
2371 I-170 Connection between the HARNESS ASSY FRONT and the HARNESS ASSY DUP
Connection between the HARNESS ASSY EXIT 1 and the HARNESS ASSY EXIT
2671 A-169
2

7-3
 Chapter 7 Wiring Data
7.1 P/J List

7.1.5 250 Paper Feeder (Optional) P/J List

Table 7-5 250 Paper Feeder (Optional) P/J List

P/J Coordinates Description

81 B-178 Connection between the FDR PWB and the HARNESS ASSY FEEDER 2
82 C-180 Connection between the FDR PWB and the HARNESS ASSY SIZE FDR
83 C-178 Connection between the FDR PWB and the HARNESS ASSY PH FDR
84 D-180 Connection between the FDR PWB and the HARNESS ASSY EDGE FDR
85 D-180 Connection between the FDR PWB and the HARNESS ASSY NO PAPER FDR
86 B-180 Connection between the FDR PWB and the HARNESS ASSY FEEDER 3
820 A-184 Connection between the SIZE SWITCH and the HARNESS ASSY SIZE FDR
Connection between the PAPER EDGE SENSOR and the HARNESS ASSY EDGE
840 E-183
FDR
Connection between the TRAY NO PAPER SENSOR and the HARNESS ASSY
850 D-183
NO PAPER FDR
Connection between the HARNESS ASSY FEEDER 1 and the HARNESS ASSY
2481 D-181
FEEDER 2
Connection between the FEED MOTOR [DRIVE ASSY OPTION] and the
8310 J-184
HARNESS ASSY PH FDR
8320 J-184 Connection between the FEED CLUTCH and the HARNESS ASSY PH FDR
8330 J-184 Connection between the TURN CLUTCH and the HARNESS ASSY PH FDR
8610 D-183 Connection between the HARNESS ASSY FEEDER 3 and the FEEDER 3

7-4
Chapter 7 Wiring Data
7.1 P/J List

7.1.6 550 Paper Feeder (Optional) P/J List

Table 7-6 550 Paper Feeder (Optional) P/J List

P/J Coordinates Description

81 B-193 Connection between the FDR PWB and the HARNESS ASSY FEEDER 2
82 C-195 Connection between the FDR PWB and the HARNESS ASSY SIZE FDR
83 C-193 Connection between the FDR PWB and the HARNESS ASSY PH FDR
Connection between the PAPER EDGE SENSOR and the HARNESS ASSY EDGE
84 D-195
FDR
Connection between the TRAY NO PAPER SENSOR and the HARNESS ASSY
85 D-195
NO PAPER FDR
86 B-195 Connection between the FDR PWB and the HARNESS ASSY FEEDER 3
820 A-199 Connection between the SIZE SWITCH and the HARNESS ASSY SIZE FDR
Connection between the PAPER EDGE SENSOR and the HARNESS ASSY EDGE
840 E-198
FDR
Connection between the TRAY NO PAPER SENSOR and the HARNESS ASSY
850 D-198
NO PAPER FDR
Connection between the HARNESS ASSY FEEDER 1 and the HARNESS ASSY
2481 D-196
FEEDER 2
Connection between the DRIVE ASSY OPTION and the HARNESS ASSY PH
8310 J-199
FDR
8320 J-199 Connection between the FEED CLUTCH and the HARNESS ASSY PH FDR
8330 J-199 Connection between the TURN CLUTCH and the HARNESS ASSY PH FDR
8610 D-198 Connection between the HARNESS ASSY FEEDER 3 and the FEEDER 3

7-5
 Chapter 7 Wiring Data
7.2 P/J Location Diagrams

7.2 P/J Location Diagrams

7.2.1 Engine P/J Location Diagrams

A B C D E F G H I J K L

101

102 <Engine (FRONT)>

103

250
104
300

105
4410

106

107

108

109

110
220
2310
2371
111 2311
2320

112

113

114

115

HMR09001AA
Figure 7-1 Engine P/J Location Diagram (1/2)

7-6
Chapter 7 Wiring Data
7.2 P/J Location Diagrams

A B C D E F G H I J K L

116
<Engine (REAR)>

5 22 26 23 28
117
25 27
4 21 24
20 11
118
7
19 12
1 18 13
119

17 16 15 14
120

121

122

123 1610

124

125 1211
1210
126 1230

32 57 55 56
127

33
128
35 52
31
34 54
129
51 53

130

HMR09002AA
Figure 7-2 Engine P/J Location Diagram (2/2)

7-7
 Chapter 7 Wiring Data
7.2 P/J Location Diagrams

7.2.2 250 Paper Feeder (Main) P/J Location Diagrams

A B C D E F G H I J K L

131

132 <250 FEEDER>

133

134

135

136

137

138

139

140
1110 310
2481
141 1130 311

1120
142

143

144

145

HMR09003AA
Figure 7-3 250 Paper Feeder (Main) P/J Location Diagrams

7-8
Chapter 7 Wiring Data
7.2 P/J Location Diagrams

7.2.3 550 Paper Feeder (Main) P/J Location Diagrams

A B C D E F G H I J K L

146

147 <550 FEEDER>

148

149

150

151

152

153

154

155

156
1110 310
2481
1130 311
157
2710
2720 1120

158

159

160

HMR09004AA
Figure 7-4 550 Paper Feeder (Main) P/J Location Diagrams

7-9
 Chapter 7 Wiring Data
7.2 P/J Location Diagrams

7.2.4 Duplex/Output P/J Location Diagrams

A B C D E F G H I J K L

161

162 <DUPLEX & EXIT DRIVE>

163

164
72E 72D

165 73D

166 71E 71D

167 74D

168

169

170
2671

740D
171
2731
730D
172

173

174

175

HMR09005AA
Figure 7-5 Duplex/Output P/J Location Diagrams

7-10
Chapter 7 Wiring Data
7.2 P/J Location Diagrams

7.2.5 250 Paper Feeder (Optional) P/J Location Diagrams

A B C D E F G H I J K L

176

177 <OPTION 250 FEEDER>

81 83
178

179

180
86 82 85 84

181 2481

182
8320

183

184

185
820 8330
8610 8310
186 850
840

187

188

189

190

HMR09006AA
Figure 7-6 250 Paper Feeder (Optional) P/J Location Diagrams

7-11
 Chapter 7 Wiring Data
7.2 P/J Location Diagrams

7.2.6 550 Paper Feeder (Optional) P/J Location Diagrams

A B C D E F G H I J K L

191

192 <OPTION 550 FEEDER>

81 83
193

194

195
86 82 85 84

196 2481

197
8320

198

199

200

820 8330
201
8610 8310
850
840
202

203

204

205

HMR09007AA
Figure 7-7 550 Paper Feeder (Optional) P/J Location Diagrams

7-12
Chapter 7 Wiring Data
7.3 Connection Charts

7.3 Connection Charts

7.3.1 Symbols in the Overall Connection Chart
The way to read the Overall Connection Chart is shown below.

Table 7-7 Symbols in the Overall Connection Chart

Symbol Description

Shows the connection between parts in the form of harness, wires, etc.

Shows a connector and the corresponding connector number.

Shows a joining terminal with a leaf spring, etc. on a circuit board and
the corresponding connector (port) number.

PARTS
Shows parts if the parts name is indicated in the box.
PLX.Y.Z PLX.Y.Z indicates item 'Z' of Plate (PL) 'X.Y' in "Chapter 5 Parts List".

Heater Shows a functional component within a part and the corresponding

component name.

2 Shows a section in "7.4 Connection Chart Between Parts" and the

corresponding section number.

7-13
 Chapter 7 Wiring Data
7.3 Connection Charts

7.3.2 Overall Connection Chart

7-14
Chapter 7 Wiring Data
7.4 Connection Chart Between Parts

7.4 Connection Chart Between Parts

7.4.1 Notes on using the Connection Chart Between Parts
The way to read the Connection Chart Between Parts in the following pages is shown below.
However, the descriptions for common symbols have been omitted.
Shows the connection between wires.

Table 7-8 Symbols in the Connection Chart Between Parts

Symbol Description

Shows a Plug.

Shows a Jack.

P/JXX
YY Shows Pin yy and Jack yy of connectors Pxx and Jxx.

PARTS Shows a parts.

PLX.Y.Z PLX.Y.Z indicates item 'Z' of Plate (PL) 'X.Y' in "Chapter 5
Parts List".

PARTS Shows a parts.

PLX.Y.Z indicates item 'Z' of Plate (PL) 'X.Y' in "Chapter 5
PLX.Y.Z Parts List".

Heater Shows a functional component within a part and the

corresponding component name.

Control
Shows a Control within the PWB section and its overview.

Shows the connection between parts in the form of harness,

DEVE_A
wires, etc., as well as the content/name of the signals.
The arrow shows the direction of the signal.

7-15
 Chapter 7 Wiring Data
7.4 Connection Chart Between Parts
Table 7-8 Symbols in the Connection Chart Between Parts

Symbol Description

Shows a function and the logical value (Low: L, High: H) of

REGI CLUTCH ON (L) +24VDC the signal when the function is in operation. The voltage value
shown is when the signal is high.
The arrow shows the direction of the signal.

Shows a function and the logical value (Low: L, High: H) of

EXIT PAPER SENSED (L) +3.3VDC the signal when the function detected something. The voltage
value shown is when the signal is high.
The arrow shows the direction of the signal.

Shows the DC voltage when the Interlock Switch is turned

I/L +24VDC
ON.

+5VDC
Shows DC voltage.
+3.3VDC

GND Shows a signal ground.

7-16
Chapter 7 Wiring Data
7.4 Connection Chart Between Parts

7.4.2 Organization of the Schematic Block Diagrams Between Parts

The Connection Charts are divided into 10 sections and shows the connection between the parts in detail.

1 Power Supply

Connection between the LVPS and the MCU PWB

Connection between the LVPS and the HARNESS ASSY SW (Main Switch), as well as between the
LVPS and the BREAKER
Connection between the LVPS and the ESS PWB
Connection between the MCU PWB and the HARNESS ASSY INTERLOCK (Interlock Switch)
Connection between the MCU PWB and the ESS PWB

2 Fuser

Connection between the MCU PWB and the FUSER ASSY

Connection between the MCU PWB and the LVPS
Connection between the LVPS and the FUSER ASSY

3 Controller

Connection between the MCU PWB and the ESS PWB

Connection between the ESS PWB and the CONSOLE ASSY

4 ROS

Connection between the MCU PWB and the ROS ASSY

Connection between the ESS PWB and the ROS ASSY

5 HVPS

Connection between the MCU PWB and the HVPS

6 Fan/Driver

Connection between the MCU PWB and the CRU ASSY (CRUM)
Connection between the MCU PWB and the MAIN MOTOR
Connection between the MCU PWB and the MIDDLE FAN
Connection between the MCU PWB and the REAR FAN
Connection between the MCU PWB and the SIDE FAN

7 250/550 Paper Feeder (Main)

Connection between the MCU PWB and the SIZE SWITCH

Connection between the MCU PWB and the PICK MOTOR
Connection between the MCU PWB and the TRAY NO PAPER SENSOR
Connection between the MCU PWB and the TURN CLUTCH
Connection between the MCU PWB and the FEED CLUTCH

7-17
 Chapter 7 Wiring Data
7.4 Connection Chart Between Parts
8 MSI/Registration

Connection between the MCU PWB and the MSI NO PAPER SENSOR
Connection between the MCU PWB and the MSI FEED SOLENOID
Connection between the MCU PWB and the REGI SENSOR
Connection between the MCU PWB and the REGI CLUTCH

9 Duplex/Output

Connection between the MCU PWB and the EXIT DRIVE ASSY (Exit Motor)
Connection between the MCU PWB and the DUP PWB
Connection between the DUP PWB and the DUP MOTOR
Connection between the DUP PWB and the DUP COVER OPEN SENSOR
Connection between the DUP PWB and the DUP JAM SENSOR

10 550 Paper Feeder (Optional)

Connection between the MCU PWB and the FDR PWB

Connection between the FDR PWB and the SIZE SWITCH
Connection between the FDR PWB and the FEED MOTOR
Connection between the FDR PWB and the FEED CLUTCH
Connection between the FDR PWB and the TURN CLUTCH
Connection between the FDR PWB and the PAPER EDGE SENSOR
Connection between the FDR PWB and the TRAY NO PAPER SENSOR

7-18
Chapter 7 Wiring Data
7.4 Connection Chart Between Parts

7.4.2.1 Power Supply

LVPS MCU PWB HARNESS ASSY

PL11.1.6 PL11.1.3 INTERLOCK
PL12.1.4
I/L+24VDC
Low IINTERLOCK
Voltage +24VDC P/J28 SWITCH (24V)
Generation 3
P/J34 P/J20
+24VDC
ON/ 1 6 4
+24VDC +24VDC
OFF 2 5
Supply +24VDC I/L+5VDC
3 4 IINTERLOCK
GND +5VDC
4 3 P/J28 SWITCH (5V)
GND
5 2 2
GND
6 1 1

P/J33 P/J21 ESS PWB

POW SAV
9 1 P/J19 P/J7 PL11.1.7
SLEEP SLEEP
8 2 2 19
+5VDC ON/ +5VDC
7 3 +3.3VDC
Supply OFF GND
6 4
+3.3VDC
ON/ 5 5
OFF GND
4 6

P/J35 P/J4
+5VDC
4 1
GND
3 2
GND
+3.3VDC 2 3
+3.3VDC
Supply 1 4

HARNESS ASSY SW BREAKER

PL2.1.15 PL12.1.24
P/J31 MAIN SWTCH P/J310
NUT P/J311
2 N
LINE 1
1 L
T1
TO FUSER
(9.4.2.2)

HMR09401AA

7-19
 Chapter 7 Wiring Data
7.4 Connection Chart Between Parts

Table 7-9 Power Supply Signal Wires

Signal Wire Name Description

Signal that turns OFF the LVPS supplied +24VDC to the MCU
POW SAV (POWER SAVE)
PWB
Signal that turns OFF the LVPS supplied +5VDC and +3.3VDC
SLEEP to the MCU PWB, as well as +5VDC to the ESS PWB
(The +3.3VDC supplied to the ESS PWB remains ON)

Overcurrent Protection
Every LVPS output will be cut off in the case of an Earth or Ground short circuit.
The outputs can be restored by either turning the power OFF and waiting for 5 minutes or longer before
turning it ON again or by automatic reset.
The safeguard points are:
• +24VDC: 18A
• +5VD: 8A
• +3.3VDC: 8A

Overvoltage Protection
Every LVPS output will be cut off in the case of an overvoltage.
The outputs can be restored by either turning the power OFF and waiting for 5 minutes or longer before
turning it ON again or by automatic reset.
The voltage for each output when overvoltage protection is activated is as follows.
• +24VDC: 38VDC
• +5VDC: 8VDC
• +3.3VDC: 8VDC

7-20
Chapter 7 Wiring Data
7.4 Connection Chart Between Parts

7.4.2.2 Fuser

MCU PWB FUSER ASSY

PL11.1.3 PL8.1.11
P/J12 P/J4410 J4410BJ4420A J4420B
STS1
9 7 1 1 2 Temp.
GND
10 6 2 2 1 Sensor1
+3.3VDC P/J4440
EXIT PAPER SENSED (L)+3.3VDC
11 5 3 1
GND Fuser Exit
12 4 4 2
+3.3VDC Sensor
13 3 5 3
J4450A J4450B
GND
14 2 6 1 2 Temp.
STS2
15 1 7 2 1 Sensor2

LVPS
PL11.1.6
P/J21 P/J33 Fuser P/J32 P/J4410 Heater Lamp2
H CONT2 NUT2
9 1 Control 3 2
H CONT1 NUT1
8 2 5 1
RELAY ON Heater
7 3
Lamp 1

FROM P/J31
NUT
MAIN SWITCH 2
LINE LINE
(9.4.2.1) 1 1 3

HMR09402AA

7-21
 Chapter 7 Wiring Data
7.4 Connection Chart Between Parts

Table 7-10 Fuser Signal Wires

Signal Wire Name Description

Signal for detection of paper at the output section by Fuser Exit
EXIT PAPER SENSED (H) +3.3VDC Sensor
(L: Paper exists)
Heat Roll surface temperature data measured by Temp.
STS1
Sensor 1 within the FUSER ASSY (analog value)
Heat Roll surface temperature data measured by Temp.
STS2
Sensor 2 within the FUSER ASSY (analog value)
H CONT1
ON signals for Heater Lamp 1 and Heater Lamp 2
H CONT2
RELAY ON ON/OFF signal for Fuser Relay within the LVPS

7-22
Chapter 7 Wiring Data
7.4 Connection Chart Between Parts

7.4.2.3 Controller

MCU PWB ESS PWB CONSOLE

PL11.1.3 PL11.1.7 ASSY
PL1.1.3

P/J19 P/J7 P/J5 P/J300

20 1 1 7
/C_CLOCK
19 2 2 6
GND
18 3 3 5
/COMMAND
17 4 4 4
/CPRDY
16 5 5 3
/START
15 6 6 2
/CBSY
14 7 7 1
GND
13 8
12 9
/STATUS
11 10
/SBSY
10 11
/TOP
9 12
/RDY
8 13
/PPRDY
7 14
GND
6 15
/BD
5 16
GND
4 17
+3.3VDC 3 18
SLEEP
2 19
+3.3VDC
1 20

HMR09403AA

7-23
 Chapter 7 Wiring Data
7.4 Connection Chart Between Parts

Table 7-11 Controller Signal Wires

Signal Wire Name Description

/C_CLOCK
/COMMAND
/CPRDY Control signals from the ESS PWB to the MCU PWB
/START
/CBSY
/STATUS
/SBSY
/TOP
Control signals from the MCU PWB to the ESS PWB
/RDY
/PPRDY
/BD
Signal that turns OFF the LVPS supplied +5VDC and +3.3VDC
to the MCU PWB, as well as +5VDC to the ESS PWB
SLEEP
(the ESS PWB outputs this signal to the LVPS through the
MCU PWB)

7-24
Chapter 7 Wiring Data
7.4 Connection Chart Between Parts

7.4.2.4 ROS

ESS PWB ROS ASSY

PL11.1.7 PL7.1.1

P/J1 P/J64 LD PWB

DATA1+
4 1
DATA1-
3 2
DATA2+
2 3
DATA2-
1 4

MCU PWB
PL11.1.3
I/L+5VDC SOS PWB
P/J18 P/J62 P/J63 P/J66
I/L+5VDC
1 8 3 1
GND
2 7 1 3
SOS SENSED SIGNAL
3 6 2 2
PCONT1
4 5
LD_VREF
5 4
LD MONITOR
6 3
PCONT2
7 2
LD_ENABLE
8 1
+24VDC
P/J17 P/J61
+24VDC
1 5
GND
2 4
SCAN MOTOR CLOCK M Scanner Motor
3 3
SCAN MOTOR ON (L)+24VDC
4 1

HMR09404AA

7-25
 Chapter 7 Wiring Data
7.4 Connection Chart Between Parts

Table 7-12 ROS Signal Wires

Signal Wire Name Description

DATA1+
DATA1-
Image signals from the ESS PWB to the ROS ASSY
DATA2+
DATA2-
PCONT1
LD_VREF
LD MONITOR LD PWB control signals within the ROS ASSY
PCONT2
LD_ENABLE
Standard signal output by the SOS PWB for start of Laser Fast
SOS SENSED SIGNAL
Scan
SCAN MOTOR CLOCK ON/OFF control signals of Scanner Motor within the ROS
SCAN MOTOR ON (L) +24VDC ASSY

7-26
Chapter 7 Wiring Data
7.4 Connection Chart Between Parts

7.4.2.5 HVPS

MCU PWB HVPS

PL11.1.3 PL11.1.5
P/J13 P/J51 P/J52
VG D/A VG
A1 17 1
VD D/A
A2 16 P/J53
VD MONITOR VD
A3 15 1
PR ON
A4 14 P/J54
HVPS STANDARD TR
A5 13 1
TR+ MONITOR
A6 12 P/J55
VG TR- ON DB
A7 11 1
TR+ ON
A8 10 P/J56
TR+ D/A HVPS CR
A9 9 1
DB DC D/A Control
B1 8 2
DB AC D/A
B2 7 3
DB AC CLOCK
B3 6 4
CR DC D/A
B4 5
CR AC CLOCK
B5 4
HVPS POWER ON
I/L+24VDC B6 3 P/J57
GND PR
B7 2 1
I/L+24VDC
B8 1
B9

Heat Roll
Pressre Roll

Drum
Guide Plate

BCR
Detack Saw

BTR

Magnet Roll

HMR09405AA

7-27
 Chapter 7 Wiring Data
7.4 Connection Chart Between Parts

Table 7-13 HVPS Signal Wires

Signal Wire Name Description

VG D/A Output voltage level signal of the Guide Bias
VD D/A Output voltage level signal to the Detack Saw
Monitor signal for the Detack Saw output voltage (analog
VD MONITOR
value)
PR ON ON/OFF control signal for the Pressure Roll output voltage
HVPS STANDARD Standard power supply voltage output by the HVPS
TR+ MONITOR Monitor signal for the BTR+ output voltage (analog value)
ON/OFF control signal for the Guide Bias and BTR- output
VG TR- ON
voltage
TR+ ON ON/OFF control signal for the BTR+ output voltage
TR+ D/A Output voltage level signal of the BTR+
DB DC D/A Output voltage level signal of the Deve Bias DC element
DB AC D/A Output voltage level signal of the Deve Bias AC element
DB AC CLOCK Clock signal of the Deve Bias AC element
CR DC D/A Output voltage level signal of the BCR DC element
CR AC CLOCK Clock signal of the BCR AC element
HVPS POWER ON ON/OFF signal for the +24VDC that is input into the HVPS

7-28
Chapter 7 Wiring Data
7.4 Connection Chart Between Parts

7.4.2.6 Fan/Driver

MCU PWB CRU ASSY

PL11.1.3 PL6.1.1
+3.3VDC
CRUM
P/J25 P/J25
+3.3VDC
1 4
SDA
2 3
SLC
3 2
GND
4 1

MAIN MOTOR
I/L +5VDC P/J22 P/J220 PL9.1.3
MAIN MOTOR ALARM
5 1
MAIN MOTOR ON
4 2
I/L+5VDC
I/L +24VDC 3 3 M
GND
2 4
I/L +24VDC
1 5

I/L +24VDC
MIDDOLE FAN
P/J14 PL10.1.2
MIDDLE FAN ON (H) +24VDC
Control 1
MIDDLE FAN ALARM
2 M
GND
3

+24VDC
REAR FAN
P/J15 PL10.1.4
REAR FAN ON (H) +24VDC
Control 1
REAR FAN ALARM
2 M
GND
3

+24VDC
SIDE FAN
P/J16 P1610 J1610 PL10.1.5
SIDE FAN ON (H) +24VDC
Control 1 4 1
SIDE FAN ALARM
2 3 2 M
GND
3 1 4

HMR09406AA

7-29
 Chapter 7 Wiring Data
7.4 Connection Chart Between Parts

Table 7-14 Fan/Driver Signal Wires

Signal Wire Name Description

SDA Data read/write control signal for the CRUM within the CRU
SLC ASSY
MAIN MOTOR ALARM Alarm signal from the MAIN MOTOR
MAIN MOTOR ON ON/OFF control signal for the MAIN MOTOR
MIDDLE FAN ON (H) +24VDC ON/OFF control signal for the MIDDLE FAN
MIDDLE FAN ALARM Alarm signal from the MIDDLE FAN
REAR FAN ON (H) +24VDC ON/OFF control signal for the REAR FAN
REAR FAN ALARM Alarm signal from the REAR FAN
SIDE FAN ON (H) +24VDC ON/OFF control signal for the SIDE FAN
SIDE FAN ALARM Alarm signal from the SIDE FAN

7-30
Chapter 7 Wiring Data
7.4 Connection Chart Between Parts

7.4.2.7 250/550 Paper Feeder (Main)

MCU PWB
PL11.1.3 P/J11 P/J1110
SIZE SW 1 ON (L) +3.3VDC
1 4
SIZE SW 2 ON (L) +3.3VDC
2 3 SIZE SWITCH
GND
3 2 PL2.1.13 / PL2.3.8
SIZE SW 3 ON (L) +3.3VDC
4 1

PICK MOTOR
+24VDC P/J11 P1120 J1120 PL2.1.11 / PL2.3.3
PICK MOTOR CLOCK B+
5 6 1
+24VDC
6 5 2
PICK MOTOR CLOCK B-
7 4 3
PICK MOTOR CLOCK A+ M
8 3 4
+24VDC
9 2 5
PICK MOTOR CLOCK A-
10 1 6
+3.3VDC

P/J11 P/J1130
+3.3VDC
11 1
GND TRAY NO PAPER SENSOR
12 2
TRAY PAPER SENSED(L) +3.3VDC PL2.1.3 / PL2.4.11
13 3

+24VDC
P/J27 P2710 J2710
+24VDC
1 2 1 TURN CLUTCH
TURN CLUTCH ON (L)+24VDC
2 1 2 PL2.4.3
+24VDC
P/J27 P2720 J2720
+24VDC
3 2 1 FEED CLUTCH
FEED CLUTCH ON (L)+24VDC
4 1 2 PL2.4.4

HMR09407AA

7-31
 Chapter 7 Wiring Data
7.4 Connection Chart Between Parts

Table 7-15 250/550 Paper Feeder (Main) Signal Wires

Signal Wire Name Description

ON/OFF detection signal for SIZE SW 1 (located at the left
SIZE SW 1 ON (L) +3.3VDC
side when you face the front of the machine)
ON/OFF detection signal for SIZE SW 2 (located at the center
SIZE SW 2 ON (L) +3.3VDC
when you face the front of the machine)
ON/OFF detection signal for SIZE SW 3 (located at the right
SIZE SW 3 ON (L) +3.3VDC
side when you face the front of the machine)
PICK MOTOR CLOCK B+
PICK MOTOR CLOCK B-
Pick Motor excitation signals
PICK MOTOR CLOCK A+
PICK MOTOR CLOCK A-
Signal for detection of paper in Tray by TRAY NO PAPER
TRAY PAPER SENSED (L)
SENSOR
+3.3VDC
(L: Paper exists)
ON/OFF control signal for the TURN CLUTCH
TURN CLUTCH ON (L) +24VDC
(only for 550 Paper Feeder)
ON/OFF control signal for the FEED CLUTCH
FEED CLUTCH ON (L) +24VDC
(only for 550 Paper Feeder)

SIZE SWITCH Overview

The combination of ON/OFF states of the SIZE SWITCH determines the paper size that is set in the
tray.

Table 7-16 Paper Size corresponding to the status of SIZE SWITCH

Switch SIZE SWITCH*1

Paper Size
sequence 1 2 3
1 B5 LEF ON ON ON
2 A5 LEF OFF ON OFF
3 A3 ON ON OFF
4 B4 ON OFF ON
5 Non-standard OFF ON ON
6 A4 SEF OFF OFF ON
7 A4 LEF ON OFF OFF
No Cassette OFF OFF OFF
*1. The switches are numbered from the left (1, 2, and 3).

7-32
Chapter 7 Wiring Data
7.4 Connection Chart Between Parts

7.4.2.8 MSI/Registration

MCU PWB
PL11.1.3
+3.3VDC

P/J23 P2320 J2320 P/J2311

+3.3VDC
1 3 1 1 MSI NO PAPER
GND
2 2 2 2 SENSOR
MSI PAPER SENSED(L) +3.3VDC PL3.1.11
3 1 3 3

I/L +24VDC
P/J23 P2710 J2710
I/L +24VDC
4 2 1 MSI FEED SOLENOID
MSI SOLENOID ON(L)+24VDC
5 1 2 PL3.1.1
+3.3VDC

P/J12 P1210 J1210 P/J1211

+3.3VDC
1 3 1 1
GND REGI SENSOR
2 2 2 2
REGI PAPER SENSED(L) +3.3VDC PL5.1.4
3 1 3 3

+24VDC P/J12 P1230 J1230

REGI CLUTCH ON (L)+24VDC
7 2 1 REGI CLUTCH
+24VDC
8 1 2 PL5.1.2

HMR09408AA

7-33
 Chapter 7 Wiring Data
7.4 Connection Chart Between Parts

Table 7-17 MSI/Registration Signal Wires

Signal Wire Name Description

Signal for detection of paper in MSI by MSI NO PAPER
MSI PAPER SENSED (L) +3.3VDC SENSOR
(L: Paper exists)
MSI SOLENOID ON (L) +24VDC ON/OFF control signal for the MSI SOLENOID
Signal for detection of paper at the registration position by
REGI PAPER SENSED (L) +3.3VDC REGI SENSOR
(L: Paper exists)
REGI CLUTCH ON (L) +24VDC ON/OFF control signal for the REGI CLUTCH

7-34
Chapter 7 Wiring Data
7.4 Connection Chart Between Parts

7.4.2.9 Duplex/Output

EXIT DRIVE ASSY

MCU PWB PL13.1.2 EXIT PWB
PL11.1.3 P/J26 P2671 J2671 P/J71E
GND
+24VDC 8 1 10 1
GND
7 2 9 2 P/J72E
+24VDC +24VDC
6 3 8 3 1
+3.3VDC GND CLOCK A+
5 4 7 4 2
+3.3VDC CLOCK B+ Exit
4 5 6 5 3 M
GND CLOCK A- Motor
3 6 5 6 4
TXD CLOCK B-
2 7 4 7 5
RXD
1 8 3 8

DUP PWB
P/J23 P2371 J2371 P/J71D PL13.2.22
DUP HOT
+24VDC 13 1 10 1 +24VDC
GND
12 2 9 2
+24VDC
11 3 8 3
+3.3VDC GND +3.3VDC
10 4 7 4
+3.3VDC
9 5 6 5
GND
8 6 5 6
TXD
7 7 4 7
RXD
6 8 3 8

DUP PWB
PL13.2.22
+24VDC DUP MOTOR
P/J72D PL13.2.13
+24VDC
1
DUP MOTOR CLOCK A+
2
DUP MOTOR CLOCK B+
3 M
DUP MOTOR CLOCK A-
4
DUP MOTOR CLOCK B-
+3.3VDC 5

P/J73D P/J730D
+3.3VDC
1 3
GND DUP COVER OPEN SENSOR
+3.3VDC 2 2
DUP COVER OPEN (L) +3.3VDC PL13.2.7
3 1
P/J73D P/J730D
+3.3VDC
1 3
GND DUP JAM SENSOR
2 2
DUP JAM SENSED (L) +3.3VDC PL13.2.7
3 1

HMR09409AA

7-35
 Chapter 7 Wiring Data
7.4 Connection Chart Between Parts

Table 7-18 Duplex/Output Signal Wires

Signal Wire Name Description

TXD Communication signal between the MCU PWB and the EXIT
RXD PWB
TXD Communication signal between the MCU PWB and the DUP
RXD PWB
DUP MOTOR CLOCK B+
DUP MOTOR CLOCK B-
DUP MOTOR excitation signal
DUP MOTOR CLOCK A+
DUP MOTOR CLOCK A-
Signal for detection of opening/closing of the Duplex Transport
DUP COVER OPEN (L) +3.3VDC Chute Cover
(L: Cover open)
Signal for detection of paper in the Duplex Transport by DUP
DUP JAM SENSED (L) +3.3VDC JAM SENSOR
(L: Paper exists)

7-36
Chapter 7 Wiring Data
7.4 Connection Chart Between Parts

7.4.2.10 250/550 Paper Feeder (Optional)

MCU PWB FDR PWB

PL11.1.3 PL14.2.18 / PL15.2.18
+24VDC +24VDC
P/J24 P2481 J2481 P/J81 P/J86 P8610
+24VDC +24VDC
1 10 1 10 1 10
+24VDC +24VDC
2 9 2 9 2 9
GND GND
3 8 3 8 3 8
+3.3VDC GND +3.3VDC GND
4 7 4 7 4 7
+3.3VDC +3.3VDC
5 6 5 6 5 6
GND GND
6 5 6 5 6 5
GND GND
7 4 7 4 7 4
TRY SNS TRY SNS
8 3 8 3 8 3
TXD TXD
9 2 9 2 9 2
RXD RXD
10 1 10 1 10 1

FDR PWB P/J82 P/J820

SIZE SW 1 ON (L) +3.3VDC
PL14.2.18 / 1 4
PL15.2.18 SIZE SW 2 ON (L) +3.3VDC
2 3 SIZE SWITCH
GND
3 2 PL14.2.17 / PL15.2.17
SIZE SW 3 ON (L) +3.3VDC
4 1

FEED MOTOR
+24VDC P/J83 P8310 J8310 PL14.2.6 / PL15.2.6
FEED MOTOR CLOCK B+
1 6 1
+24VDC
2 5 2
FEED MOTOR CLOCK B-
3 4 3
FEED MOTOR CLOCK A+ M
4 3 4
+24VDC
5 2 5
FEED MOTOR CLOCK A-
6 1 6

P/J83 P8320 J8320

+24VDC
7 2 1 FEED CLUTCH
FEED CUTCH ON (L)+24VDC
8 1 2 PL14.3.4 / PL15.3.4
P/J83 P8330 J8330
+24VDC
9 2 1 TURN CLUTCH
TURN CUTCH ON (L)+24VDC
+3.3VDC 10 1 2 PL14.3.3 / PL15.3.3

P/J84 P/J840
+3.3VDC
1 3
GND PAPER EDGE SENSOR
+3.3VDC 2 2
PAPER EDGE SENSED(L) +3.3VDC PL14.2.4 / PL15.2.4
3 1
P/J85 P/J850
+3.3VDC
1 3
GND TRAY NO PAPER SENSOR
2 2
TRAY PAPER SENSED(L) +3.3VDC PL14.3.11 / PL15.3.11
3 1

HMR09410AA

7-37
 Chapter 7 Wiring Data
7.4 Connection Chart Between Parts

Table 7-19 250/550 Paper Feeder (Optional) Signal Wires

Signal Wire Name Description

Clock signal that is used by the CPU on the FDR PWB to
TRY SNS determine which cycle it is set to
(The MCU PWB generates this signal)
TXD Communication signal between the MCU PWB and the - FDR
RXD PWB
ON/OFF detection signal for SIZE SW 1 (located at the left
SIZE SW 1 ON (L) +3.3VDC
side when you face the front of the machine)
ON/OFF detection signal for SIZE SW 2 (located at the center
SIZE SW 2 ON (L) +3.3VDC
when you face the front of the machine)
ON/OFF detection signal for SIZE SW 3 (located at the right
SIZE SW 3 ON (L) +3.3VDC
side when you face the front of the machine)
FEED MOTOR CLOCK B+
FEED MOTOR CLOCK B-
FEED MOTOR excitation signal
FEED MOTOR CLOCK A+
FEED MOTOR CLOCK A-
FEED CLUTCH ON (L) +24VDC ON/OFF control signal for the FEED CLUTCH
TURN CLUTCH ON (L) +24VDC ON/OFF control signal for the TURN CLUTCH
Signal for detection of paper in the optional tray at the paper
PAPER EDGE SENSED (L)
feed position by PAPER EDGE SENSOR
+3.3VDC
(L: Paper exists)
Signal for detection of paper in Tray by TRAY NO PAPER
TRAY PAPER SENSED (L)
SENSOR
+3.3VDC
(L: Paper exists)

SIZE SWITCH Overview

The combination of ON/OFF states of the SIZE SWITCH determines the paper size that is set in the
tray.

Table 7-20 Paper Size corresponding to the status of SIZE SWITCH

Switch SIZE SWITCH*1

Paper Size
sequence 1 2 3
1 B5 LEF ON ON ON
2 A5 LEF OFF ON OFF
3 A3 ON ON OFF
4 B4 ON OFF ON
5 Non-standard OFF ON ON
6 A4 SEF OFF OFF ON
7 A4 LEF ON OFF OFF
No Cassette OFF OFF OFF
*1. The switches are numbered from the left (1, 2, and 3).

7-38
Chapter 8 Accessories
Table of Contents
8.1 Tray Module (250 Sheets)/(550 Sheets) ....................................................................8-1
8.1.1 Check the Bundled Items................................................................................................................ 8-2
8.1.2 Installation Procedure ..................................................................................................................... 8-3
8.1.3 Removal Procedure ........................................................................................................................ 8-8
8.2 A3 Universal Cassette (250 Sheets)/(550 Sheets)...................................................8-11
8.2.1 Check the Bundled Items.............................................................................................................. 8-11
8.2.2 Loading Paper............................................................................................................................... 8-12
8.3 Duplex Unit ..............................................................................................................8-15
8.3.1 Check the Bundled Items.............................................................................................................. 8-15
8.3.2 Installation Procedure ................................................................................................................... 8-16
8.4 Expansion Memory...................................................................................................8-21
8.4.1 Installation Procedure ................................................................................................................... 8-22
8.5 Built-in Additional Hard Disk .....................................................................................8-27
8.5.1 Check the Bundled Items.............................................................................................................. 8-27
8.5.2 Installation Procedure ................................................................................................................... 8-28
8.5.3 Notes and Restrictions for the Machine ........................................................................................ 8-32
8.6 PostScript Software Kit.............................................................................................8-33
8.6.1 Check the Bundled Items.............................................................................................................. 8-34
8.7 Multi Protocol LAN Card ...........................................................................................8-39
8.7.1 Check the Bundled Items.............................................................................................................. 8-39
8.7.2 Installation Procedure ................................................................................................................... 8-40
Chapter 8 Accessories
8.1 Tray Module (250 Sheets)/(550 Sheets)

8.1 Tray Module (250 Sheets)/(550 Sheets)

This section explains how to install the tray module to the printer for first time users of this machine.
To use the machine safely, make sure you read the section "Safety Usage Guide" in the "Quick Reference
Guide" that comes with the printer before starting the installation.

The tray module comes in two models: the Tray Module (250 Sheets) and the Tray Module (550 Sheets). Both
models can be handled in the same way. This manual uses the Tray Module (550 Sheets) as an example.

CAUTION
• The machine (main processor and consumables only) weighs 23.5kg (DocuPrint 3055) or 20.8kg
(DocuPrint 2065). Always lift the machine with two people or more.
• When lifting the machine, bend your knees and hold onto the recessed areas located at the
bottom left and right sides of the machine. This is to prevent back injuries.

NOTE

• Be sure to switch OFF the machine and disconnect the plug before connecting or disconnecting
the interface cable connector. If you connect or disconnect the connector with the power still ON,
it may cause the device to malfunction.

8-1
 Chapter 8 Accessories
8.1 Tray Module (250 Sheets)/(550 Sheets)

8.1.1 Check the Bundled Items

The following items can be found in the packaging box. If there are any missing items, contact our Customer
Support Center or your dealers.

• Tray Module • Clips (x4) for installing the

(with tray already installed) tray module

• Installation Manual

Tray module installation example

This machine can have up to 3 levels (for DocuPrint 3055) or 2 levels (for DocuPrint 2065) of tray modules
installed at the same time.

DocuPrint 3055 DocuPrint 2065

• Example when 3 levels of Tray Module (550 • Example when 2 levels of Tray Module (550
Sheets) are installed. Sheets) are installed.

[During Installation]
Mount the tray module on the other tray modules (when installing 2 or more levels) before finally
mounting the printer.
Reference: Installation Procedure (P. 8-3)

8-2
Chapter 8 Accessories
8.1 Tray Module (250 Sheets)/(550 Sheets)

8.1.2 Installation Procedure

This section explains the procedure using the installation of 3 levels of tray modules to a DocuPrint 3055
printer as an example.

1 Press the power switch on the front, right bottom side of the printer to the [O] position to switch
OFF the power.
Next, unplug the power cord from the power outlet and the printer.

2 Place the tray module that is meant to be the bottom one on a level installation location.
If only installing 1 level of tray module, proceed to step 8.

3 Align the corners of the top and bottom tray modules, lower the top tray module so that the three
guide pins on the bottom tray module smoothly enter the holes at the bottom of the top tray
module.

8-3
 Chapter 8 Accessories
8.1 Tray Module (250 Sheets)/(550 Sheets)
4 Gently pull out the tray of the top tray module until it stops. Hold the tray using both hands,
slightly lift up the front and remove it from the tray module.

5 Securely push in the clips (x4) that are provided into the slots within (x2) and at the rear (x2) of
the tray module as shown in the following figure to secure the top tray module to the bottom tray
module.

8-4
Chapter 8 Accessories
8.1 Tray Module (250 Sheets)/(550 Sheets)
6 Return the tray back to the tray module. Push in the tray well to the back.

NOTE

• When returning the tray to the tray module, be careful not to pinch your fingers between the
trays.

7 Repeat steps 3 to 6 to install another level of tray module on top of the existing ones. If only
installing 2 levels of tray module, this step is not required.

8 Finally, install the printer on the top. Align the corners of the printer and tray module, lower the
printer so that the three guide pins on the tray module smoothly enter the holes at the bottom of
the printer.

NOTE

• When lifting the printer, you must follow the instructions given earlier in " " (P. 8-1).
• When lowering the printer onto the tray module, be careful not to pinch your fingers.

8-5
 Chapter 8 Accessories
8.1 Tray Module (250 Sheets)/(550 Sheets)
9 Gently pull out Tray 1 from the printer until it stops. Hold the tray using both hands, slightly lift up
the front and remove it from the printer.

NOTE

• Never pull out two or more trays at the same time. The machine may topple.

10 Securely push in the clips (x4) that are provided into the slots within (x2) and at the rear (x2) of
the printer as shown in the following figure to secure the printer to the bottom tray module.

8-6
Chapter 8 Accessories
8.1 Tray Module (250 Sheets)/(550 Sheets)
11 Return the tray back to the printer. Push in the tray well to the back.

NOTE

• When returning the tray to the tray module, be careful not to pinch your fingers between the
printer and the tray, or between trays.

12 Connect the power cord.

13 Press the Power Switch of the printer to the [I] position to turn it ON.

Installation of the tray module is complete. For details on how to load the paper, refer to the Quick
Reference Guide that is bundled with the printer.

Note

• To check whether the tray modules are installed properly, print the "Printer Settings". For details on
how to print the list, refer to the Quick Reference Guide that is bundled with the printer.
• When the tray module installation is complete, change the option configuration using the printer driver.
For the details, refer to the printer driver help file.

8-7
 Chapter 8 Accessories
8.1 Tray Module (250 Sheets)/(550 Sheets)

8.1.3 Removal Procedure

This section explains the procedure to remove the tray module from the printer.

NOTE

• When the printer is to be moved, remove the tray modules from the printer before transporting it.
As the modules are not fixed securely enough to the printer, they may fall and cause injuries.

1 Press the power switch on the front, right bottom side of the printer to the [O] position to switch
OFF the power.
Next, unplug the power cord from the power outlet and the printer.

2 Gently pull out Tray 1 until it stops. Hold the tray using both hands, slightly lift up the front and
remove it from the printer.

NOTE

• Never pull out two or more trays at the same time. The machine may topple.

8-8
Chapter 8 Accessories
8.1 Tray Module (250 Sheets)/(550 Sheets)
3 Remove the clips (x4) from within (x2) and the rear (x2) of the printer.

Note

• Keep the removed clips for reinstallation of the tray module at a later time.

4 Gently lift up the printer from the tray modules and place it on a flat surface.

NOTE

• When lifting the printer, you must follow the instructions given earlier in " " (P. 8-1).
Never hold the area where the tray is set.

8-9
 Chapter 8 Accessories
8.1 Tray Module (250 Sheets)/(550 Sheets)
5 Return the tray back to the printer. Push in the tray well to the back.

NOTE

• When returning the tray to the tray module, be careful not to pinch your fingers between the
printer and the tray.

6 Connect the power cord. Press the Power Switch of the printer to the [I] position to turn it ON.

Removal of the tray module from the printer is complete. When changing the configuration in units of
single tray module, removal can be perfomed with the same procedures.

Product Specifications

Tray Module (250 Sheets)

Compacted: Width 459 x Depth 463 x Height
112.8mm
Dimensions
Extended: Width 459 x Depth 598 x Height
112.8mm

Weight 6.7kg

Tray Module (550 Sheets)

Compacted: Width 459 x Depth 463 x Height
144.6mm
Dimensions
Extended: Width 459 x Depth 598 x Height
144.6mm

Weight 7.9kg

For details on paper that can be loaded, refer to the Quick Reference Guide that is bundled with the
printer.

8-10
Chapter 8 Accessories
8.2 A3 Universal Cassette (250 Sheets)/(550 Sheets)

8.2 A3 Universal Cassette (250 Sheets)/(550 Sheets)

This section explains how to handle the A3 Universal Cassette for first time users of this machine.
To use the machine safely, make sure you read the section "Safety Usage Guide" in the "Quick Reference
Guide" that comes with the printer before starting the installation.

The A3 Universal Cassette comes in two models: the A3 Universal Cassette (250 Sheets) and the A3
Universal Cassette (550 Sheets). Both models can be handled in the same way.
This manual uses the A3 Universal Cassette (550 Sheets) as an example.

8.2.1 Check the Bundled Items

The following items can be found in the packaging box. If there are any missing items, contact our Customer
Support Center or your dealers.

• A3 Universal Cassette • Installation Manual

8-11
 Chapter 8 Accessories
8.2 A3 Universal Cassette (250 Sheets)/(550 Sheets)

8.2.2 Loading Paper

This section explains the procedure for loading paper into the Tray.

For this machine, the Tray must be extended to load paper that is longer than 14" (279.4mm), such as B4, A3,
and 11x17". In such cases, the rear of the Tray will be protruding from the rear of the machine since its length
has become longer than the machine depth.
Also, you will not be able to load A5, B5, A4, or 8.5x11" paper in portrait position when the tray is extended.
For such cases, restore the tray back to its original length.

• Tray in the normal state • Tray in extended state

1 If there is no need to change the length of the tray, go to step 3. To change the length of the tray,
move the locks at right and left sides of the tray outward to release the locks.

2 Pull out the tray (compact the side guides).

Keep pulling out the tray (compacting the side guides) until the locks that were released in step 1
automatically re-locks. (E.g.: when the Tray is completely out)

8-12
Chapter 8 Accessories
8.2 A3 Universal Cassette (250 Sheets)/(550 Sheets)
3 Pinch the left Paper Guide Clip and move it to the intended paper size. (E.g.: When loading A4
size in portrait)

4 Pinch the vertical Paper Guide Clip and move it to the intended paper size. Align the tip of the
paper size mark and the tip of the Paper Guide mark .

5 Load paper with the side to be printed facing up.

Note

• Do not load paper exceeding the paper top limit line. It may cause a paper jam.

8-13
 Chapter 8 Accessories
8.2 A3 Universal Cassette (250 Sheets)/(550 Sheets)
6 Use the paper size setting dial and set the paper size display to match the loaded paper.

7 Push in the tray well to the back of the printer (or tray module). When the tray is extended, the
extended area protrudes from the rear of the printer.

NOTE

• When pushing the tray in, be careful not to pinch your fingers between the printer and the
tray, or between trays (when the optional tray modules are installed).

Product Specifications

A3 Universal Cassette (250 sheets)

Compacted: Width 414 x Depth 463 x Height
74.7mm
Dimensions
Extended: Width 414 x Depth 598 x Height
74.7mm

Weight 2.0kg

A3 Universal Cassette (550 sheets)

Compacted: Width 412 x Depth 463 x Height
106.5mm
Dimensions
Extended: Width 412 x Depth 598 x Height
106.5mm

Weight 2.8kg

For details on paper that can be loaded, refer to the Quick Reference Guide that is bundled with the
printer.

8-14
Chapter 8 Accessories
8.3 Duplex Unit

8.3 Duplex Unit

This section explains how to install the Duplex Unit into the printer for first time users of this machine.
To use the machine safely, make sure you read the section "Safety Usage Guide" in the "Quick Reference
Guide" that comes with the printer before starting the installation.

WARNING
• This machine has been designed to prevent users from accidentally contacting the dangerous
parts. Because these dangerous parts are protected with covers, etc., never open any panels and
covers that are secured with screws. Doing so might result in electric shock or injuries.

NOTE

• Be sure to switch OFF the machine and disconnect the plug before connecting or disconnecting
the interface cable connector. If you connect or disconnect the connector with the power still ON,
it may cause the device to malfunction.

8.3.1 Check the Bundled Items

The following items can be found in the packaging box. If there are any missing items, contact our Customer
Support Center or your dealers.

• Duplex Unit • Exit Unit

• Installation Manual

8-15
 Chapter 8 Accessories
8.3 Duplex Unit

8.3.2 Installation Procedure

1 Press the power switch on the front, right bottom side of the printer to the [O] position to switch
OFF the power.
Next, unplug the power cord from the power outlet and the printer.

2 Remove any paper loaded in the Bypass Tray.

If the Bypass Tray is closed, open it.

3 Open the Top Cover.

8-16
Chapter 8 Accessories
8.3 Duplex Unit
4 Remove the cap of the connector inlet at the front left side within the machine.

Note

• Make sure you keep the removed cap in a secure place.

5 Insert the Duplex Unit horizontally by sliding it on top of the Guide surface, and push it in until it
can go no further.

6 Tighten the left and right screws located at the upper section of the Duplex Unit.

8-17
 Chapter 8 Accessories
8.3 Duplex Unit
7 Close the Top Cover and then close the Bypass Tray.

8 Pull the Front Cover open/close lever at the left and right sides of the machine to open the Front
Cover.

9 Open the Top Cover.

8-18
Chapter 8 Accessories
8.3 Duplex Unit
10 Remove the cap of the connector inlet at the top right side of the machine.

Note

• Make sure you keep the removed cap in a secure place.

11 Insert the Exit Unit vertically while aligning the triangle marks and push in the Exit Unit connector
into the machine connector inlet.
When it is properly connected, the lock will click into place.

12 Tighten the screw located at the upper section of the Exit Unit.

8-19
 Chapter 8 Accessories
8.3 Duplex Unit
13 Close the top Cover and then the Front Cover.

Note

• When closing the front cover, be careful not to pinch your fingers between the cover (top and bottom,
right and left) and the printer.

14 Connect the power cord.

Press the Power Switch of the printer to the [I] position to turn it ON.

Installation of the Duplex Unit is complete.

Note

• To check whether the Duplex Unit is installed properly, print the "Printer Settings". For details on how
to print the list, refer to the Quick Reference Guide that is bundled with the printer.
• When the Duplex Unit installation is complete, change the option configuration using the printer driver.
For the details, refer to the printer driver help file.

8-20
Chapter 8 Accessories
8.4 Expansion Memory

8.4 Expansion Memory

This machine requires the installation of the Expansion Memory option for the following cases.

• When printing using the Print Page Mode of the printer driver.
The print processing method of the printer changes when the Print Page Mode is set to "Enable". If the data
to be printed is too large or an instructed job did not proceed to get printed, select "Enable" and try again.
• When error messages such as [Insufficient Memory] frequently appear during printing.
Consider to increase the Memory.
• When the PostScript Software Kit is installed (recommended)

In addition, an increase in the Memory capacity may be required depending on the Print Mode Settings of the
printer driver and the paper size for printing.
Refer to the following table for the required memory capacity.

1 Sided 2 Sided
Print Mode Paper Size
Print Recommended Print Recommended
requirement capacity requirement capacity

A5

B5 Standard Standard
A4 Standard Standard (64MB) (64MB)
Standard
(64MB) (64MB)
8.5 x 14"

ART- EX Long Paper

- -
Printer (297 x 900mm)
Driver
Standard Standard
A5
(64MB) (64MB)

High B5 Standard Standard

Definition (64MB) (64MB) 320MB 320MB
A4 (Standard + (Standard +
256MB) 256MB)
8.5 x 14"

Print requirement: Although this would be sufficient to print most data, it might not be sufficient to print some
data types or might cause reduced print speed during duplex print.
Recommended capacity: The memory capacity that we recommend for this operation.
The amount of required memory capacity also depends on the usage environment of the printer.

Note

• Long Paper cannot be used for 2-sided printing and printing in High Definition Mode.
• For the expansion memories that can be installed into the machine, refer to "6.5 Optional Parts" in Chapter 6.

8-21
 Chapter 8 Accessories
8.4 Expansion Memory

8.4.1 Installation Procedure

Install the Expansion Memory such that it overlaps with the Multi Protocol LAN Card (optional). If the Multi
Protocol LAN Card has been already installed, it must temporarily be removed. For the removal/installation
procedures of the Multi Protocol LAN Card, refer to the procedures in "8.7 Multi Protocol LAN Card".

Multi Protocol
LAN Card
Expansion Memory

Next, this section explains how to install the Expansion Memory into the machine.
This machine has one slot for Expansion Memory. If an Expansion Memory has been already installed,
replace it with one of a larger capacity.

WARNING
• This machine has been designed to prevent users from accidentally contacting the dangerous
parts. Because these dangerous parts are protected with covers, etc., never open any panels and
covers that are secured with screws. Doing so might result in electric shock or injuries.

NOTE

• Be sure to switch OFF the machine and disconnect the plug before connecting or disconnecting
the interface cable connector. If you connect or disconnect the connector with the power still ON,
it may cause the device to malfunction.

1 Press the power switch on the front, right bottom side of the printer to the [O] position to switch
OFF the power.
Next, unplug the power cord from the power outlet and the printer.

8-22
Chapter 8 Accessories
8.4 Expansion Memory
2 Loosen the screws (x2 locations) on the printer Rear Cover.

3 Pull the Rear Cover towards you to remove it.

4 Loosen the screws (x3 locations) on the inner Metal Cover.

5 Pull the Metal Cover towards you to remove it.

8-23
 Chapter 8 Accessories
8.4 Expansion Memory
6 If the Multi Protocol LAN Card has been already installed, remove it temporarily.

7 If an Expansion Memory has been already installed, open the left and right clips that hold it in
place. Since this diagonally raises the Memory board, pull it out diagonally.

8 Hold the new Expansion Memory to be installed such that the notch is higher than the middle
part.

8-24
Chapter 8 Accessories
8.4 Expansion Memory
9 Align the notch of the Expansion Memory with the protrusion on the RAM slot (it is marked with
"SDRAM.op" on the Controller Board), and insert it diagonally into the slot.

NOTE

• The Expansion Memory should be installed at the left slot of the Controller Board. The right
slot is for the PostScript ROM (optional). In order not to insert the RAM to the wrong
position, check for the correct position by referring to the following figure.

10 Insert the Expansion Memory from above as shown in the figure. If the card was inserted
properly, it will make a click sound.

11 If the Multi Protocol LAN Card was removed, reinstall it.

12 Return the Metal Cover and tighten the screws (x3 locations) to secure it in place.

8-25
 Chapter 8 Accessories
8.4 Expansion Memory
13 Return the Rear Cover and tighten the screws (x2 locations) to secure it in place.

14 Connect the power cord.

Press the Power Switch of the machine to the [I] position to turn it ON.

Installation of the Expansion Memory is complete.

Note

• To check whether the Expansion Memory is installed properly, print "Printer Settings" and check the
"Installed Memory" column under "General". The "Installed Memory" displays the memory capacity
that is added here on top of the 64MB memory on the controller board. For details on how to print the
list, refer to the Quick Reference Guide that is bundled with the printer.
• If the Expansion Memory is installed when the printer is being used, change the memory capacity in
the printer driver after the installation. For the details, refer to the printer driver help file.

8-26
Chapter 8 Accessories
8.5 Built-in Additional Hard Disk

8.5 Built-in Additional Hard Disk

The hard disk is required to use some functions such as Secure Print and Sample Print.

WARNING
• This machine has been designed to prevent users from accidentally contacting the dangerous
parts. Because these dangerous parts are protected with covers, etc., never open any panels and
covers that are secured with screws. Doing so might result in electric shock or injuries.

NOTE

• Be sure to switch OFF the machine and disconnect the plug before connecting or disconnecting
the interface cable connector. If you connect or disconnect the connector with the power still ON,
it may cause the device to malfunction.

8.5.1 Check the Bundled Items

The following items can be found in the packaging box. If there are any missing items, contact our Customer
Support Center or your dealers.

• Hard Disk • Screws (x2)

NOTE

• Be sure to touch a metal surface to eliminate static electricity before touching the hard disk with
your bare hands.

8-27
 Chapter 8 Accessories
8.5 Built-in Additional Hard Disk

8.5.2 Installation Procedure

Install the Built-in Additional Hard Disk such that it overlaps with the PostScript Software Kit ROM (optional). If
you have also purchased the PostScript Software Kit, install it before installing the hard disk. For the
installation procedures, refer to "8.6 PostScript Software Kit."

PostScript Software Kit Hard Disk

ROM

This section explains how to install the hard disk.

To remove, perform the reverse of the procedures described in this section.

1 Press the power switch on the front, right bottom side of the printer to the [O] position to switch
OFF the power.
Next, unplug the power cord from the power outlet and the printer.

2 Loosen the screws (x2 locations) on the printer Rear Cover.

8-28
Chapter 8 Accessories
8.5 Built-in Additional Hard Disk
3 Pull the Rear Cover towards you to remove it.

4 Loosen the screws (x3 locations) on the inner Metal Cover.

5 Pull the Metal Cover towards you to remove it.

8-29
 Chapter 8 Accessories
8.5 Built-in Additional Hard Disk
6 Align and insert the hard disk connector to the printer hard disk connector (the connector at the
right of the Controller Board).

NOTE

• The connector at the left of the Controller Board is used for the Multi Protocol LAN Card
(optional). Be careful so as not to connect wrongly.

7 Push on the area as shown in the figure to insert the hard disk securely.

8 Secure the hard disk from outside by using the provided screws (x2) and a screwdriver.

8-30
Chapter 8 Accessories
8.5 Built-in Additional Hard Disk
9 Return the Metal Cover and tighten the screws (x3 locations) to secure it in place.

10 Return the Rear Cover and tighten the screws (x2 locations) to secure it in place.

11 Connect the power cord.

Press the Power Switch of the machine to the [I] position to turn it ON.

Installation of the Hard Disk is complete.

Note

• To check whether the Hard Disk is installed properly, print the "Printer Settings". For details on how to
print the list, refer to the Quick Reference Guide that is bundled with the printer.

8-31
 Chapter 8 Accessories
8.5 Built-in Additional Hard Disk

8.5.3 Notes and Restrictions for the Machine

This section explains the notes and restrictions for the usage of this machine.

Hard Disk (Optional)

• When a hard disk is installed and the machine was shutdown in the middle of an operation due to a blackout,
etc., the data stored in the hard disk may get damaged.
• If the hard disk is being accessed when in the Power Saver mode, the [Power Saver] lamp will be blinking.
Do not turn OFF the power when the [Power Saver] lamp is blinking.

Optional Parts

• The hard disk (optional) is required to use Secure/Sample Print.

• The PostScript Software Kit (optional) is required to use this machine as a PostScript-supported printer.
When using the PostScript Software Kit, it is recommended to install the 256MB Expansion Memory
(optional).

Note

• The memory must be increased when using the Print Page Mode. The print processing method of the printer
changes when the Print Page Mode is set to "Enable". If the data to be printed is too large or an instructed
job did not proceed to get printed, select "Enable" and try again.

Meter Count during 2-Sided Print

For 2-Sided printing, some applications may automatically insert blank papers for page adjustment due to the
conditions when specifying the quantity, etc. In such cases, a sheet of blank paper that is inserted by the
application is counted as 1 page.

8-32
Chapter 8 Accessories
8.6 PostScript Software Kit

8.6 PostScript Software Kit

This section explains how to install the PostScript® Software Kit into the printer for first time users of this
machine.
To use the machine safely, make sure you read the section "Safety Usage Guide" in the "Quick Reference
Guide" that comes with the printer before starting the installation.

WARNING
• This machine has been designed to prevent users from accidentally contacting the dangerous
parts. Because these dangerous parts are protected with covers, etc., never open any panels and
covers that are secured with screws. Doing so might result in electric shock or injuries.

NOTE

• Be sure to switch OFF the machine and disconnect the plug before connecting or disconnecting
the interface cable connector. If you connect or disconnect the connector with the power still ON,
it may cause the device to malfunction.

Note

• When the PostScript Software Kit is installed, this machine can be used as a PostScript supported printer.
Refer to the manual in the CD-ROM that comes with this option to install the PostScript printer driver to your
computer.
In addition, when this Kit is installed, PostScript related settings items are added to the Control Panel menu.
For the Control Panel menu, refer to the "Quick Reference Guide" or "User Guide" that come with the printer.
• When using the PostScript Software Kit, it is recommended to install the 256MB Expansion Memory
(optional).

8-33
 Chapter 8 Accessories
8.6 PostScript Software Kit

8.6.1 Check the Bundled Items

The following items can be found in the packaging box. If there are any missing items, contact our Customer
Support Center or your dealers.

• PostScript ROM • Adobe® PostScript® 3TM • License Agreement

Logo Seal

• PostScript Driver Library CD-ROM • Installation Manual

(Contains the software

license agreement)

NOTE

• Do not touch the terminal area of the ROM.

• Do not bend or damage the ROM.
• Be sure to touch a metal surface to eliminate static electricity before touching the ROM with
your bare hands.

8-34
Chapter 8 Accessories
8.6 PostScript Software Kit

8.6.1.1 Installation Procedure

Install the PostScript ROM such that it overlaps with the Built-in Additional Hard Disk (optional). If the Built-in
Additional Hard Disk has been already installed, it must temporarily be removed. For how to remove/install the
Built-in Additional Hard Disk, refer to the procedures in "8.5 Built-in Additional Hard Disk".

Built-in Additional
PostScript ROM Hard Disk

Next, this section explains how to install the PostScript ROM.

1 Press the power switch on the front, right bottom side of the printer to the [O] position to switch
OFF the power.
Next, unplug the power cord from the power outlet and the printer.

2 Loosen the screws (x2 locations) on the printer Rear Cover.

8-35
 Chapter 8 Accessories
8.6 PostScript Software Kit
3 Pull the Rear Cover towards you to remove it.

4 Loosen the screws (x3 locations) on the inner Metal Cover.

5 Pull the Metal Cover towards you to remove it.

6 If the Built-in Additional Hard Disk has been already installed, remove it temporarily.
Remove the external screws (x2) using a screwdriver and pull out the Built-in Additional Hard
Disk vertically by holding onto the area that is shown in the figure.

8-36
Chapter 8 Accessories
8.6 PostScript Software Kit
7 Align the notch of the PostScript ROM with the protrusion on the ROM slot, and insert it
diagonally into the slot.

NOTE

• The PostScript ROM should be installed into the right slot of the Controller Board. The left
slot is for the Expansion Memory (optional). In order not to insert the ROM to the wrong
position, check for the correct position by referring to the following figure.

8 Insert the PostScript ROM from above as shown in the figure. If the card was inserted properly, it
will make a click sound.

Note

• To remove the ROM, open the tabs that secure the ROM at both sides outwards and then pull out the
ROM card.

9 If the Built-in Additional Hard Disk was removed, reinstall it.

10 Return the Metal Cover and tighten the screws (x3 locations) to secure it in place.

8-37
 Chapter 8 Accessories
8.6 PostScript Software Kit
11 Return the Rear Cover and tighten the screws (x2 locations) to secure it in place.

12 Paste the Adobe® PostScript® 3TM Logo Seal at the position indicated in the figure.

13 Connect the power cord.

Press the Power Switch of the machine to the [I] position to turn it ON.

Installation of the PostScript Software Kit is complete.

Note

• Print the "Printer Settings". If "PostScript" is listed under the Page Description Language column, the
PostScript software Kit has been installed correctly. For details on how to print the list, refer to the Quick
Reference Guide that is bundled with the printer.

8-38
Chapter 8 Accessories
8.7 Multi Protocol LAN Card

8.7 Multi Protocol LAN Card

This section explains how to install the Multi Protocol LAN Card into the printer for first time users of this
machine.
To use the machine safely, make sure you read the section "Safety Usage Guide" in the "Quick Reference
Guide" that comes with the printer before starting the installation.

WARNING
• This machine has been designed to prevent users from accidentally contacting the dangerous
parts. Because these dangerous parts are protected with covers, etc., never open any panels and
covers that are secured with screws. Doing so might result in electric shock or injuries.

NOTE

• Be sure to switch OFF the machine and disconnect the plug before connecting or disconnecting
the interface cable connector. If you connect or disconnect the connector with the power still ON,
it may cause the device to malfunction.

NOTE

• When the Multi Protocol LAN Card is newly installed when the printer is already being used in a
network environment, the network-related settings are initialized. It is recommended to print
"Printer Settings" in advance to check the current settings. For details on how to print the list,
refer to the Quick Reference Guide that is bundled with the printer.

8.7.1 Check the Bundled Items

The following items can be found in the packaging box. If there are any missing items, contact our Customer
Support Center or your dealers.

• LAN Card • Screws (x2)

• Installation Manual

8-39
 Chapter 8 Accessories
8.7 Multi Protocol LAN Card

8.7.2 Installation Procedure

Install the LAN Card such that it overlaps on top of the Expansion Memory (optional). If you have also
purchased the Expansion Memory, install it before installing the Multi Protocol LAN Card. For how to install,
refer to "8.4 Expansion Memory."

Multi Protocol
LAN Card
Expansion Memory

This section explains how to install the LAN Card.

To remove, perform the reverse of the procedures described in this section.

1 Press the power switch on the front, right bottom side of the printer to the [O] position to switch
OFF the power.
Next, unplug the power cord from the power outlet and the printer.

2 Loosen the screws (x2 locations) on the printer Rear Cover.

8-40
Chapter 8 Accessories
8.7 Multi Protocol LAN Card
3 Pull the Rear Cover towards you to remove it.

4 Loosen the screws (x3 locations) on the inner Metal Cover.

5 Pull the Metal Cover towards you to remove it.

8-41
 Chapter 8 Accessories
8.7 Multi Protocol LAN Card
6 Align and insert the LAN Card connector to the printer LAN Card connector (the connector at the
left of the Controller Board).

NOTE

• The connector at the right of the Controller Board is used for the Hard Disk (optional). Be
careful so as not to connect wrongly.

7 Push on the area as shown in the figure to insert the LAN Card securely.

8 Secure the LAN Card from outside by using the provided screws (x2).

8-42
Chapter 8 Accessories
8.7 Multi Protocol LAN Card
9 Return the Metal Cover and tighten the screws (x3 locations) to secure it in place.

10 Return the Rear Cover and tighten the screws (x2 locations) to secure it in place.

11 Connect the power cord.

Press the Power Switch of the machine to the [I] position to turn it ON.

Installation of the Multi Protocol LAN Card is complete.

Note

• To check whether the Multi Protocol LAN Card is installed properly, print the "Printer Settings".

8-43
 Chapter 8 Accessories
8.7 Multi Protocol LAN Card

8-44
Chapter 10 Machine Overview
Table of Contents

10.1 Print Process ..........................................................................................................10-1

10.1.1 Print Process Overview............................................................................................................... 10-1
10.1.2 Electric Charge ........................................................................................................................... 10-3
10.1.3 Exposure..................................................................................................................................... 10-4
10.1.4 Development............................................................................................................................... 10-5
10.1.5 Transfer....................................................................................................................................... 10-7
10.1.6 Separation................................................................................................................................... 10-8
10.1.7 Fusing ......................................................................................................................................... 10-9
10.1.8 Cleaning.................................................................................................................................... 10-10
10.2 Print Data Flow .....................................................................................................10-11
10.2.1 Data Flow.................................................................................................................................. 10-11
10.2.2 Forming a 2-dimensional Print Image ....................................................................................... 10-11
10.3 Xerographic ..........................................................................................................10-12
10.3.1 ROS .......................................................................................................................................... 10-12
10.3.2 Drum/Toner Cartridge & BTR ................................................................................................... 10-14
10.3.3 Fuser......................................................................................................................................... 10-16
10.4 Paper Feed...........................................................................................................10-18
10.4.1 Paper Feed Layout ................................................................................................................... 10-18
10.4.2 250/550 Paper Feeder .............................................................................................................. 10-20
10.4.3 MSI (Multi Sheet Inserter)/Registration..................................................................................... 10-26
10.4.4 Paper Output/2-Sided Feed ...................................................................................................... 10-30
10.4.5 Paper Feeder (optional) ............................................................................................................ 10-32
10.5 Others...................................................................................................................10-34
10.5.1 Electrical ................................................................................................................................... 10-34
10.5.2 Fan/Driver ................................................................................................................................. 10-36
10.6 Drive Channels .....................................................................................................10-37
10.6.1 MAIN MOTOR (PL9.1.3)........................................................................................................... 10-37
10.6.2 Pick Motor [BRACKET ASSY FDR 250] (PL2.1.11 ) ................................................................ 10-38
10.6.3 Pick Motor [BRACKET ASSY FDR 550] (PL2.3.3) ................................................................... 10-39
10.6.4 Exit Motor [EXIT DRIVE ASSY] (PL13.2.1) .............................................................................. 10-40
10.6.5 DUP MOTOR (PL13.2.13) ........................................................................................................ 10-41
10.6.6 Feed Motor [DRIVE ASSY OPTION] (PL14.2.6 / PL15.2.6 ) .................................................... 10-42
10.7 Operating Mode....................................................................................................10-43
Chapter 10 Machine Overview
10.1 Print Process

10.1 Print Process

10.1.1 Print Process Overview

This machine is a monochrome laser printer that is based on the electrophotographic recording principle. The
electrophotographic recording principle consists of the following 7 steps, which forms a toner image on the
Drum surface, transfers the toner image onto the paper, and then fuses the transferred toner image to the
paper.

The print process of this machine consists of the following basic steps:
1 Electric Charge: Charge the Drum surface.
2 Exposure: Expose the Drum surface with laser beam to form the image.
3 Development: Develop the image section on the Drum surface with toner.
4 Transfer: Transfer the toner image on the Drum onto the paper.
5 Separation: Peel off the paper from the Drum surface.
6 Fusing: Fuse the toners on the paper with heat and pressure.
7 Cleaning: Clean the Drum.

Paper Flow
Paper Source Transfer Process

1. Electric
2. Exposure 3. Development 4. Transfer 5. Separation 6. Fusing
Charge
Printing
Output

7. Cleaning
Next print cycle

Figure 10-1 Print Process Overview

By rotating the Drum, the Drum surface goes through the Electric Charge, Exposure, Development, Transfer,
Separation, and Cleaning process, which creates a toner image on the Drum surface and transfers it onto the
paper. The paper then goes through the Transfer, Peeling, and Fusing process, which transfers the toner
image from the Drum surface onto the paper and fuses the image to it.

10-1
 Chapter 10 Machine Overview
10.1 Print Process
The print process schematic is shown below.

Laser Beam
Paper Feed

Figure 10-2 Print Process Schematic

10-2
Chapter 10 Machine Overview
10.1 Print Process

10.1.2 Electric Charge

In the "Electric Charge" process, the BCR (Bias Charge Roll) evenly distributes a negative electrical charge on
the surface of the Drum that rotates at a fixed speed.

• The BCR is always in contact with the Drum and it is driven by the Drum rotation.
The BCR is a conductive roll that is energized by the negative DC component of the AC voltage from
the HVPS and charges the Drum surface evenly with negative charge.
• The Drum surface is photoconductive (becomes a nonconductor when it is in a dark place and a
conductor when exposed to light) and its inner side is composed of a conductor (aluminum cylinder).

Figure 10-3 Electric Charge Process

10-3
 Chapter 10 Machine Overview
10.1 Print Process

10.1.3 Exposure

In the "Exposure" process, the negatively charged Drum surface is scanned with laser beam to form an
invisible electrostatic latent image on it.

• The laser beam is emitted based on the print data (image data) from the printer controller. It is
emitted only when the print data is made up of pixels (small dots that form characters or images).
(The laser diode turns on for parts that are developed by toners, and turns off for parts that are not.)
When parts of the Drum surface are exposed to the laser beam, they become conductive and the
negative charges flow towards the positive side to cancel out the positive charges, reducing the
potential on the Drum surface. These sections with lowered surface potential form the electrostatic
latent image.

Figure 10-4 Exposure Process

10-4
Chapter 10 Machine Overview
10.1 Print Process

10.1.4 Development

In the "Development" process, the electrically charged toners adhere to the electrostatic latent image on the
Drum surface to form a visible image (a toner image that can be seen) on it.
• This machine uses dry monocomponent magnetic toner. The agitator supplies the toner from the
toner tank to the Magnet Roll that is located near the Drum surface. Since the toner is slightly
magnetized, it is attracted to the Magnet Roll surface, where it forms an extremely thin and uniform
layer with the help of the CM Blade (Charging & Metering Blade).
The CM Blade has a rubber that contacts the toner. The friction between the rubber and the toner
charges the toner with negative potential.
• The Magnet Roll surface is covered with thin semi-conductive sleeve. DB (Developing Bias) voltage
is supplied from the HVPS to this semi-conductive sleeve. The DB voltage consists of overlapping
AC voltage and negative DC voltage. The DC voltage is used to maintain the Magnet Roll at a
constant negative potential compared to the Drum conductive layer. Therefore, sections of Drum
surface where the negative charges have not been reduced will have lower potential than the
Magnet Roll, while sections where the negative charges have been reduced will have higher
potential than the Magnet Roll. The AC voltage is used vibrate the toner on the Magnet Roll surface
so that it can be transferred more easily. Hence, the negatively charged toner is only attracted to the
sections with reduced negative charges on the Drum surface (the electrostatic latent image) to form
a toner image on the Drum. (Since the attraction of the positive charge on the Drum conductive layer
is stronger than the repulsive force of the negative charge on the Drum surface, the toner still gets
pulled to the Drum despite being affected by repulsive force of the negative charge.) As more toner
adheres to the Drum, the negative charge of that section increases, causing the potential to drop
and the attraction force that pulls the toner to weaken.

10-5
 Chapter 10 Machine Overview
10.1 Print Process

Figure 10-5 Development Process

10-6
Chapter 10 Machine Overview
10.1 Print Process

10.1.5 Transfer

In the "Transfer" process, the BTR (Bias Transfer Roll) is used to transfer the toner image on the Drum surface
onto the paper.
• The BTR is a conductive roll that is positioned to contact the Drum, and it is supplied with high
voltage from the HVPS. When a sheet of paper passes between the BTR and the Drum, the BTR
applies positive charges to the back of the paper. The positive charge on the back of the paper
attracts the toner image on the Drum surface and causes it to be transferred from the Drum onto the
paper surface. The paper then gets attracted to the negative potential induced in the Drum
conductive layer due to the positive charge at its back and adheres to the Drum surface.

Figure 10-6 Transfer Process

10-7
 Chapter 10 Machine Overview
10.1 Print Process

10.1.6 Separation

The Detack Saw is used to peel off the paper from the Drum surface.
• The Detack Saw uses the high voltage from the HVPS to apply a negative charge to the back of
paper to neutralize the positive charge that was applied in the "Transfer" step.
This cancels the attractive force that pulls the paper to the Drum surface, and causes the paper to
peel off from the Drum due to its own stiffness (recovery force from deformation).

10-8
Chapter 10 Machine Overview
10.1 Print Process

10.1.7 Fusing

In the "Fusing" process, the toner image is fused to the paper by melting the toner on the paper and using
pressure to compress it.
• The toner image that was transferred from the Drum can be spoilt even by just lightly touching it with
a finger. The paper has to pass through the FUSER ASSY (fusing unit) to fuse this toner image to it.
The Heat Roll derives heat from the Heater Rod to melt the toner, while the pressure that nips the
Heat Roll and the Pressure Roll fuses the toner to the paper.
• The Pressure Roll is supplied with high voltage (positive DC voltage) from the HVPS.
This voltage, which has opposite polarity to the charge of the toner, is applied to the back of the
paper to prevent the toner from dispersing due to the fuser nip (the pressure used to pinch the paper
between the Heat Roll and Pressure Roll).

Figure 10-7 Fusing Process

10-9
 Chapter 10 Machine Overview
10.1 Print Process

10.1.8 Cleaning

In the "Cleaning" process, excess toner on the Drum surface is removed. Also, both the Drum and the BTR
will be cleaned electrically.
• Cleaning a Drum Physically
This is to remove any remaining toner on the Drum surface.
The Cleaning Blade that contacts the Drum surface scrapes off any toner that was not transferred in
the "Transfer" step and remained on the Drum surface.
The toner that was scraped off is collected as a waste toner in a different section from the one for
unused toners (in the CRU ASSY).
• Cleaning a Drum Electrically
This is to neutralize any remaining charges on the Drum that was not removed in the previous steps
and to equalize the potential.
Any charge that remained from the previous processed are spread out into an even level using the
negative DC voltage/AC voltage from the BCR, and the Drum surface is again negatively and evenly
charged up to the DC bias voltage level. (Refer to the "Electric Charge" step.)
The Drum surface is also scanned with the laser beam to neutralize any remaining charges on the
Drum and to equalize the potential.
By exposing the entire Drum surface to the laser beam at the beginning of a continuous print
operation (while the Main Motor is rotating), any remaining charge on the Drum that have
accumulated from the previous print operation is neutralized and the potential level is equalized.
• Cleaning a BTR Electrically
This is done by reverse-transferring any toner that remained stuck to the BTR onto the Drum.
By applying a negative high voltage (the reverse of the one in the "Transfer" process) to the BTR at
the beginning and the end of the continuous print operation, any adhered toner on the BTR that has
accumulated from the previous print operation is transferred onto the Drum, and the BTR surface is
cleaned.

Figure 10-8 Cleaning

10-10
Chapter 10 Machine Overview
10.2 Print Data Flow

10.2 Print Data Flow

10.2.1 Data Flow

The print data (electric signals) from the Printer Controller goes through the following flow to become a print
image.

Host (Electric Signal)

Printer Controller (Electric Signal) Toner Image on the Drum (visible image)

ROS ASSY (Laser Beam) Toner Image on the Paper

Electrostatic latent image on the Drum Print Image on the Paper

(invisible image)

Figure 10-9 Print Data Flow

10.2.2 Forming a 2-dimensional Print Image

According to the electric signals from the Printer Controller (Video signals: representing image data using high
and low voltages), scanning an image while turning the laser beam ON/OFF creates a dot image for one line.
By doing the above scan for a whole image, a complete monochromatic image (2-dimensional dot image) is
created. To create a full-color image, this 2-dimensional dot image must be created for each of the 4 colors.

The resolution is calculated as follows:

• Fast Scan Direction: number of dots / inch
• Slow Scan Direction: number of scan lines / inch

Figure 10-10 Forming a 2-dimensional Print Image

10-11
 Chapter 10 Machine Overview
10.3 Xerographic

10.3 Xerographic
The following illustration describes the main functional parts related to Xerographic.

10.3.1 ROS

ROS ASSY
SOS PWB Polygon PWB

LD PWB

HMR02009AA
Figure 10-11 ROS ASSY Components

ROS ASSY (PL7.1.1)

The ROS ASSY is an exposure device that emits the laser beam that is used to form the electrostatic
latent image on the Drum surface.
The ROS ASSY is made up of the following main components.

• LD PWB
Converts the image data that was input into the ROS ASSY from the ESS PWB to a laser beam that
is emitted from the mounted LD (Laser Diode).
The LD PWB always monitors the intensity of the laser beam and controls it to be within the
appropriate level. This is called "APC (Auto Power Control)".
• Polygon PWB
This is made up of the Scanner Motor that rotates at a fixed speed and the Polygon Mirror that is
attached to the Motor rotation axis.

10-12
Chapter 10 Machine Overview
10.3 Xerographic
• SOS PWB
This is the PWB where the SOS Sensor is mounted on.
The SOS Sensor converts the incoming laser beam to electric signals that form the scan start
reference and then sends the signals to the MCU PWB.
Laser Beam Flow

• The laser beam is emitted from the LD (Laser Diode) and passes through two lenses - Lens COL
and Lens CYL - to illuminate the Polygon Mirror. It is then reflected by the Polygon Mirror, passes
through Lens L1 and Lens L2, and passes through the Window to illuminate the Drum.
• The Polygon Mirror has a 6-pane reflective mirror and it is rotated by the Scanner Motor. Therefore,
the laser beam scans in the Drum Shaft direction by the change in the reflection angle of the
Polygon Mirror. One pane of reflective mirror scans one line.
• The laser beam that is deflected by the Polygon Mirror to the farthest edge is incident to the SOS
Mirror, which then reflects the beam to pass through the Lens SOS into the SOS Sensor. The SOS
Sensor generates a scan reference signal based on the incident laser beam. This signal is used to
synchronize the laser beam scan start timing and the image write timing.

SOS Mirror Drum

Window
LD PWB
Lens SOS

Lens COL

Lens CYL SOS PWB

Lens L2
Scanner Motor
Lens L1
Polygon Mirror HMR02010AA

Figure 10-12 Laser Beam Flow

10-13
 Chapter 10 Machine Overview
10.3 Xerographic

10.3.2 Drum/Toner Cartridge & BTR

BTR
Detack Saw CRU ASSY

Cleaning Blade
CRUM

BCR

Drum

Magnet Roll
Waste Toner Box
CM Blade
Toner HMR02011AA

Figure 10-13 Drum/Toner Cartridge & BTR Components

10-14
Chapter 10 Machine Overview
10.3 Xerographic
CRU ASSY (PL6.1.1)
The CRU ASSY is the unit that electrically charges the Drum performs development.
The CRU ASSY is made up of the following main components.

• Drum
Forms electrostatic latent images and toner images.
• BCR
Charges the Drum.
• Cleaning Blade
Cleans any toner remaining on the Drum after the transfer of toner image onto the paper.
• Magnet Roll
Contacts the Drum and forms toner images on the Drum.
• CM Blade
This spreads the toner evenly on the surface of the Magnet Roll and generates friction to apply
negative charge to the toner.
• CRUM
This is a non-volatile memory that stores the machine data.
• Toner Tank
Contains unused toner.
• Waste Toner Box
Holds the waste toner that is collected back from the Drum.

BTR [ROLL ASSY TRANS] (PL4.1.3)

The BCR is in contact with the Drum of the CRU ASSY and rotates togather with the Drum.
During printing, it applies positive charge to the back of the paper to transfer the toner from the Drum
surface onto the paper. After that, the paper is sent to the FUSER ASSY.

Detack Saw [FRAME FRONT BASE ASSY] (PL4.1.8)

The Detack Saw is installed to the FRAME FRONT BASE ASSY.
During printing, it applies negative charge to the back of the paper. This neuralizes the charge on the
paper and enables it to peel off the Drum.

10-15
 Chapter 10 Machine Overview
10.3 Xerographic

10.3.3 Fuser

Temp.Sensor
Fuser Exit Sensor

Heater Lamp
Pressure Roll

Thermostat Heat Roll HMR02012AA

Figure 10-14 FUSER ASSY Components

10-16
Chapter 10 Machine Overview
10.3 Xerographic
FUSER ASSY (PL8.1.11)
The FUSER ASSY is a unit for fusing the complete toner image that has been transferred onto the
paper, using heat and pressure.
The paper output parts is integrated in the FUSER ASSY.
The FUSER ASSY is made up of the following main components.

• Heat Roll
This is a tube-covered hollow metal roll, which applies heat to the paper to fuse the toner on it.
• Pressure Roll
This is a tube-covered rubber roll with a metal shaft at its center, which together with the Heat Roll
applies pressure to the paper to fuse the toner on the paper.
• Heater Lamps (x2)
These lamps can be found within the Heat Roll. Sealed within them are the heating coils that heat up
the whole Heat Roll.
• Temp. Sensors (x2)
These Thermistors are electric resistors that react to temperature changes. They are placed in
contact with the Heat Roll to detect the surface temperature of the Heat Roll. These control the ON
(conducting: light on)/OFF (light off) status of the Heat Lamp based on the detected temperature to
prevent primary overheating.
• Thermostat
This is placed in series with the Heater Lamp power supply. If the Temp. Sensors (Thermistors) have
failed to prevent overheating (primary), and the contact point has reached the specified temperature,
the contact will open to prevent secondary overheating.
• Fuser Exit Sensor
Detects that paper has passed through the Fuser section.
(No paper: Sensor blocked)

10-17
 Chapter 10 Machine Overview
10.4 Paper Feed

10.4 Paper Feed

The following illustration describes the overall paper feed path and the main functional parts related to paper
feed.

10.4.1 Paper Feed Layout

Figure 10-15 shows the paper feed layout of the machine with a 250 Paper Feeder and two optional 250
Paper Feeders attached.

Laser Beam
Paper Feed

FUSER ASSY
Roll Dup1 (PL8.1.11)
Exit Roll
(PL13.2.1)
MSI FEED ROLL
Dup Jam Sensor [COVER TOP ASSY] Fuser Exit Sensor
(PL3.1.17) (PL1.1.2) [FUSER ASSY] Regi Roll Rubber
Roll Dup2 (PL13.2.7) (PL8.1.11) [KIT REGIST]
(PL13.2.1)
(PL5.1.1)
MSI NO PAPER
SENSOR
(PL3.1.11) CRU ASSY
(PL6.1.1) Regi Roll Metal
[KIT REGIST]
(PL5.1.1)

ROS ASSY
(PL7.1.1)

Nudger Roll
(PL2.1.4)
REGI SENSOR
(PL5.1.4)
MSI Retard Roll
[HOLDER ASSY RETARD] TRAY NO PAPER SENSOR
(PL3.1.21) (PL2.1.3)
BTR [ROLL ASSY TRANS]
(PL4.1.3)
Turn Roll
[KIT FRAME FRONT]
(PL4.1.1) Feed Roll
(PL2.1.4)
Retard Roll
(PL2.2.19)

PAPER EDGE SENSOR

(PL14.2.4)

ROLL ASSY TURN

(PL14.3.12)
Feed Roll Retard Roll Nudger Roll TRAY NO PAPER SENSOR
(PL14.3.10) (PL2.2.19) (PL14.3.10) (PL14.3.11)
HMR02013AA

Figure 10-15 Paper Feed Layout (250 Feeder)

10-18
Chapter 10 Machine Overview
10.4 Paper Feed
Figure 10-16 shows the paper feed layout of the machine with a 550 Paper Feeder and three optional 550
Paper Feeders attached.

Laser Beam
Paper Feed

FUSER ASSY
Roll Dup1 (PL8.1.11)
Exit Roll
(PL13.2.1)
MSI FEED ROLL
Dup Jam Sensor [COVER TOP ASSY] Fuser Exit Sensor
(PL3.1.17) (PL1.1.2) [FUSER ASSY] Regi Roll Rubber
Roll Dup2 (PL13.2.7) (PL8.1.11) [KIT REGIST]
(PL13.2.1)
(PL5.1.1)

CRU ASSY
(PL6.1.1) Regi Roll Metal
[KIT REGIST]
(PL5.1.1)

ROS ASSY
(PL7.1.1)

Nudger Roll
REGI SENSOR (PL2.4.10)
(PL5.1.4)
MSI Retard Roll
[HOLDER ASSY RETARD]
(PL3.1.21) TRAY NO PAPER SENSOR
BTR [ROLL ASSY TRANS] (PL2.4.11)
(PL4.1.3)
Turn Roll
[KIT FRAME FRONT]
(PL4.1.1)
ROLL ASSY TURN
(PL2.4.12)
Feed Roll
(PL2.4.10)
Retard Roll
(PL2.5.19)

PAPER EDGE SENSOR

(PL14.2.4)

ROLL ASSY TURN

(PL15.3.12)

Feed Roll
Retard Roll Nudger Roll TRAY NO PAPER SENSOR
(PL15.3.10)
(PL2.5.19) (PL15.3.10) (PL15.3.11) HMR02014AA

Figure 10-16 Paper Feed Layout (550 Feeder)

10-19
 Chapter 10 Machine Overview
10.4 Paper Feed

10.4.2 250/550 Paper Feeder

TRAY NO PAPER SENSOR

SIZE SWITCH

Pick Motor

WHEEL SIZE ASSY

HMR02015AA

Figure 10-17 250 Paper Feeder Components

TRAY NO PAPER SENSOR

SIZE SWITCH

Pick Motor

FEED CLUTCH
WHEEL SIZE ASSY
TURN CLUTCH
HMR02016AA

Figure 10-18 550 Paper Feeder Components

10-20
Chapter 10 Machine Overview
10.4 Paper Feed
WHEEL SIZE ASSY (PL2.2.28/PL2.5.36)
Set the paper size inside the Paper Cassette

SIZE SWITCH (PL2.1.13 / PL2.3.8)

Inserting the Paper Cassette causes the three SIZE SWITCH buttons in the WHEEL SIZE ASSY to be
pressed. The paper size in the Paper Cassette is determined by the combination of ON/OFF states of
these buttons.

TRAY NO PAPER SENSOR (PL2.1.3 / PL2.4.11)

Detects whether or not paper exists inside the Paper Cassette by changes in the Actuator.
(No paper: Sensor blocked)

Pick Motor [BRACKET ASSY FDR 250] (PL2.1.11 )

Drives the Feed Roll.

Pick Motor [BRACKET ASSY FDR 550] (PL2.3.3)

Drives the Feed Roll and the ROLL ASSY TURN.

TURN CLUTCH (PL2.4.3)

Transfers the drive of the Pick Motor to the ROLL ASSY TURN.

FEED CLUTCH (PL2.4.4)

Transfers the drive of the Pick Motor to the Feed Roll.

PLATE ASSY BTM Operation

The PLATE ASSY BOTTOM is a mechanism that works with the Gear attached to the side of the Paper
Cassette. As long as the coupled Gear is not released, it can maintain the specified position without rising/
descending. Paper is fed at this position.
When the top level of the paper stack drops as paper is being fed, the Nudger Roll descends, the Lever
releases the Gear, and the PLATE ASSY BOTTOM rises.

10-21
 Chapter 10 Machine Overview
10.4 Paper Feed

Lever

PLATE ASSY BOTTOM

HMR02017AA

Figure 10-19 PLATE ASSY BTM Operation (250 Paper Cassette)

10-22
Chapter 10 Machine Overview
10.4 Paper Feed

Lever

PLATE ASSY BOTTOM

HMR02018AA

Figure 10-20 PLATE ASSY BTM Operation (550 Paper Cassette)

Related Components
• PLATE ASSY BOTTOM (PL2.2.5 / PL2.5.5)

10-23
 Chapter 10 Machine Overview
10.4 Paper Feed
Feeding Paper from the Paper Cassette

The paper loaded in the Paper Cassette is transported towards the Feed Roll and Retard Roll by the Nudger
Roll and then fed by the rotation of Feed Roll and Retard Roll.
The Retard Roll is pushed by the spring pressure beneath it, and presses against the Feed Roll to perform the
role that separates paper by using rotation resistance.
When there is paper overlap, the brake force of the Torque Limiter that is linked to the Retard Roll separates
the topmost paper from the rest and feeds it.

Nudger Roll Feed Roll

Retard Roll

Feed Roll

Nudger Roll

Retard Roll

HMR02019AA

Figure 10-21 Feeding Paper from the Paper Cassette

Related Components
• ROLL ASSY FEED (Feed Roll, Nudger Roll) (PL2.1.4 / PL2.4.10)
• ROLL ASSY FEED (Retard Roll) (PL2.2.19 / PL2.5.19)

10-24
Chapter 10 Machine Overview
10.4 Paper Feed
Paper Size

This machine does not have a mechanism to automatically detect paper sizes. Set the loaded paper size
using the dial (WHEEL SIZE ASSY) at the front of the Cassette. The WHEEL SIZE ASSY dial position
changes the combination of ON/OFF states of three SIZE SWITCH buttons when the Paper Cassette is
inserted. Table 10-1 shows the relationship between the combination of ON/OFF states of the three SIZE
SWITCH buttons and the paper sizes.

SIZE SWITCH
WHEEL SIZE ASSY HMR02020AA

Figure 10-22 Paper Size Setting

Table 10-1 States of SIZE SWITCH and Paper Sizes

SIZE SWITCH*1
Switch Order Paper Size
1 2 3
1 B5 LEF ON ON ON
2 A5 LEF OFF ON OFF
3 A3 ON ON OFF
4 B4 ON OFF ON
5 Non-standard OFF ON ON
6 A4 SEF OFF OFF ON
7 A4 LEF ON OFF OFF
No Cassette OFF OFF OFF
*1. The switches are numbered from the left (1, 2, and 3).

10-25
 Chapter 10 Machine Overview
10.4 Paper Feed

10.4.3 MSI (Multi Sheet Inserter)/Registration

Regi Sensor

MSI NO PAPER SENSOR

MSI FEED SOLENOID Regi Clutch

HMR02021AA

Figure 10-23 MSI/Registration Components

MSI FEED SOLENOID (PL3.1.1)

Transfers the drive of the MAIN MOTOR to the ROLL FEED MSI.

MSI NO PAPER SENSOR (PL3.1.11)

Detects whether or not paper exists on the MSI by changes in the Actuator. (No paper: Sensor blocked)

Regi Sensor (PL5.1.4)

Detects whether the lead edge of the paper has reached the Registration section (KIT REGIST) by
changes in the Actuator. (No paper: Sensor blocked)

Regi Clutch (PL5.1.2)

Transfers the drive of the MAIN MOTOR to the Regi Roll Rubber installed to the KIT REGIST.

10-26
Chapter 10 Machine Overview
10.4 Paper Feed
Feeding Paper from the MSI

During paper feed, the paper loaded on the MSI Tray is lifted up by the Plate Assy Bottom and pushed against
the MSI FEED ROLL to start the advance. When there is paper overlap during the advance, the brake force of
the Torque Limiter that is integrated in the HOLDER ASSY RETARD separates the topmost paper from the
rest and feeds it.

The Plate Assy Bottom is on standby at the bottom while hanged to the Arm and Spring.
When the paper feed starts, the shaft rotates and causes the attached Cam to move. The Arm and Spring
rises along the trajectory of the Cam and lift up the Plate Assy Bottom.

Plate Assy Bottom

MSI FEED ROLL

HOLDER ASSY RETARD

(Roll Assy Retard)

MSI FEED ROLL

Plate Assy Bottom

Roll Assy Retard
HMR02022AA

Figure 10-24 Feeding Paper from the MSI

Related Components
• MSI FEED ROLL (PL3.1.17)
• HOLDER ASSY RETARD (Roll Assy Retard) (PL3.1.21)

10-27
 Chapter 10 Machine Overview
10.4 Paper Feed
Paper Lead Edge Adjustment

When paper is fed to the Toner Transfer section in the same state as it was loaded in the Tray, there are cases
where the image cannot be transferred to the appropriate position. The paper lead edge is aligned using the
"roll loop" method in the Registration section.
The "roll loop" method puts the paper that was fed and transported from the tray or the MSI against the Regi
Roll Metal, and loops the paper. By rotating the Regi Roll Metal and the Regi Roll Rubber with the paper
looped, the paper can be transported with its lead edge aligned.

Regi Roll Rubber

Regi Roll Metal

HMR02023AA

Figure 10-25 Paper Lead Edge Adjustment

Related Components
• KIT REGIST (Regi Roll Metal, Regi Roll Rubber) (PL5.1.1)

10-28
Chapter 10 Machine Overview
10.4 Paper Feed
Paper Transport up to The FUSER ASSY

The Drum and the BTR transfers the toner image on the Drum onto the paper as it passes through the
Registration section, and then the paper is sent to the FUSER ASSY. Since the FUSER ASSY of this machine
is located right above the Drum and the BTR, the paper that passes through the BTR must be fed almost
vertically. Thin paper with low stiffness is not stable enough to be directly fed in the vertical direction.
Therefore, the Guide Plate in the paper path, which has a guide bias voltage applied to it from the HVPS, is
employed to pull it up electrically.

Figure 10-26 Paper Transport up to The FUSER ASSY

Related Components
• FRAME FRONT BASE ASSY (Guide Plate) (PL4.1.8)
• FUSER ASSY (PL8.1.11)
• BTR (PL4.1.3)

10-29
 Chapter 10 Machine Overview
10.4 Paper Feed

10.4.4 Paper Output/2-Sided Feed

Exit Motor
DUP PWB

Dup Cover Open Sensor

Dup Jam Sensor

DUP MOTOR HMR02025AA

Figure 10-27 Paper Output/2-Sided Feed Components

Exit Motor [EXIT DRIVE ASSY] (PL13.1.2)

Provides the drive to the Exit Roll that is installed in the COVER TOP ASSY. When the Exit Motor
rotates normally, the Exit Roll rotates in the paper output direction. When the Exit Motor rotates in
reverse, the Exit Roll rotates in the DUPLEX ASSY direction to pull the paper into the DUPLEX ASSY.

DUP MOTOR (PL13.2.13)

Drives the Dup Roll 1 and Dup Roll 2 to transport the paper in the DUPLEX ASSY.

Dup Jam Sensor [SENSOR PHOTO] (PL13.2.7)

Detects whether the paper is being transported in the DUPLEX ASSY by changes in the Actuator.
(No paper: Sensor blocked)

Dup Cover Open Sensor [SENSOR PHOTO] (PL13.2.7)

Detects the open/close state of the CHUTE COVER. Closing the Cover blocks the Sensor.
(Cover closed: Sensor blocked)

DUP PWB (PL13.2.21)

Controls all the components in the DUPLEX ASSY.

10-30
Chapter 10 Machine Overview
10.4 Paper Feed
Paper Output/2-Sided Feed Flow

The paper that has passed through the FUSER ASSY is output by the rotation of the Exit Roll that is installed
in the COVER TOP ASSY. The completion of an output is detected by the Fuser Exit Sensor.
If the Duplex Unit is not installed, the MAIN MOTOR drives the Exit Roll through the gear in the BRACKET
ASSY EXIT.
The Duplex Unit consists of the DUPLEX ASSY and the EXIT DRIVE ASSY. When the EXIT DRIVE ASSY is
installed, the gear in the BRACKET ASSY EXIT is pushed in and gets disengaged from the gear at the Exit
Roll. Meanwhile, the gear in the EXIT DRIVE ASSY engages the gear at the Exit Roll. This enables the Exit
Motor to drive the Exit Roll.

Figure 10-28 Difference between when the Duplex Unit is installed and not installed.

Related Components
• ROLL DUP (Dup Roll 1, Dup Roll 2) (PL13.2.1)
• COVER TOP ASSY (Exit Roll) (PL1.1.2)
• MAIN MOTOR (PL9.1.3)

10-31
 Chapter 10 Machine Overview
10.4 Paper Feed

10.4.5 Paper Feeder (optional)

There are two types of optional Paper Feeders: the 250 Paper Feeder and the 550 Paper Feeder.

PAPER EDGE SENSOR

FDR PWB 250

SIZE SWITCH

Feed Motor

WHEEL SIZE ASSY FEED CLUTCH

TRAY NO PAPER SENSOR TURN CLUTCH HMR02027AA

Figure 10-29 250 Paper Feeder Components

PAPER EDGE SENSOR

FDR PWB 550

SIZE SWITCH

Feed Motor

FEED CLUTCH
WHEEL SIZE ASSY

TURN CLUTCH
TRAY NO PAPER SENSOR HMR02028AA

Figure 10-30 550 Paper Feeder Components

10-32
Chapter 10 Machine Overview
10.4 Paper Feed
The 250 Paper Feeder and the 550 Paper Feeder have the same main components.
The Paper Cassette is the same unit as the one that comes with the machine.
The paper feed and paper size setting mechanisms are also the same as that of the Paper Feeder that comes
with the machine.

WHEEL SIZE ASSY (PL2.2.28/PL2.5.36)

Set the paper size inside the Paper Cassette

SIZE SWITCH (PL14.2.17 / PL15.2.17)

Inserting the Paper Cassette causes the three SIZE SWITCH buttons in the WHEEL SIZE ASSY to be
pressed. The paper size in the Paper Cassette is determined by the combination of ON/OFF states of
these buttons.

TRAY NO PAPER SENSOR (PL14.3.11 / PL15.3.11)

Detects whether or not paper exists inside the Paper Cassette by changes in the Actuator.
(No paper: Sensor blocked)

PAPER EDGE SENSOR (PL14.2.4 / PL15.2.4)

Detects a paper feed from the Paper Feeder by changes in the Actuator.
(No paper: Sensor blocked)

Feed Motor [DRIVE ASSY OPTION] (PL14.2.6 / PL15.2.6 )

Drives the Feed Roll and the ROLL ASSY TURN.

TURN CLUTCH (PL14.3.3 / PL15.3.3)

Transfers the drive of the Pick Motor to the ROLL ASSY TURN.

FEED CLUTCH (PL14.3.4/PL15.3.4)

Transfers the drive of the Pick Motor to the Feed Roll.

FDR PWB (PL14.2.18/PL15.2.18)

Controls all the Paper Feeder components.

10-33
 Chapter 10 Machine Overview
10.5 Others

10.5 Others
This section provides illustrations and descriptions for the main functional parts related to Electrical, Fan, and
Drive.

10.5.1 Electrical

CONSOLE ASSY MCU PWB

Interlock Switch ESS PWB

BREAKER
LVPS

HVPS

HARNESS ASSY SW

HMR02029AA

Figure 10-31 Electrical Components

10-34
Chapter 10 Machine Overview
10.5 Others
MCU PWB (PL11.1.3)
Communicates with the Printer Controller and controls the components used in print operation.

HVPS (PL11.1.5)
Supplies high voltage to the BCR in the CRU ASSY, Magnet Roll, BTR, Detack Saw in the FRAME
FRONT BASE ASSY, Guide Plate, and Pressure Roll in the FUSER ASSY.

LVPS (PL11.1.6)
Generates +24VDC, +5VDC, and +3.3VDC voltages from the AC power source to supply the
components that need them.

ESS PWB (PL11.1.7)

Performs conversion of print data input from a network, USB, or parallel port, etc. and communicates
with the PC.

HARNESS ASSY SW (PL2.1.15)

This consists of the Main Switch and the Harness that is used to connect the Main Switch to the
BREAKER and the LVPS.

BREAKER (PL12.1.24)
This consists of the AC power supply inlet and the breaker for preventing overvoltage.

Interlock Switch (24V/5V) [HARNESS ASSY INTERLOCK] (PL12.1.4)

Detects the open/close state of Front Cover. Opening the Front Cover cuts off the DC power supply
(24V, 5V) to the machine.

CONSOLE ASSY (PL1.1.3)

This consists of LCD, LED, and Switch.
The LCD and LED indicate the machine status while the Switch is used to operate the machine.

10-35
 Chapter 10 Machine Overview
10.5 Others

10.5.2 Fan/Driver

MIDDLE FAN
SIDE FAN MAIN MOTOR

REAR FAN

HMR02030AA

Figure 10-32 Fan/Driver Components

MAIN MOTOR (PL9.1.3)

Drives the MSI FEED ROLL, Regi Roll [KIT REGIST], Drum [CRU ASSY], BTR, Heat Roll [FUSER
ASSY], and Turn Roll [FRAME FRONT BASE ASSY]. Also drives the Exit Roll [COVER TOP ASSY]
when the Duplex Unit is not installed.

MIDDLE FAN (PL10.1.2)

Dissipates heat in the machine. Mainly cools down the CRU ASSY section.

REAR FAN (PL10.1.4)

Dissipates heat in the machine. Mainly cools down the LVPS section.

SIDE FAN (PL10.1.5)

Dissipates heat in the machine. Mainly cools down the ROS ASSY section.

10-36
Chapter 10 Machine Overview
10.6 Drive Channels

10.6 Drive Channels

10.6.1 MAIN MOTOR (PL9.1.3)

The MAIN MOTOR drives the Exit Roll, Heat Roll, Drum, BTR, Regi Roll Rubber, MSI FEED ROLL, and Turn
Roll via the gears in the DRIVE ASSY and BRACKET ASSY EXIT as shown in Figure 10-33.

Heat Roll Exit Roll

Drum

BTR

Regi Roll Rubber

MSI FEED ROLL

Turn Roll

BRACKET ASSY EXIT

Exit Roll [COVER TOP ASSY] (PL9.1.1)
(PL1.1.2)

Heat Roll [FUSER ASSY]

(PL8.1.11) DRIVE ASSY
(PL9.1.2)
Drum [CRU ASSY]
(PL6.1.1)

BTR
[ROLL ASSY TRANS]
(PL4.1.3)

MSI FEED ROLL

(PL3.1.17)
Regi Roll Rubber
MAIN MOTOR
[KIT REGIST]
(PL9.1.3)
(PL5.1.1)

Turn Roll
[KIT FRAME FRONT]
(PL4.1.1) HMR02031AA

Figure 10-33 MAIN MOTOR

10-37
 Chapter 10 Machine Overview
10.6 Drive Channels

10.6.2 Pick Motor [BRACKET ASSY FDR 250] (PL2.1.11 )

The Pick Motor in the 250 Paper Feeder drives the Feed Roll and Nudger Roll via the gear in the BRACKET
ASSY FDR 250 as shown in Figure 10-34.

Nudger Roll

Feed Roll

Feed Roll Nudger Roll

(PL2.1.4) (PL2.1.4)
Gear Feed Gear Idler Nudger Gear Nudger

Pick Motor
[BRACKET ASSY FDR 250]
(PL2.1.11)

HMR02032AA

Figure 10-34 Pick Motor [BRACKET ASSY FDR 250]

10-38
Chapter 10 Machine Overview
10.6 Drive Channels

10.6.3 Pick Motor [BRACKET ASSY FDR 550] (PL2.3.3)

The Pick Motor in the 550 Paper Feeder drives the Feed Roll, Nudger Roll, and ROLL ASSY TURN via the
gear in the BRACKET ASSY FDR 550 as shown in Figure 10-35.

ROLL ASSY TURN

Nudger Roll

Feed Roll

ROLL ASSY TURN Feed Roll Nudger Roll

Gear Idler Nudger (PL2.4.10)
(PL2.4.12) (PL2.4.10)
Gear Feed Gear Nudger

Pick Motor
[BRACKET ASSY FDR 550]
(PL2.3.3)

HMR02033AA

Figure 10-35 Pick Motor [BRACKET ASSY FDR 550] (PL2.3.3)

10-39
 Chapter 10 Machine Overview
10.6 Drive Channels

10.6.4 Exit Motor [EXIT DRIVE ASSY] (PL13.2.1)

The Exit Motor drives the Exit Roll in the COVER TOP ASSY via the gear in the EXIT DIVE ASSY as shown in
Figure 10-36.

Exit Roll

Exit Roll Exit Gear

[COVER TOP ASSY]
(PL1.1.2)

Exit Motor
[EXIT DRIVE ASSY]
(PL13.1.2) HMR02034AA

Figure 10-36 Exit Motor

10-40
Chapter 10 Machine Overview
10.6 Drive Channels

10.6.5 DUP MOTOR (PL13.2.13)

The DUP MOTOR drives the Dup Roll 1 and Dup Roll 2 via the gear as shown in Figure 10-37.

Dup Roll 1

Dup Roll 2

Dup Roll 1
(PL13.2.1) Gear Roll 35
(PL13.2.10)

Gear 37
(PL13.2.11)
DUP MOTOR
(PL13.2.13)
Gear 23-34
(PL13.2.12)
Gear 37
(PL13.2.11)

Dup Roll 2 Gear Roll 35

(PL13.2.1) (PL13.2.10)
HMR02035AA

Figure 10-37 Dup Motor

10-41
 Chapter 10 Machine Overview
10.6 Drive Channels

10.6.6 Feed Motor [DRIVE ASSY OPTION] (PL14.2.6 / PL15.2.6 )

The Feed Motor drives the Feed Roll, Nudger Roll, and ROLL ASSY TURN via the gears in the Feed Roll and
DRIVE ASSY OPTION as shown in Figure 10-38.
Figure 10-38 shows the drive path with an optional 250 Feeder. The path is exactly the same for the optional
550 Feeder.

Nudger Roll
ROLL ASSY TURN

Feed Roll Feed Roll

ROLL ASSY TURN (PL14.3.10
Nudger Roll
(PL14.3.12 / PL15.3.12) / PL15.3.10)
(PL14.3.10 / PL15.3.10)
Gear Feed Gear Idler Nudger
Gear Nudger

Feed Motor
[DRIVE ASSY OPTION]
(PL14.2.6 / PL15.2.6)
HMR02036AA

Figure 10-38 Feed Motor [DRIVE ASSY OPTION]

10-42
Chapter 10 Machine Overview
10.7 Operating Mode

10.7 Operating Mode

The following 4 operating modes are available.

Running mode

Operating states such as running or recording, etc.

Item Status
ESS Full Power
Maintaining the operating
Fusing system (FUSER ASSY)
temperature

IOT Exposure system (ROS ASSY) Rotating at run speed

Recording system (CRU ASSY) In operation
MCU PWB Full Power

Standby mode

This is the standby state. It is possible to enter this mode within 16 seconds after power Off then On or from
the Sleep mode.

Item Status
ESS Full Power
Fusing system (FUSER ASSY) Maintaining the standby temperature
Exposure system (ROS ASSY) Pause
IOT
Recording system (CRU ASSY) Pause
MCU PWB Full Power

Power Saver mode 1

To reduce power consumption, the machine enters Power Saver mode 1 when it has not received print data
for a certain time. The waiting time before switching to this mode is set as 3 minutes by default. It can be set in
increments of 1 minute in the range between 1 and 60 minutes from the operation panel. The machine cannot
be prohibited from entering Power Saver mode.

Item Status
ESS Sleep
Fusing system (FUSER ASSY) Pause
Exposure system (ROS ASSY) Pause
IOT
Recording system (CRU ASSY) Pause
MCU PWB Full Power

10-43
 Chapter 10 Machine Overview
10.7 Operating Mode
Power Saver mode 2 (Deep Sleep)

To save power consumption, the machine enters Power Saver mode 2 when it has not received print data for a
certain time after it has entered Power Saver mode 1. The waiting time before switching to this mode is set as
5 minutes by default. It can be set in increments of 1 minute in the range between 1 and 120 minutes from the
operation panel. The machine can be prohibited from switching to this mode.
This is not guaranteed when a non-standard HDD etc. is installed as an option.

Item Status
ESS Sleep
Fusing system (FUSER ASSY) Pause
Exposure system (ROS ASSY) Pause
IOT
Recording system (CRU ASSY) Pause
MCU PWB Pause

Operating Mode Status Transition

The status transition among the operating modes is shown below.

Power OFF

When a certain When a certain

time has passed time has passed

Standby Mode Power Saver Power Saver

mode 1 mode 2

Job End Job Start When the panel is pressed

When a Job is received When the panel is pressed
When cover is opened/closed When a Job is received

Running mode

Figure 10-39 Operating Mode Transition

10-44
 PUBLICATION COMMENT SHEET

Use this feedback sheet to make us aware of the strengths and weaknesses of the material you
have received. Please comment on adequacy, quality, usability, format, parts of manual not
used, etc. Specific errors or deficiencies should be referenced by page and/or page number.

Mail to your Technical Support Department and they will pass to us.
(Customer Engineer→OpCo Technical Support Department→FX/CSS/IBS)

Use black pencil or ink:

Name : Date : Publication No. :

Job Title : Employee No. : Title of Publication :

OpCo (Country) : Mailing Address :

Date and Revision of Publication :

Page No. - Figure No. Description of Error or Deficiency (please be specific).

Please check if answer is requested. No Yes

If yes, be sure to fill in Name, Job Title, Employee No., OpCo name and Mailing Address
FIRST FOLD

Place
Postage
Stamp
Here

FUJI XEROX Co., Ltd.

Attn: CSS/IBS
KSP/R&D Business Park Bldg.6A7
3-2-1,Sakado Takatsu-ku,Kanagawa-ken
213-8508 Japan

SECOND FOLD

CLEAR TAPE Before sealing, please be sure that all information is completed on reverse side. CLEAR TAPE